B-62444e-1!04!050120 Series 16 18 TB TC 16i 18i Ta Super Cap T and Super Cap II T

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Super CAP T and Super CAP II T

for Series 16/18-TB, 16/18-TC, and 16i/18i-TA
Operator's Manual
B-62444E-1/04
October 1997
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
PowerMotion is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When using a machine equipped with the FANUC Super CAP T and FANUC Super CAP II T, be sure to observe
the following safety precautions.
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B62444E1/04
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B62444E1/04
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING
1. Before starting to use the conversational functions (such as creation/run of machining programs,
measurement of tool compensation, and specification of a chuck barrier), close the doors of the
machine, and take any other necessary safety measures.
Failure to take a necessary safety measure may bring about the death of, or a serious injury to,
the user.
2. Before going to the next step of handling or operation, check the display on the screen carefully
to assure that the intended data has been entered correctly.
If the machine is used with incorrect data, the tool may bump against the machine and/or
workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
3. When you are using a tool compensation function, before starting the machine, check the
direction and amount of compensation so that the tool will not bump against the workpiece or
machine.
If the tool bumps against the machine and/or workpiece, the tool and/or machine may be
damaged, and even injuries may occur.
4. After you create a machining program using a conversational function, do not run the machine
on that program immediately. Instead, carry out machining simulation to make sure that the tool
path and machining operation are correct and that the tool will not bump against the workpiece
or machine (including the chuck and tailstock).
5. After you convert a machining program created using a conversational function to NC program
format, do not run the machine on that program immediately. Instead, confirm every step of the
resultant NC program, and make sure that the tool path and machining operation are correct and
that the tool will not bump against the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and tailstock).
Before starting production machining, run the machine with no workpiece attached to the
machine to make sure that the tool will not bump against a workpiece (when attached) or the
machine (including the chuck and tailstock).
6. Before starting to create a machining program using a conversational function, make sure that
all necessary data among the tool data, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool
list, and chuck and tailstock data, and all parameters necessary for the conversational function
are set correctly.
If the necessary data is not set correctly, any required cutting conditions will not be set correctly,
possibly causing damage to the tool, and even injuries.
s3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B62444E1/04
WARNING
7. When you run the machine using a machining program created using a conversational function
or a machining program generated by converting another machining program to NC program
format, be sure to use the correct tool geometry compensation data measured on the relevant
measurement guidance screen provided by the conversational function.
The method to measure the tool compensation amount may be provided by the machine tool
builder. If this is the case, before starting measurement, read carefully and understand
sufficiently the applicable users guide from the machine tool builder.
8. Before using a chuck barrier or chuck/tailstock barrier, perform a manual operation (such as jog
feed or manual pulse generator feed) to make sure that the barrier area data is set correctly, that
the barrier function occurs at the correct position, and that the tool will not bump against the
chuck or tailstock.
If the tool bumps against the chuck and/or tailstock, the tool and/or machine may be damaged,
and even injuries may occur.
9. When pressing the power ON button, do not touch any key on the keyboard before a display
appears on the screen. Some keys on the keyboard are allocated to maintenance or other special
operations. Pressing any of these keys may cause the machine to behave unexpectedly.
s4
Table of Contents
B62444E1/04
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
I. GENERAL
1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. SYMBOLS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. FLOWCHART FROM CREATING A PROGRAM TO EXECUTING IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1
3.2
3.3
CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

CHECKING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SELECTING A MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4. SELECTING THE MENU AND INPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.1
4.2
SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALCULATION FUNCTIONS SIMILAR TO THOSE OF A HANDHELD CALCULATOR . . . .
4.2.1
Operation for Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Keys for Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
12
14
5. HIERARCHY OF THE CONVERSATIONAL SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
II. OPERATION
1. OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1
2.2
KEYBOARD TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DETAILS OF THE KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3. OPERATION MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4. TYPES OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.1
4.2
ONEPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
TWOPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5. DESCRIPTION OF COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

5.1
ONEPATH LATHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1
Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3
Program Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c1
44
44
45
46
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62444E1/04
5.2
TWOPATH LATHES WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.3
FOR TWOPATH LATHES WITH ONE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
47
47
48
49
50
50
51
52
6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
FORMAT OF MACHINING PROGRAM USED FOR THE ONEPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FORMAT OF MACHINING PROGRAM USED FOR THE TWOPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECTING THE CONVERSATIONAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1
Entering the Number and Name of a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1
Details of Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2
Operation for Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCESS DATA SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1
Operation for the Process Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIGURE DATA SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1
Operation on the Contour Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2
Operation for Data other than Contour Data on the Figure Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREATING A NEW PROGRAM USING OTHER PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.1
Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2
Copying a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
55
56
57
57
58
58
64
65
66
68
68
70
72
72
72
7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

7.1
CHECKING INPUT FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.1
Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Specifying the Program to be Edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Displaying the Contents of the Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
Enlarging the Part of the Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
End of Checking Machining Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS USING THE SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
Selecting a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Simulating Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3
Enlarging a Figure and Displaying Other Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
SIMULATION OF YAXIS MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1
Simulation of Yaxis Machining by a Onepath Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2
Simulation of Yaxis Machining by a Twopath Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
OFFSET DATA SAVE AND RESTORE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1
Generals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4
Execution Selection State Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5
Tool Changing Position Temporary Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.6
Alternation of G30 Command in Macro Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c2
74
74
74
74
76
76
77
78
80
83
85
85
86
87
87
87
88
89
90
90
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62444E1/04
7.5
MACHINING SIMULATION BASED ON A SOLID MODEL (SUPER CAP II T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

7.5.1
Simulating a Cutting Operation Based on a Solid Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.5.2
Simulation of C/Yaxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

8.1
SELECTING THE MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE EDITED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

8.1.1
Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8.1.2
Selecting a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.2
EDITING A MACHINING PROGRAM IN UNITS OF PROCESSES (PROGRAM SCREEN) . . . . 97

8.2.1
Deleting a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.2.2
Adding a New Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.3
CHANGING THE PROCESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.4
CHANGING PART OF THE CONTOUR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

8.4.1
Changing Entered Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.4.2
Changing the Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.4.3
Adding a Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.4.4
Deleting a Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.5
CHANGING FIGURE DATA OTHER THAN CONTOUR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.6
EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS IN UNITS OF PROCESSES

(PROCESS EDITING SCREEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.6.1
Displaying the Process Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.6.2
Moving a Process for a Tool Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
8.6.3
Moving a Process between the Two Tool Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.6.4
Copying a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
8.6.5
Deleting a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.6.6
Searching for a Process (Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.7
AUTOMATIC SCHEDULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

8.7.1
Operation of Automatic Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8.7.2
Details of Automatic Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8.8
DELETING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8.9
EDITING NC PROGRAMS (CROSS EDITING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9. OUTPUTTING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

10. READING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11. CONVERTING MACHINING PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
11.1
CONVERTING A MACHINING PROGRAM TO AN NC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
11.1.1
Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Conversion to NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
11.1.2
Converting a Machining Program to an NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
11.1.3
Entering Setting Data Before Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
11.2
ALARMS DURING CONVERSION OF THE MACHINING PROGRAM

INTO THE NC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
11.3
SETTING THE READER/PUNCH INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

c3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62444E1/04
12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR MACHINING PROGRAMS CREATED

CONVERSATIONALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
12.1
OPERATION BEFORE EXECUTION

(SUCH AS SELECTING A PROGRAM, MOUNTING A TOOL, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1 Displaying the Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Direct Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 Specifying a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3 Setting Data on the Setting Screen Before Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.4 Mounting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.5 Measuring Tool Geometry Compensation when no Tool Setter is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.6 Measuring Tool Geometry Compensation when a Tool Setter is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.7 Chuck Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.8 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2
EXECUTING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 Starting Execution of Machining Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 Override Playback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3 Execution of a Conversational Machining Program After Conversion to an NC Program . . . .
127
127
128
129
135
137
143
146
155
156
156
157
159
13. SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

13.1
TOOL DATA FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.1 Displaying the Tool Data Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.2 Operations on the Tool Data Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.3 Tool Data for Machining Outer Surfaces, Inner Surfaces, End Faces,
and Inner Bottom Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.4 Tool Data for External Threads and Internal Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.5 Tool Data for Grooving on Outer Surfaces, Inner Surfaces, and End Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.6 Tool Data for Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.7 Tool Data for Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.8 Tool Data for Center Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.9 Tool Data for Throwaway Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.10 Tool Data for End Mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.11 Tool Data for Side Cutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.12 Tool Data for Chamfering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.13 Tool Data for Reamers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.14 Tool Data for Boring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.15 Automatic Tool Specification Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.16 Tool Geometry Data for Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.17 Details of the Automatic Setting of Tool Geometry Data for Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2
MACHINING CONDITION DATA AND SURFACE ROUGHNESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1 Machining Condition Data for Generalpurpose Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.2 Cutting Condition Data for Threading Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.3 Cutting Condition Data for Grooving Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.4 Cutting Condition Data for Drilling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.5 Cutting Condition Data for Tapping Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.6 Cutting Condition Data for Caxis/Yaxis Machining Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.7 Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.8 Surface Roughness Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3
PRETOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c4
162
163
164
166
170
172
176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
203
203
205
206
207
208
209
211
221
222
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62444E1/04
13.4
CHUCK/TAIL STOCK FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.1 Chuck Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.2 Chuck Data Extension Function (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.3 Tail Stock Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5
PUNCHING OUT SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6
READING SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7
CLEARING SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
223
224
225
226
226
226
14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
DATA THAT CAN BE ENTERED AND OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DATA OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O PARAMETER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
229
234
236
15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (Super CAP II T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

15.1
HOW TO CHANGE DISPLAY COLORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2
STORING AND CALLING DISPLAY COLOR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.1 Storing Display Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.2 Calling Display Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
238
240
240
241
III. TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR 2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
1.1
BAR MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2
Details of Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.4
Details of Contour Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.5
Partially Enlarged Drawing of a Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.6
Automatic Residual Machining Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.7
Details of Bar Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.8
Entering Contour Data for Machining on the 2Path Lathe with Two Spindles Facing
Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.9
Entering Contour Data for Machining on the Singlespindle 2path Lathe (16TB) . . . . . . . .
1.1.10 Null Cutting Cancel Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.11
Compensation by Tool Cutting Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.12 Bar and Pattern Repeating Finishing Processing without Using G41/G42 Command . . . . . . . .
1.1.13 Improving the Machining of Figures that Differ Slightly in Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
PATTERN REPEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1
1.2.2
Details of Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3
Figure Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.4
Details of Pattern Repeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.5
Automatic Reverse Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.6
Compensation by Tool Cutting Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c5
247
247
249
256
260
273
274
276
279
281
282
287
290
291
292
292
293
293
294
296
296
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62444E1/04
1.2.7
Improvement of Pattern Repeating Cutting Retract Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.8
Pattern Repeating Approach to Shape Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.9
Bar and Pattern Repeating Finishing Processing without Using G41/G42 Command . . . . . . . .
1.3
RESIDUAL MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
1.3.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3
1.3.4
Details of Residual Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
END FACING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
Details of End Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
Details of Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6
GROOVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
Details of Grooving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7
NECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
Automatic Tool Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.4
1.7.5
Details of Necking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8
CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, BORING, AND TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.1
1.8.2
Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.3
Automatic Pretool Determination Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9
SINGLE ACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
Figure Data Input Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.5
Selecting the Type of Machining (Single Action II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.6
Process Data (For Single Action II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.7
Figure Data (For Single Action II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10
CALLING SUBPROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.1 Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.2 Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.3 Notes on Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.4 Selecting the Type of Machining (For Subcall II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.5 Process Data (For Subcall II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.6 Subprograms to be Called (Subcall II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.7 NC Program Conversion For Subcall II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c6
297
300
304
305
305
306
308
312
313
313
313
314
315
315
316
323
326
328
329
330
337
343
345
345
346
351
352
352
354
355
356
364
365
365
365
366
367
368
368
369
370
370
370
371
371
372
373
374
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62444E1/04
1.11
AUXILIARY AND TRANSFER PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12
MCODE AND PROGRAM END PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.1 Mcode Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.2 Program End Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
374
375
375
376
2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES WITH CAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, AND TAPPING FOR END FACES . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
Automatic Pretool Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, AND TAPPING FOR SIDE FACES . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
GROOVING FOR END FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
CAXIS GROOVING FOR SIDE FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
CAXIS NOTCHING FOR END FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
Details of Caxis Notching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5
NC Program Conversion for Caxis Notching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS NOTCHING FOR SIDE FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
Details of Caxis Notching for Side Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS CYLINDRICAL MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1
2.7.2
Details of Set Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3
2.7.4
Details of Cylindrical Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
378
379
382
384
385
385
386
388
390
391
391
392
394
398
398
399
400
405
405
407
408
411
413
415
415
416
416
417
418
418
419
421
423
3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR A LATHE HAVING

THE YAXIS MACHINING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
3.1
YAXIS CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, AND TAPPING (ON THE END FACE) . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1
Selecting a Machining Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3
Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4
c7
425
426
427
430
433
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62444E1/04
3.2
CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, AND TAPPING (ON THE SIDE FACE) . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Machining Type Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2
Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3
Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4
3.3
YAXIS MILLING (ON THE END FACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
3.3.2
Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
YAXIS MILLING (ON THE SIDE FACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
3.4.2
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3
Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
434
436
437
439
442
443
443
444
446
448
449
450
452
4. CONVERTING A MACHINE PROGRAM IN THE RIGHTHAND COORDINATE

SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFTHAND COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
4.1
4.2
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DETAILS OF CONVERSION TO MACHINING PROGRAM IN THE LEFTHAND
COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Conversion of Machining Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Restrictions on Conversion to Machining Programs in the Lefthand Coordinate System . . . .
455
457
457
458
5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS FOR A LATHE WITH A SUBSPINDLE . . . . . . 459

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
SELECTING THE SUBSPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BACK MACHINING WITH THE SUBSPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATE SYSTEM FOR CAXIS MACHINING WITH THE SUBSPINDLE . . . . . . . . . .
ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION FOR MACHINING WITH THE SUBSPINDLE . . . . .
FUNCTION FOR CONTROLLING THE CAXIS BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS MACHINING FUNCTION UNDER CONTROL OF SPINDLE POSITIONING . . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC OUTPUT OF THE M CODE FOR CONTROLLING THE SUBSPINDLE
(AND THE M CODES FOR CALLING SUBPROGRAMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
460
461
462
463
463
464
465
IV. EXAMPLES OF CREATING PROGRAMS

1. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
1.1
1.2
SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING TOOL DATA AND CUTTING CONDITION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1
Setting Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2
Setting Cutting Condition Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS FOR MACHINING THE CYLINDRICAL SURFACE
OF BARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Creating a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
Entering Initial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3
Specifying the Primary Machining Process (For the Leftside Tool Post) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.4
Specifying a Transfer Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c8
470
474
474
475
476
476
477
478
480
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62444E1/04
1.3.5
Specifying the Secondary Machining Process (For the Rightside Tool Post) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.6
Displaying the Figure of a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.7
Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.8
Returning to the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
SETTING UP MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1
Setting the Workpiece Shift Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2
Another Setup Operation for Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
481
483
484
484
485
485
486
2. EXAMPLE OF INPUTTING CONTOURS FOR BAR MACHINING AND

PATTERN REPEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES WITH THE CAXIS . . . . . . . 505
3.1
3.2
SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING TOOL AND CUTTING CONDITION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Setting Tool Data for Machining Around the Caxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3
EXAMPLE OF CREATING A PROGRAM FOR NOTCHING AND
CYLINDRICAL MACHINING AROUND THE CAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
Creating a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
Entering the Initial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
Specifying Process 1 (End Face and Cylindrical Surface Machining) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4
Specifying Process 2 (Notching the End Face Around the Caxis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5
Specifying Process 3 (Cylindrical Surface Machining Around the Caxis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6
Input for the End Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.7
Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.8
Returning to the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
506
507
507
509
510
511
512
513
516
518
519
521
APPENDIX
A. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6
A.7
A.8
A.9
A.10
A.11
A.12
A.13
A.14
DRILLING PARAMETERS (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PARAMETERS FOR CONVERSATIONAL PERIPHERAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENTERING WORKPIECE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR THE MFUNCTIONLIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGISTERING THE TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENTERING SUBPROGRAM NAMES ON THE SUBPROGRAM CALLING SCREEN . . . . . .
TOOL POST NAME PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS NECESSARY FOR USING THE CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION (BITTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS NECESSARY FOR USING THE CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION (COMMON DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR BAR MACHINING, PATTERN REPEATING, END FACING,
AND RESIDUAL MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR NECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR GROOVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c9
526
527
528
532
537
537
538
539
540
554
562
567
568
570
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A.15
A.16
A.17
A.18
A.19
B62444E1/04
PARAMETERS FOR YAXIS MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PARAMETERS FOR DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR NOTCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR OTHER CONVERSATIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING PARAMETERS IN THE NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
572
573
577
578
584
B. ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
c10
I. GENERAL
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
1. OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Overview of the manual
This manual describes the functions related to the one/twopath lathe

Super CAP T and Super CAP II T of the FANUC Series 16/18TB and
FANUC Series 16/18TC Series 16i/18iTA. (The Super CAP II T is
usable only with the FANUC Series 16/18TC, Series 16i/18iTA.)
The one/twopath Super CAP T and Super CAP II T differ from each
other only in conversational programming screens and machining
simulation. All other aspects such as screen displays, key operations, and
machining operations are identical. Therefore, this manual mainly
describes the former Super CAP, and explains the conversational
automatic programming function of the latter Super CAP as required.
For other functions, refer to the operators manual for the FANUC Series
16/18TB or FANUC Series 16/18TC Series 16i/18iTA.
The specifications and usage of the conversational automatic
programming function may vary according to the specifications of the
operators panel of a machine tool. Be sure to read the manual provided
by the machine tool builder.
The functions of the CNC machine tool system are determined not only
by the CNC, but by the combination of the machine tool, the power
magnetic circuit in the machine tool, the servo system, the CNC, and the
operators panel.
It is impossible to cover all possible combinations of all functions,
programming methods, and operations in a single manual.
This manual explains only the conversational automatic programming
function provided for the CNC. For individual CNC machine tools, refer
to applicable manuals from the machine tool builders.
The manuals from machine tool builders take precedence over this
manual.
This manual explains as many detailed functions as possible. However,
it is not possible to describe all of the items which cannot be done or which
the operator must not do. Therefore, please assume that functions other
than those described in this manual cannot be performed.
Detailed information and special conditions are explained in notes. The
readers may encounter new technical terms in the notes not previously
defined or described. In this case, read this manual through first, then
review the details.
1. OVERVIEW
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are:

MODEL
About the Super CAP II T
ABBREVIATION
FANUC Series 16TB
16TB
FANUC Series 18TB
18TB
FANUC Series 16TC
16TC
FANUC Series 18TC
18TC
FANUC Series 16iTA
16iTA
FANUC Series 18iTA
18iTA
The Super CAP II T is added with the following functions, as compared

with the Super CAP T.
1 Background color of the display screen, and stereoscopic frames of the
window/soft keys
2 Stereoscopic display of a soft key when it is in a depressed state
3 Machining simulation based on a solid model
4 Tool trajectory drawing based on isometric projection in C/Yaxis
machining simulation
5 Changes to screen display colors, and storage of additional four groups
of screen display colors
All other functions such as screen displays, key operations, and
machining functions are the same as conventional ones.
Moreover, machining programs, tool data, and conversational function
parameters created on the Super CAP T can be used also on the Super CAP
II T.
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
2. SYMBOLS USED
SYMBOLS USED
The following explains how keys and buttons are indicated in this manual.
(1) Function buttons are indicated in bold type:
Example) PRGRM, OFSET
(2) Numeric keys to be entered from the key board are underlined:
Example) 12.345
(3) The input key is indicated in bold type in the same way as the
function buttons. Generally, the input key follows numeric key
input.
Example) 12.345 INPUT
(4) The edit keys are also indicated in bold type:
Example) ALTER key: ALTER
INSRT key:
INSRT
DELET key: DELET
(5) Soft keys are enclosed in brackets [ ]:
Example) [NEW], [NEW-PR]
(6) The cursor keys are indicated by the following symbols:
, , , and .
(7) The page keys are indicated by the following symbols:

and
3. FLOWCHART FROM CREATING

A PROGRAM TO EXECUTING IT
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
FLOWCHART FROM CREATING A PROGRAM TO

EXECUTING IT
This chapter shows a flow indicating how a machining program is created

and executed using the conversational automatic programming function.
GENERAL
B62444E1/04

3.1
CREATING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM
Press the PRGRM function

button.
NC-format programming input

menu
Select the conversational mode.
To select the conversational mode, press the conversational key on the

machine operators panel or press the [CAP-I] soft key after entering the
EDIT mode.
Main menu
Press the [1] soft key to create a new machining program on the main menu.
Program input menu

(initial settings)
Enter necessary data, such as the number and name of a machining program, the material of tools used in common in machining programs, and
blank figures.
Moving the cursor forward automatically creates processes.
Program input menu (process data)
Select entries for necessary items, such as the type of machining and the
area to be machined. The tools and cutting conditions used for the machining are then automatically determined.
Following the operation guidance on the screen, specify a contour figure.

Program input menu
(figure data)
Press the [PLOT] soft key, if necessary, to display and check the contour
figures previously entered for other processes.
After specifying all necessary figures, press the [FIGURE END] soft key.
After specifying all necessary processes, press the [PRGRM END] soft key.
[FIGURE END]
[PRGRM END]

GENERAL
B62444E1/04
3.2
CHECKING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM
Press the PRGRM function button.
NC-format programming input

menu
To select the conversational mode, either press the conversational key on

the machine operators panel or enter the EDIT mode and press the [CAP-I]
soft key.
Main menu
Press the [2] soft key for creating a new machining program on the main
menu.
Registered-program directory
screen
Move the cursor to the program to be edited. Press the [EDIT] soft key.
Program screen
If the program does not fit on one page, press the page key to scroll the
screen.
Pressing the leftmost soft key [
Page key
] returns to the main menu.
GENERAL
B62444E1/04

3.3
SELECTING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM TO BE
EXECUTED
Press the PRGRM function button.
NC-format programming input menu
To select the conversational mode, press the conversational key on the

machine operators panel or enter the EDIT mode and press the [CAP-I] soft
key.
Select the automatic operation mode on the machine operators mode.

Main menu
Press the [4] soft key to operate a conversational machining program directly after entering the MEM mode on the main menu.
[PRE-EX]:
Press this key to specify a chuck barrier, workpiece shift, and

position where the tool is changed (tool change position).
[EXEC]:
Press this key to select a machining program to be executed

only when the power is turned on or when a new program is
selected.
Registered-program directory
screen
Setting screen before execution
On the setting screen before execution, specify the chuck barrier, workpiece
shift, and tool change position. This operation is required only once for each
machining program.
Program screen
Check that the selected machining program is correct, then start automatic
operation.
Program execution screen
While the machining program created conversationally is being executed,

the program execution screen is displayed.
End of execution
When another machining program is selected
4. SELECTING THE MENU AND

INPUTTING DATA
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
SELECTING THE MENU AND INPUTTING DATA
Whenever you are uncertain of the operation to be performed next, check

relevant part of this manual. Alternatively, press the [GUIDE] soft key
to display the operation guidance screen for the current operation.
When the screen selected on the conversational main menu is displayed
and you are at a loss what to do next, press the leftmost soft key [ ]. The
main menu then appears on the screen and you can start from the
beginning.
10
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
4.1
SOFT KEYS
Example
4. SELECTING THE MENU

AND INPUTTING DATA
Soft keys displayed on the conversational screens have different colors

depending on their functions as follows:
(1) Green soft keys
Used mainly for displaying other screens.
[MCHNC]
: Displaying the cutting condition data screen
[TOOLD]
: Displaying the registered tool directory screen
[DETAIL DATA] : Displaying process data not shown on the
machining program screen
[GUIDE]
: Displaying operation guidance
(2) Yellow soft keys
Used for selecting the menus.
Example
[1 BAR]
: Selecting the type of machining
[1 OEND]
: Selecting the area to be machined
[]
: Selecting a figure pattern
(3) Purple soft keys

Used for editing.
Example
[DELETE]
[INSERT]
[COPY]
: Deleting a process or figure

: Inserting a process or figure
: Copying a program or process
When the [+] soft key appears at the right end of the screen, there are soft
keys other than those displayed on the current screen. Press the [+] soft
key to display the other soft keys, if necessary.
The leftmost soft key [<], which is called the super return key, is used to
return from a conversational screen to the main menu.
11

INPUTTING DATA
GENERAL
4.2
B62444E1/04
Data can be entered for items on the conversational programming menus

(except for the detailed data screen) while calculation is performed on the
same menu.
CALCULATION
FUNCTIONS SIMILAR
TO THOSE OF A
HANDHELD
CALCULATOR
The four arithmetic functions, addition, subtraction, multiplication, and

division, operate on two numbers. By substituting the result as one term
at the next calculation, calculation can be iterated indefinitely.
Data to be entered for an item must conform to the type of data in the item.
If data contains a component less than the minimum input limit, the
component is ignored.
4.2.1
The following shows key operations for each function.
Operation for
Calculation
Addition
Subtraction
100. +200.
200. 100.
Multiplication 100. * 20.

Division
200. /10.
INPUT
INPUT
The result reads at the location where input

keys are displayed.
INPUT
INPUT
To enter the calculated result for the desired item, press the INPUT key
again after checking the result.
Pressing the CAN key deletes characters successively in the input field
from the last character entered.
Example of operation)
Key input operation and input key display when the following expression
is calculated:
210. 65.3 + 1.25
210.065.3
INPUT
INPUT INPUT
START POINT X
DELETE INSERT FIGURE WINDOW PROCES MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT

ON/OFF EDIT
DATA
(INPUT key)
144.7
GUIDE
START POINT X

ON/OFF EDIT
DATA
12
GUIDE
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
Second key operation for the calculation

144.7+1.25
4. SELECTING THE MENU

AND INPUTTING DATA
START POINT X

ON/OFF EDIT
DATA
(INPUT key)
145.95
START POINT X

ON/OFF EDIT
DATA
(INPUT key)
GUIDE
GUIDE
The result, 145.95, is entered for the item START POINT X. The cursor
automatically proceeds to the next data item.
13

INPUTTING DATA
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
4.2.2
Keys for Calculation
Example of a keyboard)
For the 10 LCD
Addition (+)
SHIFT
L
+
CAN
SHIFT
INPUT
14
(1)
(2)
Subtraction ()
(3)
Multiplication ()
SHIFT
T
*
(4)
Division (/)
/
5. HIERARCHY OF THE
CONVERSATIONAL SCREENS
GENERAL
B62444E1/04
HIERARCHY OF THE CONVERSATIONAL SCREENS
Main menu
Direct operation Converting NC programs Tool/cutting condition data
Creating programs
PROGRAM
NO
Editing programs
Machining simulation
PROGRAM LIST
FOR EDITING
PROGRAM LIST
FOR
SIMULATION
PROGRAM LIST
FOR DIRECT
OPERATION
PROGRAM LIST
FOR CONVERTING
NC PROGRAMS
Selecting processes
Program screen
Setting
before execution
Chuck
barrier
Setting
before execution
Chuck
barrier
Setting
before execution
Chuck
barrier
TYPE OF
MACHINING
=
Inputting figures
Animated simulation
Editing processes
Tooling data
Animated simulation
Measuring tool offset
plus path drawing
Path drawing
Position screen
Tool list
Animated simulation
plus path drawing
Tool data file
Cutting condition data
Pre-tool list
FINAL TOOL
PRE-TOOL
Chuck/tail stock data
15
Tool offset
TOOL DATA
MENU
Editting NC programs
II. OPERATION
1. OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
The following shows the general procedure from creating a machining

program to executing it using Super CAP for the FANUC Series 16TB.
Reference
APPENDIX
Setting parameters
II.13 SETTING DATA
Setting cutting condition data
II.13 SETTING DATA
Setting a pre-tool list when drilling is included
II.13 SETTING DATA
Setting the figures of a chuck and tail stock
II.13 SETTING DATA
Setting a tool data file
II.6 CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS
Creating a machining program
II.12 EXECUTING MACHINING PROGRAMS
Selecting a machining program
Mounting tools (and referring to the tooling data)
19
1. OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Measuring the tool offset
Specifying a tool change position
Setting data before execution
Checking the machining program with the check drawing
Trial machining
Specifying tool wear compensation
Actual machining
20
II.8 CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD
DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD
21
2.1
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
The CRT/MDI panel consists of a display unit, such as a color 14 CRT

or color 9.5 LCD, and a keyboard.
KEYBOARD TYPES
(1) CRT/MDI panel with the 14 color CRT

RESET key
Address/numerical key
HELP key
FANUC Serlee 16T

RESET
HELP
O(
N)
GE PQ
XA
ZB
CD
Y?
U.
WJ
H,
M#
S=
T*
L+
I[
K]
R&
FSP
4
1
SHIFT
ALTER
INSERT
DELETE
EOB
CAN
INPUT
POS
PROG
OFFSET
SETTING
CUSTOM
SYSTEM
MESSAGE
GRAPH
SHIFT key
Program edit key

INPUT key
Cancel (CAN) key
Function key
POWER
PAGE
Power ON/OFF button
Soft key
PAGE
Cursor move key
Page change key
(2) CRT/MDI panel with the 9.5 color LCD
Function key
Address/numerical key
FANUC Serles 16T

O(
N)
GE PQ
POWER
XA
ZB
CD
Y?
U.
WJ
H,
M#
S=
T*
L+
I[
K]
R&
FSP
POS
PROG
OFFSET
SETTING
CUSTOM
SYSTEM
MESSAGE
GRAPH
PAGE
PAGE
Power ON/OFF button
Soft key
Page change key
3
.
EOB
CAN
INSERT
DELETE
INPUT
HELP
RESET
Program edit key

Cursor move key
22
SHIFT
ALTER
Cancel (CAN) key

SHIFT key
INPUT key
HELP key
RESET key
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
2.2
DETAILS OF THE
KEYBOARD
The keys mainly used for the conversational automatic programming

function are explained here. For other keys that are not dealt with in this
manual, refer to the relevant operators manuals.
When the conversational automatic programming function is used, the
operator sometimes has to perform certain operations manually from the
machine operators panel. There may include reference position return
operation and turret turning operation (tool replacement). The operators
panel varies depending on the machine tool builders and the individual
machines. For the use of the operators panel, refer to the appropriate
manual provided by the machine tool builder.
Key
Description
Function buttons
Displays the ACUTUAL POSITION.
POS
When a machining program is created or edited using the

conversational automatic programming function, press this
button first.
PROG
When a machining program created using the conversational programming function is being executed, this button
is also used to display the conversational automatic program execution screen that shows the program, current
position, and actual speed.
When the conversational programming screen is displayed,
enter the EDIT mode and press the [END] soft key to display
the NCformat programming screen.
To return from the NCformat programming screen to the
conversational programming screen, press the [CAPI] soft
key or press the Conversation key on the machine operators panel.
Sets and displays tool offset data, workpiece shift, and custom macro variables.
OFFSET
SETTING
Pressing this function button twice displays the screen used

for setting and displaying tool data files and cutting condition
data.
Sets and displays parameters, and displays diagnostic
data. Parameter 9000 and subsequent parameters are
used for the conversational automatic programming function.
SYSTEM
Displays an alarm number, and displays and sets the state

of the software operators panel (only when the appropriate
option is provided).
MESSAGE
When a machining program created using the conversational automatic programming function is executed, if an error occurs in the program, some alarms from 3000 to 3099
are issued and indicated.
Displays the machining simulation screen. The conversational function supports a special function that displays the
machining simulation screen, eliminating the need to press
this key.
GRAPH
23
OPERATION
Key
B62444E1/04
Description
Data input key

Address keys
(alphabetical
keys)
Used to enter alphabetic characters and symbols on the

NCformat programming screen.
Numeric keys
Used when numeric data is entered. In the conversational

automatic programming function, the numeric keys are
used whenever machining programs are created and
edited, and tool data and cutting condition data are entered.
In the conversational automatic programming function,

these keys are used only when the name of a machining
program is entered. They are not used on the other program
input screens.
Program edit keys

On the ordinary NCformat programming screen, this key
rewrites word address data consisting of an address and
numeric data.
ALTER

inserts word address data consisting of an address and numeric data.
INPUT

deletes word address data consisting of an address and numeric data.
DELETE
Arrow keys
: Moves the cursor forward for each setting on the conversational programming screen, cutting condition data
setting screen, tool data file setting screen, and so forth.
Cursor keys
: Moves the cursor backward for each setting on the

screens mentioned above.
: Displays the next page when the conversational programming screen, cutting condition data setting
screen, tool data file setting screen, or an other screen
is displayed.
Page keys
PAGE
PAGE
: Displays the previous page when the one of the

screens mentioned above is displayed.
Soft keys
Leftmost soft key
When a function is activated by a certain soft key in a mode

other than the conversational mode, this key returns to the
previous state (the state immediately before the function
button was pressed).
On a screen displayed by the conversational function,
pressing this soft key causes processing to return to the
main menu screen of the conversational function.
Rightmost soft
key
When there are soft keys other than those displayed on the
screen, pressing this soft key displays the next set of soft
keys.
Other soft keys
Various functions are assigned according to the applications. The function assigned to each soft key is indicated at
the bottom of the CRT or LCD.
24
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Key
Description
Other keys
Reset key
Resets the NC to release an alarm.

This key can also be used to stop automatic operation of the
machine or machining simulation.
RESET
Input key
Sets data entered into the key input buffer in an appropriate

data area.
INPUT
Cancel (CAN) key Deletes one character at a time from numeric or character
data stored in the key input buffer.
CAN
Pressing the cancel key then the input key on the conversational programming screen deletes the input data.
25
3. OPERATION MODES
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
OPERATION MODES
Before performing the desired operation listed below, enter the

corresponding mode.
In the following table, an asterisk (*) in the mode column indicates that
the corresponding operation can be performed in any mode.
Operation
Reference
Mode
II. 6
EDIT
Creating a machining program
II. 6
Checking input figures for a machining program
II. 7
Checking a machining program using the animated simulation
II. 7
MEM
Editing a machining program
II. 8
Outputting a machining program
II. 9
EDIT
Reading a machining program
II. 10
EDIT
Converting a machining program to the NCformat program
II. 11
MEM
Selecting a machining program to be

executed
II. 12
Specifying a chuck barrier on the setting

screen before execution
II. 12
JOG/HANDLE
Specifying a tool changing position on the set- II. 12

ting screen before execution
JOG/HANDLE
Switching from the NC-format programming

screen to the conversational programming
screen
The screen can be changed in any mode
when the Conversation switch in the machine
operators panel is used.
Executing a machining program
II. 12
MEM
Setting tool data, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pre-tool list, chuck/tail
stock figure data
II. 13
Outputting tool data, cutting condition data,

surface roughness data, pre-tool list, chuck/
tail stock figure data
II. 13
EDIT
Reading tool data, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pre-tool list, chuck/tail
stock figure data
II. 13
Emergency-stop
26
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
Operation
3. OPERATION MODES
Reference
Mode
Punching and reading the data by using the

batch data input/output function
II. 14
EDIT
Measuring tool length offset on the tooling

screen
II. 13
JOG/HANDLE
Entering offset on the tooling screen
II. 13
Setting parameters
APPENDIX
27
MDI
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF SCREENS
The screens displayed by the conversational automatic programming

function are shown below. For details of data and operation on each
screen, see the related explanation in this manual.
28
4.1
ONEPATH LATHES
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(1) Parameter setting screen (For details, see Part V, APPENDIX.)

General data relating to the conversational automatic programming
function is set and displayed on this screen.
ACTUAL POSITION
O0001 P0000
(ABSOLUTE)
X
Z
C
Y
G00
G97
G69
G99
G21
G40
<
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
(MODAL)
G25 G13.1
G22
G80
G67
G54
G18
ABB
REL
MM/M
PARAMETER(CAP BIT PARAM)

9770 NM7
NM3 NM2 NM1 NM0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9771 1SP 2SP 96S 96M CS2 CLD DM2 T99
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
9772 INO DIO RFN YMD RLF EDM MSO CM5
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
9773
MDL GTL TCD RPT OPO GRO SG3
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
9774 AUT GPW T00 M10 280 MLT MLS TLC
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
S
SRPM
0
SSPM
0
SMAX 32767
SACT
0
>_
MDI **** *** ***
14:04:09
NO.SRH ON:1 OFF:0 +INPUT INPUT
ALL
(2) Main menu (For details, see II.6.)

All operations start from this menu.
[CAP.]
FANUC Super CAP T Ver. Z3.0

PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM
EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM
PROCESSING SIMULATION
DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PROGRAM
CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM
TOOL,CUTTING CONDITION DATA

TOOL OFFSET DATA
EDIT NC PROGRAM
POSIION
EKIT
MODE
END
MEM
MODE
1 2
29
MEM
MODE
3 4
MEM
MODE
14:04:48
5 6 7
MEM
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(3) Machining condition screen (For details, see II.13.)

Cutting condition data for the conversational automatic
programming function is set and displayed on this screen. The
cutting condition data for all possible combinations of tools and
materials to be machined in conversational automatic programming
can be set and displayed.
[CAP.]
101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAP
(F)
T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD
0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500
50 TL
TL
TL
20.000
150.000
60.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (GENERAL) ***

ROUGHING
FINISHING
CARBID BITE
CARBID BITE
MATERIALFEED/REV. CUT SPD. CUT DPTH MATERIALFEED/REV. CUT SPD.
(MM/REV.) (M/MIN.)
(MM)
(MM.REV.) (M/MIN.)
FC25
0.5000
80.0
4.000 FC25
0.4000
110.0
FCD45
0.6000
60.0
3.500 FCD45
0.5000
100.0
SS41
0.6000
55.0
5.000 SS41
0.5000
120.0
S45C
0.3000
80.0
8.000 S45C
0.4000
110.0
SKD11
0.5000
80.0
2.000 SKD11
0.2200
150.0
SUS304
0.5000
60.0
2.000 SUS304
0.3000
200.0
AL
0.3000
50.0
3.000 AL
0.3000
120.0
0.0000
0.0
0.000
0.0000
0.0
SET FEEDRATE AMOUNT BY MAX. VALUE
< WORK
MATERL
MENU
RETURN
(4) Pretool list screen (For details, see II.13.)

Final tool and pretool data required by the conversational
automatic programming function to automatically determine a
pretool for final drilling are set and displayed on this screen.
[CAP.]
101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAP
(F)
T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD
0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500
*** PRETOOL LIST ***
50 TL
TL
TL
NO.01
TOOL NO.
TL NAME NOMINLD
S51
TAP
(F)
18.000
LAST TL
PRETOOL 1
2
3
4
5
701
601
<
CENTER (F)
DRIL
(F)
2.000
20.000
SEARCH
30
MENU
TOOL
RETURN LIST
20.000
150.000
60.000
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(5) Chuck and tail stock figure data screen (For details, see II.13.)
Data on the chuck and tail stock figures displayed together with the
material figure on the check drawing screen is set and displayed.
[CAP.]
101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAP
(F)
T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD
0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500
*** CHUCK FIGURE ***

NO.TYPE
L
W
L1
W1
1 EXT 60.0 60.0 30.0 30.0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
50 TL
TL
TL
20.000
150.000
60.000
L1
W
W1
<
EXT.
INT.
CHUCK TAIL
STOCK
MENU
RETURN
(6) Screen for setting and displaying tool data (For details, see II.13.)
Up to 99 tooldata items can be set and displayed for all tools
provided (including tools that are not mounted on the turret).
[CAP.]
101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAO
(F)
T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD
*** TOOL DATA(1) ***

TOOLID NO CN0.101
TOOL TYPE OUTER
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN OOMMON
OUTPUT T
0101
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOSERADIS RN=
0.400
CUTIMG EDG AC=
110
NOSE ANGLE AN=
50
NOSE WIDTH TW=
20.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
3
TL MATRIAL TM=
CARBID
<
0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500
50 TL
TL
TL
20.000
150.000
60.000
TW
AC
AN
MENU TOOL TOOL

RETURN LIST FIGURE
31
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(7) Program menu screen (Edit the processing program) (For details, see
II.6.)
This screen appears first when a machining program is created or
edited using the conversational automatic programming function.
The program numbers and names of all machining programs
registered are displayed on this screen.
EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM*** PROGRAM MENU ***
(REST NO. OF PROGRAM 24 PCS.)
(REST NO. OF PROCES 261 PCS.)
PRG.NO.
NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
0001:(EXEC)PRG11
1M27S
1994/03/24 11:19
PROGRAM NO
PUNCH
MODIFIED
1994/03/27 14:02
SFTKY
INITAL SET
FC25
PROC(01)
BAR
PROC(01)
BAR
PROC(03) DRILLING
PROC(02)
END
<
[CAP.]
BAR
OUTER END
OUTER END
ROUGH
FIN
(DRILLNG)
READ DELETE COPY
T0101
T0101
T0303
SCHED- EDIT PROCES PLOT GUIDE

ULING
EDIT
(8) Program screen (Edit the processing program) (For details, see II.6.)
A machining program consists of a set of machining program units,
called processes. Data necessary for these processes is set and
displayed.
The menu and description of the data item which the cursor points
out are shown on the window in the screen.
[CAP.]
NO. =0001
NAME=PRG11
INITAL SETMATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
100.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZ EREMOVL
0.100
0.200
2.000
PROC(01)
AREA
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END
101
120
PROC(01)
AREA
ROUGHNES TOOLNO
BAR (F) OUTER END
5
101
1=OUTER END
START X=
0.000
Z= 0.000
2=OUTER MID
X= 34.000
Z= 0.000
CHAMFR X= 40.000
Z= 3.000
3=INNER
END
X= 40.000
Z= 15.000
ROUND X= 50.000
Z= 20.000
4=INNER MID
X= 56.000
Z= 20.000
CHAMFR X= 60.971
Z= 21.941
X= 69.402
Z= 38.806
5=FACE END
ROUND X= 70.000
Z= 41.232
X= 70.000
Z= 48.000
4=FACE MID
SOFTKE
AREA
<
2
3
4
5
1
OUTER OMID INNER IMID FACING
32
6
FMID
TOOL DETAIL PLOT

DATA DATA
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
(9) Figure data programming screen (Edit the processing program) (For
details, see II.6.)
Dimension data required for machining is entered and displayed on this
screen. All processes except for the end facing processes consist of the
process data explained previously and the figure data.
The maximum number of figure data items that can be included in each
machining process is given below:
(a) Bar machining: 30
(b) Pattern repeating: 30
(c) Residual machining: 5
(d) End facing: No figure data is needed.
(e) Threading: 5 (for generalpurpose threads and metric threads)
(f) Grooving: 5
(g) Necking: 5
(h) Center drilling: 1
(i) Drilling: 1
(j) Tapping: 1
(k) Single action: 30 (Single action II: 104)
(l) M code: 5
(m) Caxis center drilling/drilling/reaming/tapping:
6 (for uneven intervals), even intervals can be specified.
(n) Caxis grooving: 6 (for uneven intervals), even intervals can be
specified.
(o) Caxis notching: 30
(p) Caxis cylindrical machining: 30
(q) Yaxis center drilling/drilling/reaming/tapping: 6 (for uneven
intervals), A hole pattern can be specified.
(r) Yaxis milling: 30
Arbitrary figures formed by arcs and lines can be specified for bar
machining, pattern repeating, Caxis notching, Caxis cylindrical
machining. and Yaxis milling machining. These arbitrary figures are
called contour figures.
By entering dimensional data specified on a drawing, intersections at the
corners of the contour figure can be automatically calculated and the
results are displayed.
Entered data for a contour figure is displayed on the window and the
calculated results are displayed outside the window on the program
screen.
33
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04

[CAP.]
NO. =0001
NAME=PRG11
INITAL SETMATERIAL
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
100.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZ EREMOVL
0.100
0.200
2.000
PROC(01)
AREA
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTEP END
101
120
0.50
5.000
101
PROC(01)
AREA
ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
BAR (F) OUTER END
5
101
150
0.50
101
START X=
0.000
Z= 0.000
X= 34.000
Z= 0.000
COUNT FORM(TAPER LINE)
CHAMFR X= 40.000
Z= 3.000
DIRECTION
B=
X= 40.000
Z= 15.000
TAPER END X CORD. X= 70.000
ROUND X= 50.000
Z= 20.000
TAPER
END
Z
CORD.
Z=
40.000
X= 56.000
Z= 20.000
COMPONENT X
I=
CHAMFR X= 60.971
Z= 21.941
COMPONENT Z/ANGLE K/J=
X= 69.402
Z= 38.806
LENGTH
Q=
ROUND X= 70.000
Z= 41.232
ROUGHNESS(1 10 ) SR=
5
X= 70.000
Z= 48.000
SOFTKE
AREA
< WINDOW INSERT ALTER ALTER DELETE

FIGURE
OFF
MACHIN TOOL DETAIL PLOT

COND. DATA DATA
(10) Setting of premachining (Processing simulation) (For details, see

II.12.)
Prior to executing the selected machining program, data required for
machining by the program is set on this screen.
PROCESEING SIMULATION
BASIS TCODE
T=
FACE POSITION CZ=
WSHIFT
SZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=
TAILSTOCK NO
T=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
*** SETTING OF PREMACHING ***
[CAP.]
2.000
1
TO MOVE WORK ORIGIN, PLACE TOOL ON SIDE

BORDER AND PRESS (SET) SOFT KEY
CURRENT WSHIFT(Z) =
0.000
WSHIFT
<
SET RETURN
34
TOOLNG
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(11) Tooling data screen (For details, see II.12.)

A list of tool data for the tools used in the currently selected
machining program is displayed on this screen.
*** TOOLING DATA ***
[CAP.]
PAGE 01/01
PROCPROCNAMEUSINGTOOLGEOMETRY OFS XGEOMETRY OFS Z RN/WN/DD/TR/TW TCODE
01
BAR (R)
200.000 100.000
RN
0.400
0101
01
BAR (F)
200.000 100.000
RN
0.400
0101
03 DRILLING DRILL
200.000 100.000
DD
20.000
0303
GEOMETE DFS X
<
YAXIS WEAR
OFFSETOFFSET
PREPAR
TOOL RETURN
DISPLY
(12) Tool offset measurement screen (Tool preparation) (For details, see
II.12.)
Operation guidance for measuring a tool offset is shown on this
screen. Follow the instructions on the screen to automatically
measure a tool offset.
[CAP.]
101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAP
(F)
T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD
0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500
50 TL
TL
TL
20.000
150.000
60.000
*** TOOL PREPARATION *** NO. 101

3.BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN CONTACT WITH
THE SENSOR FROM ZAXIS DIRECTION
X=
Z=
200.000
100.000
4
2
3
<
PREPG NXTPG
35
RETURN
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04

II.12.)
Operation guidance for specifying the optimal position at which to
change tools is indicated on this screen. Follow the instructions on
the screen to automatically determine the tool changing position.
PROCESEING SIMULATION
BASIS TCODE
T=
FACE POSITION CZ=
WSHIFT
SZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=
TAILSTOCK NO
T=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
[CAP.]
*** SETTING OF PREMACHING ***
2.000
1
AFTER CHECKING THAT THERE IS NO

INTERFERENCE,PUSH SOFTKEY [ SET ].
TOOLCHB
X
<
SET RETURN
TOOLNG
(14) Machining simulation screen (For details, see II.7.)

Before the created machining program is executed, it can be checked
with the check drawing screen where the machining operation is
simulated.
00001 P0001
X
X
Z
C
69.448
38.850
0.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.160Z
Z
16.939
C
0.000
1M025
500%
STOP *** ***
< SPEED SPEED PLOT

DOWN
UP
36
AD
ON/OFF
14:13:15
STOP
WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE +

PIECE
STEP
4.2
TWOPATH LATHES
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
In Super CAP T for twopath lathes used with the Series 16TB, a screen
for tool post 2 is added to each screen explained in Super CAP T for
onepath lathes used with the Series 16TB.
A screen for tool post 1 is the same as the corresponding screen explained
in Super CAP T for onepath lathes.
(1) Parameter setting screen (For details, see Part V, Appendix.)
Parameters related to the conversational automatic programming
function are common to tool posts 1 and 2 except for parameter No.
9770 specifying allocation of the NCformat program area and
conversational format program area.
ACTUAL POSITION
O0001 P0000
(ABSOLUTE)
X1
Z1
C1
Y1
G00
G97
G69
G99
G21
G40
<
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
(MODAL)
G25 G13.1
G22
G80
G67
G54
G18
ABB
REL
F
S
SRPM
0
SSPM
0
SMAX 32767
SACT
0
ALL
MM/M
PARAMETER(CAP BIT PARAM)
M
T
9770 NM7
NM3 NM2 NM1 NM0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9771 1SP 2SP 96S 96M CS2 CLD DM2 T99
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
9772 INO DIO RFN YMD RLF EDM MSO CM5
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
9773
MDL GTL TCD RPT OPO GRO SG3
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
9774 AUT GPW T00 M10 280 MLT MLS TLC
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
>_
MDI **** *** ***
13:06:58
HEAD1
NO.SRH ON:1 OFF:0 +INPUT INPUT
(2) Main menu (For details, see II.6.)

This menu is common to tool posts 1 and 2.
(3) Machining condition data screen (For details, see II.13.)
This screen is common to tool posts 1 and 2.
37
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(4) Pretool list screen (For details, see II.13.)

Pretool list data is specified separately for tool posts 1 and 2. Two
tool posts are displayed on the screen.
[CAP.:HEADL]
101#L OUTER
102#R OUTEP
601#L DRILL
(F)
T0101 RN
T0101 PN
T0303 DD
0.400 AC
0.500 AC
20.000 AC
110 AN
90 AN
150
50 TW
60 TW
TL
20.000
30.000
150.000
NO.01
TOOL NO.
TL NAME NOMINLD
651#L TAP
(F)
18.000
LAST TL
PRETOOL 1
2
3
4
5
701#L CENTER (F)

601#L DRIL
(F)
2.000
20.000
<
SEARCH
MENU TOOL
RETURN LIST
(5) Chuck and tail stock figure data screen (For details, see II.13.)
The data is common to tool posts 1 and 2.
(6) Screen for setting and displaying tool data (For details, see II.13.)
Tool data is specified separately for tool posts 1 and 2. The item
which specifies a tool post is added on the screen.
[CAP.:HEADL]
101#L OUTER
102#R OUTER
601#L DRILL
*** TOOL
TOOLID NO
TOOL TYPE
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSERADIS
CUTIMG EDG
NOSE ANGLE
NOSE WIDTH
IMGNRY NOS
TL MATRIAL
(F)
T0101 RN
T0101 PN
T0303 DD
0.400 AC
0.500 AC
20.000 AC
110 AN
90 AN
150
50 TW
60 TW
TL
20.000
30.000
150.000
DATA(1) ***
CN0.101
OUTER (HEADL)
COMMON
0101
NORMAL
RN=
0.400
AC=
110
AN=
50
TW=
20.000
TD=
3
TM=
CARBID
TW
AN
AC
RN
< HEADLHEADF
38
MENU TOOL TOOL

RETURN LIST FIGURE
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(7) Program menu screen (Edit the processing program) (For details, see
II.6.)
A machining program is used in common by both tool posts 1 and
2. This screen is also common for the two tool posts.
(8) Program screen (Edit the processing program) (For details, see II.6.)
One machining program is used in common by both tool posts 1 and
2. The item which specifies whether each process is performed with
tool post 1 or 2 is added on the screen.
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0001
NAME=PRG11
INITAL SET MATERIAL
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
100.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZEREMOVLPRODLNG
0.100
0.200
2.000 96.000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV
CUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END
HEADL
101
120
0.50
5.000
0101
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO
CUTSPD
FEED/REV TCODE
BAR (F)
OUTER END EADL
5
101
150
0.50
0101
START X=
0.000 Z= 0.000
X= 34.000 Z= 0.000 SR=

5
CHAMFR X= 40.000 Z= 3.000 SR=
5
X= 40.000 Z= 15.000 SR=

5
ROUND X= 50.000 Z= 20.000
R=
5.000
SR=
5
X= 66.000 Z= 20.000 SR=

5
CHAMFR X= 70.971 Z= 21.941 SR=
5

X= 79.402 Z= 38.806 SR=
5
ROUND X= 80.000 Z= 41.232
R=
1.000
SR=
5
X= 80.000 Z= 48.000 SR=

5
SOFTKE
TURRET_BE_OT
< HEADL HEADR PRGRM WINDOWPROCES

END
OFF
EDIT
MACHIN TOOL DETAIL PLOT

COND. DATA DATA

II.12.)
To specify items concerning setting up tools for each tool post, the
setting menus for both tool posts appear on the screen at the same
time.
*** SETTING OF PREMACHING ** [CAP.:HEADL]
HEADR
HEADL
BASIS TCODE
T=
FACE POSITION CZ=
WSHIFT
SZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=
TAILSTOCK NO
T=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
BASIS TCODE
T=
2.000
WSHIFT
SZ=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
TO MOVE WORK ORIGIN, PLACE TOOL ON SIDE

BORDER AND PRESS (SET) SOFT KEY
CURRENT WSHIFT(Z) =
0.000
WSHIFT
<
SET
39
RETURNHEADR
TOOLNG
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(10) Tooling data screen (For details, see II.12.)

Different tools are used for each tool post. The tooling data menus
for both tool posts appear on the screen at the same time.
*** HEADL TOOLING DATA ***
PROCPROCNAMEUSINGTOOLGEMOETRY OFS
01
BAR (R)
0.000
01
BAR (F)
0.000
03 DRILLING DRILL
0.000
[CAP.:HEADL]
PAGE 01/01
XGEOMETRY OFS Z RN/WN/DD/TR/TW TCODE
0.000
RN
0.400
0101
0.000
RN
0.400
0101
0.000
DD
20.000
0303
GEOMETE DFS X
< HEADL HEADF
YAXIS WEAR
OFFSETOFFSET
PREPAR
TOOL RETURN
DISPLY
(11) Tool offset measurement screen (Tool preparation) (For details, see
II.12.)
Operation guidance for measuring tool offsets is indicated for each
tool post.
[CAP.:HEADL]
101#L OUTER
102#R OUTER
601#L DRILL
(F)
T0101 RN
T0101 PN
T0303 DD
0.400 AC
0.500 AC
20.000 AC
110 AN
90 AN
150
50 TW
60 TW
TL
20.000
30.000
150.000
*** TOOL PREPARATION *** NO. 101

3.BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN CONTACT WITH
THE SENSOR FROM ZAXIS DIRECTION
X=
Z=
0.000
0.000
4
2
3
<
PREPGNXTPG
40
RETURN
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(12) Setting of premachining screen (Processing simulation) (For

details, see II.12.)
Operation guidance for specifying the optimal position at which to
change tools is indicated for each tool post.
*** SETTING OF PREMACING *** [CAP.:HEADL]
HEADR
HEADL
BASIS TCODE
T=
FACE POSITION CZ=
WSHIFT
SZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=
TAILSTOCK NO
T=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
BASIS TCODE
T=
2.000
WSHIFT
SZ=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
AFTER CHECKING THAT THERE IS NO

INTERFERENCE,PUSH SOFTKEY[SET].
TOOLCHB FOB X
<
SET RETURN HEADR
TOOLNG
(13) Machinig simulation for twotoolpost lathes or twopath lathes

with two opposing spindles (For details, see II.7.)
Two materials are machined separately with tool posts 1 and 2 in the
lathes mentioned above. The states of machining with tool posts are
displayed on the screen at the same time.
HEAD1
HEAD2
X2
X1
X1
Z1
C1
00001 P0001
0.000
0.000
0.000
X2 90.000
Z2 24.000
C2
0.000
ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
0M00S
31.7
500%
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Z2
0M28S
31.7
MEM STOP *** ***
< SPEED SPEED PLOT

DOWN
UP
41
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
13:13:52
STOP

STEP
PIECE
4. TYPES OF SCREENS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(14) Machining simulation for twotoolpost lathes or twopath lathes

with one spindle (For details, see II.7.)
With lathes of these types, a single workpiece is simultaneously
machined with tool posts 1 and 2. The machining status is displayed
on the screen as machining progresses.
HEAD1
HEAD2
00001 P0001
X1
X1 60.000
Z1 21.528
C1
0.000
X2 90.000
Z2149.800
C2
0.000
ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G01
X
4.43
Z
1.7
C
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z 69.561
C
0.000
1M07S
24.4
500%
1M17S
MEM STOP *** ***
< SPEED SPEED PLOT

DOWN
UP
42
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
13:25:40
STOP

STEP
PIECE
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
DESCRIPTION OF COORDINATE SYSTEMS
The following explains the coordinate systems used in the conversational

automatic programming function.
43
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
5.1
ONEPATH LATHES
5.1.1
The machine coordinate system is set as follows:
Machine Coordinate
System
+X
+Z
Machine zero point
Tool post
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck
Spindle
The above figure shows the state in which a tool post has returned to the
reference position. The X and Z machine coordinates of the position of
the tool post are 0. When the tool post is manually returned to a reference
position, the X and Z machine coordinates of the machine reference
position are automatically set to 0.
The directions of the X and Zaxes are specified so that the tool post
moves away from a workpiece or the spindle when the tool post moves
in the positive X and Z directions.
This machine coordinate system is kept unchanged, regardless of whether
the program reference position, explained later, is set on the end face of
a workpiece or the end face of the chuck.
The coordinates in the machine coordinate system are indicated on the
allposition display screen or in the MACHINE column on the
conversational program execution screen. The all position display screen
is displayed by pressing the POS function button, then pressing the [ALL]
soft key.
44
B62444E1/04
5.1.2
Workpiece Coordinate
System
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
OPERATION
The machine coordinate system previously mentioned is peculiar to a

specific machine. It is determined uniquely regardless of the workpieces
and tools used.
Another coordinate system is required for each tool to prevent
programmed positions from changing between tools because of the
difference in tool dimensions. This coordinate system must be set with
respect to the dimensions of a specific tool. Such coordinate systems are
called workpiece coordinate systems.
A workpiece coordinate system is determined using the tool geometry
compensation function. For details of tool geometry compensation, refer
to the Series 16/18TB or Series 16/18TC Operators Manual.
The origin of the workpiece coordinate system may be set on the end face
of either a workpiece or the chuck.
(1) When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is placed on the
end face of a workpiece
+X
Machine zero point
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck
Spindle
+Z
Origin of the workpiece
coordinate system
(2) When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is place on the
end face of the chuck
+X
Machine zero point
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck
Spindle

coordinate system
45
+Z
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
5.1.3
Program Coordinate
System
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
When a machining program is created by entering data conversationally,

the dimensions are specified with respect to the reference position
peculiar to a workpiece. This reference position is called the program
reference position.
The program reference position may be set on the end face of either the
workpiece or the chuck.
Setting parameter No. 9786 (ZEROPT) to 0 places the program reference
position on the end face of the workpiece. Setting the parameter to 1
places the reference position on the end face of the chuck.
(1) When the program reference position is placed on the end face of the
workpiece
+X
Machine zero point
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck
Spindle
Program reference
position
+Z

coordinate system
(2) When the program reference position is placed on the end face of the
chuck
+X
Machine zero point
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck
Spindle

coordinate system, Program reference position
46
+Z
5.2
TWOPATH LATHES
WITH TWO
OPPOSING
SPINDLES
5.2.1
Machine Coordinate
System
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
In twopath lathes with two spindles, coordinate systems used for tool
posts 1 and 2 are the same as those for onepath lathes except that the
direction of the Zaxis is opposite in coordinate systems for tool post 2.
The following figure shows the machine coordinate system for tool post
2.
+X2
+Z2
Machine zero point
Tool post 2
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck
Spindle
The directions of the Xand Zaxes are specified so that the tool post
moves away from a workpiece or the spindle when the tool post moves
in the positive X and Z directions.
47
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
5.2.2
System
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
In a workpiece coordinate system used for tool post 2, like in the machine
coordinate system for tool post 2, the direction of the Zaxis is opposite
that used for tool post 1.
(1) When the origin of a workpiece coordinate system is placed on the
edge of a workpiece
+X2
Machine zero point
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck
Spindle
+Z2

edge of the chuck
+X2
Machine zero point
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck
Spindle
+Z2
48
5.2.3
Program Coordinate
System
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
In a program coordinate system used for tool post 2, like in the machine
coordinate system for tool post 2, the direction of the Zaxis is opposite
(1) When the program reference position is placed on the edge of a
workpiece
Toll
post 2
+X2
Machine zero
point
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck
Program reference position

coordinate system
Spindle
+Z2
(2) When the program reference position is placed on the edge of the
chuck
+X2
Machine zero
point
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

+Z2

coordinate system
49
Spindle
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
5.3
FOR TWOPATH
LATHES WITH ONE
SPINDLE
5.3.1
Machine Coordinate
System
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
In twopath lathes with one spindle, coordinate systems used for tool
posts 1 and 2 are the same as those for onepath lathes except that the
direction of the Xaxis is opposite in coordinate systems for tool post 2.
The following figure shows the machine coordinate system for tool post
2.
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck
Spindle
Tool post 2
+Z2
Machine zero point
+X2
50
B62444E1/04
5.3.2
System
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
OPERATION
In a workpiece coordinate system used for tool post 2, like in the machine
coordinate system for tool post 2, the direction of the Xaxis is opposite
edge of a workpiece
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck
Spindle
+Z2
coordinate system
+X2
Machine zero point

edge of the chuck
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck
Spindle

coordinate system
+X2
51
+Z2
Machine zero point
5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
5.3.3
Program Coordinate
System
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
In a twopath lathe with one spindle and two tool posts, a program
coordinate system used for tool post 2 is the same as that for tool post 1.
(1) When the program reference position is placed on the edge of a
workpiece
+X
Machine zero
point
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck
Spindle
+Z

coordinate system
(2) When the program reference position is placed on the edge of the
chuck
+X
Machine zero point
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck
Spindle
Origin of the workpiece coordinate

system, program reference position
52
+Z
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS
53
6.1
FORMAT OF
MACHINING
PROGRAM USED
FOR THE ONEPATH
LATHES
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
The format of machining programs created using the conversational

automatic programming function is different from that of NCformat
machining programs.
An NCformat machining program consists of NC block instructions in
which G codes, axisaddress data, and miscellaneous functions are
combined. An NC block instruction corresponds to an NC operation.
A conversational machining program consists of processes. A process
here refers to a set of machining operations using one tool. The process
contains process data, such as a tool to be used and cutting conditions, and
figure data including the figure of a machined product. NC data necessary
for machining is automatically generated from the process and figure
data.
NCformat machining programs and conversational machining
programs are stored separately as shown below.
Part program
storage
Conversational
machining
programs
A program is stored by each process block

(it corresponds to a tape length of about
0.76 m, 30 inches).
NCformat
machining
programs
A program is stored by each character (it

corresponds to a tape length of about 2.54
mm, 0.1 inches).
The storage capacity assigned to machining programs is determined

according to the length of the optional tape attached. Setting parameter
No. 9770 (NMEM0 to NMEM4) sets the ratio of the storage capacity used
for NCformat and conversational machining programs.
54
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
6.2
FORMAT OF
MACHINING
PROGRAM USED
FOR THE TWOPATH
LATHES
In the Twopath lathes, an NCformat machining program is created

separately for each tool post, tool post 1 or 2, and is stored. Each
NCformat machining program is totally independent.
In a conversational machining program, each machining process is
created separately for tool post 1 or 2. However, processes for both tool
posts are combined and stored as a one machining program. When a
certain conversational machining program is selected, a workpiece is
machined within the processes specified in the program for tool posts 1
and 2. Different machining programs cannot be executed for the two tool
posts.
The following figure shows how a conversational machining program is
executed.
Conversational machining
program
Processes to be executed
with tool post 1
Process 1: Machining the
outer surface of
a bar

outer surface of
a bar with tool
post 1
Process 2: Grooving on an
outer surface
with tool post 1
Process 2: Grooving on an
outer surface
The processes
are classified
by the tool post
used.
Process 3: Threading on an
outer surface
Process 3: Threading on an
outer surface
with tool post 1
Processes to be executed
with tool post 2

end face of a
bar with tool
post 2

end face of a
bar
Process 5: Drilling
Process 5: Drilling with tool

post 2
Process 6: Tapping
Process 6: Tapping with

tool post 2
Process 4 with
an endfacing
tool #2
Process 6
with a tap
#2
""""
""""
""
"""""
"
""""
""
""""""""
"""""
"
""""""""
"""""""
"""""
""
"""""""
""""
"""""
""
""""
""""
Process 2
with a
grooving
tool #1
Process 5
with a drill
#2
Workpiece to be
machined
55
Process 1
with a tool
used for
machining
an outer
surface
#1
Process
3 with a
threading
tool #1
6.3
SELECTING THE
CONVERSATIONAL
MODE
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Select the conversational mode before creating a machining program

using the conversational automatic programming function.
To enter the conversational mode, use the Conversation button on the
machine operators panel by referring to the operators manual issued by
the machine tool builder or use the [CAPI] soft key on the program
screen in the NC as follows:
(1) Select the EDIT mode by using the mode switch on the machine
operators panel.
(2) Press the PRGRM function button to display the NCformat
program screen.
(3) Press the [CAPI] soft key to enter the conversational mode. Then
the main menu for the conversational function appears.
[CAP:HEADL]
FANUC Super CAP

DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PROGRAM

TOOL,CUTTING CONDITION DATA
TOOL OFFSET DATA
EDIT NC PROGRAM
POSIION
EDIT
MODE
END
MEM
MODE
1 2
MEM
MODE
3 4
MEM
MODE
14:04:48
5 6 7
MEM
(4) To return from the conversational input mode to the NCformat

mode in the main menu, change the mode to the EDIT mode and
press the [END] soft key.
NOTE
1 At the top right corner of the screen displayed by the
conversational function, [CAP:HEADL]/[CAP:HEADR]
(twopath lathe) or [CAP] (onepath lathe) is displayed.
2 At the bottom right corner of the screen, the current time and
current mode are displayed.
56
6.4
CREATING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM
6.4.1
Entering the Number
and Name of a
Program
Example)
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Press the [1] soft key to create a new machining program on the main
menu.
A number and name can be specified for a machining program using the
conversational automatic programming function.
When entering the DEMONSTRATION program with number 210

(1) (PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM)
210
INPUT
DEMONSTRAION
INPUT
PREP A NEW PROCESSING PROGRAM

[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0210
NAME = DEMONSTRATION
INITAL SET MATERIAL
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
SOFTKE
TURRET_BE_OT
SOFTKEY
<
FC25
MATERIAL
FCD45
SS41
S45C
SKD11
SUS304
AL
PLOT
NOTE
1 Up to 20 characters can be used for the name of a program.
2 The PRODLNG data item is displayed only when the
conversational function for twoturret lathes with two
opposing spindles or lathes with a subspindle is used.
3 The displayed workpiece materials vary with the machine
tool builder. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.
57
6.5
INITIAL SETTINGS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Initial settings are commonly used in a conversational machining

program.
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0120
NAME = MSTU
INITAL SET MATERIAL
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
SOFTKE
TURRET_BE_OT
SOFTKEY
<
FC25
MATERIAL
FCD45
SS41
S45C
SKD11
SUS304
AL
PLOT
The data for the machining program created immediately before the
current program is automatically copied to initial setting items.
6.5.1
Details of Settings
MATERIAL (workpiece material) : Material to be machined.

A
material is chosen from either eight
or 24 types of materials. When it is
chosen from 24 types, press the [+]
rightmost soft key to display the
ninth and subsequent materials.
Set the workpiece material with the
parameter.
SHAPE (shape of a workpiece) : Figure of the workpiece to be
machined. Choose either a blank
rod or a blank plate.
BAR
RGH
SHAPE
BAR:Blank rods or blanks having a rounded portion

RGH SHAPE : Casting or material for casting
NOTE
When the workpiece material is changed on the initial
setting screen for an existing machining program, all cutting
condition data in the machining program is automatically
replaced by newly calculated data corresponding to the new
material.
Similarly, when the workpiece figure is changed,
corresponding data in the machining program, such as the
start point for cutting, is calculated again.
58
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
The selection of the workpiece figure, for either blank rods or blank
plates, determines the subordinate input data items for blank dimensions.
(1) When BAR is selected as the workpiece figure
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0120
NAME = MSTU
INITAL SET MATERIAL
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
###
###
###
L
OUTSIDE DIA
< DELETE INSERT
P R OWINDOW PROCES
GRAM
ON/OFF EDIT
END
MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL

DATA
PLOT
OUTDIA (maximum diameter) : Outer diameter of the blank

INDIA (minimum diameter)
: Inner diameter of the blank
WORKLNG
: Length of the blank
Outer diameter
of the blank (D)
Inner diameter
of the blank (H)
Length of the blank (L)
59
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(2) When RGH SHAPE is selected as the workpiece figure

To specify the figure of a blank plate, enter the coordinates of up to 12
points for each of the outer and inner surfaces of the figure in the program
coordinate system.
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0120
NAME = MSTU
INITAL SET MATERIAL
MAXS COOLANT
FC25RGH SHAPE 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
OUTSIDEPX1
Z1
X2
Z2
X3
Z3
#####
#####
#####
#####
1
3 4
5
9 10
78
OUTSIDE PX1
< DELETE INSERT
FIGURE
WINDOW PROCES
END
ON/OFF EDIT
Points on the outer surface X1 :

Z1 :
X12 :
Z12 :
Points on the inner surface X1 :
Z1 :
X12 :
Z12 :
MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL

DATA
PLOT
11
12
X and Z coordinates of points on the outer

surface in the program coordinate system
X and Z coordinates of points on the inner

surface in the program coordinate system
NOTE
Enter the coordinates of necessary positions on both the
outer and inner surfaces. Enter coordinates of three points
in a line. When the cursor moves to the next line, new data
items for three points appear.
After data is entered for the necessary points on the outer
surface, press the [FIGURE END] soft key to display the
data items for points on the inner surface.
After data is entered to points on the inner surface, press the
[FIGURE END] soft key.
Pressing the [DELETE] soft key deletes all the data which
is on the line the cursor points out.
Pressing the [INSERT] soft key creates a new data entry line
for three points immediately after the line the cursor points
out.
60
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Points on the outer surface

Coordinates of point (1) = (X1, Z1)
Example) Crosssection of molding material

#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Points on the inner surface

(8)
(12)
(10)
(11)
(9)

(on the edge of a workpiece)
Figure for checking

the outside claw
Program reference position (on the edge of the chuck)
61
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
MAXS (maximum spindle speed) : Maximum spindle speed under

constant surfacespeed control
COOLANT
: Coolant commonly used in this machining
program. Select the appropriate coolant using the
following soft keys.
ON
OFF
Initial value of coolant data for each processes is automatically determined by this setting.
FINISHING X/Z (finishing allowance X/Z) : Finishing allowance in the

Xaxis (diameter) and Zaxis direction
END REMOVAL (end face of a workpiece) : Machining allowance at end
facing
Degree of cutting at
the end face
(such as mill scale)

(on the edge of a workpiece)
Program reference position (on the edge of the chuck)
PRODLNG (length of a product) :
Length of a finished product
Endfacing allowance for tool post 2 is obtained by subtracting (end face

of a workpiece) and (length of a product) from (length of a workpiece).
Length of a finished product is effective only when twopath lathes with
two opposing spindles and lathe with subspindles are used.
62
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
WARNING
After you enter or copy the initialization data, make sure that all data is correct.
Material
: Select the same material as the actual workpiece from the material
menu. If the desired material is not on the menu, discontinue
machining the workpiece. If an incorrect material is selected, or an
incorrect cutting condition is used, the tool may be damaged, and
even injuries may occur.
Shape, outer blank surface, inner blank surface, blank length,
and molding outside/inside diameter points
: Enter the correct data that matches the actual workpiece. If
incorrect data is entered, the tool may bump against the workpiece,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even
injuries.
Maximum rotation speed : For the machine spindle, workpiece, and workpiece fastening jig, do
not specify data higher than the maximum rotation speed allowed
for them.
Running the machine with incorrect data may allow the workpiece
and/or jig to come off by centrifugal force, possibly causing damage
to the machine, and even injuries.
Coolant
: Set coolant selection to ON as required. If it is set to OFF when a
coolant is necessary, the tool may be damaged, and even injuries
may occur.
Finishing allowance X/Z : Enter the finishing allowance data that assures safe finishing work
for cutting. If incorrect data is entered, finishing may result in
damage to the tool, and even injuries.
Endsurface allowance : Be sure to enter the same endsurface allowance data as that for
the actual workpiece.
If incorrect data is entered, the tool may bump against the
workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine,
and even injuries.
Product length
: For a twopath lathe with two facing spindles or a lathe with a
subspindle, enter the same data as the length of the actual product.
If incorrect data is entered, the tool may bump against the
workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine,
and even injuries.
63
6.5.2
Operation for Initial
Settings
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(1) Entering or changing data

Press the soft key corresponding to the desired menu. For some
menus, the guidance is shown on the window.
Use the numeric keys and the INPUT key to enter data.
(2) Terminating the initial setting entry
After entering all the necessary data for a certain initial setting, press
the INPUT key or cursor key several times to move the cursor to the
next initial setting line.
Then a new process is created. The following soft key menu for
selecting processes and the window for guidance appear on the
screen.
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. = 0120
NAME = MSTU
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA
INDIA WORKLNG MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000 2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZ EREMOVL PRODLNG
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
PROC (01)
1=BAR
2=PT.RPT
3=RESID.
4=FACING
5=THREAD
6=GROOVE
7=NECK
8=CENTER
9=DRILL
10=TAP
SOFTKEY
<
1
BAR
MACHINING
2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THREAD
64
6
7
8
9
GROOVE NECK CENTER DRILL
10
TAP
B62444E1/04
6.6
PROCESS DATA
SCREEN
OPERATION
A machining program consists of several processes, or units of

machining.
Process data, such as the type of machining, tools to be used, and cutting
conditions, is set and displayed on the process data screen.
Data which must be set in this screen depends on the type of machining
in the process. For details, see Part III, Types of machining programs.
NOTE
Process data for a twopath lathe contains the process data
for a onepath lathe and the items (units) for selecting a tool
post.
WARNING
No check is made on whether the machining sequence is
correct. For example, even if you program tapping without
preparing a hole, or finishing without roughing, the machine
runs according to the programmed machining sequence.
For this reason, when creating a machining program using a
conversational function, be sure to confirm that the machine
runs in the correct sequence.
If the machining sequence is incorrect, the tool may bump
against the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the
tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
WARNING
When process data is entered, tool and cutting condition data
is determined automatically according to the selected
machining type and area. Be sure to check that the
automatically determined data is correct.
If the data is incorrect, correct it.
If the tool and cutting condition data is incorrect, the tool may
bump against the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
65
6.6.1
Operation for the
Process Data Screen
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(1) Entering or changing data

Use the soft key to select the menu. Use the numeric keys and
INPUT key to enter data.
(2) Automatic determination of tools to be used and cutting conditions
Tools to be used and cutting conditions are automatically
determined and displayed on the screen by only entering the type of
machining and the area to be machined.
The functions for automatically determining tools and cutting
conditions depend on the type of machining. For details, see Part III,
Types of machining programs.
(3) Terminating data input
After all the necessary data is entered on the process data screen,
follow the step below according to the type of machining.
(a) When the type of machining is set to end facing, turning and
drilling, miscellaneous machining, subcall or M.
After all the necessary data is entered, if data is to be entered for
the next process, move the cursor to the next line with the cursor
key.
This operation creates an empty process. The menu for selecting
a machining type is displayed in the soft key field.
To return to the main menu screen once program creation has been
completed, press the [PROGRAM END] or [ ] soft key.
(b) When the type of machining is set to machining other than that in
(a)
Move the cursor to the next line with the cursor key to specify
figure data. Then the figure data screen described in 6.5 appears.
66
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(4) Soft keys

The following soft keys are displayed when the cursor is positioned
at the process data items.
<
DELETE INSERT PRGRM WINDOW PROCES

END
OFF
EDIT
[DELETE]
EXEC REALLY?
CANCEL
MCHNC TOOL DETAIL PLOT

D
DATA
: Deletes the current process. Pressing this soft

key displays the following confirmation
message and soft keys.
YES:[EXEC] NO:[CANCEL]
EXEC
Pressing the [EXEC] soft key deletes the process. Pressing the
[CANCEL] key cancels the deletion and returns to the previous state.
[PRGRM END]
[WINDOW OFF]
[PROCES EDIT]
[MCHNC]
[TOOLD]
[DETAIL DATA]
[PLOT]
67
: Terminates the creation of the program and

returns to the main menu.
: Suppresses the window guidance. Pressing
this soft key changes the key to the [WINDOW
ON] soft key. Pressing the [WINDOW ON]
soft key displays the window guidance.
: Displays the process directory screen.
: Displays the cutting condition data screen.
: Displays the registeredtool directory screen.
: Displays all the data used in the process.
: Displays figures of a workpiece in all the
processes of the machining program.
6.7
FIGURE DATA
SCREEN
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
All processes, except for end facing, turning and drilling, miscellaneous
machining, and subcall processes consist of process data (explained in
the previous section) and figure data.
The figure data screen is used to enter and display figure data required for
each type of machining.
Data to be entered on the figure data screen differs according to the type
of machining performed in the process. For details, see the explanation
of machining programs in III.
6.7.1
Operation on the
Contour Data Screen
For the figure data used in bar machining, pattern repeating, Caxis
notching, Caxis cylindrical machining, and Yaxis milling machining
specify the final figure.
Enter necessary data, such as intersections and contact points which are
automatically calculated while a contour is displayed on the screen.
(1) Entering coordinates of the start point.
50
INPUT
(START POINT X)
INPUT
(START POINT Z)
[INSERT]
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. = 1234
NAME =DEMONSTRATION
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA
INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REVCUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPDFEED/REV TCODE
5
102
80
0.25
0101
CONTR FORM(START PPOINT)
START POINT X
START POINT Z
X= 50.000
Z= 0.000
START POINT X
CANCEL
68
INSERT TOOL DETAIL PLOT

D
DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(2) Selecting a figure

A menu of figures appears on the lower part of the screen. Select a
figure by pressing the corresponding soft key.
<
CHAMFR
<
TANGNT
PLOT
FIGURE PLOT
END
ROUND
(3) Entering contour data

When a figure has been selected, the window guidance for entering
contour figure data appears as shown below. Enter the data that is
designated on the drawing.
Position the cursor at the item for specifying the angle, then enter the
following:
30
INPUT (angle of the diagonal line)
[INSERT]
CONTR FORM(TAPER LINE)

DIRECTION
B=
TAPER END X CORD. X=

TAPER END Z CORD. Z=
COMPONENT X
I=
COMPONENT Z/ANGLE K/J=30.000
LENGTH
Q=
ROUGHNESS(1 10 ) SR=4
LENGTH
CANCEL
INSERT TOOL DETAIL PLOT

D
DATA
(4) Displaying the figure data screen

When contour data is entered as mentioned above, the intersections
and other necessary data are calculated automatically and displayed
on the screen.
Repeat the above operation until all the data necessary for the
process is entered. Then press the [FIGURE END] soft key.
69
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
WARNING
When entering contour data, make sure that the specified
shape is the one that can be machined according to the
machining type and area selected as the process data.
If an incorrect shape is specified, the tool may bump against
the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to
the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
CAUTION
After contour data is entered, make sure that the coordinates
and arc radius of each specified shape are correct; the
specified shape can be displayed graphically. It is especially
necessary to make sure that the data automatically calculated
using a conversational function is definitely correct.
If the data is incorrect, it is impossible to create a correct
product.
6.7.2
Operation for Data
other than Contour
Data on the Figure
Data Screen
For figure data used in machining except for bar machining, pattern
repeating, Caxis notching, Caxis cylindrical machining, and Yaxis
milling machining specify the reference position or start point, and the
end point that are required for machining.
Use the numeric keys and the INPUT key to enter data.
Example) Figure data screen for threading
Move the cursor to the next line in the process data. After displaying the
figure data, enter the following:
100
INPUT
(START POINT X)
INPUT
(START POINT Z)
100
INPUT
(END POINT X)
50
INPUT
(END POINT Z)
[FIGURE END]
70
B62444E1/04
PROC (03)
THREADING
OPERATION
AREA
HEAD THRDTYPE THRDANGL CUTMETHD
OUTER
HEADL
GENERL
60 AMNTSNGL
TOOLNO CUTSPD CUTDPTH CHAMFER
251
80
0.200
ON
STATX
STATZ
ENDX
ENDX
100.000
0.000
100.000
LEAD
1.000
TCODE
0101
END POINT Z
<
DELETE INSERT FIGURE WINDOW PROCES

END
OFF
EDIT
MCHNC TOOL DETAIL PLOT

D
DATA
NOTE
When contour data is entered for bar machining, edit keys,
such as the INSERT key, need to be pressed for every
figure. However, for data entry on the above figure data
screen, only the numeric keys and the INPUT key are used.
After all the figure data for the process is entered, press the [FIGURE
END] soft key.
Pressing the [FIGURE END] soft key creates the next process
automatically. Enter the type of machining in the next process. If the next
process is unnecessary, press the [PRGRM END] soft key or the leftmost
soft key to return to the main menu.
Automatically created processes do not need to be deleted.
WARNING
After figure data is entered, make sure that the specified shape
is the one that can be machined according to the machining
type and area selected as the process data.
If an incorrect shape is specified, the tool may bump against
the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to
CAUTION
After figure data is entered, make sure that the coordinates
and arc radius of each specified shape are correct; the
specified shape is displayed graphically by pressing the
[PLOT] soft key.
If the data is incorrect, it is impossible to create a correct
product.
71
6.8
CREATING A NEW
PROGRAM USING
OTHER PROGRAMS
6.8.1
Registeredprogram
Directory Screen for
Editing
6.8.2
Copying a Program
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Based on an existing machining program, a new machining program can

be created with some modifications to the existing program.
Press the [2] soft key on the main menu to display the registeredprogram
directory screen
On the registered program directory screen, used for editing a machining

program, enter the number of the machining program to be copied.
Alternatively, position the cursor to the program number and press the
[COPY] key.
Before copying the program, be sure to check that the memory protect
switch on the the machine operators panel is set to the release position.
Example)
Copying the machining program with program number 210

210
[COPY]
*** PROGRAM MENU ***
(REST NO.OF PROGRAM 16 PCS.)

(REST NO.OF PROCES 128 PCS.)
PRG.NO
NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
0025 DEMONSTRATION
5M51S
1993/11/24 09:24
PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC(01)
PROC(01)
PROC(02)
[CAP.:HEADL]
MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
SFTKEY
FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER END
BAR
OUTER END
DRILLING
HEADL
HEADL
HEADL
CANCEL
ROUGH
FIN
T0505
T0505
T0202
EXEC
Enter a program number for a program to be created. Press the [EXEC]

soft key. The new machining program is then created.
To stop copying, press the [CANCEL] key.
The initial setting screen for the new machining program appears. Modify
the machining program in the same way as editing machining programs
explained in Section 6.8.
72
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS
CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS
73
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
7.1
CHECKING INPUT
FIGURES
7.1.1
Registeredprogram
Editing
7.1.2
Specifying the
Program to be Edited
On the main menu screen, press the [2] soft key to call the
registeredprogram directory screen for editing.
On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, enter the number

of the desired machining program using numeric keys. Alternatively,
move the cursor to the program number. Then press the [EDIT] soft key.
However, be sure to check that the memory protect switch on the machine
operators panel has been locked.
7.1.3
Displaying the
Contents of the
Machining Program
(1) Checking the data

By performing the operation described in the section above, the
initial setting screen of the selected machining program appears on
the display.
Press the page key to check the contents of the machining program.
Pressing this key displays the contents one after another.
(2) Checking all product figures
Pressing the [PLOT] key on the program directory screen draws, in
a window, the product figures for all machining processes included
in the machining program, together with the corresponding
workpiece figures. The above figures are drawn on the program
screen in the same way.
When the product figures are drawn, the final figures specified in the
machining program are displayed in the material figures using lines.
Since it is hard to see the figures, they are drawn according to
machining type as listed below.
Machining type
Description of drawing
BAR (bar machining)
The specified final contour is drawn with

straight lines and arcs.
PT.RPT (pattern repeating)

straight lines and arcs.
RESID. (residual machining)
The residual is drawn using straight lines based

on the start and end point data of the residual
specified by the figure data.
FACING (end facing)
The machined end is drawn with straight lines.
THREAD (threading)
The portion to be threaded is drawn with two

lines indicating the top and bottom of the
thread.
GROOVE (grooving)
The cross section of the groove is drawn with

straight lines.
74
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
Machining type
Description of drawing
NECK (necking)
The corners to be necked are drawn with arcs.
CENTER (center drilling)
The sectional hole figure is drawn with straight

lines based on nominal diameter and cutting
edge angle data registered in the tool file.
DRILL (drilling)

TAP (tapping)

SINGL (single action)
Nothing is displayed on the final figure drawing

screen.
CA.SUB (calling subprograms)

CCENT (Caxis center
drilling)
CDRIL (Caxis drilling)
In the front view of the material, a hole on the

end face is drawn with a nominal diameter
circle and a hole on the side face is drawn with
circle,
a rectangle.
CTAP (Caxis tapping)

CGROV (Caxis grooving) The groove figure is drawn in the front view of
the material.
The figure of a fixedform groove on the end
face is drawn as it is machined while a straight
line is drawn between the grooving start and
end positions for an unfixedform groove.
CNOTC (Caxis
notching)

straight lines and arcs in the front view of the
material.
CCYL. (Caxis
cylindrical machining)

straight lines and arcs in the development drawing of the cylindrical section of the material.
YMIL. (Yaxis milling)
The specified final contour is drawn with lines

and arcs.
AUX (auxiliary process)
Noting is displayed on the final figure drawing

screen
screen.
TRANS process (only for

twopath lathes)
75
OPERATION
B62444E1/04

NO. = 0194
NAME =
PROC (02)
TRANS.
PROC(03)
AREA
BAR (R) OUTER END
PROC (01)
AREA
BAR (R) OUTER END
START
CHAMFR
PRG11
*** PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE ***

X
SOFTKEY
CUTDPTH TCODE
8.000
0202
FEED/REV TCODE
0.20
0202
B=
X= 95.000
Z= 14.000
I=
K/J= 75.000
Q=
) SR=
5
FIG.TYPE
RETURN
7.1.4
Enlarging the Part of
the Contour
The contour entered on the figure data screen for bar machining or
suchlike is displayed and can be enlarged partially.
(1) Move the cursor to the desired figure.
(2) Press the rightmost [+] soft key until the following soft keys are
displayed. When these soft keys are displayed, the scale
magnification is displayed at the upper right of the screen.
< SCALE SCALE ENLARG
7.1.5
End of Checking
Machining Programs
NORM PROCES
EDIT
MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT

DATA
[SCALE ]
: Increases the contour display magnification.
[SCALE ]
: Decreases the contour display magnification.
[ENLARG]
: Draws the contour at the specified scale

magnification.
[NORM]
: Restores the scale magnification to that applied

before the enlargement (= 1.0).
After the contents of the machining program are checked, press the
leftmost [
] soft key.
The system returns to the main menu screen.
76
B62444E1/04
7.2
CHECKING
MACHINING
PROGRAMS USING
THE SIMULATION
OPERATION
Even if the machine is not actually operated, the machining tool path can
be displayed.
When this function is used, it is not necessary to operate the machine.
However, the requirements for starting the actual NC operation of the
machine must be met by the following: selecting the MEM mode with
the mode switch on the machine operators panel and releasing the start
lock and interlock.
WARNING
Even after machining simulation has made sure that the programmed tool path and machining
operation are correct, if actually used data such as the tool offset and work shift amount is
incorrect, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine (including the chuck and
tailstock), possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
For this reason, before starting actual machining, make sure that the tool will not bump against
the workpiece or machine, for example, by starting the machining program with sufficiently low
feedrate without attaching a workpiece to the machine.
WARNING
Machining simulation may cause data such as a work shift amount, tool tip radius/wear
compensation value, virtual tool tip direction data, tool exchange position (second reference
position data), chuck barrier data (second storedstroke limit data), and chuck/tailstock barrier
data (only when the relevant option is available) to be changed according to the machining
program subjected to machining simulation.
If another program (conversational machining program or a machining program in the form of NC
statements) runs under this condition, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
WARNING
In some cases, machining simulation may not cause data such as a work shift amount, tool tip
radius/wear compensation value, virtual tool tip direction data, tool exchange position (second
reference position data), chuck barrier data (second storedstroke limit data), and chuck/tailstock
barrier data (only when the relevant option is available) to be changed according to parameter
settings. For details, refer to the applicable manual supplied by respective the machine tool
builders.
Even in such cases, before running another program (conversational machining program or a
machining program in the form of NC statements), make sure that the data described above is
correct.
If the data is incorrect, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing
damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
77
7.2.1
Selecting a Machining
Program
(1) Display the main menu screen, then change the system to the MEM
mode.
(2) Press the [3] and [PROCESSING SIMULATION] soft keys. The
following registeredprogram directory screen for machining
simulation is displayed.
*** PROGRAM LIST ***
CAP.:HEADL
NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
DEMONSTRATION
5M51S 1993/11/24 09:24
PRG11
1M58S 1993/11/20 14:30
NECKING
3M22A 1993/10/30 10:15
PROGRAM NO.=
INITAL SET
PROC(01)
PROC(02)
PROC(03)
PROC(04)
PROC(05)
< TOOL
ING
B62444E1/04
Before checking a drawing, select a machining program created by

conversational programming by following the procedure described
below:
PRG.NO
0025
0194
1212
OPERATION
MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23
SOFTKEY
FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
ANIMA. ANIMA. RT.CH

+RT.CH
HEADL
HEADL
ROUGH
FIN
T0505
T0505
HEADR
HEADR
ROUGH
FIN
T0202
T0202
PREEX PROCES PLOT

EDIT
GUIDE +
(3) Enter the number of the program to be simulated. Alternatively,

move the cursor to the number of the program. Then press the
[ANIMA.], [ANIMA. + RT.CH], or [RT.CH] soft key.
[ANIMA.]
[ANIMA. + RT.CH]
[RT.CH]
: Displays the animated simulation of the

machining.
: Displays the animated simulation of the
machining and tool path.
: Displays only the tool path.
NOTE
The tool path of the Caxis and Yaxis machining cannot
be drawn if RT.CH is specified.
78
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
(4) To display the simulated drawing of a chuck or tail stock, press the
[PREEX] soft key. The setting screen before execution is
displayed. On the setting screen, enter the following data:
OUTPUT (Specified T code)
WSHIFT (INC) (Workpiece shift)
END REMOVAL
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO.
T:
SZ :
CZ :
C:
Need not be set

Need not be set
Automatically set.
Number on the chuck
figure screen
X, Z : Need not be set
TN : Number on the tail stock
figure screen
After entering these necessary data, press the [RETURN] soft key. The
system returns to the registeredprogram directory screen. Then follow
the procedure described in (3) above.
79
7.2.2
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
When the [ANIMA.], [ANIMA + RT.CH], or [RT.CH] key is pressed, the

following simulation screen is displayed:
Simulating Machining
O1209 P0001
X1 20.000
Z1 10.000
C1
0.000
X1
X2
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G01
Z2
0.000
0.000
0.000
0M00S
20.0
500%
<
SPEED SPEED
UP
DOWN
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G01
X
Z
C
X
Z
C
0M00S
20.0
MEM ****
PLOT
X2 30.000
Z2 20.000
C2 90.000
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
[SINGLE STEP]
***
***
0.000
0.000
0.000
15: 26: 21
WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE

PIECE
STEP
: Causes a singleblock stop while continuous

simulation is being executed.
Or, starts
singleblock simulation.
[EXEC]
: Starts the ordinary simulation drawing.
[PROCES]
: Starts simulating the machining in units of
processes.
The output of M01 causes a
singleblock stop. (To output M01 at the end of
each process, set bit 4 (M01OUT) of parameter
9774 to 1.)
[WORKPIECE] : Clears the current simulation drawing and
redisplays the initial workpiece figure.
[HEAD]
: Searches for the beginning of a machining
program and initializes the graphic drawing.
[PROG ON/OFF] : Displays or deletes a converted NC program
during NC program conversion.
[PLOT]
: Draws the final product figure over the workpiece
figure.
[SPEED DOWN] : Reduces the drawing speed.
[SPEED UP]
: Increases the drawing speed.
80
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
The above soft keys are valid only during machining simulation.
Animated drawings showing the actual machining status can also be
displayed during machining (drawing during machining). To do this,
press the GRAPH key to display the screen illustrated above, then start
the machining.
When display of this machining simulation screen was selected from the
main menu screen of the conversational function, press the [ ] key to
return to the main menu screen.
NOTE
1 If the [RT.CH] key is pressed, the [PROG ON/OFF]/[PLOT]
[SPEED DOWN]/[SPEED UP] soft keys are not displayed.
2 The drawing speed can be increased only during machining
simulation. In drawing during machining, the conventional
method is applied.
If the actual tool travels at high speed while drawing during
machining is being executed, the drawing may not be
performed at the same speed, resulting in the drawing being
incorrect.
3 The screen cannot be switched during machining
simulation. If an attempt is made to switch the screen,
machining simulation is stopped and cannot be resumed.
4 To use the soft keys described above, set both bit 4 (CSF)
and bit 6 (NZM) of parameter 6500 to 1.
Set bit 3 (DPA) of parameter 6500 to 0.
To use the machining simulation drawing function, set bit 0
(HSA) of parameter 6502 to 1.
While an NC program is being converted, the NC program is displayed

as shown below.
81
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Sample of screen displayed during NC program conversion)

NXT G00
X 0.000
Z
Z 55. 900
C 0. 000
O0002
G01Z49. 9F0.5;
X159.5Z 49.9;
X160.;
G00Z6.;
0M23S
500%
SPEED
UP
MEM
SPEED
DOWN
PLOT
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
STRT
***
***
WORK
PROCES
PIECE
11:31:35
EXEC
EDIT
SINGLE
STEP
NOTE
1 When the NC program is displayed as shown above, it may
not be possible to display part of a long block in the frame.
2 For Super CAP II T, [SPEED UP] and [SPEED DOWN] are
not displayed.
3 Do not press [HEAD] during conversion to an NC format
program. Otherwise, ordinary simulation is performed
instead of machining simulation even if [EXEC] is pressed.
82
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
7.2.3
Enlarging a Figure and
Displaying Other
Screens
(1) Enlarging a figure

While the soft keys, described in the previous section, are displayed,
press the [+] key. The [ENLARG] key is displayed.
Press the [ENLARG] soft key. The following soft keys are
displayed. The coordinates of the screen center and scale
magnification are also displayed on the lefthand side of the screen.
Coordinates of the
screen center
Scale magnification
X=
0.000
Z= 125.523
S=
0.60
<
NORMAL SCAL
SCAL
CURSOR KEYS
CAN
EXEC
[EXEC]
: Draws the figure with the new scale magnification

and the new coordinates of the screen center.
[CAN]
: Cancels the scale magnification and the
coordinates of the screen center, modified on this
screen.
[SCAL]
: Reduces the scale magnification.
[SCAL]
: Increases the scale magnification.
[NORMAL]
: Sets the scale magnification and coordinates of the
screen center to the standard values and draws the
figure by applying these standard values.
Cursor keys : Move the screen center.
On the figure enlargement screen, specify a new scale magnification and
new coordinates for the screen center. Press the [+] key, then press the
[OPRT] key. The original simulation soft keys are displayed. Then, start
the new machining simulation.
83
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
NOTE
1 If increasing the scale magnification or modifying the
coordinates of the screen center causes the workpiece to
exceed the range of the screen, the machining simulation
may not be executed normally.
2 If increasing the scale magnification causes the
corresponding tool to be enlarged, the tool may not be
displayed normally or cutting simulation may not be
performed normally.
(2) Displaying other screens
Press the [+] key several times. The following soft keys are
displayed.
<
G.PRM A.PRM GRAPH
[OPRT]
OPRT
: Redisplays the machining simulation soft keys,

described in Section 7.2.2.
: Displays the graphic parameter screen.
: Displays the animation parameter screen.
[GPRM]
[A.PRM]
NOTE
When the conversational function is used, no operations
need be performed using the graphic parameter screen or
the animation parameter screen. For details, see the
operators manual of the NC function.
[GRAPH]
: Displays the following soft keys. Once the

simulation drawing has been completed, press the
soft key corresponding to the desired screen. The
selected screen is displayed.
<
SIDE
FRONT
OPEN
OPRT
SIDE
: Displays the simulated turning.
FRONT : Displays the simulated Caxis machining or Yaxis end
facing (drilling, milling), except Caxis cylindricalsurface
machining.
OPEN : Displays the simulated Caxis cylindricalsurface
machining.
84
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
7.3
SIMULATION OF
YAXIS MACHINING
7.3.1
Simulation of Yaxis
Machining by a
Onepath Lathe
If the Yaxis machining function is supported, the following machining

simulation screen is displayed:
01209 P0005
X
30.000
Z 20.000
C
90.000
Y 10.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000
20.0
500%
MEM **** *** ***
< SPEED SPEED PLOT

DOWN
UP
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
15:26:21

STEP
PIECE
(FS16/18TB)
Simulated turning is displayed on the left half of the screen. Simulated

Yaxis side facing is displayed on the right half of the screen.
If Yaxis side facing is executed, the machining statuses on the four faces
determined by the orientation of the Caxis can be displayed
simultaneously.
Example)
Y
Drawing coordinate system for

Yaxis side facing
X
Z
C
85
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
If movement about the Caxis is specified for Yaxis side facing, the
machining face is switched. The machining faces need not meet at right
angles as shown above. Five or more faces can be machined. The
machining statuses for the fifth and subsequent faces, however, cannot be
displayed together with the statuses of the first four faces. For example,
the machining status for the fifth face is drawn after the status displayed
for above has been erased.
When Yaxis end facing is simulated, the end face of the workpiece is
drawn in the same way as when Caxis end facing is simulated.
7.3.2
Simulation of Yaxis
Machining by a
Twopath Lathe
When the Yaxis machining function is added to a twopath lathe, the

following machining simulation screen is displayed:
01209 P0005
X1
X1 20.000
Z1 10.000
C1
0.000
Y1
5.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
Z10.000
C
Y
0.000
X2
Z2
0M55S
20.0
MEM **** *** ***
1M25S
20.0
500%
< SPEED SPEED PLOT
DOWN
UP
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
X2 30.000
Z2 20.000
C2 90.000
Y2 10.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000
15:26:21

STEP
PIECE
(FS16/18TB)
Simulated Yaxis side facing is displayed at the top of the screen. If a

twopath lathe is used, the status of the latest Yaxis side facing is
displayed for each tool post.
NOTE
1 The field of the simulated Yaxis side facing is limited to an
area around the center of the workpiece. If the tool is moved
toward the upper or lower end of the workpiece, the tool will
not be displayed.
2 If machining is continued with an identical angular
displacement about the Caxis, but with different tools, the
tools are drawn using different colors.
3 To simulate Yaxis machining, set bit 0 (HSA) and bit 1
(GRY) of parameter 6502 to 1.
86
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
7.4
OFFSET DATA SAVE
AND RESTORE
FUNCTION
7.4.1
On Super CAP T, the under mentiond data are memorized at each CAP
programs. And these NC data are automatically rewritten when Direct
operation of CAP program or Convert to NC program or Processing
simulation are execution selected.
(1) Work shift amount
(2) Geometry and wear offset of nose R and direction of imaginary nose.
(3) Tool change position (the second reference position data)
(4) Chuck barrier data (the second stored stroke limit data)
(5) Chuck and tail stock barrier data (only this option is added)
Generals
Therefore, when the drive of NC program is interrupted and Processing

simulation or Direct operation of CAP program or Convert to NC
program is done, the above mentiond data will be rewr itten. In this case,
there is possibility interfere the tool because refer to rewritten offset data.
By setting of parameter, the offset data is prevented from changing before
and after the only machining simulation.
7.4.2
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
9766
OSV
LGC
#1
#0
0 : It is overwritten the offset data when CAP program is execution

selected.
1 : It is saved and restored of the offset data when CAP program is
exection selected in Processing simulation mode.
#7
5002
#2
OSV
#6
#5
LGC
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
0 : Tool geometry compensation is not canceled by offset number 0.

1 : Tool geometry compensation is canceled by offset number 0.
*Always set this bit to 1.
87
7.4.3
Details
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
When the parameter described in 7.4.2 is set to 1, the following processing

will be done.
(1) Following data are saved, rewritten, restored when Processing
simulation is executed.
Save/ restore Nose R offset (geometry, wear) imaginary nose
direction, tool geometry offset, tool wear offset.
Nose R offset (geometry, wear) imaginary nose
direction tool offset (geometry, wear)
(temporary value) .
Rewrite
(2) The data are saved and restored only when Processing simulation is
executed. And the data are not saved and restored when Direct
operation of CAP program, Convert to NC program are executed.
(3) The data are saved at biginning of each process, and restored at
ending of each process.
(4) During offset data save, and RESET is occured, the data are restored
immedeitely. And power off is occured, the data will be restored at
next power on. If P/ S alarm is occuerrd, the data are not restored.
(because, RESET signal is not turn on)
(5) For distinguish Processing simulation from the others, the condition
that is able to start is limited. The executing program is selected in
Processing simulation mode, it becomes P/ S alarm 3014 when the
program starts in Direct operation of CAP program mode. And also
when the executing program is selected in Direct operation of CAP
program mode, it becomes P/ S alarm 3014 when the program start
in Processing simulation mode.
Information of selecting condition is displayed on the right of the
screen.
(6) When offset data save restore function is effecive, the geometry and
wear offset data are written in to the temporary value 0. Therfore, it
dose not display the tool wear/ geometry offset data in tooling data
screen of Processing simulation mode.
88
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
7.4.4
Execution Selection
State Display
When offset data save restore function is effecive, the condition that is
able to start is limited. For understand easily, information of selecting
condition is displayed on the right of the screen.
SIMU [CAP. HEAD L]
Execution selection state
(1) Selection mode displaying.

It depends on the program selection screen whether offset data are
saved and restored or not. The state being selected now (selection
mode) is displayed by the character.
SIMU Processing simulation mode
(The offset data are saved and restored)
DRCT Direct operation of CAP program mode
(The offset data are not saved and restored)
CONV Convert into NC program
(The offset data are not saved and restored)
These selection mode are changed by pressing soft key in the main
menu 3 [Processing simulation] , 4 [Direct operation of CAP
program] 5 [Convert into CAP program] .
(2) Program selection state displaying
When offset data save and restore function is effective, it is
neccessary select the execute program. Whether the program is
selected in current is displaying by the reverse color.
Red
It isnt selected the executing program in current selection mode.
Under this condition, it is impossible to start both Processing
simulation and machine drive. (it will be became P/S 3014
program is not selected) Please select the executing program in
current selection mode.
Green
Already selected the executing program in current selection mode.
It is possible to start program execution. However, under this
condition, only be able to start animation in Processing
simulation, and able to machine start in Dirrect operation CAP
program. If the executing program is selected in Processing
simulation mode, and start the direct drive, it will be became P/S
3014. Same way, if the executing program is selected in Direct
drive mode and start the animation, it will be became P/S 3014.
In Convert into NC program mode, it is possible to start both
animation and direct driving.
89
7.4.5
Tool Changing Position
Temporary Setting
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Tool changing position is fixed to the following temporary position which

is not related to the NC parameter No. 1241 (the second reference
position) .
In case of program zero point is workpiece end
X material length +100
Z 150
(when unit is inch, +10)

(when unit is inch, 15)
In case of program zero point is chuck end

Z material diameter +150
7.4.6
Alternation of G30
Command in Macro
Program
Example)

In the machining macro program, when Offset data save restore function
is effective and only execute Processing simulation, the program
commands G00 instead of G30 to display the tool at fixed position
however absolute and machine coordinates are any value. Therefore, if
Offset data save restore function is used, the machine tool builders
original macro program will be changed in case of G30 is in the macro
program.
G30 U0 V0 G00 X (material outer diameter +100) Z150
If the change is necessary, please replace the part of calling G30 command
with the subroutine which shows in the follows. Command order of axis,
simultaneous axis number etc. follows G30 command which is replaced
G00 command ( see machining macro program O0450 O0455, O0460)
Command value of each axis in G00 is in order to inputting unit and
program zero point.
In case of program zero point is workpiece end
Z 150

(when unit is inch, 15)
In case of program zero point is chuck end

Z material diameter +150
90

OPERATION
B62444E1/04
7.5
MACHINING
SIMULATION BASED
ON A SOLID MODEL
(SUPER CAP II T)
7.5.1
With the Super CAP II T, it is possible to perform cutting simulation for

turning, using a solid model. After simulation, the display of the
simulated cut product can be rotated.
It is also possible to make a line drawing of a tool trajectory on the
C/Yaxis simulation screen, using an isometric projection method.
Cutting simulation for turning uses a solid model. To display how the
inner surface is machined, a quarter of the periphery of the display is cut
out.
Simulating a Cutting
Operation Based on a
Solid Model
The chuck and tailstock are displayed in a similar manner. The chuck is
displayed as a cylinder on the assumption that it is rotating.
(1) On the machining simulation registration program screen, press
[ANIMA.] to select animated drawing where no tool trajectory is
drawn.
TOOLING
ANIMA.
ANIMA.
+RT.CH
RT.CH
PREEX PROCES
LIST
PLOT
GUIDE
(2) When the following soft keys appear on the machining simulation
screen, press [PROCES], [EXEC], or [SINGLE STEP], similarly to
conventional machining simulation. The machining simulation
type selected by the pressed key begins.
SPEED
UP
SPEED
DOWN
PLOT
ROTATE
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
PROCES
EXEC
SINGLE
STEP
(3) After machining simulation is finished, pressing [ROTATE] causes

the display of the simulated machined product to be rotated.
Moreover, pressing [
] can switch the display from

threequarter shape format to full shape format. To reselect the
threequarter format, press [
].
NOTE
It is impossible to carry out machining simulation with the
display of the simulated machined product kept rotated.
7.5.2
Simulation of
C/Yaxis Machining
In addition to the conventional animated endsurface (C/Yaxis),

development (Caxis), and side elevation (Yaxis) drawings, C/Yaxis
machining simulation can display a line drawing of a tool trajectory based
on isometric projection.
91
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
flow chart
Offset data save and restore
function is effective?
yes
no
no
Execute processing simulation?

yes
#1=material length
#2=material diameter
Program zero point is workpiece end?

yes
no
#1=0 (material length clear)
Input unit is mm?

yes
no
inch unit
#1=15+#1
#2=10+#2
mm unit
#1=150+#1
#2=100+#2
G30command
G00command
G00X#2Z#1
RET
92
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
example)
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
O0000
N100
Offset data save and restore function G30 G00 replace operation
INPUT
P9766#3(OSV)
Input Macro parameter #20666 material length
#20667 material outer diamiter
#20737 input unit
#20794 program zero point
#9127 state of execution
OUTPUT
none
IF[[P9766AND4]EQ0]GOTO500;No.9766#2(OSV) 0:non effective 1:effective
IF[#9127NE1]GOTO500
;#9127 1:Processing simulation
;
2:Convert in to NC program
#1=#20666
;material length
#2=#20667
;material outer diamiter
IF[#20794EQ1]GOTO100
#1=0
;program zero point 0:workpiece and 1:chuck end

;matelial length data clear
IF[#20737EQ1]GOTO120
;#20737 0:input unit mm 1:input unit inch

;***mm unit
;#1=150+ material length (z coordenate)
;#2=100+ material diamiter (x coordenate)
#1=150+#1
#2=100+#2
GOTO200
;**inch unit
;#1=150+ material length (z coordenate)
;#2=100+ material diamiter (x coordenate)
N120
#1=15+#1
#2=10+#2
N200
G00X#2Z#1
GOTO900
;*** G00 command
N500
N900
G30U0W0V0
M99
;*** G30 command

;return
93
8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS
WARNING
When editing a machining program, be sure to confirm that the
changes are correct. If you have made a mistake in changing,
be sure to correct it, because the previous state of the program
has not be saved.
If the machining program is incorrect, the tool may bump
WARNING
When a machining program is edited, the tool and cutting
condition data may be changed automatically and become
different from manually entered data, depending on the
changes made. In such a case, make sure that the
automatically made changes are correct. If there is incorrect
data, be sure to correct it.
If the tool and cutting condition data is incorrect, the tool may
bump against the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
94
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
8.1
SELECTING THE
MACHINING
PROGRAM TO BE
EDITED
8.1.1
To display the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, press the

[2] and [EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM] soft keys on the main
menu screen.
Registeredprogram
Editing
CAP.:HEADL

PRG.NO
0025
0194
1212
NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
DEMONSTRATION
3M32S 1993/11/24 09:24
PRG11
1M58S 1993/11/20 14:30
NECKING
0M30S 1993/10/30 10:15
SFTKY
PROGRAM NO.=
INITAL SET
PROC(01)
PROC(02)
PROC(03)
PROC(04)
PROC(05)
<
MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23
FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
PUNCH
READ
DELETE COPY
HEADL
HEADL
ROUGH
FIN
T0505
T0505
HEADR
HEADR
ROUGH
FIN
T0202
T0202
SCHEDULEING
EDIT PROCES PLOT

EDIT
GUIDE
The registeredprogram directory screen displays the program numbers,

names, cycle times, creation dates and times, and the latest update dates
and times of all registered conversational machining programs.
Part of the outline of the program to which the cursor is positioned is
displayed in the lower part of the screen.
By pressing [PLOT], the product figure of the program to which the
cursor is positioned can be displayed in the window. The screen display
returns to its original status when [RETURN] is pressed.
95
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
NOTE
1 As the cycle time data, a calculated machining time is
displayed when machining simulation is performed.
Depending on the conditions, the actual machining time
may differ from a calculated machining time. When a
machining program is actually executed, the time required
for actual machining is displayed.
2 Another registeredprogram directory screen, such as that
for machining simulation, displays similar information for
each machining program.
8.1.2
Program

of the machining program to be edited using numeric keys. Alternatively,
move the cursor to the number of the program. Then press the [EDIT] soft
key.
operators panel has been released.
By performing the operation above, the initial setting screen of the
selected machining program is displayed.
Press a cursor key or page key to find the part to be changed.
96
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
8.2
EDITING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM IN UNITS
OF PROCESSES
(PROGRAM SCREEN)
A process can be deleted or added by pressing the [DELETE] or

[INSERT] soft key shown below.
< DELETE INSERT PRGRM WINDOW PROCES

END
OFF
EDIT

DATA
If the soft keys shown above are not displayed, press the rightmost [+] soft
key for several times.
NOTE
A process can be deleted or inserted only when the cursor
is positioned to a process data item. When the cursor is
positioned to figure data, figure data can be deleted or
inserted. None of the initial setting data can be deleted.
8.2.1
The processes contained in a machining program can be deleted in units

of processes.
Deleting a Process
Move the cursor to the process to be deleted, then press the [DELETE]
soft key. The message for confirming the operation and soft keys are
displayed as shown below.
EXEC REALLY?
CANCEL
YES:[EXEC]
NO:[CANCEL]
EXEC
8.2.2
Adding a New Process
[CANCEL]
: Cancels the deletion and returns to the original state.
[EXEC]
: Deletes the process.
To add a new process to a machining program, move the cursor to the

process which is to be followed by the new process and press the
[INSERT] soft key.
By performing this operation, the new process is created. Select a
machining type as when a program is created.
97
8.3
CHANGING THE
PROCESS DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
To change the process data, move the cursor to the part to be changed
using a cursor key. Enter new numeric data using numeric keys, then
press the INPUT key.
To delete the entered data, press the CAN key, then the INPUT key.
To change the machining type of a process, position the cursor to the
machining type, then press the soft key corresponding to the desired
machining type. This displays the operation confirmation message and
soft keys shown below. Press a soft key as required.
EXEC REALLY?
CANCEL
YES:[EXEC]
NO:[CANCEL]
EXEC
[CANCEL] :
[EXEC]
Cancels the operation for changing the machining type,

and returns to the previous state.
Changes the machining type.
NOTE
When a machining type is changed to a new machining
type, the process data and figure data existing before the
change may be entirely rewritten, depending on the new
machining type.
98
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
8.4
CHANGING PART OF
THE CONTOUR DATA
8.4.1
Changing Entered
Figure Data
The contour data of bar machining can be changed by the data entered for
automatic figure computing.
By performing this operation, cross and contact points of the changed
contour block and the preceding and subsequent figure blocks are
recomputed to create new contour data.
(1) Using a cursor key, move the cursor to the figure block to be
changed. The entered data is displayed in the window guidance as
shown below.
[CAP.:HEADL]
EDITING THE PROCESSING PROGRAM
NO. = 1234
NAME =DEMONSTRATION
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA
INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPDFEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
5
102
80
0.25
0101
START X= 20.000 Z= 0.000
CONTR FORM(HOPIZLINE)
J
X= 20.000 Z= 30.000
X= 20.000 Z= 40.000
DERECTION
B=
END POINT Z
Z=30.000
HORIZONTAL X CORD. X=
LENGTH
Q=
ROUGHNESS(110)
SR=

OFF
FIGURE

DATA
(2) Press the [ALTER] soft key shown above. If the soft keys are not
displayed, press the rightmost [+] soft key for several times.
(3) The color of the frame of the window guidance changes to yellow
and the following soft keys are displayed.
<
DELETE
ALTER TOOLD DETAIL PLOT

DATA
If a cursor key is pressed in this state, a yellow inverted cursor moves in the
window guidance.
99
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(4) Using a cursor key, move the cursor to the part of the contour data
to be changed.
(5) Using numeric keys, enter new numeric data, then press the INPUT
key.
(6) Press the [ALTER] soft key.
(7) The contour is recomputed and the results are displayed. The color
of the frame of the window guidance returns to sky blue.
Example
PROC (01) AREA
BAR (R)
OUTER
START
Changing the angle of a taper line from 45 to 60

HEAD ROUGHNES
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
END HEADL 5
102
80
0.25
0101
X= 20.000
Z= 0.000
SR=5
X= 20.000
Z= 30.000
X= 80.000
Z= 60.000
X= 10.000
Z= 60.000
DIRECTION
B=
COMPONENT X
1=
LENGTH
Q=
ROUGHNESS(110)
SR= 5

OFF
FIGURE

DATA
Move the cursor (J) to the figure to be changed, then

[ALTER]
Move the cursor in the window guidance (yellow frame) to the angle, then
60 INPUT
[ALTER]
By performing the operation above, the contour is recomputed and the
new figure data is displayed. The new figure is displayed on the same
screen.
100
8.4.2
changed. The entered data is displayed in the window guidance.
(2) Press the [ALTER FIGURE] soft key. If soft keys are not displayed,
press the rightmost [+] soft key for several times.
(3) The graphic pattern menu is displayed on the soft keys, as shown
below. Press the soft key of the desired new figure.
Changing the Figure
<
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
CHAMFR
TANGNT
ROUND
PLOT
FIGURE PLOT
END
[ + ]
<
(4) The input data items for the new contour are displayed in the window
guidance. The color of the frame of the window guidance changes
to yellow. The following soft keys are displayed.
CANCEL
ALTER TOOLD DETAIL PLOT

FIGURE
DATA
If a cursor key is pressed in this state, the yellow inverted cursor moves
in the window guidance.
(5) Using numeric keys, enter the numeric data of the new figure. Then
(6) After entering all necessary data, press the [ALTER FIGURE] soft
key.
(7) Based on the new figure, the contour is recomputed and the results
are displayed. The color of the frame of the window guidance
changes to sky blue.
101
Example
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Changing chamfering (C2) to rounding (R3)
PROC (01) AREA

HEAD ROUGHNES
BAR (R)
OUTER END HEADL 5
102
80
0.25
0101
START X= 20.000 Z= 0.000
SR=5
X= 20.000 Z= 30.000
X= 77.172 Z= 58.58
CONTR FORM(CHAMFER)
JCHAMFR X= 84.000 Z= 60.000
BEVEL AMOUNT
I= 2.000
X= 10.000 Z= 60.000
ROUGHNESS(110)
SR= 5

OFF
FIGURE

DATA
Move the cursor (J) to the chamfering data to be changed, then

[ALTER FIGURE]
Check that the graphic pattern menu is displayed on the soft key field, then
[ROUND]
Check that the input data items for rounding are displayed in the window
guidance, move the cursor to the radius of rounding, then
3 INPUT
[ALTER FIGURE]
By performing the operation above, the contour is recomputed and the
changed figure data is displayed on the screen. The new figure is
displayed on the same screen.
102
8.4.3
followed by a new figure.
(2) Press the [INSERT] soft key.
(3) The graphic pattern menu is displayed on the soft keys. Press the soft
key of the figure to be added.
Adding a Figure
<
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
CHAMFR
TANGNT
ROUND
PLOT
FIGURE PLOT
END
[ + ]
<
(4) The input data items for the new contour are displayed in the window
guidance. The color of the frame of the window guidance changes
to yellow. The following soft keys are displayed.
CANCEL
INSERT TOOLD DETAIL PLOT

DATA
If a cursor key is pressed in this state, the yellow inverted cursor moves
in the window guidance.
(5) Using numeric keys, enter the numeric data for the new figure and
(6) After entering all necessary data, press the [INSERT] soft key.
(7) Based on the added figure, the contour is recomputed and the results
are displayed. The color of the frame of the window guidance
returns to sky blue.
103
Example
PROC (01) AREA
BAR (F)
OUTER
START
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Adding rounding (R3)

HEAD ROUGHNES
ENDHEADL
5
X= 20.000 Z=
X= 20.000 Z=
X= 77.172 Z=
X= 10.000 Z=

102
80
0.25
0101
0.000
30.000
58.58
60.000
SR=5
DIRECTION
B=
COMPONENTX
I=
LENGTH
Q=
ROUGHNESS(110)
SR= 5

OFF
FIGURE

DATA
Move the cursor (J) to the figure which is to be followed by a new figure,
then
[INSERT]
Check that the graphic pattern menu is displayed on the soft key field, then
[ROUND]
Check that the input data items for rounding are displayed in the window
guidance, move the cursor to the radius of rounding, then
3 INPUT
[INSERT]
By performing the operation above, the contour after the new figure is
added is recomputed and the changed figure data is displayed on the
screen. The new figure is displayed on the same screen.
104
B62444E1/04
8.4.4
Deleting a Figure
EXEC REALLY?
OPERATION
(1) Using a cursor key, move the cursor to the figure block preceding the
part to be deleted.
(2) Press the [DELETE] soft key.
(3) The message for confirming the operation and the soft keys are
displayed as shown below. To cancel the operation, press the
[CANCEL] soft key. To delete the figure, press the [EXEC] soft key.
CANCEL
EXEC
(4) The contour after the figure is deleted is recomputed and the results
are displayed.
NOTE
Deletion of a figure may cause a conflict in relationship
between the deleted figure and the figures before and after
the deleted figure. In this case, the system warns the
operator that the entered data are invalid and the system
cancels the delete operation. The warning message is
erased by the next key operation.
8.5
CHANGING FIGURE
DATA OTHER THAN
CONTOUR DATA
To change figure data other than contour data, move the cursor to the data
to be changed using a cursor key. Using numeric keys, enter numeric data
and press the INPUT key.
To delete the entered data, press the CAN key, then the INPUT key.
105
8.6
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Machining programs created by conversational programming can be

moved, deleted, copied, and searched for in units of processes on the
process editing screen.
EDITING MACHINING
PROGRAMS IN
UNITS OF
PROCESSES
(PROCESS EDITING
SCREEN)
8.6.1
Two methods are available to display the process directory screen.

(1) Displaying the process directory screen from the
registeredprogram directory screen
Displaying the Process

Directory Screen
On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, enter the desired

program number using numeric keys. Alternatively, move the cursor to
the program number. Then press the [PROCES EDIT] soft key.
(2) Displaying the process directory screen from the screen of the
machining program
When the contents of the machining program are displayed, press the
[PROCES EDIT] soft key. The process editing screen of the machining
program is displayed.
Example
Process editing screen of a twopath lathe
*** PROCESS EDIT ***
HEADL
INITAL SET
FC25
HEADR
INITAL SET
BAR
PROC (04)
PROC (01)
BAR OUTER END
ROUGH
T0505
3M 0S
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
PROC (02)
BAR OUTER END
FIN
T0505
1M37S
JJJJJJJ
PROC (03)
GRV OUTER END (STNDRD)
T1212
0M 4S
J
PROC (04)
TRANS.
0M20S
JJJ
HEADL
HEADR
5M01S 01
2M02S 04
[CAP.: HEAD:L]
FC25
BAR
TRANS.
0M20S
JJJ
PROC (05)
BAR OUTER END
ROUGH
T0505
1M 3S
JJJJJJ
PROC (06)
BAR OUTER END
FIN
T0505
0M39S
JJJJ
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 02 JJJJJJJJJ
JJJJ 05 JJJJJJJ 06 JJJJJ
< RENUM TRANS DELETE COPY
EDIT
0304
JJJJ
RETURN PLOT
GUIDE
On the process editing screen, the machining time of each process is

indicated in minutes and seconds and also in a bar chart. The bar charts
of the rough machining, finish machining, and chamfering are displayed
in green, purple, and blue respectively.
106
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
The ratio of the machining time of each process to that of the entire
machining program is indicated in a bar chart at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE
The machining time described above is displayed after
simulation or actual machining is completed. If the
simulation or actual machining is stopped in the middle by
a reset, the machining time may not be displayed.
Machining times longer than 99 minutes are not displayed.
During simulation, machining time data is summed by
calculating the execution times for individual move
commands. However, such a machining time can differ from
the actual machining time, depending on the prevailing
conditions, including the feedrate override and
miscellaneous function operation times. During actual
machining, the actual machining time data is displayed.
8.6.2
Moving a Process for a
Tool Post
The sequence of processes registered in a machining program can be

changed in units of processes.
On the process editing screen, move the cursor to the process to be moved,
then press the [TRANS.] soft key. The following operation guidance is
displayed.
SPECIFY DESTINATION SOFT KEY [EXEC]

CANCEL EXEC
Move the cursor to the process which is to be followed by the moved

process and press the [EXEC] soft key. The selected process is inserted
immediately after the process specified by the cursor.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed on the operation guidance shown
above, the move operation is canceled and the system returns to the
original state.
NOTE
The initial setting process cannot be moved. An attempt to
move it will be ignored.
107
8.6.3
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
If a twopath lathe with the Series 16TB is used, a process can be moved
between the two tool posts.
Moving a Process
between the Two Tool
Posts
When the process is moved to the other tool post, the tools used in the
destination tool post is automatically selected. The tools required for the
process to be moved must be registered in advance.
Moving the process to the other tool post is the same as moving the
process for a tool post, except that the former requires the move
destination to be specified to the other tool post.
Example
Moving the grooving process (process 03) of the HEADL to HEADR

on the process editing screen shown in Section 8.6.1
Move the cursor to process 03, then
[TRANS.]
Move the cursor to process 06, then
[EXEC]
After the operation above, the following process editing screen is
displayed.
*** PROCESS EDIT ***
HEADL
INITAL SET
FC25
INITAL SET
BAR
PROC (04)
PROC (01)
BAR OUTER END
ROUGH
T0505
3M 0S
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
PROC (02)
BAR OUTER END
FIN
T0505
1M37S
JJJJJJJ
PROC (04)
TRANS.
0M20S
JJJ
HEADL
HEADR
5M01S 01
2M02S 04
[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR
FC25
BAR
TRANS.
0M20S
JJJ
PROC (05)
BAR OUTER END
ROUGH
T0505
1M 3S
JJJJJJ
PROC (06)
BAR OUTER END
FIN
T0505
0M39S
JJJJ
PROC (03)
GRV OUTER END (STNDRD)
T0909
0M 4S
J
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 02 JJJJJJJJJ
JJJJ 05 JJJJJJJ 06 JJJJJ 03
< RENUM TRANS DELETE COPY

.
EDIT
108
04
JJJJ
RETURN PLOT
GUIDE
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
NOTE
1 A process can be moved to the other tool post only in an
automatically scheduled program.
For automatic
scheduling, see Section 8.7, Automatic Scheduling.
2 The following processes cannot be moved to the other tool
post:
D Drilling processes such as center drilling and tapping
D All Caxis/Yaxis machining processes
D Special processes such as single action, calling of
subprograms, auxiliary processes, and TRANS
processes
3 If a process of bar machining or pattern repeating is moved
to the other tool post, the contour of the process is
automatically adjusted to the coordinate system used for
the destination tool post.
If the contour data has been entered with automatic
calculation of intersections, the figure data entered for the
automatic calculation is all deleted and the end point data
of each figure is automatically entered instead.
Chamfering and rounding are replaced with a slanted line
and arc respectively.
Even if the moved process is returned to the original tool
post, the replaced figure data will not return to the original
data.
8.6.4
The contents of a machining program can be copied in units of processes.
Copying a Process
On the process editing screen, move the cursor to the process to be copied
and press the [COPY] soft key. The following operation guidance is
displayed.
SPECIFY DESTINATION SOFT KEY [EXEC]

CANCEL
EXEC
Move the cursor to the process to be followed by the copied process and
press the [COPY] soft key. The specified process is copied.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed on the operation guidance shown
above, the copy operation is canceled and the system returns to the
original state.
NOTE
The initial setting process cannot be copied. An attempt to
copy it will be ignored.
109
8.6.5
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
The contents of a machining program can be deleted in units of processes.
Deleting a Process
EXEC REALLY?
On the process directory screen, move the cursor to the process to be

deleted and press the [DELETE] soft key. The following operation
guidance is displayed.
CANCEL
EXEC
If the [EXEC] soft key is pressed on the operation guidance, the specified
process is deleted. If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed on the operation
guidance, the delete operation is canceled and the system returns to the
original state.
NOTE
The initial setting process cannot be deleted. An attempt to
delete it will be ignored.
8.6.6
Searching for a
Process (Editing)
On the process editing screen, the part of a machining program to be

displayed or edited can be specified.
Move the cursor to the process of which contents are to be displayed and
press the [EDIT] soft key. The data of the selected process is displayed.
Edit the contents in the same way as for usual editing of a machining
program.
110
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
8.7
In a machining program which has just been created in conversational

programming, a process contains both rough machining and finish
machining. When the machining program is executed, the processes are
executed in order in which they were entered.
AUTOMATIC
SCHEDULING
The automatic scheduling function divides each process of the machining

program into three groups: rough machining, finish machining, and
chamfering (chamfering is performed only in the Caxis machining). It
automatically arranges the processes so that all rough machining is
executed first and the finish machining is executed next.
WARNING
When a machining program is created by automatic
scheduling, make sure that the generated machining
sequence is correct.
If the machining sequence is incorrect, the tool may bump
8.7.1
Operation of Automatic
Scheduling
When the automatic scheduling function is executed, the original

machining program is kept as it is and a new scheduled program is created.
of the machining program for which the automatic scheduling function
is executed. Alternatively, move the cursor to the program using a cursor
key. Then press the [SCHEDULING] soft key.
operators panel has been released.
The following operation guidance and soft keys are displayed.
PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)
SFTKY
=
FC25 BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
HEADL
HEADL
ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505
HEADR
HEADR
ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202
CANCEL
EXEC
On the operation guidance, enter the number of the program to be created

by automatic scheduling using numeric keys and press the [EXEC] soft
key.
111
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
By performing the operation above, an automatically scheduled program

is created.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, the automatic scheduling is
canceled.
On the registeredprogram directory screen, the new machining program
created by automatic scheduling is indicated with an asterisk (*) on the
left of the program number, as shown below. With the asterisk, the
program can be distinguished from other programs.
Display
Example
Machining program 0025 has been arranged so that all rough machining
is executed first.
EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM *** PROGRAM LIST ***

(REST NO.OF PROGRAM 12 PCS.)
(REST NO.OF PROCES 128 PCS.)
PRG.NO
NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
*0025
DEMONSTRATION
3M32S 1993/11/24 09:24
0194
PRG11
1M58S 1993/11/20 14:30
1212
NECKING
0M30S 1993/10/30 10:15
112
[CAP.:HEADL]
MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
8.7.2
Details of Automatic
Scheduling
In automatic scheduling, processes are divided and arranged so that all

rough machining is executed first.
(1) Dividing processes
Each of the processes of i to iv listed below contains rough machining and
finish machining. The process is divided into independent subprocesses
such as rough machining process, finish machining process and
chamfering process (chamfering is performed only in Caxis machining
process).
i.
Process including rough machining and finish machining: Bar

machining, pattern repeating, residual machining, end facing, and
trapezoidal grooving
ii. Process executed as rough machining: Ordinary grooving, slanted
grooving, center drilling, drilling, reaming, boring, tapping, single
action, measurement, and calling of subprograms
iii. Process executed as finish machining: Threading and necking
iv. Others: Caxis machining processes (including drilling, rough
machining, finish machining, and chamfering)
Yaxis machining processes (including drilling, rough
machining, and finish machining)
M process
Example
Bar machining
Entered process
Divided processes
Bar machining (rough and finish)
Bar machining (rough)
Contour (common)
Contour (rough)
Bar machining (finish)
Contour (finish)
NOTE
1 The program for which the automatic scheduling function is
not executed has a single contour (or figure) shared by the
rough machining, finish machining, and chamfering (in
Caxis machining).
If the common contour data (or figure data) is changed in
that program, the machining contours for rough machining,
finish machining, and chamfering (in Caxis machining) are
changed at the same time.
The program for which the automatic scheduling function
has been executed has a contour (or figure) for each
process. The contour can be changed in units of processes.
2 An end process is always placed at the end, even in a
program subject to automatic scheduling.
113
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
When automatic scheduling is executed, the processes are divided as

described above and automatically arranged in the following order.
Group of rough machining processes
Group of finish machining processes
Group of threading and Caxis machining processes

NOTE
3 If bit 0 (TRD) of parameter 9776 is set to 1, the group of
threading and Caxis machining processes is included in
the group of finish machining processes.
i.
Group of rough machining processes
Rough machining for bar machining, pattern repeating, residual

machining, and end facing processes
Ordinary grooving and slanted grooving processes
Rough machining for trapezoidal grooving
Turning and drilling processes such as center drilling, drilling, and

tapping
Single action and calling of subprograms
NOTE
4 Ordinary grooving and slanted grooving processes can be
included in the finish machining process group by specifying
finish machining as the execution cycle data displayed on
the detail data screen.
ii.
Group of finish machining processes
Finish machining for bar machining, pattern repeating, residual

machining, and end facing processes
Finish machining for trapezoidal grooving
Necking processes
iii. Group of threading and Caxis machining processes
iv.
Threading processes
Caxis drilling processes such as Caxis center drilling and Caxis

tapping
Caxis milling processes such as Caxis grooving, Caxis

notching, and Caxis cylindrical machining
M process
Auxiliary processes
The group to which the auxiliary processes belong depends on the
machine. Refer to the operators manual written by the machine tool
builder.
114
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
v.
TRANS processes
A TRANS process (available only with twopath lathes with the
Series 16/18TTA) divides the programs for tool posts 1 and 2.
In automatic scheduling, the TRANS process is set at the end of the
program of tool post 1 and at the beginning of the program of tool
post 2.
Example
Program in which the processes are arranged so

that all rough machining is executed first
Original program
Process 1
Process 1
End facing (rough/finish)
End facing (rough)
Process 2
Process 2
Bar machining (rough/finish)
Contour (common)
Contour (rough)
Process 3
Process 5
Threading
Ordinary grooving (rough)
Process 4
Process 6
Caxis notching
(rough/finish/chamfer)
Calling of subprograms
(rough)
Contour (common)
Process 1
End facing (finish)
Process 5
Ordinary grooving (rough)
Process 6
Process 2
Calling of subprograms
(rough)
Bar machining (finish)

Contour (finish)
Process 3
Threading
Process 4
Caxis notching (rough)
Process 4
Caxis notching (finish)
Contour (finish)
Process 4
Caxis notching (chamfer)
Contour (chamfer)
115
8.8
EXEC REALLY?
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)
B62444E1/04

of the machining program to be deleted. Alternatively, move the cursor
to the program number. Then press the [DELETE] soft key. The message
for verifying the operation and the soft keys are displayed as shown below.
DELETING
MACHINING
PROGRAMS
PROGRAM NO.
OPERATION
YES:[EXEC]
=
1258
NO:[CANCEL]
SFTKY
FC25 BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
HEADL
HEADL
ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505
HEADR
HEADR
ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202
CANCEL EXEC
If the [EXEC] soft key is pressed on the operation guidance, the specified
machining program is deleted.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, the delete operation is canceled and
the system returns to the original state.
NOTE
To delete all machining programs, enter 9999 as the
program number.
116
B62444E1/04
8.9
EDITING NC
PROGRAMS (CROSS
EDITING)
OPERATION
By pressing [8] (EDIT NC PROGRAM) on the main menu screen, an NC

program can be edited without changing the conversational mode. This
type of editing is automatically performed in the background, eliminating
the need to change the mode to EDIT mode.
Example of operation
: Editing NC program O1001
(Main menu screen of the conversational function)
[8] (EDIT NC PROGRAM) : Displays the NC program background
editing screen.
[LIB]
: Displays the NC program directory
screen.
: Selects NC program O1001.
O1001 [O SERCH]
[PRGRM]
: Displays the above program on the
entire screen.
: Perform the necessary editing.
[OPRT]
: Displays the soft keys used for edit
operations.
[BGEND]
: Returns the display to the main menu
screen of the conversational function.
NOTE
1 Before this cross edit function can be used, bit 4 (CRS) of
parameter No. 9775 must be set to 1.
2 NC programs, selected on the NC side, cannot be edited in
the background.
117
9. OUTPUTTING MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
OUTPUTTING MACHINING PROGRAMS
A conversational machining program can be output and saved in an

external memory unit via the reader/punch interface.
On the registered-program directory screen for editing, enter the number
of the machining program to be output. Alternatively, move the cursor
to the program number. Then press the [PUNCH] soft key. The soft keys
for verifying the operation are displayed as shown below.
PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)
<
1234
SFTKY
FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
HEAD-L
HEAD-L
ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505
HEAD-R
HEAD-R
ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202
CANCEL EXEC
If the [EXEC] soft key is pressed, the output of the specified program is
started.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, the output operation is canceled and
the system returns to the original state.
To output all machining programs, enter 9999 as the program number.
If the output equipment is the FANUC Cassette, a new file is created
immediately after the registered file.
When the output of the machining program starts, the OUTPUT
message blinks at the bottom of the screen. It continues to flash until the
operation ends.
NOTE
Only the machining program created with the
conversational programming function described in this
manual can be output by performing the operation
described above.
The machining program created on the NC program screen
cannot be output by the operation described above. For the
output of the program, refer to the operators manual of the
NC machine.
118
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
10
10. READING MACHINING PROGRAMS
READING MACHINING PROGRAMS
The machining program output by the operation described in Chapter 9

can be read by the NC machine via the reader/punch interface.
Before starting reading, be sure to release the memory protect switch on
the machine operators panel.
On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, press the [READ]
soft key. The message for entering a file number and the soft keys for
verifying the operation are displayed as shown below.
PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)
<
SFTKY
=
FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
HEADL
HEADL
ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505
HEADR
HEADR
ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202
CANCEL EXEC
Using numeric keys, enter the number of the file containing the machining
program to be read and press the [EXEC] soft key. Reading of the
machining program is started.
If the input equipment is the FANUC PPR, only press the [EXEC] soft
key. The file number need not be entered.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, reading is canceled and the system
returns to the original state.
When reading of the machining program is started, the INPUT message
blinks at the bottom of the screen. It continues to flash until the operation
ends.
NOTE
Only the machining program created with the
conversational programming function described in this
manual can be read by performing the operation described
above.
The machining program created on the NC program screen
cannot be read by the operation described above. For
reading of the program, refer to the operators manual of the
NC machine.
119
11. CONVERTING MACHINING

PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
11
CONVERTING MACHINING PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS
A machining program created by conversational programming can be

executed. The program can also be converted into an NC program and the
NC program can be executed and changed.
The converted NC program can be stored in the NC tape memory area or
output to the external memory unit via the reader/punch interface.
NOTE
When a twopath lathe is used, the program cannot be
output via the reader/punch interface.
This function is available as an option.

NOTE
While the program is being converted as described above,
no other operation such as background editing, manual
movement, or data setting with MDI can be performed.
WARNING
Conversion of a machining program to an NC program may
cause data such as a work shift amount, tool tip radius/wear
compensation value, virtual tool tip direction, tool exchange
position (second reference position data), chuck barrier data
(second storedstroke limit data), and chuck/tailstock barrier
data (only when the relevant option is available) to be changed
according to the machining program subjected to conversion.
It is impossible to run another machining program after
conversion.
If you try to run another program (conversational machining
program or a machining program in the form of NC statements)
under this condition, the tool may bump against the workpiece
and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or
machine, and even injuries.
120

OPERATION
B62444E1/04
11.1
CONVERTING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM TO AN NC
PROGRAM
11.1.1
On the main menu, press the [5] and [CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM]

soft keys. The registeredprogram directory screen for conversion to NC
program is displayed.
Registeredprogram
Conversion to NC
Program
PRG.NO.
0025
0194
1212
*** PROGRAM MEMU ***
NAME
CYCLE TIME
DEMONSTRATION 3M32S
PRG11
1M58S
NECKING
0M30S
PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)
[CAP.: HEADL]
CREATED
1993/11/24 09:24
1993/11/20 14:30
1993/10/30 10:15
MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23
SFTKY
=
FC25
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
BAR
END
END
HEADL
HEADL
ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505
END
END
HEADR
HEADR
ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202
< NCMEM
PREEX
PLOT
GUIDE
NOTE
If a onepath lathe with the Series 16TB is used, the
[NCPCH] soft key is displayed to the right of the [NCMEM]
soft key.
121

11.1.2
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
When converting a machining program to an NC program, select the

MEM mode.
Converting a
Machining Program to
an NC Program
On the registeredprogram directory screen, enter the number of the

machining program to be converted to an NC program using numeric
keys. Alternatively, move the cursor to the program number. Then press
the [NCMEM] or [NCPCH] soft key.
(1) [NCMEM]: Stores the converted program in the NC tape memory
area. Before pressing this key, memory protection must be released.
(2) [NCPCH]: Outputs the converted program to an external memory
unit via the reader/punch interface. The soft key is valid only when
a onepath lathe with the Series 16/18TA is used.
After the operation described above, the message for entering the number
of the converted program and the soft keys for verifying the operation are
displayed as shown below.
NEW PROGRAM NO.

INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)
1234
FC25
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
SFTKY
BAR
END
END
HEADL
HEADL
ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505
END
END
HEADR
HEADR
ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202
< CANCEL EXEC
Enter the number of the converted program with numeric keys and press
the [EXEC] soft key. The following animated simulation is displayed on
the screen.
If the [EXEC] soft key is pressed on the simulation screen, conversion to
the NC program is started and the simulation is executed.
During the conversion to the NC program, the EDITING message
blinks at the bottom right of the screen. The message disappears when the
operation ends.
During the conversion, avoid changing the screen to another screen or
performing other operation.
122
B62444E1/04
OPERATION

NOTE
1 During conversion to the NC program, the drawing speed on
the simulation screen is lower than usual. An arc may be
displayed as a polygon.
2 If the leftmost [<] soft key (super return) is pressed when the
conversion to the NC program terminates, the system
returns to the registeredprogram directory screen for
conversion to NC program.
3 The simulation is executed for the converted NC program in
the same way as described above. The data of the material
figure and tool figure is output in the NC command block of
G10 at the beginning of the program. The command for
changing the tool is also output.
The output of the NC command block can be suppressed by setting

parameters. The optional block skip (/) can be output at the beginning of
the block.
For details, see Section 12.2, Executing Machining Programs.
11.1.3
Entering Setting Data
Before Execution
To enter setting data before execution such as a chuck barrier, press the
[PREEX] soft key.
On the setting screen before execution, enter necessary data following the
description of the setting screen before execution in Chapter 12,
Executing Machining Programs. Then press the [SET] soft key. The
selected machining program is displayed in the conversational format.
NOTE
1 If the chuck barrier is not specified on the setting screen
before execution, the chuck barrier command is not output
in the NC program.
2 If the same program number as that of the NC program
specified during program conversion is already registered
in the NC program memory area, P/S alarm 73 occurs
irrespective of the parameter setting. In this case, change
the program number. Alternatively, delete the registered
program having the same program number. Then restart
the program conversion.
123

11.2
ALARMS DURING
CONVERSION OF
THE MACHINING
PROGRAM INTO THE
NC PROGRAM
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
While the machining program is being converted into the NC program,

the machining program is running for machining operation or check
drawing. A P/S alarm may occur because of the contents of the machining
program or the operation to start the machining program.
For the P/S alarms, see Appendix V. which describes the alarms that may
occur when the machining program is running. Then correct the
machining program.
If the P/S alarm occurs during the conversion, the converted part of the
machining program has already been stored in the tape memory area. To
restart the conversion of the machining program, correct the erroneous
part, delete the converted part, and perform conversion from the
beginning.
The following alarms may occur while the machining program is being
converted.
Alarm No.
070
Description
Cause
Insufficient tape memory area
Action
Take the following action depending on the condition:

(1)If another NC program is already registered and
the remaining memory is insufficient for the program being currently converted,
Save the registered NC program in the external
memory unit via the reader/punch interface, delete
the program, and resume conversion.
(2)If the entire reserved area is insufficient for the program being currently converted,
Output the converted program to the external
memory unit via the reader/punch interface as described in Section 11.3.
To execute the converted NC program, perform
DNC execution via the reader/punch interface.
The NC program area can be increased by setting
parameters. However, this causes the conversational program area to be reduced and the all data
items to be cleared temporarily. This method must
not be used in usual operation.
072
073
Cause
The number of registered programs exceeded 63 or

125 (optional setting).
Action
Save some of the registered NC programs in the external memory unit via the reader/punch interface,
delete the programs, and resume conversion from the
beginning.
Alternatively, output the converted program to the external memory unit via the reader/punch interface as
described in Section 11.3.
Cause
An attempt was made to specify the same program

number as that of a registered program.
Action
Delete the registered NC program having the same

number and resume conversion from the beginning.
Alternatively, change the number of the machining
program specified in the conversion procedure and
resume conversion from the beginning.
124
B62444E1/04
11.3
SETTING THE
READER/PUNCH
INTERFACE
OPERATION

Before the machining program converted into the NC program is output

to an external memory unit via the reader/punch interface, the following
must be set in the same way as for outputting of an ordinary program.
(1) Selecting the input/output equipment
Select the channel to which the converted machining program is
output in the item setting No. 0020:I/O CHANNEL.
(2) Setting the baud rate of the selected channel and other data items
D Channel 1: Setting Nos. 0101, 0102, and 0103, or setting Nos. 0111,
0112, and 0113
D Channel 2: Setting Nos. 0121, 0122, and 0123
For details of the data items to be set and the operation, refer to the
description of specification of the setting data items in the operators
manual of the NC machine.
125
12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR

MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY
12
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
DIRECT OPERATION FOR MACHINING PROGRAMS

WARNING
Direct operation of a machining program created using a
conversational function may cause data such as a work shift
amount, tool tip radius/wear compensation value, virtual tool
tip direction, tool exchange position (second reference
position data), chuck barrier data (second storedstroke limit
data), and chuck/tailstock barrier data (only when the relevant
option is available) to be changed according to that machining
program. It is impossible to run a machining program in the
form of NC statements after conversion.
If you try to run a machining program in the form of NC
statements under this condition, the tool may bump against the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
126

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
12.1
OPERATION BEFORE
EXECUTION (SUCH
AS SELECTING A
PROGRAM,
MOUNTING A TOOL,
ETC.)
12.1.1
Displaying the
Registeredprogram
Direct Operation
Select the MEM mode on the main menu. Then, press the [4] soft key
(DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PROGRAM) to display the
registeredprogram directory screen for direct operation.
DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG

PRG.NO. NAME
0025 DEMONSTRATION
0194 PRG11
1212 NECKING
PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)
CYCLE TIME
3M32S
1M58S
0M30S
=
FC25
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
CREATED
1993/11/24 09:24
1993/11/20 14:30
1993/10/30 10:15
[CAP.: HEADL]
MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23
SFTKY
BAR
END
END
HEADL
HEADL
ROUGH
FIN
T0505
T0505
END
END
HEADR
HEADR
ROUGH
FIN
T0202
T0202
< TOOLING
EXEC
127
PREEX PROCES PLOT

LIST
GUIDE

MACHINING PROGRAMS
12.1.2
Specifying a Machining
Program
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
On the registeredprogram directory screen for direct operation, position

the cursor at the machining program to be executed. Alternatively, enter
the number of the program to be executed with the numeric keys, then
press the [EXEC], [PREEX], or [PROCES LIST] soft key.
(1) [EXEC]:Specifies the machining program to be executed.
(2) [PROCES LIST]:Displays the process directory screen. Move the
cursor to the process to be executed and press the [EXEC] soft key.
The program can be started in the middle.
(3) [PREEX]:Displays the setting screen before execution. On this
screen, use this key to specify the chuck barrier and workpiece shift
or to enter the numbers of a chuck and tail stock.
When a new machining program is executed using these functions
for the first time, call the setting screen and enter data items as
required before execution.
Pressing the [EXEC] soft key displays the program execution screen.
Pressing the [PREEX] soft key displays the setting screen before
execution.
128
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
12.1.3
Setting Data on the
Setting Screen Before
Execution

MACHINING PROGRAMS
Example of a setting screen before execution in the Series 16TB for a

twopath lathe
WARNING
If data such as a work shift amount, turret rotation position
(second reference position data), chuck barrier data (second
storedstroke limit data), and chuck/tailstock barrier data (only
when the relevant option is available) is changed on the
preexecution setting screen, it is always rewritten. It is
impossible to run another machining program after
conversion.
If you try to run another machining program (such as a
conversational machining program or a machining program in
the form of NC statements) under this condition, the tool may
bump against the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing
damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
*** PREMACHINING ***
HEADL
BASIS TCODE
WSHIFT (INC)
END REMOVAL
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO
TOOLCHG POS
T=
SZ=
CZ=
C=
X=
Z=
T=
X=
Z=
[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR
BASIS TCODE
WSHIFT (INC)
T=
SZ=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
2.000
<
RETURN HEADR
129
TOOL
NG

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
BASIS T
T : T code of a tool for which a chuck barrier is

specified
WSHIFT(INC)
SZ : Increment or decrement of the workpiece
shift along the Z axis.
The current workpiece shift is displayed at
the bottom of the screen. When the end face
of a workpiece needs to be shifted, enter the
required value.
When parameter PREDSP (bit 1 of
parameter 9775) is 0, enter a value in the
incremental mode, then press the [SET] soft
key.
When parameter PREDSP (bit 1 of
parameter 9775) is 1, bring the tool
specified by the T code into contact with the
end face of a workpiece, then press the
[SET] soft key.
END REMOVAL
CZ : Cut amount in end facing (set automatically)
CHUCK ID NO.
C : The number of the chuck to be used, which
is displayed on the chuck figure data screen
CHUCK BARRIER X, Z : The machine coordinates of the chuck
reference position
The machine coordinates are read by
pressing the [SET] soft key. See 12.1.6
for details of the chuck barrier.
TAILSTOCK NO.
T : The number of the tail stock to be used,
which is displayed on the tail stock figure
data screen
TOOLCHG POS
X, Z : The machine coordinates of the tool
change position
Move the turret to the tool change
position, then press the [SET] soft key.
The machine coordinates of the position
are written into parameter 1241 (second
reference position).
NOTE
For tool post 2, END REMOVAL, CHUCK ID NO., CHUCK
BARRIER, and tail stock data, cannot be specified.
When all necessary data items have been input, press the [RETURN] soft
key to return to the registeredprogram directory screen for direct
operation.
130

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(1) Setting screen prior to execution when bit 1 (PRD) of parameter No.
9775 is set to 1
*** PREMACHINING ***
HEADL
BASIS TCODE
FACE POSITION
WSHIFT
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO
TOOLCHG POS
[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR
T=
CZ=
SZ=
C=
X=
Z=
T=
X=
Z=
FACE POSITION
WSHIFT
OUTPUT T
WSHIFT (INC)
T=
SZ=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
CZ :
Zaxis coordinate of a workpiece end face

when the workpiece shift amount is
measured by butting a tool against the end
face
SZ : A workpiece shift amount difference can be
automatically entered by butting the tool
specified by a T code against a workpiece
end face and pressing [SET].
NOTE
1 Press [HEADR] to set the data for tool post 2.
2 End removal, chuck number, chuck barrier, and tailstock
data for tool post 2 cannot be set.
(2) Chuck barrier data when the optional chuck/tailstock barrier
function is selected
When the cursor is positioned to CHUCK ID NO. or CHUCK
BARRIER on the setting screen, before execution, the following
soft keys are displayed:
<
RETURN HEADR BARRI TOOLCHUCK

ING
By pressing [BARRI CHUCK], chuck barrier data is displayed in the

window. This chuck barrier data is identical to that for the same option
on the NC side.
By entering a chuck number on the setting screen before execution, chuck
barrier data is automatically determined and displayed in the window.
131

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
NOTE
1 For details of the chuck/tailstock barrier function, see the
relevant operators manual for the NC.
2 When the optional chuck/tailstock barrier function,
supported by the NC side, is selected, the chuck barrier
function based on the conventional conversational function
cannot be used.
WARNING
Before using a chuck/tailstock barrier supported by the
conversational function, make sure that the barrier area data
is set correctly, that the barrier function works at the correct
position, and that the tool will not bump against the chuck or
tailstock, using a manual operation (such as jog feed or
manual pulse generator feed).
If the tool bumps against the chuck and/or tailstock, the tool
and/or machine may be damaged, and even injuries may
occur.
Example of chuck barrier data window for a onepath lathe:

DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG *** PREMACHINING ***
BASIS TCODE
T=
WSHIFT (INC) SZ=
END REMOVAL
CZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=1
TAILSTOCK NO. T=
TAILSTOCK BAR Z=
TOLLCHG POS
X=2
Z=2
BARRIER
L
[CAP.]
(CHUCK)
*
L1
CX
TY
L
W
L1
W1
=
=
=
=
=
OUT
30.000
40.000
20.000
20.000
W1
CX =
CZ =
140.000
129.000
CZ
PRES.POS (ABSOLUTE)
X 80.000
<
Z 120.000
RETURN
132

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(3) Tailstock barrier data when the optional chuck/tailstock barrier

function is selected
In the same way as for chuck barrier data, the following soft keys are
displayed when the cursor is positioned to TAILSTOCK NO. or
TAILSTOCK BAR on the setting screen, before execution:
<
RETURN
BARRI. TOOL(TAIL ING

S)
By pressing [BARRI. TAILSTOCK], tailstock barrier data is displayed

in the window.
The tailstock barrier data is identical to that for the same option on the NC
side.
Example of tailstock barrier data window for a onepath lathe:
DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG *** PREMACHINING ***
BASIS TCODE
WSHIFT (INC)
END REMOVAL
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO.
TAILSTOCK BAR
TOOLCHG POS
T=
SZ=
CZ=
C=
X=
Z=1
T=
Z=
X=2
Z=2
BARRIER
(TAILSTOCK)
L
L1
L2
TZ
*
[CAP.]
D2 D1
L
D
L1
D1
L2
D2
D3
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
30.000
60.000
20.000
40.000
0.000
20.000
16.000
TZ =
0.500
D3
Z
PRES.POS (ABSOLUTE)
X 80.000
<
Z 120.000
RETURN
By entering a tailstock number on the setting screen before execution,

tailstock barrier data is automatically determined and displayed in the
window.
133

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(4) Notes on the setting screen, displayed before execution

For each conversational machining program, the data items listed
below are memorized.
(a) Workpiece shift amount (SZ)
(b) Chuck barrier data (X/Z)
(c) Chuck number, chuck barrie reference point (CX/CZ)
(d) Tailstock number, tailstock reference point (TZ)
(e) Turret turning position (X/Z)
When a machining program is converted to an NC program, NC
commands are output at the beginning of the program, created by the
conversion, to rewrite the data items below.
(a) Workpiece shift amount along the Zaxis
(b) Chuck barrier data (parameter Nos. 1322 and 1323: Second stored
stroke limit coordinates)
(c) Chuck barrier data for the chuck/tailstock barrier option
(d) Tailstock barrier data for the chuck/tailstock barrier option
(e) Turret turning position (parameter No. 1241: Second reference
position coordinates)
When a program is selected on a registeredprogram directory screen by
pressing [EXEC], [PREEX], [TOOLING], [ANIMA], [ANIMA. +
RT.CH], [NCMEM], or [NCPCH], to perform operations such as
conversational machining program simulation, direct run, and conversion
to an NC program, the following data items, memorized for each program,
are written to the NC.
This means that NC data is rewritten even if actual machining is not
performed. So, be careful when operating an NC program after
performing these operations.
(a) Workpiece shift amount along the Zaxis
(b) Chuck barrier data (parameter Nos. 1322 and 1323: Second stored
stroke limit coordinates)
(c) Chuck barrier data for the chuck/tailstock barrier option
(d) Tailstock barrier data for the chuck/tailstock barrier option
(e) Turret turning position (parameter No. 1241: Second reference
position coordinates)
(f) Tooltip radius compensation values (geometry/wear) and virtual
tool) tip positions for the tools being used
NOTE
Item (b) above is applicable only when the chuck/tailstock
barrier option is not selected. On the other hand, items (c)
and (d) are applicable only when the chuck/tailstock barrier
option is selected.
134
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
12.1.4

MACHINING PROGRAMS
By pressing [TOOLING] on the registeredprogram directory screen,

setting screen before execution, or process directory screen, the tooling
data screen is displayed.
Mounting Tools
Processes and data for the tools being used are displayed in the order in
which they were registered in the machining program. With [HEADL]
or [HEADR], a tool post can be selected for display.
Example of tooling data screen: For a twopath lathe
*** HEADL TOOLING DATA ***
PROC
PROC NAME
USING TOOL
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
END FACNG (R)

BAR
(R)
BAR
(F)
GROOVING
CGROOVE (R)
CGROOVE (C)
CENTERDRL
DRILLING
BORE
THREADING
CNOTCHING(R)
CNOTCHING(F)
GEOMETRY
OFS X
200.000
300.000
0.000
0.000
ENDMILL
0.000
CHAMFER
0.000
CENTER
0.000
DRILL
0.000
BORE
0.000
OUTR TH
0.000
END MILL
0.000
END MILL
0.000
[CAP : HEAD L]
01/01
GEOMETRY RN/WN/DD/TR/TW TCODE
OFS Z
10.000 RN
0.400
0202
20.000 RN
0.600
0303
0.000 RN
0.600
0404
0.000 WN
2.000
0505
0.000 TR
5.000
0606
0.000 TR
10.000
0707
0.000 DD
2.000
0808
0.000 DD
5.000
0909
0.000 TW
10.000
1010
0.000 RN
0.000
1111
0.000 TR
5.000
1212
0.000 TR
5.000
1313
GEOMETRY OFS X
< HEAD
L
HEAD
R
YAXIS WEAR
OFFSET OFFSET
PREPARE
TOOL TOOL RETURN

LIFE DISPLY
PROC
: Process number
PROC NAME
: Name of each process
USING TOOL
: Symbol or name of a tool used for each process
GEOMETRU OFS X,Z :
Tool geometry compensation values (same as
compensation values for the NC side)
This data item can be entered directly by using the
numeric keys, or can be entered by using the setup
guidance screen for compensation value
measurement, displayed by pressing [PREPARE].
RN/WN/DD/TR/TW: Data specific to each tool
RN= Tool tip radius (same as the compensation
value for the NC)
WN= Width of a grooving tool
DD= Nominal diameter of a drilling tool
TR= Radius of a milling cutter (same as the
compensation value for the NC)
TW= Width of a boring tool
135

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
When any of the above data items is rewritten, the

same data, held in the tool file, is modified at the
same time.
TCODE:
T code for cach tool
When the T code value of a tool is rewritten, the T
code value of the same tool in the current
machining
program
is
also
modified
automatically. Furthermore, the T code in the tool
file is also modified at the same time.
When [YAXIS OFFSET] is pressed, Yaxis
geometry/wear compensation values are
displayed. These values are the same as for the
NC. When the Yaxis conversational function is
not supported, this soft key is not displayed.
When [WEAR OFFSET] is pressed, Xaxis/Zaxis wear compensation
values are displayed. These values are the same as for the NC. Enter these
values manually in the same way as for the tool offset screen.
Before attempting to execute a machining program, attach the tools to be
used to the turret of the machine by checking the tooling data screen.
Usually, attach the tools according to the displayed Tcode tool numbers.
Even if a tool is attached to a different turret, the corresponding T code
in the program can be automatically rewritten simply by rewriting the
specified T code on the tooling data screen.
By pressing [RETURN], the user can display the original screen.
When [TOOL DISPLAY] is pressed, a tool data screen like that shown
below appears in the window. At the same time, the tool figure is also
drawn in the same window.
*** HEAD L
TOOLING DATA ***
PROC
PROC NAME
USING TOOL
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
END FACNG (R)

BAR
(R)
BAR
(F)
GROOVING
CGROOVE (R)
CGROOVE (C)
CENTERDRL
DRILLING
BORE
THREADING
CNOTCHING(R)
CNOTCHING(F)
GEOMETRY
OFS X
200.000
300.000
0.000
0.000
ENDMILL
0.000
CHAMFER
0.000
CENTER
0.000
DRILL
0.000
BORE
0.000
OUTR TH
0.000
END MILL
0.000
END MILL
0.000
[CAP : HEAD L]
1/1
GEOMETRY RN/WN/DD/TR/TW TCODE
OFS Z
10.000 RN
0.400
0202
20.000 RN
0.600
0303
0.000 RN
0.600
0404
TOOL DATA
0.000 WN
2.000
0505
0.000 TR
TOOLID5.000
NO No.0606
101
0.000 TR
10.000 OUTER(HEADL)
0707
TOOLTYPE
0.000 DD
2.000
0808
TOOLDIREC
0.000 DD
5.000 COMMON
0909
ROUGH/FIN
0.000 TW
1010
OUTPUT10.000
T
0202
0.000 RN
0.000 NOMAL
1111
REVOLUTD
0.000 TR
5.000 RN=1212
NOSERADIUS
0.400
0.000 TR
CUTTING5.000
EDG AC=1313 90
NOSE ANGEL AN=
60
NOSE WIDTH TW= 20.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
3
TL MATRIAL TM= CARBID
GEOMETRY OFS X
RETURN
<
136
B62444E1/04
OPERATION

MACHINING PROGRAMS
NOTE
1 The window displays the tool data for the tool to which the
cursor is positioned. The displayed data cannot, however,
be modified.
2 When [PREPARE] is pressed, the tool offset measurement
guidance screen appears. The information displayed on
the screen may vary, depending on the machine. For
details, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool
builder.
3 When [TOOL LIFE] is pressed, the screen may display no
information, depending on the specifications of the
machine. Information, if displayed, may vary from one
machine to another. For details, refer to the manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.
12.1.5
Measuring Tool
Geometry
Compensation when
no Tool Setter is Used
On the tooling data screen, move the cursor to the geometry compensation
field and press the [PREPAR] soft key. The setup guidance screen for
measuring compensation values appears.
WARNING
When measuring tool geometry compensation on the
X/Zaxis using this method, keep the spindle rotating, and
push the tool against the end surface or periphery of the
workpiece and cut it with a feedrate as low as possible, using
manual pulse generator feed. Also, be sure to keep the safety
door of the machining station closed.
Refer to the applicable manual supplied by the respective
machine tool builders for detailed operations. If you do not
know how to use this measurement function, do not use it.
Use of this measurement method without a working
knowledge of the operating procedure may bring about the
death of, or a serious injury to, the user.
137

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(1) Manual reference position return operation

First, manually return to the reference position. When reference
position return has been performed previously, this screen is not
displayed.
Operation)
After manually returning to the reference position along the X and Z axes,
press the [NXTPG] soft key.
[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN
*** TOOL PREPARATION ***
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
90
90
120
AN
AN
AN
60
60
30
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
NO. 101
1. RETURN X, Z AXIS TO REFERENCE POINT
<
NXTPG
RETURN
To return to the tooling data screen, press the [RETURN] soft key.
NOTE
On the setup screen, data of the tool for which the geometry
compensation is measured is displayed at the top of the
screen with the data of tools registered before and after the
tool.
138

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(2) Tool indexing

The tool index request screen appears after the reference position
return request screen described in the previous section. The tool to
be measured is indexed from the machine operators panel.
Operation)
After indexing a tool from the machine operators panel, press the [END]
soft key.
[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN

2.
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
90
90
120
AN
AN
AN
60
60
30
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
NO. 101
CHANGE TO ACTUAL TOOL

AFTER CHANGING TO ACTUAL TOOL,
PUSH SOFTKEY [END]
<
PREPG NXTPG END
RETURN
The [PREPG] soft key displays the previous page, the [NXTPG] soft
key displays the next page, and the [RETURN] soft key displays the
previous screen.
139

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(3) Measuring compensation along the Zaxis

The screen for measuring compensation along the Zaxis appears
after the tool index request screen described in the previous section.
The compensation is measured by manually bringing the tool into
contact with the end face of the workpiece.
Operation)
After manually moving the tool so that it touches the end face of the
workpiece, press the [END] soft key.
[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
90
90
120
AN
AN
AN
60
60
30
PREPG NXTPG
END
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
NO. 101
3. CUT A WORK AT END SURFACE AND BRING

THE TOOL EDGE THERE IN MANUAL MODE
(BUT CUTTING IS AT ONLY FIRST TIME)
AFTER THIS OPERATION,
PUSH SOFTKEY [END]
<
RETURN
As displayed on the above screen, the end face of the workpiece is cut off
only when the compensation is measured for the first time.
140

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(4) Measuring the compensation along the Xaxis

The screen for measuring the compensation along the Xaxis
appears after the screen for measuring compensation along the
Zaxis described in the previous section. The compensation value
is measured by manually bringing the tool into contact with the outer
surface of the workpiece.
Operation)
After manually moving the tool to touch the outer surface of the
workpiece, press the [END] soft key.
[CAP.; HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
90
90
120
AN
AN
AN
60
60
30
PREPG NXTPG
END
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
NO. 101
4. CUT A WORK AT OUTSURFACE AND BRING

THE TOOL EDGE THERE IN MANUAL MODE
(BUT CUTTING IS AT ONLY FIRST TIME)
AFTER THIS OPERATION,
PUSH SOFTKEY [END]
<
RETURN
As displayed on the above screen, the end face of the workpiece is cut off
only when the compensation value is measured for the first time.
141

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(5) Measuring the outside diameter of a workpiece

The screen for measuring the diameter of a workpiece appears after
the screen for measuring the compensation along the Xaxis.
Measure the diameter of the workpiece using a tool such as vernier
calipers, then enter the reading into the MX field (workpiece
diameter) on the screen.
Operation)
When the diameter of a workpiece is 100 mm
100 INPUT
[END]
[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
90
90
120
AN
AN
AN
60
60
30
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
MX=
MZ=
100.000
0.000
NO. 101
5. FING OF SHIFT (MZ) OF WORK PATH (MX)

AND DIRECTLY INPUT THE FIGURE
THEN, PUSH SOFTKEY [END]
MX
MZ
<
PREPG
END
RETURN
If necessary, enter the following data in the MZ field (shift along the
Zaxis) before pressing the [END] soft key.
D When the program reference position is on the end face of a workpiece
To shift the end face of the workpiece, enter the desired shift.
D When the program reference position is on the end face of a chuck
Enter the length of the workpiece.
When [END] is pressed, a tool geometry compensation value calculation
is performed, the result of the calculation being written into the tool
geometry compensation field. This tool geometry compensation value is
the same as that for the NC.
At the same time, 0 is written into the wear compensation field for the
compensation number.
The original tooling data screen is redisplayed.
142
B62444E1/04
12.1.6
Measuring Tool
Geometry
Compensation when a
Tool Setter is Used
OPERATION

MACHINING PROGRAMS
When a tool setter is provided, tool geometry compensation is measured

in the same manner as for when no tool setter is used. The compensation
is measured by calling the setup guidance screen on the tooling data
directory screen.
WARNING
When measuring tool geometry compensation on the
X/Zaxis using this method, keep the spindle at a stop, and
push the tool against the sensor with a feedrate as low as
possible, using manual pulse generator feed. Also, be sure to
keep the safety door of the machining station closed.
Refer to the applicable manual supplied by the respective
machine tool builders for detailed operations. If you do not
know how to use this measurement function, do not use it.
Use of this measurement method without a working
knowledge of the operating procedure may cause the tool to
bump against the workpiece, machine, and/or sensor, possibly
resulting in damage to the tool, machine, and/or sensor, and
even injuries.
(1) Manual reference position return operation and tool indexing
The screen for requesting the manual reference position return and
the screen for requesting tool index are displayed in the same way
as for when no tool setter is used.
143

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(2) Measurement using a sensor

The above operations display the screen for measuring
compensation using a sensor. Measure the compensation by
manually bringing the tool into contact with the sensor.
In this case, the sensor to which the tool is brought into contact with
is displayed on the screen using the icon. Bring the tool into contact
with that sensor.
Operation)
Manually bring the tool into contact with the specified senor.
The number is displayed in reverse video.
[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
90
90
120
AN
AN
AN
60
60
30
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
MX=
MZ=
120.000
20.000
NO. 101
3. BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN

CONTACT WITH THE SENSOR
FROM ZAXIS DIRECTION
1
4
2
3
<
PREPG
144
END
RETURN

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
When the tool touches the sensor, the sensor to be touched next is
automatically displayed.
Operation)
Manually bring the tool into contact with the specified sensor.
[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
90
90
120
AN
AN
AN
60
60
30
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
MX=
MZ=
120.000
20.000
NO. 101
3. BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN

CONTACT WITH THE SENSOR
FROM ZAXIS DIRECTION
1
4
2
3
<
PREPG
RETURN
Once an Xaxis measurement has been completed, a tool geometry

compensation value calculation is performed, the result of the calculation
being written into the tool geometry compensation field. This tool
geometry compensation value is the same as that for the NC.
At the same time, 0 is written into the wear compensation field for the
compensation number.
The original tooling data screen is redisplayed, and the result of the
measurement is displayed in the tool geometry compensation field.
145

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
12.1.7
Chuck Barrier
WARNING
Before using a chuck barrier supported by the conversational
function, make sure that the barrier area data is set correctly,
that the barrier function works at the correct position, and that
the tool will not bump against the chuck or tailstock, using a
manual operation (such as jog feed or manual pulse generator
feed).
If the tool bumps against the chuck or tailstock, the tool and/or
machine may be damaged, and even injuries may occur.
(1) Specifying a chuck barrier

On the setting screen before execution
0101 INPUT (Tcode of the tool currently indexed)
Position the cursor at the chuck number field (C=).
1 INPUT (Chuck No.)
Position the cursor at the chuck barrier field, and manually move the tool
to the upper right corner of the chuck.
[SET] (Chuck barrier specification)
DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG *** SETTING OF PREMACHINING ***
HEADL
BASIS TCODE
WSHIFT (INC)
END REMOVAL
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO
TOOLCHG POS
T=
SZ=
CZ=
C=
X=
Z=
X=
Z=
[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR
0101
OUTPUT T
WSHIFT (INC)
T=
SZ=
TAILSTOCK NO
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=
2.000
1
0.000
0.000
146
0.000
0.000
OPERATION
B62444E1/04

MACHINING PROGRAMS
(a) For external claw chucks
Tool
Chuck
Move the tool to the upper right corner of the chuck with a
clearance of about 2 mm along the X and Zaxes.
Workpiece
(b) For internal claw chuck
Tool
Chuck
Move the tool to the upper right corner of the chuck with a
clearance of about 2 mm along the X and Zaxes.
Workpiece
NOTE
A tool needs a distance of 2 mm from the tip of the tool to
the end of the chuck when the tool stops after hitting the
stroke limit while it moves in rapid traverse. For safety,
however, a larger distance may be required.
147

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(2) Details of the chuck barrier

The Chuck barrier uses the second limit of the extended stored stroke
check function. When this function is used for other purposes, the
chuck barrier is not available.
The chuck barrier checks only the tip of a tool (or the center of a
rotating tool). It does check the entire tool.
When the second limit is used, set bit 0 (INOUT) of parameter No.
1300 to 0 to suppress machining in the area inside the second limit.
The chuck barrier function uses a program command (G22 X _Z _I
_K _) for the second limit to move an inhibited area by the distance
equalivalent to the difference between the offset of the reference tool
and that of each tool.
This function also modifies the figure of an inhibited area according
to the figure of the chuck used and the area to be machined in each
process.
(a) For external claw chucks (turning tool)
f
L
L1
g
W
c
W1
b
L
(1)
Calculation for each point
: Chuck reference position specified on the

setting screen before execution
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1
Z = Z coordinate of point a
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL
: X = X coordinate of point a
CL
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D
CL
: Tool geometry compensation (X)
b
c
d
e
GOX
148
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
WOX
WSX

MACHINING PROGRAMS
: Tool wear compensation (X)

: Shift of the X coordinate in the workpiece
coordinate system (X)
: Outside diameter of the workpiece
: Workpiece length
: Tool geometry compensation (Z)
: Tool wear compensation (Z)
: Shift of the Z coordinate in the workpiece
coordinate system (Z)
: Amount of clearance (100 mm or 10 inches)
: Dimensions of the chuck
D
L
GOZ
WOZ
WSZ
CL
L, W, L1, W1
(2) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b, e,

and f
Bar machining
: Outer surface near the edges, outer surface
away from the edges, end faces near the
edges, end faces away from the edges
Pattern repetition
Residual machining
: Outer surface and end faces
Threading
: Outer surface
Grooving
Necking
End facing, independent operation, and subprogram calling
(3) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points c, d, e,
and g
Bar machining
: Inner surface near the edges, inner surface away

from the edges
Pattern repetition
: Inner surface near the edges, inner surface

away from the edges
Residual machining
: Inner surface and inner bottom surface
Threading
: Inner surface
Grooving
: Inner surface
Necking
away from the edges
Center drilling, drilling, and tapping
NOTE
When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is on
the end face of the chuck, the length of the workpiece (L)
is ignored. The machining allowance for the end face is not
included in workpiece length L.
When a blank plate is machined, point X1 on the outer
surface of a workpiece is used.
149

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(b) For internal claw chucks (turning tool)
W1
b
c
L1
L
e
(1) Calculation of each point

a
: Chuck reference position specified on the

setting screen before execution
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H (W W1)

Z = Zcoordinate of point a
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H

Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L + L1

Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L + L1

CL
: X = Xcoordinate of point a
CL
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H

CL
GOX
WOX
WSX
: Shift of the Xcoordinate in the workpiece

: Inside diameter of the workpiece
: Workpiece length
GOZ
WOZ
WSZ
: Shift of the Z coordinate in the workpiece

CL
L, W, L1, W1
150
OPERATION
B62444E1/04

MACHINING PROGRAMS
(2) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b, e,

and f
Bar machining: Outer surface near the edges, outer surface away from the
edges, end faces near the edges, end faces away from the edges
Pattern repetition
Residual machining
Threading

: Outer surface
Grooving
Necking

End facing, single action, and subprogram calling

(3)
When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points c, d, e, and g
Bar machining
Residual machining
Threading
: Inner surface near the edges and inner

surface away from the edges
: Inner surface near the edges and inner
surface away from the edges
: Inner surface and inner bottom surface
: Inner surface
Grooving
: Inner surface
Necking

away from the edge
Pattern repetition
Center drilling, drilling, and tapping

NOTE
is ignored. The machining allowance of the end face is not
When a blank plate is machined, the point closest to the
chuck on the inner surface is used.
151

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(c) External claw chucks (rotating tool)
a
a
f
L1
c
W
e
W1
d
b
e

a
: X = Xcoordinate of the chuck reference

position specified on the setting screen
before execution
Z = Zcoordinate of the chuck reference
before execution + CR
before execution
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1 CR
CL
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1 CR
CL
CL
CL
: Shift of the X coordinate in the workpiece
: Radius of the tool
b
b
e
GOX
WOX
WSX
CR
152

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
D
L
GOZ
WOZ
WSZ
:
:
:
:
:
Outside diameter of a workpiece

Workpiece length
Tool geometry compensation (Z)
Tool wear compensation (Z)
Shift of the Z coordinate in the workpiece
CL
L, W, L1, W1
(2) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b,

e, and f
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
:
:
:
:
Side face
Side face
Side face
Side face
Cylindrical machining
: Side face

e, and f
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Caxis notching
:
:
:
:
:
Side face
Side face
Side face
Side face
End and side faces
NOTE
is ignored. The machining allowance for the end face is not
surface is used.
(d) Internal claw chucks (rotating tool)
a
a
f
f
W
W1
c
b
L1
e
e
153

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04

a

before execution

position specified on the setting screen before
execution + CR
position specified on the setting screen before
execution


CR

CL

CR
CL
CL
CL
GOX
WOX
WSX
: Shift of the Xcoordinate in the workpiece

CR
: Radius of the tool
: Inside diameter of a workpiece
: Workpiece length
GOZ
WOZ
WSZ
: Shift of the Zcoordinate in the workpiece

CL
L, W, L1, W1
154
B62444E1/04

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION

e, and f
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Cylindrical machining
:
:
:
:
:
Side face
Side face
Side face
Side face
Side face

e, and f
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Notching
:
:
:
:
:
End face
End face
End face
End face
End and side faces
NOTE
the end face of a chuck, the length of the workpiece (L) is
ignored. The machining allowance for the end face is not
surface is used.
12.1.8
Chuck/Tailstock Barrier
When the chuck/tailstock barrier function, an optional NC function, is selected,

it replaces the chuck barrier function described in the previous section. For
details of this optional function, refer to the operators manual supplied with the
NC.
Chuck/tailstock barrier data can be displayed and entered by using the

conversational setting screen before execution. For details, see Section
12.1.3.
155

MACHINING PROGRAMS
12.2
12.2.1
(1) Execution in the conversational mode

After operating as instructed in Section 12.1, Operation before
Execution, start execution of a machining program on the machine
operators panel.
When the program screen is called, the following screen is displayed
during execution of the machining program.
Example of a screen for current positions for a twopath lathe
Starting Execution of
Machining Programs
POSITION
[ABSOLUTE]
[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR
HEADL
X1
Z1
C1
0.000
0.000
0.000
[CURRENT]
X 0.000
Z 0.000
C 0.000
X2
Z2
C2
[NEXT]
G00
X 0.000
Z 0.000
C 0.000
(ACTUAL SPEED)
F: 2000 MIM/MIN
S: 800 RPM
OVR_PLAY BACK
PRC OVRD 80%
ABS
MACIN
LOAD METER
X jjjjjjJJJ
Z jjjjjjJ
C jjj
S jjjj
REL
G00
CPROC (01) BAR

OUTTER
NPROC (02) GR OUTTER (NORMAL)
<
B62444E1/04
Machining programs created conversationally can be executed in the

conversational mode. It can be also executed after being converted to the
NCformat program.
EXECUTING
MACHINING
PROGRAMS
G00
OPERATION
PROC
ES
LIST
0.000
0.000
0.000
[CURRENT]
X 0.000
Z 0.000
C 0.000
S
[NEXT]
G00
X 0.000
Z 0.000
C 0.000
T
CPROC (01) BAR

OUTTER
NPROC (02) GR OUTTER (NORMAL)
(ACTUAL SPEED)
F: 2000 MIM/MIN
S: 800 RPM
OVR_PLAY BACK
PRC OVRD 80%
LOAD METER
X jjjjjjJJJ
Z jjjjjjJ
C jjj
S jjjj
HEAD HEAD
OVR
L
R
TEACH
(FS16/18TB)
By starting the program while the graphic screen is displayed by pressing

the GRAPH function button, an animated simulation can be displayed
when a workpiece is being machined.
NOTE
1 If another screen is called while an animated simulation is
displayed, the animated simulation may be suspended
depending on the type of screen called.
2 The sample execution inprogress screen shown above
assumes that the override playback function is enabled.
156
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
12.2.2
Override Playback
Function

MACHINING PROGRAMS
When a conversational machining program is executed directly, a feedrate

override value can be memorized for each process.
This function can be enabled by setting bit 7 (OPB) of parameter No. 9765
to 1.
(1) Override teaching
When a conversational machining program is executed, a feedrate
override value, set on the operators panel, can be memorized by
each process (override teaching) by using the execution inprogress
screen (Section 12.2.1).
(a) The execution inprogress screen is displayed during the direct
execution of a conversational machining program.
(b) When a twopath lathe is used, the tool post for which override
teaching is used can be specified using [HEAD L]/[HEAD R].
Override teaching can be specified for use with both tool posts at
the same time. The soft key corresponding to a specified tool post
is displayed in reverse video.
(c) When [OVR TEACH] is pressed, the following message and soft
keys are displayed:
(ACTUAL SPEED)
F: 2000 MM/MIN
S: 800 RPM
OVRPLAY BACK
PRC OVRD 80%
EXEC REALLY?
YES [EXEC]
NO: [CANCEL]
EXEC
CAN
(d) By pressing [EXEC], the feedrate override value currently set on

the operators panel is memorized. When [CAN] is pressed, the
previous screen is redisplayed.
NOTE
1 Override teaching is performed only for the process being
executed when [OVR TEACH] is pressed. Even if the next
process is started before the teaching operation has been
completed, a feedrate override value is memorized in the
process being executed when [OVR TEACH] is pressed.
2 When bit 6 (OPR) of parameter No. 9765 is set to 0:
Override teaching cannot be performed when the memory
protect switch is set.
When bit 6 (OPR) of parameter No. 9765 is set to 1:
Override teaching can be performed even when the
memory protect switch is set.
157

MACHINING PROGRAMS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(2) Override playback

When a conversational machining program, for which override
teaching is performed, is executed, its memorized override values
are automatically applied (override playback).
In this case, however, note that an override value of 100% must be
set. Otherwise, the feedrate will be overridden twice.
When a conversational machining program is executed using the
override playback function, OVR.PLAY BACK blinks on the
execution inprogress screen.
When conversion to an NC program is performed while the override
playback function is being used, overridden feedrate data is output.
NOTE
1 If override teaching is performed with a machining program
being executed using the override playback function,
override values, produced by multiplying one override value
by another, are memorized.
2 The override teaching and override playback functions can
be used with the following processes:
Bar machining (excluding finish machining)
Pattern repeating (excluding finish machining)
Residual machining
End facing
Grooving (excluding finish machining of trapezoidal
grooves)
Necking
Center drilling/drilling
Caxis center drilling/drilling
Caxis grooving/notching/cylindrical machining
Yaxis center drilling/drilling
Yaxis milling
WARNING
When using the override playback function, especially when
increasing an override value, make sure that the override
value is sufficient for successful machining.
If the override value is too high, the machine may be forced to
158
B62444E1/04
12.2.3
Execution of a
Conversational
Machining Program
After Conversion to an
NC Program
OPERATION

MACHINING PROGRAMS
A machining program that was created conversationally, and which has

been converted to an NC program, can be executed in exactly the same
way as an ordinary NC program.
The parameters listed below allow a user to determine whether to perform
animated simulation with an NC program created by conversion.
D Bit 1 (GRO) of parameter No. 9773
0 : Outputs an NC command (G10) for animated simulation upon
conversion to an NC program.
1 : Does not output an NC command (G10) for animated simulation
upon conversion to an NC program.
D Bit 2 (OPO) of parameter No. 9773
0 : Outputs an NC command (G10) for animated simulation without
modification when the GRFOUT bit is set to 0.
1 : Outputs an NC command (G10) for animated simulation with /
(optional block skip) specified at the beginning of the block
containing the NC command when the GRFOUT bit is set to 0.
In addition, the following parameters are also related to conversion to NC
programs.
D Bit 6 (MDL) of parameter No. 9773
0 : Outputs the G and F codes of group 01 upon conversion to an NC
program, even if the codes are the same as those in the previous
block.
1 : Does not output the G and F codes of group 01 upon conversion to an
NC program if the codes are the same as those in the previous block.
159
13. SETTING DATA
13
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
SETTING DATA
Before creating a program in the conversational mode, data items such as

TOOL DATA and MACHINING CONDITION must be set.
These data items are used for the automatic selection of a tool and the
automatic determination of machining conditions.
Pressing the soft key [6](TOOL, CUTTING CONDITION DATA) on the
basic menu screen displays the following tool data menu:
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""""
""""
"""""""""
""""
""""
"
[CAP.:HEADL]
MACHINING DATA MENU

1
<
TOOL FILE LIST
DISPLAY
/EDIT
TOOL
ENTRY
TOOL DATA
TRANS.
COPY
DELETE
MACHINING CONDITION (GENERAL)
MACHINING CONDITION (THREADING)
MACHINING CONDITION (GROOVING)
MACHINING CONDITION (DRILL)
MACHINING CONDITION (TAP)
MACHINING CONDITION (MILLING)
MACHINING CONDITION (COEFFICIENT)
MACHINING CONDITION (ROUGHNESS)
""
"" """"
"" """""
"""""
"
10
PRETOOL LIST
11
CHUCK, TAILSTOCK DATA
CHUCK
CHUCK
FIGURE
TAIL
STOCK
TAIL
FIGURE
Pressing the rightmost soft key [+] on the above screen displays the soft
keys on the second page:
<
10
11
READ
PUNCH
CLEAR +
The relevant screen is displayed by pressing the soft key corresponding

to an item number for each screen.
NOTE
When the leftmost soft key [ ] is pressed on the screen
displayed on the basic menu, the screen can be returned to
the main menu.
160
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
13. SETTING DATA
WARNING
When creating a machining program using a conversational
function, make sure that all necessary data among the tool
data, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool
list, and chuck/tailstock data is set correctly.
If this data is not set correctly, the cutting conditions necessary
for machining will not be set correctly, possibly causing
damage to the tool, and even injuries.
161
13. SETTING DATA
13.1
TOOL DATA FILE
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
As shown below, tools to be registered are assigned to tool management

numbers according to the type of machining.
101 to 149:
201 to 249:
301 to 349:
401 to 449:
501 to 549:
601 to 649:
701 to 749:
801 to 849:
901 to 949:
151 to 199:
251 to 299:
451 to 499:
551 to 599:
651 to 699:
751 to 799:
851 to 899:
951 to 999:
Outer surface machining

End facing
Threading on the inner surface
End facing on the inner bottom
Grooving on the inner surface
Drilling
Center drilling
Side cutting
Reaming
Inner surface machining
Threading on the outer surface
Grooving on the outer surface
Grooving on the end surface
Tapping
End milling
Chamfering
Boring
Up to 40 or 99 tools can be registered in the tool data file.

The tool specified in the machining program coded in the conversational
mode is called a prepared tool. Mark @ is given to the left of the
management number of the prepared tool on the tool data screen. The
management number is displayed in reverse.
The selected tool post and tool direction for the prepared tool cannot be
changed.
162
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.1
Displaying the Tool
Data Directory Screen
*** TOOL FILE LIST
101#01 OUTTER
102#02 OUTTER
103#02 OUTTER
251#01 OUTR TH
451#01 OUTR GR
452#02 OUTR GR
601#01 DRILL
Selecting the tool data screen on the tool data menu screen calls the tool
data directory screen.
***
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T1212
T1212
T0808
No.=
< TRANS. COPY DELETE
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
REST No. OF
0.400 AC
90
0.400 AC
90
0.400 AC
90
0.000 AN
60
0.000 WN 3.000
0.200 WN 3.000
20.000 AC
118
TOOL=92 [CAP. :HEADL]

AN
60 TW
20.000
AN
60 TW
20.000
AN
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
AA
90 TL
15.000
AA
90 TL
5.000
TL
170.000
SFTKY
TOOL
ENTRY
DISPLY
/EDIT
MENU
RETURN
NOTE
The above example shows the tool data directory screen for
the 2path lathe. In the 1path lathe, the tool post number
(#L or #R) is not displayed on the right of the tool
management number.
163
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
13.1.2
Operations on the Tool
Data Directory Screen
B62444E1/04
(1) Registering a new tool

Press the soft key [TOOL ENTRY], then press the soft key
corresponding to the desired tool.
[CAP. :HEADL]
101#01
102#02
103#02
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505
T0101
T0202
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 000
TOOL TYPE
GENERAL
OUTTER
INNER
END FACE
THREAD
OUTTER
INNER
INNER BOTTOM FACE CHAMFER
GROOVE
OUTER
INNER
END FACE
TOOL TYPE SOFTKEY
<
RN 0.400
RN 0.400
RN 0.400
DRILL
TAP
CNT.DR
END MIL
SIDCUT
AC 90
AC 90
AC 90
AN 60
AN 60
AN 60
TW 20.000
TW 20.000
TW 20.000
GENERAL
THREAD
BOTTOM
GROOVE
REAMA
BORE
GENERL GENERL GENERL THREAD THREAD

OUTTER INNER FACING OUTTER INNER
BOTTOM GROOVE GROOVE GROOVE TOOL +

OUTTER INNER FACE
LIST
Pressing the rightmost soft key [+] displays the following soft keys:
<
DRILL
TAP
CNT.DR THROW
AWAY
TOOL
LIST
NOTE
The [THROWAWAY] soft key is displayed by setting bit 0
of parameter No. 9765 to 1.
<
END
MIL
< REAMA
SIDCUT CHAMFR
BORE
164
TOOL
LIST
TOOL
LIST
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(2) Deleting a tool data item

Move the cursor to the tool data item to be deleted and press the soft
key [DELETE]. The following prompt and soft keys are then
displayed:
NO. =
<
SFTKY
DELETE REALLY? YES: [DELETE]
CANCEL DELETE
NO: [CANCEL]
TOOL +
LIST
Pressing the soft key [DELETE] can delete the tool data item. Pressing
the soft key [CANCEL] can cancel the deletion.
(3) Copying a tool data item
Move the cursor to the tool data item to be copied and press the soft
key [COPY]. The following message is then displayed. Enter a new
tool management number with numeric keys, then press the soft key
[COPY] again.
NO. =
< TRANS. COPY
SFTKY
PRESS SOFT KEY [COPY] AFTER TOOL # INPUT

TOOL
TOOL
ENTRY
ENTRY
DELETE
DISPLY
/EDIT
MENU
RETURN
(4) Changing the priority of tools to be selected

To change the order of registered tools by changing a tool
management number, move the cursor to the tool data item to be
changed and press the soft key [TRANS.]. The following message
is then displayed. Enter a new tool management number with
numeric keys and press the soft key [TRANS.].
NO. =
< TRANS. COPY
SFTKY
DELETE
PRESS SOFT KEY [TRANS.] AFTER TOOL # INPUT

TOOL
ENTRY
DISPLY
/EDIT
MENU
RETURN
NOTE
By setting bit 7 (AUT) of parameter 9774 to 1, the tool having
the smallest tool management number can automatically be
selected from among the tools satisfying the specified
conditions.
When bit 7 (AUT) is set to 0, the tool that requires the
minimum cutting time is selected.
165
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.3
Tool Data for
Machining Outer
Surfaces, Inner
Surfaces, End Faces,
and Inner Bottom
Faces
[CAP. :HEADL]
101#01
102#02
103#02
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T0101 RN
T0202 RN
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 101
TOOL TYPE OUTTER (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN
COMMON
OUTPUT T
0505
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOSERADIS RN=0.400
CUTTING EDG AC=
90
NOSE ANGLE AN=
60
AC
NOSE WIDTH TW=20.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
3
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID
90
90
90
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
TW
AN
RN
<
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
Tool post selection :
TOOL
LIST
TOOL
FIGURE
Specify when a tool is registered.

Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or
[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.
TOOL DIREC
166
Specify by pressing one of the following soft

keys.
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
(1) Outer surface (
(2) Outer surface (
(3) Inner surface (
(5) End face (
(4) Inner surface (
(6) End face (
(7) Inner bottom face (
(8) Outer surface, inner surface, and

end face (
)
Used for residual machining of drilled hole bottoms
NOTE
A tool shown on the screen by pressing the tool direction
soft key with a filledin tip indicates that the cutter is
equipped with a tip at this side. A tool shown with an
unfilledin tip indicates that shown the cutter is equipped
with a tip at the opposite side.
167
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
ROUGH/FIN
Specify by pressing one of the [ROUGH], [FIN],

and [COMMON] soft keys.
OUTPUT T
Tcode to be output when a machining program

is executed (Four digits/six digits)
REVOLUT.D
Direction in which a spindle rotates during

cutting Specify by pressing the [NORMAL]
(= M03) or [REVERS] (= M04) soft key.
NOSERADIS (RN):
Radius of a tool tip

When bit 0 (TLC) of parameter 9774 is set to 1,
the tool tip radius in a conversationally coded
program isspecified separately from that in an
NCformat program, and the former valueis
copied to the NC offset data when the program
is executed.
When the bit is set to 0, the same tool tip radius
is used in both a conversationally coded program
and an NCformat program.
CUTTING EDG (AC) :
See the following figures.
NOSEANGLE (AN) :
(1) Outer surface (right hand)
(2) Outer surface (left hand)
AN
AN
AC
(3) Inner surface (right hand)
AC
AC
(4) Inner surface (left hand)
AC
AN
AN
(5) End face (negative direction)
AN
(6) End face and inner bottom face (positive direction)

AC
AN
AC
NOTE
When a round nose tool is used, the cutting edge angle and
tool angle are not displayed.
168
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
NOSE WIDTH (TW) :
TW
Need to be set only when the figure of a tool to

be drawn is determined.
TW
IMGNRY NOS (TD) :
Position of a virtual tool tip when compensating

the tool tip radius
Example of setting)
(1) Outer surface (right hand/round nose tool) =3
(2) Outer surface (left hand) = 4
(3) Inner surface (right hand/round nose tool) =2
(4) Inner surface (left hand) = 1
(5) End face (negative direction/round nose tool)
=3
(6) End face and inner bottom face (positive
direction) = 2
(7) Roundnose tool=
TL MATRIAL (TM) :
Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],

[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys. The tool
material [SPCIAL] can be altered by parameters.
169
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.4
Tool Data for External
Threads and Internal
Threads
103#02
251#01
451#01
452#02
601#01
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR GR
OUTR GR
DRILL
T0202
T0404
T1212
T1212
T0808
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.000
0.000
0.200
20.000
AC
90
AN
60
WN 3.000
WN 3.000
AC
118
AN
AA
AA
[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
90 TL
15.000
90 TL
5.000
TL
170.000
60
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 251
TOOL TYPE OUTR TH (HEADL)
TW
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSERADIS
NOSE ANGLE
NOSE WIDTH
TL MATRIAL
<
0404
NORMAL
RN= 0.000
AN=
60
TW=40.000
TM=CARBID
AN
RN
MENU
HEADL HEADR
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
(1) External thread
TOOL
FIGURE
(2) Internal thread

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
170
TOOL
LIST
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
OUTPUT T

REVOLUT.D

cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] (= M03) or
[REVERS] (= M04) soft key.
NOSERADI (RN) :
Need not be set.
NOSEANGLE (AN) :
AN
NOSE WIDTH (TW) :
Need to be set only when the figure of a tool

to be drawn is determined.
(1) External thread
(2) Internal thread
TW
TW
TL MATRIAL(TM)
171

[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.5
Tool Data for Grooving
on Outer Surfaces,
Inner Surfaces, and
End Faces
103#02
251#01
451#01
452#02
601#01
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR GR
OUTR GR
DRILL
T0202
T0404
T1212
T1212
T0808
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.000
0.000
0.200
20.000
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 251
TOOL TYPE OUTR GR (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN COMMON
OUTPUT T
1212
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
TL
NOSERADIS RN= 0.000
NOSE WIDTH WN= 3.000
SLANT ANGL AA=
90
CUTTR LNGT TL=15.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
3
AC
90
AN
60
WN 3.000
WN 3.000
AC
118
AN
AA
AA
[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
90 TL
15.000
90 TL
5.000
TL
170.000
60
AA
RN
WIN
< HEADL HEADR
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
TOOL
LIST
TOOL
FIGURE

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
TOOL DIREC
Specify by pressing one of the following soft

keys.
(1) Grooving on outer surfaces (
172
) (2) Grooving on outer surfaces (
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
(3) Grooving on inner surfaces (
(5) Grooving on end faces (
(6) Grooving on end faces (
: Programming point
ROUGH/FIN

OUTPUT T

is executed (Four digits only)
REVOLUT.D

cutting
NOSERADIS (RN):
Radius of a tool tip
RN
173
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
NOSE WIDTH (WN) :
B62444E1/04
Width of the cutting edge of a grooving tool
WN
SLANT ANGLE (AA) :

(1) Grooving on outer surfaces
(2) Grooving on inner surfaces
AA
AA
(3) Grooving on end faces
AA
CUTTR LNGT (TL) : Effective length of a grooving tool tip
TL
174
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
13. SETTING DATA
IMGNRY NOS (TD) :
Position of a virtual tool tip when

compensating the tool tip radius
Example of setting)
(1) Grooving on outer surfaces (left reference
position) = 3
(2) Grooving on outer surfaces (right
reference position) = 4
(3) Grooving on inner surfaces (left reference
position) = 2
(4) Grooving on inner surfaces (right
reference position) = 1
(5) Grooving on end faces (upper reference
position) = 2
(6) Grooving on end faces (lower reference
position) = 3
TL MATRIAL (TM) :

175
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.6
Tool Data for Drilling
451#01
452#02
601#01
602#01
603#01
OUTR GR
T1212 RN
OUTR GR
T1515 RN
DRILL
(F) T0303 DD
DRILL
(F) T0808 DD
DRILL
(S) T0909 DD
0.000
0.200
20.000
25.000
12.000
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 601
TOOL TYPE
DRILL(HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
MILLING/TRN COMMON
OUTPUT T
0303
AC
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOMINLD
DD=20.000
NOSE ANGLE AC= 118
CUTTER LNGT TL=60.000
<
FACE
WN 3.000
WN 3.000
AC
118
AC
180
AC
150
AA
AA
[CAP. :HEADL]
90 TL
15.000
90 TL
5.000
TL
60.000
TL
90.000
TL
40.000
DD
TL
SIDE
CUT
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
TOOL
LIST
TOOL
FIGURE

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
TOOL DIREC
Specify by pressing the [FACE] or [CROSS]

soft key.
(1) Drilling an end face

(turning or Caxis machining, Yaxis
machining)
176
(2) Drilling an side face (Caxis machin

ing, Yaxis machining)
[CROSS]
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
MILLNG/TRN
Specify by pressing one of the [TURN],

[MILLNG], and [COMMON] soft keys.
[MILLNG] : Milling tools for Caxis/Yaxis
machining
[TURN]
: Tools for turning
[COMMON] : Tools that are used for both
milling and turning
OUTPUT T

is executed (T4 digits/T6 digits)
REVOLUT.D
Direction in which a spindle or rotating tool

rotates during cutting
NOTE
The M code for normal rotation (parameter 9877) or reverse
rotation (parameter 9878) can be set in the respective
parameter for Caxis/Yaxis machining.
NOMINAL DIA (DD) :
Nominal diameter of a drill
NOSE ANGLE (AC) :
Point angle of a drill
CUTTR LNGTH (TL) :
Effective length of a drill
DD
AC
TL
TL MATRIAL (TM)
177

13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.7
Tool Data for Tapping
[CAP. :HEADL]
602#01
603#01
651#01
701#01
751#02
DRILL
DRILL
TAP
CENTER
ENDMILL
(F)
(S)
(F)
(F)
(S)
T0808
T0909
T0303
T0808
T0909
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 651
TOOL TYPE TAP (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
MILLING/TRN COMMON
OUTPUT T
0303
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOMINLD
DD=20.00
PITCH
PT= 1.500
DD
DD
DD
DD
TR
25.000
12.000
20.000
2.000
12.000
AC
180
AC
150
PT 1.500
AC
90
EN
3
TL
TL
TL
CD
TL
90.000
40.000
60.000
2.000
40.000
PT
DD
TL
<
FACE
SIDE
CUT
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
TOOL
LIST
TOOL
FIGURE

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
TOOL DIREC

soft key.
(1) Tapping on end faces

(turning or Caxis machining, Yaxis
machining)
MILLNG/TRN
178
(2) Tapping on side faces

(Caxis machining, Yaxis
machining)
[CROSS]

B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
OUTPUT T

REVOLUT.D

NOMINAL DIA (DD) :
Nominal diameter of a tap
PITCH (PT)
Pitch of a tap
CUTTR LNGTH (TL) :
Effective length of a tap
PT
DD
TL
TL MATRIAL (TM) :
179

13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.8
Tool Data for Center
Drills
[CAP. :HEADL]
603#01
651#01
701#01
751#02
752#02
DRILL
TAP
CENTER
ENDMILL
ENDMILL
(S)
(F)
(F)
(F)
(S)
T0909
T0303
T0808
T0909
T1111
DD
DD
DD
TR
TR
12.000
20.000
2.000
12.000
2.500
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 701
TOOL TYPE
DRILL (HEADR)
TOOL DIREC FACE
MILLING/TRN COMMON
OUTPUT T
0303
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOMINLD
DD= 2.000
MAX DIA
DT=10.000
DD
NOSE ANGLE AC=
90
CUT DPTH
CD= 2.000
<
FACE
AC
AC
150
PT 1.500
AC
90
EN
3
EN
3
TL
TL
CD
TL
TL
40.000
60.000
2.000
40.000
30.000
DT
CD
SIDE
CUT
MENU
RETURN
TOOL
LIST
TOOL
FIGURE
TOOL TYPE
TOOL POST
SELECTION

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
TOOL DIREC

soft key.
(1) Drilling an end face

(turning or Caxis machining,
Yaxis maching)
(2) Drilling an side face

(Caxis machining,
Yaxis machining)
[CROSS]
180
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
MILLNG/TRN

OUTPUT T

REVOLUT.D

Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] or
[REVERS] soft key.
NOMINAL DIA (DD)
Nominal diameter of a center drill
MAX DIA (DT)
Diameter of the base of a center drill.
NOSE ANGLE (AC) :
Point angle of a center drill
CUTTR LNGTH (CD) :
Effective length of a center drill
DD
AC
DT
CD
TL MATRIAL (TM) :
181

13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.9
Tool Data for
Throwaway Drills
451#01
452#02
631#03
OUTER GR
OUTER GR
TRWAWY
T1212 RN 0.000WN 3.00

T1515 RN 0.200WN 3.00
T0303 DD 20.000AC 180
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 631
TOOL TYPE
TRWAWY (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
MILLING/TRN COMMON
OUTPUT T
0303
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOMINLD
DD=20.000
NOSE ANGLE AC=180.000
CUTR LNGT
TL=60.000
AA
AA
90
90
[CAP. :HEADL]
TL 15.000
TL 5.000
TL 60.000
DD
TL
<
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
TOOL POST SELECTION :
TOOL
LIST
TOOL
FIGURE
To be selected when the tool is registered

To be selected using [HEADL]/
[HEAD]R]
NOTE
Tool post selection is possible only when a twopath lathe
is used.
OUTPUT T
T code (T followed by four digits/T followed by

six digits) output when a machining program is
executed
REVOLUTD
Direction of spindle or milling cutter rotation for

cutting.
Specified using [NORMAL
] (= M03) or
].
[REVERSE
NOTE
In Caxis/Yaxis machining, the M code for normal rotation
can be specified using parameter No. 9877, and the M code
for reverse rotation can be specified using parameter No.
9878.
182
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
NOMINLD
DD: Nominal diameter of a throwaway drill
NOSE ANGLE
AC: Point angle of a drill for throwaway drill

(Normally 180)
CUTR LNGT
TL: Effective drill length
183
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.10
Tool Data for End Mills
[CAP. :HEADL]
651#01
701#01
751#02
752#02
753#01
TAP
CENTER
ENDMILL
ENDMILL
ENDMILL
(F)
(F)
(F)
(F)
(S)
T0303
T0090
T1414
T1212
T1111
DD 20.000
DD 2.000
TR 5.000
TR 2.500
TR 5.000
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 751
TOOL TYPE
ENDMILL(HEADR)
TOOL DIREC FACE
ROUGH/FIN
COMMON
OUTPUT T
1414
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
TOOL RADIS TR= 5.000
NUM OF BLA EN=
3
IMGNRY NOS TD=
0
<
FACE
PT 1.500
AC
90
EN
3
EN
3
EN
3
TL
CD
TL
TL
TL
60.000
2.000
20.000
30.000
20.000
TL
TR
SIDE
CUT
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
TOOL
LIST
TOOL
FIGURE

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
TOOL DIREC
(1) End mill for end faces
184

soft key.
(2) End mill for side faces
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
ROUGH/FIN

OUTPUT T

REVOLUT.D
Direction in which a rotating tool rotates during

cutting
[REVERS] soft key.
NOTE
The M code for normal rotation (parameter 9877) or reverse
rotation (parameter 9878) can be set in the respective
parameter for Caxis machining and Yaxis machining
TOOL RADIS (TR)
NUM OF BLAD (EN) :
Radius of an end mill

When bit 0 (TLCOPY) of parameter 9774 is
set to 1, the cutter compensation value in a
conversationally coded program is specified
separately from that in an NCformat
program, and the former value is copied to
the NC offset data when a program is
executed.
When the bit is set to 0, the same cutter
compensation value is used in both a
conversationally coded program and an
NCformat program.
Number of cutting edges on an end mill
NOTE
When cutting conditions are determined automatically, the
feed amount per cutting edge is specified. An actual feed
amount is calculated by multiplying the feed amount in the
determined condition data by the number of cutting edges.
CUTTR LNGT (TL) :
Effective length of an end mill
TR
TL
IMGNRY NOS (TD) :
Must be set to 0.
TL MATRIAL (TM) :

185
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.11
Tool Data for Side
Cutters
752#02
753#01
801#01
851#01
852#01
ENDMILL
ENDMILL
SIDE CU
CHAMFER
CHAMFER
(F) T1212 TR
(S) T1111 TR
T0707 TR
(F) T1313 TR
(F) T1414 TR
2.500
5.000
30.000
15.000
15.000
EN
3
EN
3
EN
12
MD 2.000
MD 2.000
[CAP. :HEADL]
TL
30.000
TL
20.000
TW 5.000 TL
25.000
AN
90 CL
0.500
AN
90 CL
0.500
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 751
TOOL TYPE
SIDE CU(HEADL)
ROUGH/FIN
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSE WIDTH
TOOL RADIS
NUM OF BLA
CUTTR LNGT
IMGNRY NOS
TL MATRIAL
< ROUGH
FIN
COMMON
0707
NORMAL
TW= 5.000
TR=30.000
EN=
12
TL=25.000
TD=
0
TM=CARBID
TW
TR
TL
COMMON
MENU TOOL
RETURN LIST
TOOL TYPE
TOOL
FIGURE

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
ROUGH/FIN

OUTPUT T

186
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
REVOLUT.D

cutting
[REVERS] soft key.
NOSE WIDTH (TW) :
Width of a side cutter
TOOL RADIUS (TR) :
Radius of a side cutter

When bit 0 (TL) of parameter 9774 is set to
1, the cutter compensation value in a
conversationally coded program is specified
separately from that in an NCformat
program, and the former value is copied to
the NC offset data when execution is
selected.
When the bit is set to 0, the same cutter
compensation value is used in both a
conversationally coded program and an
NCformat program.
TR
TW
NUM OF BLADS (EN) :
Number of cutting edges on a side cutter
NOTE
When cutting conditions are determined automatically, the
feed amount per cutting edge is specified. An actual feed
amount is calculated by multiplying the feed amount in the
determined condition data by the number of cutting edges.
CUTTR LNGTH (TL) :
Effective length of a side cutter
TL
IMGNRY NOS (TD) :
Must be set to 0.
TL MATRIAL (TM) :

187
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.12
Tool Data for
Chamfering
[CAP. :HEADL]
753#01
801#01
851#01
852#01
901#01
ENDMILL
SIDE CU
CHAMFER
CHAMFER
REAMA
(S) T1111
T0707
(F) T1313
(S) T1414
(F) T1818
TR
TR
TR
TR
DD
5.000
30.000
15.000
15.000
22.000
EN
3
EN
12 TW 5.000
MD 5.000 AN
90
MD 2.000 AN
90
TL 70.000
TL
TL
CL
CL
20.000
25.000
2.000
0.500
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 851
TOOL TYPE CHAMFER (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
TOOL RADIS
SMALL DIAM
NOSE ANGLE
NOS CLRLNC
IMGNRY NOS
TL MATRIAL
<
FACE
1313
NORMAL
TR=15.000
MD= 5.000
AN=
90
CL= 2.000
TD=
0
TM=CARBID
CL
AN
TR
MD
SIDE
CUT
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
TOOL
TOOL
LIST FIGURE

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
TOOL DIREC
(1) End face chamfering
OUTPUT T
188

soft key.
(2) Side face chamfering

B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
REVOLUT.D

cutting
[REVERS] soft key.
TOOL RADIUS (TR) :
Radius of a chamfering tool
NOTE
To execute chamfering, calculate the required cutter
compensation value, then overwrite the wear compensation
value corresponding to a specific offset number by the G10
command.
SMALL DIAM (MD) :
Smaller diameter of a chamfering tool
NOSE ANGLE (AN) :
Angle of a chamfering tool tip
NOS CLRLNC (CL)
Length of the part which cannot be used for

chamfering at the tip of a chamfering tool
TR
AN
TR
CL
IMGNRY NOS (TD) :
Must be set to 0.
TL MATRIAL (TM) :

189
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.13
Tool Data for Reamers
[CAP. :HEADL]
851#01
852#01
901#01
951#01
CHAMFER (F) T1313 TR

CHAMFER (S) T1414 TR
REAMA
T1818 DD
BORE
T0707 TW
15.000
15.000
22.000
20.000
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 901
TOOL TYPE REAMA (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
ROUGH/FIN COMMON
OUTPUT T
1818
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOM.D/WID DD= 22.000
CUTTR LNGT TL= 70.000
MD 5.000 AN
MD 2.000 AN
TL 70.000
TL 60.000
90
90
CL
CL
2.000
0.500
DD
TL
<
FACE
SIDE
CUT
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
TOOL TOOL
LIST FIGURE

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
TOOL DIREC
(1) Reamer for end faces
190

soft key.
(2) Reamer for side faces
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
MILLNG/TRN

[MILLNG] : Milling tools for Caxis/Yaxis
machining
[TURN]
: Tools for turning
[COMMON] : Tools that are used for both
milling and turning
OUTPUT T

REVOLUT.D

cutting
[REVERS] soft key.
NOM.D/WID
(DD) :
Nominal diameter of a reamer
CUTTR LNG
(TL) :
Effective length of a reamer
DD
TL
TL MATRIAL (TM) :
191

13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.1.14
Tool Data for Boring
852#01
901#01
951#01
CHAMFER (S) T1414 TR

REAMA
T1818 DD
BORE
T0707 TW
15.000 MD 2.000
22.000 TL70.000
20.000 TL60.000
AN
[CAP. :HEADL]
90 CL
0.500
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***

TOOLID NO. 951
TOOL TYPE BORE
(HEADL)
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSE WIDTH
CUTTR LNGT
TL MATRIAL
0707
NORMAL
TW= 20.000
TL= 60.000
TM=CARBID
TW
TL
< HEADL HEADR
MENU
RETURN
TOOL TYPE
TOOL TOOL
LIST FIGURE

[HEADR] soft key.
NOTE
OUTPUT T
192

B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
REVOLUT.D

cutting
NOSE WIDTH (TW) :
Need to be set only when the figure of a tool

to be drawn is determined.
CUTTR LNGT (TL) :
Effective length of a boring tool
TW
TL
TL MATRIAL (TM) :
193

13. SETTING DATA
13.1.15
Automatic Tool
Specification Function
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
The following table lists tools that are automatically specified according to the
type of the machining and the area to be machined.
Type of machining
Bar machining and
pattern repeating
Residual machining
Area to be machined
Tool
Outer surlaco edge
Outersurface machining
Outer nonedge surface
Inner surface edge
Innersurface machining
Inner nonedge surface
End face edge
Endface machining
End face nonedge machining
Endface machining
Outer surface
Inner surface
End face
Endface machining
Inner bottom face
Inner bottom face machining
End facing
Endface machining
Threading
Grooving
Necking
Outer surface
Outersurface threading
Inner surface
Innersurface threading
Outer surface
Outersurface grooving
Inner surface
Innersurface grooving
End face
Endface grooving
Right side of an outer sur- Outersurface machining

face
Left side of an outer surface
Right side of an inner sur- Innersurface machining

face
Left side of an inner surface
Upper side of an end face Endface machining

Lower side of an end face Endface machining
Center drilling
Center drill
(end face turning)
Drilling
Drill
(end face turning)
194
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Type of machining
Area to be machined
Tool
Reamer
Reamer
(end face turning)
Boring
Boring
(end face turning)
Tapping
Tap
(end face turning)
End face
Center drill
(end face milling)
Side face
Center drill
(side face milling)
End face
Drill
(end face milling)
Side face
Drill
(side face milling)
End face
Reamer
(end face milling)
Side face
Reamer
(side face milling)
End face
Tap
(end face turning)
Side face
Tap
(side face milling)
End face
End mill
(end face)
Side face
End mill
(side face)
End face
End mill
(end face)
Side face
Side cutter
Caxis cylindrical
machining
Side face
End mill
(side face)
Yaxis Center dril
End face
Center dril
(end face turning)
Side face
Center dril
(Side face turning)
End face
Dril
(end face turning)
Side face
Dril
(Side face turning)
Caxis drilling
Caxis Reamer
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Caxis notching
Yaxis Drilling
195
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
Type of machining
Yaxis Reamer
Yaxis Tapping
Yaxis Milling
13.1.16
Tool Geometry Data for
Drawing
B62444E1/04
Area to be machined
Tool
End face
Reamer
(end face turning)
Side face
Reamer
(Side face turning)
End face
Tap
(end face turning)
Side face
Tap
(Side face turning)
End face
End mill
(end face)
Side face
End mill
(side face)
Tool geometry data for drawing is automatically determined. To display

data for drawing, press the [TOOL FIGURE] soft key on the tool data
screen.
[CAP. :HEADL]
101#01
102#02
103#02
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
T0505 RN
T0101 RN
T0202 RN
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC
90
90
90
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
*** TOOL DATA(2) *** NO. 101

TOOTH FORM
PT1 X= 0.000
X= 0.000
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***
2 X= 10.000
X= 0.524
TOOLID NO. 000
3
X=
10.000
X= 6.666
TOOL TYPE
OUTTER(HEADL)
4 X= 3.849
X= 6.666
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSERADIS
CUTTING EDG
NOSE ANGLE
NOSE WIDTH
IMGNRY NOS
TL MATRIAL
COMMON
0505
NORMAL
RN= 0.400
AC=
90
AN=
60
TW=20.000
TD=
3
TM=CARBID
PT1
2
3
4
5
6
SHANK FORM
X= 30.000
X= 18.750
X= 15.000
X= 0.000
X= 11.547
X= 30.000
<
X= 2.500
X= 2.500
X= 0.000
X= 0.000
X= 20.000
X= 20.000
TOOL
PLOT
RETURN
Pressing the [RETURN] soft key returns to the tool data screen.
196
B62444E1/04
OPERATION
13. SETTING DATA
(1) Turning tools

Up to four points can be specified for a tip figure. Specify each point
clockwise from the origin (0, 0), plotting by a single stroke. The area
formed by these four points is filled.
Up to six points can be specified for a shank figure. By plotting each point
using the singlestroke drawing method, lines can be created.
Make sure that the line formed for the shank figure does not pass through
the area specified for the tip. Otherwise, the area may not be filled
normally.
(2) Round nose tools
For round nose tools, the tip figure need not be specified.
Two lines can be specified for the shank figure. Points 1 to 3 and points
4 to 6 each create one line.
(3) Milling tools
Neither a tip figure nor a shank figure needs to be specified for milling
tools. Tool geometry data for drawing is not displayed.
NOTE
The automatically determined tool geometry data for
drawing can be changed by pressing numeric keys and
INPUT key. Pressing the [TOOL PLOT] soft key draws a
new tool figure.
197
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
13.1.17
Details of the
Automatic Setting of
Tool Geometry Data for
Drawing
B62444E1/04
When all data items required for the type of a tool have been entered, tool
geometry data for drawing is automatically specified as follows.
(1) Generalpurpose cutting tools
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, NOSEANGLE, CUTTING EDG, and NOSE
WIDTH
[Right side of an outer surface]

SW (shank width) = Tool width
SL (shank length) = SW*1.5
SW
TT (tip thickness) = SW/3

SW/8
TW (tip length) = SL/3
SL/8
SL
SL/2
Based on the cutting edge angle, tool angle, and above dimensions,
values of points s1 to s6 for a shank and points t2 to t4 for a tip are
calculated. Note that the point of the tip (t1) must always be at the
origin (0, 0).
A tool for machining the left side of an outer surface is symmetrical
with the above tool about its axis.
TW
TT
[Left side of an inner surface]
[Right side of an inner surface]
TT
TT
SL/2
TW
TW
SW
SW
SL/8
SL
SL
SW/8
[Lower side of an end face]
SL
SL/8
SW
SW/8
TT

TW
A tool for machining the left side of an outer surface

is symmetrical with the above tool about its axis.
SL/2
198
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
(2) Threading tools
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, CUTTING EDG, and NOSE WIDTH
[Outer surface]
SW
TT (tip thickness) = SL/8

Based on the cutting edge angle and above dimensions,
values of points s1 to s6 for a shank and points t2 to t4 for a
tip are calculated. Note that the point of the tip (t1) must
always be at the origin (0, 0).
SL
TW
TT
[Inner surface]
SL
TW

TW (tip height) = SW/8
SW
TT
199
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(3) Grooving tools
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, NOSEANGLE, SLANT ANGLE, and
effective length
[Outer surface]
Left reference point
SW
S5
S1
S4
SL
SW/2
SW (shank width) = Cutting edge width*8
SL/2
S2
t2

TT (tip length) = Effective length
S3
TT
t1
t3
TW (tip width) = Cutting edge width
t4
The figure of a tool for which the right reference position is specified
TW
[Inner surface]
Left reference point
TW
t2
t1
SW (shank width) = Effective length*8
TT
S1
t
SW 4
S2
t3

For grooving inner surfaces, the right reference position is not specified normally. Should it be specified, however, shift the entire figure
for the left reference position to the left by width of the cutting edge.
The position of the tip is also shifted accordingly.
S3
S5
S4
SL
[End face]
Lower reference position
S2
S1
SW
S3
t4
S5
S4
t1
t2

t3
TW
SW (shank width) = Cutting edge width*8

The figure of a tool for which the upper reference position is specified
SL
TT
200
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13. SETTING DATA
(4) Center drills
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, NOMINAL DIA, NOSE ANGLE, and
CUTTR LNGTH
S1
S3
S2
t3
t4
t2
DD
t1
SW
S5
DD (nominal diameter) = Nominal diameter of a center drill
S6
CD
SW (shank width) = DD*3

SL (shank length) = SW
S4
CD (depth of cut) = Depth of cut by a center drill

SL
(5) Drills
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, NOMINAL DIA, NOSE ANGLE, and
effective length
S1
S2
t2
t1
DD
t3
S3
S4
DD (shank width) = Nominal diameter
S5
SL (shank width) = Effective length

SL
(6) Taps
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, NOMINAL DIA, and effective length
S2
t2
t1
S1
t3
t4
SW
S4
S3

SL (shank length) = Effective length
SL
201
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(7) Round nose cutting tools
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, tool tip radius, and NOSE WIDTH
SW (shank width) = NOSE WIDTH
SW
SL (shank length) = SW
S1
Two lines are drawn upward from the center of the circle, both of
which form 45 degrees with the Xaxis. The two lines intersect the
arc at points s3 and s6 as shown in the figure. Then, the two lines
are extended until they intersect the lines indicating the tool width at
points s2 and s5.
S4
S5
S2
SL
S6
S3
(8) Reamers
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, NOMINAL DIA, and effective length
S2
S1
t2
t3
t1
t4
SW
S4
S3
SL (shank length) = Effective length

SL
(9) Boring tools
Tool data used

TOOL DIREC, NOSE WIDTH, and effective length
TT
S2
t1
Note)
S1
t2
Boring is performed only when turning is specified.
TW
t4
SW
t3
SW (shank width) = NOSE WIDTH

TT (tip length) = SL/4
S3
S5
S4
TW (tip width) = SW/2
SL
202
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.2
MACHINING
CONDITION DATA
AND SURFACE
ROUGHNESS DATA
13.2.1
Machining Condition
Data for
Generalpurpose Tools
Pressing the [2] soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for generalpurpose tools.
(1) Cutting condition data for rough machining
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for rough machining)
. 5 INPUT (FEED/REV.)
80 INPUT (CUT SPD.)
2
INPUT (CUT DPTH)
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for finish machining)
. 3 INPUT
120 INPUT
(FEED/REV.)
(CUT SPD.)
[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (GENERAL) ***

ROUGHING
FINISHING
CARBID BITE
CARBID BITE
MATERIAL FEED/REV. CUT SPD. CUT DPTH MATERIAL FEED/REV. CUT SPD.
(MM/REV.) (M/MIN.) (MM)
(MM/REV.) (M/MIN.)
FC25
0.5000
80.0
2.000
FC25
0.3000
120.0
FCD45
0.0000
0.0
0.000
FCD45
0.0000
0.0
SS41
0.0000
0.0
0.000
SS41
0.0000
0.0
S45C
0.0000
0.0
0.000
S45C
0.0000
0.0
SKD11
0.0000
0.0
0.000
SKD11
0.0000
0.0
SUS304
0.0000
0.0
0.000
SUS304
0.0000
0.0
AL1
0.0000
0.0
0.000
AL1
0.0000
0.0
AL2
0.0000
0.0
0.000
AL2
0.0000
0.0
<
WORK
MENU
MATERL
RETURN
203
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
NOTE
1 The cutting conditions for generalpurpose tools need to be
specified when cutting conditions for bar machining or
pattern repeating are automatically determined.
Enter the following three items in the cutting condition data
for generalpurpose tools:
One of the three tool material types
Either rough machining or finish machining
One of the eight (or 24) workpiece material types
When a workpiece material can be selected from 24 types,
pressing the [WORK MATERL] soft key displays data on
subsequent 16 types of workpiece materials.
(2) Cutting condition data for finish machining
The feed amount for finish machining with a generalpurpose tool
is calculated based on the surface roughness using the following
formula:
F=
8R
1000
: Feed amount
: Radius of a tool tip
: Surface roughness
That is, the larger the radius of the tool, the larger the feed amount. For
a tool with a large radius, such as round nose tools, therefore, a clamp
value for the feed amount needs to be set in the cutting condition data for
finish machining with a generalpurpose tool.
204
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.2.2
Cutting Condition Data
for Threading Tools
condition data screen for threading tools.
To display the cutting condition data screen for each tool material, press
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for threading)
80
1
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH
INPUT
INPUT
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
(CUT SPD.)
(CUT DPTH)
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (THREAD) ***

CARBID BITE
MATERIAL CUT SPD.
(M/MIN.)
FC25
80.0
FCD45
0.0
SS41
0.0
S45C
0.0
SKD11
0.0
SUS304
0.0
AL1
0.0
AL2
0.0
<
CUT DPTH
(MM)
1.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
WORK
MATERL
MENU
RETURN
NOTE
Enter the following two items in the cutting condition data for
threading tools:
205
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
13.2.3
for Grooving Tools
B62444E1/04
condition data screen for grooving tools.
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for rough machining)
.5
INPUT
80 INPUT
2 INPUT
(FEED/REV.)
(CUT SPD.)
(CUT DPTH)
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for finish machining)

.3
INPUT
120 INPUT
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
(FEED/REV.)
(CUT SPD.)
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (GROOVING) ***

ROUGHING
FINISHING
CARBID BITE
(SWDTH MM
MM)
CARBID
BITE
MATERIAL FEED/REV.
CUT SPD. CUT DPTH MATERIAL FEED/REV.
CUT SPD.
(MM/REV.)
(M/MIN.) (MM)
(MM/REV.)
(M/MIN.)
FC25
0.5000 80.0 2.000 FC25
0.3000
120.0
FCD45 0.0000 0.0
0.000 FCD45
0.0000
0.0
SS41
0.0000 0.0
0.000 SS41
0.0000
0.0
S45C
0.0000 0.0
0.000 S45C
0.0000
0.0
SKD11 0.0000 0.0
0.000 SKD11
0.0000
0.0
SUS304 0.0000 0.0
0.000 SUS304 0.0000
0.0
AL1
0.0000 0.0
0.000 AL1
0.0000
0.0
AL2
0.0000 0.0
0.000 AL2
0.0000
0.0
<
WORK
MENU
MATERL
RETURN
Because the feed amount required for finish machining for trapezoidal
grooves is calculated based on the surface roughness and radius of the tool
tip, a clamp value for the feed amount needs to be set, as in the cutting
conditions for generalpurpose tools.
NOTE
for grooving tools:
Cutting condition data for rough machining is only used for ordinary and
slanted grooves. Cutting condition data for finish machining is used for
trapezoidal grooves.
206
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.2.4
for Drilling Tools
condition data screen for drilling tools.
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for drilling)
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH
.5
INPUT
(FEED/REV.)
60
INPUT
(CUT SPD.)
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (DRILL) ***

CARBID DRIL
(SDIA.
MM
MATERIAL FEED/REV. CUT SPD.
(MM/REV.) (M/MIN.)
FC25
0.5000
60.0
FCD45
0.0000
0.0
SS41
0.0000
0.0
S45C
0.0000
0.0
SKD11
0.0000
0.0
SUS304
0.0000
0.0
AL1
0.0000
0.0
AL2
0.0000
0.0
<
WORK
DRILL
CNT.DR REAMA
MM)
BORE
MATERL
MENU
RETURN
To select the cutting condition data screen for the desired drilling tool,
press one of the [DRILL], [CNT.DR], [REAMA], and [BORE] soft keys.
When the desired cutting condition data screen is selected, the name of
the relevant soft key is displayed in reverse.
NOTE
1 Enter the following three items in the cutting condition data
for drilling tools:
2 Cutting condition data for a throwaway drill can be
calculated by multiplying the cutting condition data (feed
amount and cutting speed) by coefficients.
Set the coefficient for the cutting speed in parameter No.
9055 and the coefficient for the feed amount in parameter
No. 9057.
207
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
13.2.5
for Tapping Tools
B62444E1/04
condition data screen for tapping tools.
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for tapping)
80
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH
INPUT
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
(CUT SPD.)
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (TAP) ***

CARBID TAP
(SDIA.
MATERIAL CUT SPD.
((M/MIN.)
FC25
80.0
FCD45
0.0
SS41
0.0
S45C
0.0
SKD11
0.0
SUS304
0.0
AL1
0.0
AL2
0.0
<
MM
MM)
WORK
MATERL
MENU
RETURN
NOTE
for tapping tools:
208
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.2.6
condition data screen for Caxis machining tools such as ENDMIL,
SIDCUT, and CHAMFR.

for Caxis/Yaxis
Machining Tools
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for rough machining
with end mills)
.5
.3
80
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(FEED QNTH)
(FEED QNTA)
(CUT SPD.)
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for finish machining

with end mills)
. 2 INPUT
. 3 INPUT
120 INPUT
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
(FEED QNTH)
(FEED QNTA)
(CUT SPD.)
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (ENDMILL) ***

ROUGHING
FINISHING
CARBID ENDMIL (SDIA MM MM)
CARBID ENDMIL (SDIA MM MM)
MATERIAL FEED QNTH FEED QNTA CUTSPD MATERIAL FEEDQNTH FEEDQNTA CUT SPD.
(MM/EDG.)
FC25
0.5000
FCD45 0.0000
SS41
0.0000
S45C
0.0000
SKD11 0.0000
SUS304 0.0000
AL1
0.0000
AL2
0.0000
<
WORK
(MM/EDG.) (M/MIN.)
0.3000
80.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
FC25
FCD45
SS41
S45C
SKD11
SUS304
AL1
AL2
(MM/EDG.) (MM/EDG.) (M/MIN.)

0.2000
0.3000
120.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
MENU
ENDMILSIDECUT CHAMFR
MATERL
RETURN
NOTE
For end mills, two values must be specified for the feed
amount. One is for radial cutting and the other is for axial
cutting.
209
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
(1) Radial cutting
B62444E1/04
(2) Axial cutting
To display one of other cutting condition data screens for Caxis/Yaxis

machining tools, press the desired soft key.
NOTE
For end mills and side cutters, enter the following three
items in the cutting condition data:
For end mills and side cutters, specify the feed amount per
cutting edge.
For chamfering tools, enter the following two items in the
cutting condition data:
210
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.2.7
Detailed cutting conditions can be specified by setting coefficients.

Pressing the [8] ([7] soft key if the Caxis graphic conversation function
is not provided) soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for specifying coefficients.
To display the screen for specifying coefficients for each tool material,
press the page key.
Coefficients
(1) Coefficients for generalpurpose tools

The cutting speed can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the feed amount required for finish machining for each workpiece
material.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for generalpurpose tools)
0.2 INPUT
0.4 INPUT
0.6 INPUT
0.8 INPUT
1.667 INPUT
1.500 INPUT
1.333 INPUT
1.200 INPUT
1.000 INPUT
1.667 INPUT

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
(FEED/REV. 1)
(FEED/REV. 2)
(FEED/REV. 3)
(FEED/REV. 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***

FINISHING
GENERAL
FEED/REV.
(MM/REV.)
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80
MATERIAL
FC25
1.667 1.500 1.333 1.200 1.000
FCD45
1.667 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SS41
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
S45C
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SKD11
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SUS304
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
AL1
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
AL2
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(CUT SPD.)
<
WORK
MENU
MATERL
RETURN
211
GUIDE
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
NOTE
The coefficients for the reference feed amount must always
be 1.000. Not all boundary values and coefficients need to
be specified.
(2) Coefficients for threading tools
The depth of the first cutting can be increased or decreased according to
the range of the thread lead for each workpiece material.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for threading tools)
1
2
3
4
0.3
0.6
0.9
1.0
1.2
0.4
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(LEAD 1)
(LEAD 2)
(LEAD 3)
(LEAD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

THREAD
LEAD
(MM/REV.)
1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00
MATERIAL
FC25
0.300 0.600 0.900 1.000 1.200
FCD45
0.400 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SS41
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
S45C
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SKD11
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SUS304
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
AL1
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
AL2
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(CUT DPTH)
<
WORK
MENU
MATERL
RETURN
212
GUIDE
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(3) Coefficients for grooving tools

The feed amount can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the width of a grooving tool for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for grooving tools)
2
4
6
8
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(GRV WIDTH 1)
(GRV WIDTH 2)
(GRV WIDTH 3)
(GRV WIDTH 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

GROOVE
GRV WIDTH
2
4
6
8
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<
MENU
RETURN
GUIDE
NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (4
mm to 6 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SWDTH field of the cutting condition data screen for
grooving tools.
213
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(4) Coefficients for drills

the nominal diameter of a drill for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for drills)
10
20
30
40
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

DRIL
NOMINLD
10
20
30
40
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<
MENU
RETURN
GUIDE
NOTE
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for drills.
214
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(5) Coefficients for center drills

the nominal diameter of a center drill for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for center drills
1
2
3
4
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

CNT.DR
NOMINLD
1
2
3
4
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<
MENU
GUIDE
RETURN
NOTE
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for Center
drills.
215
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(6) Coefficients for reamers

the nominal diameter of a reamer for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for reamers)
10
20
30
40
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

REAMER
NOMINLD
10
20
30
40
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<
MENU
GUIDE
RETURN
NOTE
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for
reamers.
216
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(7) Coefficients for boring tools

the nominal diameter of a boring tool for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for boring tools)
10
20
30
40
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

BORE
NOMINLD
10
20
30
40
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<
MENU
RETURN
GUIDE
NOTE
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for boring
tools.
217
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(8) Coefficients for tapping tools

the nominal diameter of a tapping tool for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for tapping tools)
10
20
30
40
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

TAP
NOMINLD
10
20
30
40
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(CUT SPD.)
<
MENU
RETURN
GUIDE
NOTE
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for tapping
tools.
218
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(9) Coefficients for end mills (Caxis/Yaxis graphic conversation

function)
The feed rate can be increased or decreased according to the range of the
nominal diameter of an end mill for each material of the tool.
In this case, coefficients for rough machining and finish machining can
be specified separately.
Example of operation to specify coefficient for end mills)
3
6
9
12
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

ROUGHING
ENDMIL
NOMINLD
3
6
9
12
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
FINISHING
NOMINLD
0
0
0
0
(MM)
CARBID
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
HISPD
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<
MENU
RETURN
GUIDE
NOTE
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for end
mills.
219
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(10) Coefficients for side cutters (Caxis graphic conversation function)

The feed rate can be increased or decreased according to the range of the
nominal diameter of a side cutter for each material of the tool.
In this case, coefficients for rough machining and finish machining can
be specified separately.
Example of operation to specify coefficient for side cutters)
20
40
60
80
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(NOSE WIDTH 1)
(NOSE WIDTH 2)
(NOSE WIDTH 3)
(NOSE WIDTH 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

ROUGHING
SIDECUT
NOSE WIDTH
3
6
9
12
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
FINISHING
NOSE WIDTH
0
0
0
0
(MM)
CARBID
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
HISPD
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<
MENU
GUIDE
RETURN
NOTE
SWDTH field of the cutting condition data screen for side
cutters.
220
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.2.8
Surface Roughness
Data
For each finishing after bar machining, pattern repeating, and machining
of trapezoidal grooves, the surface roughness can be selected from ten
levels.
Pressing the [9] ([8] soft key it the Caxis graphic conversation function
is not provided) soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for the surface roughness.
Example of operation to specify the surface roughness)
60
40
30
25
20
15
10
7
4
3
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTTER
T0505
OUTTER
T0101
OUTTER
T0202
OUTR TH T0404
OUTR TH T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 1)
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000
*** MACHINING CONDITION (ROUGH) ***

RGH CODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SURFACE ROUGHNESS
(MM/1000)
60.0
40.0
30.0
25.0
20.0
15.0
10.0
7.0
4.0
3.0
<
MENU
RETURN
221
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
13.3
B62444E1/04
In drilling, entering one of the final processes automatically determines

the required preprocesses.
Pressing the [10] soft key ([9] soft key if the Caxis graphic conversation
function is not provided) on the tool data menu screen displays the
pretool list screen. Up to five pretools can be registered for each final
tool.
PRETOOL LIST
Example of operation to specify pretools)

651 INPUT
701 INPUT
601 INPUT
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
(LAST TL)
(PRETOOL 1)
(PRETOOL 2)
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
LAST TL
PRETOOL
TOOL NO.
651#01
1 701#01
2 601#01
3
4
5
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000
NO. 01
TL NAME
TAP(F)
NOMILD
20.000
CNT.DR(F)
DRIL (F)
2.000
20.000
SEARCH
<
MENU TOOL
RETURN LIST
To display the registeredtool directory screen, pressing the [TOOL

LIST] soft key.
To search the list of pretools for a pretool for which a tool management
number has been registered at the final tool column, enter the tool
management number with numeric keys and press the [SEARCH] soft
key.
222
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.4
Pressing the [11] soft key ([10] soft key if the Caxis graphic conversation
function is not provided) on the tool data menu screen displays the
chuck/tail stock figure setting screen.
CHUCK/TAIL STOCK
FIGURE DATA
13.4.1
Example of operation to specify a chuck figure)
Chuck Figure Data
[EXT.]
(Chuck type)
20
20
10
15
(Dimension L)
(Dimension W)
(Dimension L1)
(Dimension W1)
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000
*** CHUCK FIGURE ***

NO. TYPE
1 EXT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
<
EXT.
L
20.0
W
20.0
INT. CHUCK
L1
10.0
W1
15.0
L1
W
W1
TAIL
STOCK
MENU
RETURN
(1) External claw chuck
(2) Internal claw chuck

L
L1
W1
223
W1
L1
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
NOTE
Up to 10 types or up to 60 types (Option) of figures can be
registered for the chuck figure data. These figures are used
for animated simulation and the specification of chuck
barriers.
13.4.2
Chuck Data Extension
Function (Optional)
<
EXT.
INT.
OUTS
(1) Outline
This function increases the number of chuck figure data items that
can be registered in FANUC Super CAP T/II T, from 10 (standard)
to 60.
(2) Detailed specifications
(a) Registering chuck figure data
Up to 60 items of chuck data can be registered, using the chuck
figure data screen.
(b) Adding the Outer Special chuck type
In the conventional specification, two types of chucks, Inner
and Outer, can be registered. By enabling the chuck data
extension function, three types of chucks including these types
and an additional Outer Special chuck type can be registered.
The Outer Special chuck type is supported for the user to ease
management, while the dimensions set for that type are the same
as those set for the external claw type.
CHUCK
TOOL
TAIL
ENTRY
STOCK
MENU
RETURN
The [OUTS] soft key is displayed on the chuck figure

data screen.
NOTE
When the FS16/18TA or FS16/18TTA is used, enabling
this function reduces the number of processes that can be
used in the conversational program by 10 to 15.
224
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
13.4.3
Tail Stock Figure Data
Pressing the [TAIL STOCK] soft key displays the tail stock figure data
screen.
Example of operation to specify a tail stock figure)
30
20
20
15
10
20
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(Dimension D0)
(Dimension L0)
(Dimension D1)
(Dimension L1)
(Dimension D2)
(Dimension L2)
[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000
AC
AC
AC
AN
AN
90
90
90
60
60
AN
AN
AN
60
60
60
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000
*** TAIL STOCK FIGURE ***

NO.
D0
L0
D1
L1
D2
L2
1
30.000
20.000
20.000
15.000
10.000
20.000
D2
D1
L2
<
CHUCK
D0
L1
L0
MENU
TAIL
STOCK
RETURN
D Dimensions of a tail stock figure
D2
L2
D1
L1
D0
L0
NOTE
Four types of figures can be registered for the tail stock
figure data. The figures are used for animated simulation
of tail stocks.
225
13. SETTING DATA
OPERATION
13.5
The tool data file, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool
list, and chuck/tail stock figure data can be punched out on external I/O
devices.
(1) Connect an external I/O device to the system and specify the
required parameters such as a device selection.
(2) Change the mode to the EDIT mode.
(3) Call the tool data menu screen and press the [+] rightmost soft key
to display the following soft keys. Then, press the [PUNCH] soft
key.
PUNCHING OUT
SETTING DATA
<
10
B62444E1/04
11
READ
PUNCH
CLEAR
13.6
Setting data that is punched out in the above procedure can be read again.
READING SETTING
DATA
(1) Connect the external I/O device to the system and specify the
required parameters such as a device selection.
(2) Set setting data for parameter writing to 1.
(3) When the FANUC CASSETTE is used, specify a file number in
parameter 9877 (TLFLNO).
(4) Call the tool data menu screen and bring the system to an emergency
stop.
(5) Press the [READ] soft key.
13.7
Tool data file, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool list, and
chuck/tail stock figure data can be cleared.
CLEARING SETTING
DATA
(1) Set setting data for parameter writing to 1.

(2) Call the tool data menu screen, change the mode to the EDIT mode,
then bring the system to an emergency stop.
(3) Press the [CLEAR] soft key.
226
B62444E1/04
14
OPERATION
14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION
BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
Using the batch data input/output function, multiple types of data such as
NC parameters, NC offset values, NC programs, and PMC parameters,
can be entered or output as a batch by using a generalpurpose external
input/output unit such as the FANUC Cassette Adaptor.
NOTE
Before the batch data input/output function can be used, bit
6 (DIO) of parameter No. 9772 must be set to 1.
227

FUNCTION
14.1
DATA THAT CAN BE
ENTERED AND
OUTPUT
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(a) NC parameter: All parameters, except the option parameters and

the parameter (No. 1010) used to specify the number of axes
(b) Offset value: All wear/geometry compensation value data
(c) NC program: All NC programs (Part of the NC programs can also
be entered and output.)
(d) PMC parameter: All counter values, keep relay data, timer data,
and data (Part of the data can also be entered and output.)
(e) Tool file: All tool data files, cutting condition data, surface
roughness data, pretool lists, and chuck/tailstock geometry data
(f) Conversational program: All conversational programs (Conversational programs cannot be entered and output on aprogram
byprogram basis.)
NOTE
NC parameters cannot be entered and output together with
other types of data. All other types of data can be entered
and output as a batch.
228
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
14.2

FUNCTION
(1) Connect an external input/output unit, then set the necessary

parameters, including the unit selection parameter:
Channel used on the NC = 0
Stop bit = 2
Parity = None
Character length = 8
Baud rate = Corresponds to NC parameter No. 0103.
XON/OFF control = Used
(2) Select the EDIT mode. When a twopath lathe is used, select the
screen for tool post 1.
DATA OUTPUT
(3) Display the main menu screen, then press [+] to display the soft keys
on page 2.
(4) Press [17] to display the data input/output menu screen.
Sample data input/output menu screen (for a twopath lathe)
[CAP.:HEADL]
DATA I/O SCREEN

PUNCH
SINGLE
SINGLE
1.NC PARAMETER (HD1)
2.NC OFFSET
(HD1)
3.NC PROGRAM
(HD1)
4.PMC PARAMETER
5.NC OFFSET (HD2)

6.NC PROGRAM (HD2)
8.CAP TOOL FILE

9.CAP PROGRAM
<
READ
PUNCH
I/O
SET UP
NOTE
When a onepath lathe is used, the data selection menu for
tool post 2 is not displayed.
(5) Press [PUNCH]. The screen below appears.
229

FUNCTION
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
[CAP.:HEADL]
DATA I/O SCREEN

PUNCH
SINGLE
SINGLE
2.NC OFFSET
(HD1)
3.NC PROGRAM
(HD1)
4.PMC PARAMETER
5.NC OFFSET (HD2)

6.NC PROGRAM (HD2)
8.CAP TOOL FILE

9.CAP PROGRAM
SELECT THE DATA WHICH YOU WANT TO PUNCH OUT
<
NC
PARAM
NC
NC
OFFSET PROG
PMC
PARAM
CAP
TOOL
CAP
PROG
NC HD2 NC HD2 NC HD2 SELECT

PARAM OFFSET PROG
END
NOTE
When a onepath lathe is used, the soft keys below are
displayed.
<
NC
NC
PARAM OFFSET
NC
PMC
PROG PARAM
CAP
TOOL
CAP
PROG
I/O
PRE SELECT
SET UP
PG
END
(6) Press the soft keys corresponding to the types of data to be output.
The selected types of data are displayed in reverse video (in green).
After selecting the desired types of data, press [EXEC].
NOTE
1 To cancel data type selection, press [PREPG]. The
original screen is displayed.
2 NC parameters cannot be output together with other types
of data. If several types of data as well as NC parameters
are selected for output, the selection of all types of data,
except the NC parameters, is cancelled.
(7) When [NC PROG] or [NC HD2 PROG] ([NC PROG] for a onepath
lathe) is pressed, a registered NC program directory is displayed as
shown below.
230

FUNCTION
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
[CAP.:HEADL]
DATA I/O SCREEN

PUNCH
SINGLE
1.NC PARAMETER
SINGLE
(HD1)
REGISTERO PROGRAM
2.NC OFFSET (HD1) 5.NC OFFSET (HD2) 8.CAP TOOL FILE

3.NC PROGRAM (HD1) 6.NC PROGRAM (HD2) 9.CAP PROGRAM
4.PMC PARAMETER
*** HEAD 1 ***

00012
00110
00120
00150
00160
SELECT THE DATA WHICH YOU WANT TO PUNCH OUT
<
ALL
ALL SELECT CANCEL SELECT
SELECT CANCEL
END
[ALL SELECT]: Press this soft key to punch all programs. When this
soft key is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed:
EXEC REALLY? YES[EXEC] NO[CANCEL]

<
EXEC
CANCEL
Press [EXEC] to specify punch for all programs. Press [CANCEL] to

cancel punch for all programs.
ALL SELECT
Press this soft key to cancel punch for all

programs. When this soft key is pressed, the soft
keys displayed when [ALL SELECT] is pressed
are displayed.
Press [EXEC] to cancel punch for all programs.
Press [CANCEL] to abandon cancelation of
punch for all programs.
SELECT
When specifying an NC program to be punched,

position the cursor to the program number, then
press this soft key.
CANCEL
Press this soft key to cancel punch for an NC

program.
SELECT END
Press this soft key once punch for NC programs

has been completed.
(8) When [EXEC] is pressed, the following screen appears. Press

[EXEC] to start data output. Press [CANCEL] to cancel data output.
231

FUNCTION
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
[CAP.:HEADL]
DATA I/O SCREEN

PUNCH
SINGLE
SINGLE
2.NC OFFSET
(HD1)
3.NC PROGRAM
(HD1)
4.PMC PARAMETER
5.NC OFFSET
6.NC PROGRAM
(HD2)
(HD2)
8.CAP TOOL FILE

9.CAP PROGRAM

<
I/O
SET UP
EXEC CANCEL
When data output is started, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of

the screen. The type of data being output is indicated by the data type
name blinking in reverse video (in yellow). Data that has already been
output is indicated by displaying the corresponding data type name in
light blue.
When the data output terminates with an error, the data type name is
displayed in red.
(9) Upon the completion of data output, press [
menu screen.
] to display the main
NOTE
1 The format of the data output with the batch data
input/output function differs from that used when outputting
data conventionally, on a typebytype basis.
2 The format of the data output for a onepath lathe differs
from that of the data output for a twopath lathe.
3 Only the data output with the batch data input/output
function can be entered by using the same function.
4 A range of PMC parameters to be output can be specified
by using the NC parameters, as shown below.
NC PARAMETER
PMCIOS
9090
PMCIOS
232
Start address of the PMC parameter D area data

to be output

FUNCTION
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
NC PARAMETER
PMCIOE
9091
PMCIOE
End address of the PMC parameter D area data

to be output
When No. 9090 (PMCIOS) = 0 and No. 9091 (PMCIOE) = 0:

All PMC parameters, including counter values, keep relay data, timer
data, and data are output.
When No. 9090 (PMCIOS) = No. 9091 (PMCIOE) 0 0:
The PMC parameter D area data (one data item only) at a specified address
is output.
When No. 9090 (PMCIOS) < No. 9091 (PMCIOE):
The PMC parameter D area data between a specified start address and end
address is output.
When No. 9090 (PMCIOS) > No. 9091 (PMCIOE):
All PMC parameter D area data is output.
233

FUNCTION
14.3
DATA INPUT
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Data output, performed as described in Section 14.2, can be entered as a

batch in a similar way.
(1) Before reading NC parameters, manually set any option parameters
and parameter (No. 1010), used to specify the number of axes.
(2) Connect an external input/output unit, then set the necessary
parameters, including the unit selection parameter, in the same way
as for input.
(3) Select EDIT mode. When a twopath lathe is used, select the screen
for tool post 1.
(4) Release the protection for each type of input data.
(a) NC parameter
: Set PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE
to 1.
(b) Offset value
: Set offset data protection to off (KEY1
= 1).
(c) NC program
: Set program protection to off (KEY3
= 1).
(d) PMC parameter
: Set PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE
to 1.
(e) Tool file
: Set offset data protection to off
(KEY1 = 1).
(f) Conversational program : Set program protection to off (KEY3
= 1).
(5) Display the data input/output menu screen.
(6) Press [READ]. The screen below appears.
[CAP.:HEADL]
DATA I/O SCREEN

READ
SINGLE
SINGLE
2.NC OFFSET
(HD1) 5.NC OFFSET
3.NC PROGRAM
(HD1) 6.NC PROGRAM
4.PMC PARAMETER
(HD2) 8.CAP TOOL FILE

(HD2) 9.CAP PROGRAM
SELECT THE FILE WHICH YOU WANT TO READ
<
NC
OTHERS NC HD2
PARAM
PARAM
I/O
SET UP
234
C PRE SELECT
PG
END
B62444E1/04
OPERATION

FUNCTION
NOTE
1 When a onepath lathe is used, the data selection menu for
tool post 2 is not displayed.
2 When an input/output unit other than the FANUC Cassette
Adaptor is used, [NC PARAM], [OTHERS], and [NC HD2
PARAM] are not displayed.
(7) When an external input/output unit other than the FANUC Cassette
Adaptor is used, perform read data preparation (such as that done
when searching for the start of data).
When the FANUC Cassette Adaptor is used, the user need not
perform this preparation: the data is called automatically.
(8) Press [NC PARAM] to read the NC parameters for tool post 1. Press
[NC HD2 PARAM] to read the NC parameters for tool post 2.
Press [OTHERS] to read data other than the NC parameters.
Each selected type of data is indicated by displaying the data type
name in reverse characters (in green). When the input of data other
than the NC parameters is specified, the data types actually read
cannot be identified beforehand; all data type names are displayed
in reverse characters (in green).
NOTE
To cancel data read, press [PREPG]. The original screen
is displayed.
(9) When [EXEC] is pressed, the following screen appears.
<
I/O
EXEC
SET UP
CANCEL
(10) Press [EXEC] to start data input. Press [CANCEL] tocancel data
input.
If several types of data, other than the NC parameters, are output as a batch
beforehand, those types of data can also be read as a batch.
During data input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.
Data being read is indicated by its data type name, blinking in reverse
video (in yellow). Data that has been read normally is indicated by
displaying the data type name in light blue. When the input of data
terminates with an error, the data type name is displayed in red.
(11) Upon the completion of data input, press [ ] to display the main
menu screen.
235

FUNCTION
14.4
I/O PARAMETER
DISPLAY
OPERATION
When [I/O SET UP] is pressed, the parameters set for the reader/punch
interface are displayed as shown below.
[CAP.:HEADL]
DATA I/O SCREEN

SINGLE
B62444E1/04
SINGLE
2.NC OFFSET (HD1) 5.NC OFFSET (HD2) 8.CAP TOOL FILE

3.NC PROGRAM (HD1) 6.NC PROGRAM (HD2) 9.CAP PROGRAM
4.PMC PARAMETER
I/O PARAMETER
SEL CHANNEL
BAUD RATE
STOP BIT
SEL DEVICE
0
4800
2
2
<
RETURN
The user can display the original screen by pressing [RETURN].

NOTE
The Super CAP II T constantly displays the I/O parameters.
So, [I/O PARAMETER] or [RETURN] shown above is not
displayed.
236
B62444E1/04
15
OPERATION
15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY

COLORS (Super CAP II T)
CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (Super CAP II T)
With the Super CAP II T, it is possible to change the colors of displays

on the screen.
237

15.1
HOW TO CHANGE
DISPLAY COLORS
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(1) Press [16] on the basic menu to cause the color scheme setting screen
to appear. (Pressing [+] causes [16] to appear.)
(2) Place the cursor on a number from 1 to 14 or Background color.
Each number corresponds to each part color, as listed below.
Number
Corresponding part color
Standard set color
1 Alarm display in the upper right section of the conversational screen, tool
in animated drawing mode, inoperable display of the status (drawing,
execution, and conversion) at the top
of the conversational screen
Red
2 Warning message display, soft key

characters, bar graph representing
machining time on the process edit
screen, operable display (drawing,
execution, and conversion) at the top
of the conversational screen, and tool
interference section in animated drawing mode
Green
3 Title bar at the top of the conversational screen
Yellow
4 Soft key characters, and characters in

expansions of drawings on the detail
data screen
Blue
5 Soft key characters, and bar graph

representing machining time on the
process edit screen
Pink
6 Not used
Light blue
7 Window title characters, highlighted

soft keys, cursor, and input keys at the
bottom of the conversational screen
White
8 Title bar of the contour data input window
Yellow
9 Title bars of windows other than item

8.
Blue
10 Cross section of the blank
Dark green
11 Window background, product shape

in animated drawing mode
Light gray
12 Cross section of chuck and tailstock
Blue
13 Background of data display on the

conversational screen
Light gray
14 Soft key shade, and window shade
Dark gray
Background Background of the conversational

screen
238
Gray

OPERATION
B62444E1/04
(3) Press the soft key that corresponds to the color element (red, green,
or blue) to be changed.
<
RED
15
GREEN
0
BRIGHT
BLUE
0
DARK
RETURN +
(4) Pressing [BRIGHT] makes brighter the color element at 3. Pressing

[DARK] makes it darker. Use of these soft keys can change the
number displayed on each color element key between 0 (dark) and
15 (light). The color displayed is determined by mixing the color
elements in proportion as indicated by the numbers. For example,
if the number indicated at each color element is 0, the synthesized
color is black. If the number is 15, it is white.
(5) Pressing [RETURN] brings you back to the basic menu screen.
239

15.2
STORING AND
CALLING DISPLAY
COLOR DATA
15.2.1
Storing Display Color
Data
< MEMORY
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
Changes to the display color made in Section 15.1 can be stored. Once
a changed display color is stored, any subsequent changes can be nullified
by calling the stored display color.
All display color numbers 1 to 14 and background color are stored in
groups. Up to four groups of display colors can be stored. One of the
groups can be stored as parameter data. This parameter data can be output
and input, similarly to other parameters.
(1) After you specify a display color, press [+] to cause soft key page 2
to appear.
CALL
COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 COLOR4 RETURN

PARAM
(2) Press [COLOR1 PARAM], [COLOR2], [COLOR3], or [COLOR4]

to select a group to be stored. If [COLOR1 PARAM] is pressed, the
display color data is stored in parameters No. 9061 to 9075. If any
other key is pressed, it is impossible to output the color display data.
So, clearing the NC memory results in the display color data being
deleted.
(3) Pressing [MEMORY] causes the following soft keys to appear.
< CANCEL
EXEC
(4) Pressing [EXEC] causes all color displays to be stored in the display
color data group selected at 2.
Pressing [CANCEL] stops storing the display color data.
240
OPERATION
B62444E1/04
15.2.2

(1) Pressing [+] causes soft key page 2 to appear.
Calling Display Color

Data
< MEMORY
CALL
COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 COLOR4 RETURN

PARAM
(2) Press [COLOR1 PARAM], [COLOR2], [COLOR3], or [COLOR4]

to select a group to be called. If [COLOR1 PARAM] is pressed, the
display color data stored in parameters No. 9061 to 9075 is restored
(3) Pressing [CALL] causes the following soft keys to appear.
<
CANCEL
EXEC
(4) Pressing [EXEC] changes the display color of the screen to the color
in a display color data group selected at 2.
Pressing [CANCEL] stops calling the stored display color data.
241
III. TYPES OF MACHINING

PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
WARNING
Before going to the next step of handling or operation, check the display on the screen carefully
to assure that the intended data has been entered correctly.
WARNING
When process data is entered, tool and cutting condition data is determined automatically
according to the selected machining type and area. Be sure to check that the automatically
determined data is correct.
If the data is incorrect, correct it.
If the tool and cutting condition data is incorrect, the tool may bump against the workpiece, or the
machine may be forced to perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the tool
and/or machine, and even injuries.
WARNING
When entering contour data, make sure that the specified shape is the one that can be machined
by the machining type and area selected as the process data.
If an incorrect shape is specified, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine,
CAUTION
After figure data is entered, make sure that the specified shape is the one that can be machined
by the machining type and area selected as the process data.
If an incorrect shape is specified, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine,
WARNING
After figure data is entered, make sure that the coordinates and arc radius of each specified shape
are correct; the specified shape is displayed graphically by pressing the soft key [PLOT].
If the entered shape data is incorrect, it is impossible to create a correct product.
WARNING
After contour data is entered, make sure that the coordinates and arc radius of each specified shape
are correct; the specified shape can be displayed graphically. It is especially necessary to make sure
that any data automatically calculated using a conversational function is definitely correct.
If the data is incorrect, it is impossible to create a correct product.
245
1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR

2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR 2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES
NOTE
In some machining programs created in the conversational mode, the offset data for specific
offset numbers may have been rewritten. (16: The number of offset groups is 16. 32: The
number of offset groups is 32.) 64:The number of offset groups is 64. 97:The number of offset
groups is 97.) Those offset numbers should not be used.
Refer to the appropriate manual, issued by the machine tool builder, for details of these offset
numbers (16, 32, 64, and 97, according to the number of offset groups).
246
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.1

Roundbar materials are machined by bar machining.
BAR MACHINING
+X
Material figure
+Z
Product figure
1.1.1
Machining Type
Selection
When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
automatically created, and the machining type menu is displayed on the
soft key field.
Pressing the [BAR] soft key selects bar machining.
The process data varies according to the machining area (See the
following items.)
(1) For the outer surface, inner surface, and end face
PROC
BAR
PROC
BAR
(01)
AREA
(R) OUTER END
(01)
AREA
(F) OUTER END
HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE

HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101
NOTE
One of outer surface, inner surface, and end face is
displayed as area data according to the specified machining
area.
247

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) For the outer surface, inner surface, and end face plus automatic
residual machining
PROC (01)
AREA
BAR (R) OUTER MID
AREA
RESIDUAL
PROC (01)
AREA
BAR (F) OUTER MID
AREA
RESIDUAL
HEAD
HEADL
TOOLNO
102
TOOLNO
105
HEAD ROUGHNES
HEADL
5
ROUGHNES
5
CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE

80
0.25
2.000
0101
CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE
80
0.25
2.000
0101
102
80
0.25
0101
105
80
0.25
0101
NOTE
1 One of OUTER MID, INTER MID, and FACE MID is
displayed as area data according to the specified machining
area.
2 The above process data is for 2path lathes. For 1path
lathes, there is no HEAD data item.
3 Some process data is not displayed on the program screen
but displayed only on the detail data screen.
The detail data screen is displayed by pressing [DETAIL DATA]. The

figure displayed on the detail data screen may vary depending on the
machine being used. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the
248
B62444E1/04
1.1.2
Details of Setting Data
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

Among the following data items, those preceded by a J mark are

displayed on the detail data screen. A separate detail data screen is
displayed for roughing processes and finishing processes.
The data marked with J at its left is displayed on both the program screen
and detail data screen.
Machining area
Select the desired type of machining area from the following menu items.
Those are displayed on the window
1 = Outer surface
2 = Outer surface + automatic residual machining
3 = Inner surface
4 = Inner surface + automatic residual machining
5 = End face
6 = End face + automatic residual machining
(1) Outer surface
Outer surface portion which does not require automatic residual
machining. Monotonous change along the Zaxis.
(2) Outer surface + automatic residual machining

Outer surface portion which requires automatic residual machining.
Monotonous change along the Zaxis.
(3) Inner surface

Inner surface portion which does not require automatic residual
machining
249

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(4) Inner surface + automatic residual machining

Inner surface portion which requires automatic residual machining.
Monotonous change along in the Zaxis.
(5) End face

End face portion which does not require automatic residual
machining
(6) End face + automatic residual machining

End face portion which requires automatic residual machining.
Monotonous change along the Xaxis.
NOTE
1 When a machining area is specified, the tools for rough
machining and cutting conditions are determined
automatically.
250
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(1) Roughing process

TOOLNO.
: Management number of a rough machining

tool
CUTSPD
: Cutting speed in rough machining
FEED/REV
: Feed amount in rough machining
CUTDPTH
: Depth of cut in rough machining
TCODE
: T code of a rough machining tool
JRotation direction
: Spindle rotation direction in rough machining
JPASS POINT 1 X1: X coordinate of pass point 1, traversed by the

tool as it moves from the tool exchange
position to a cutting start point
Z1: Z coordinate of pass point 1, traversed by the
JPASS POINT 2 X2: X coordinate of pass point 2, traversed by the
Z2: Z coordinate of pass point 2, traversed by the
NOTE
2 The position of pass point 2 is automatically determined
from parameter Nos. 9780 and 9781.
JSTART PNT
CX: X coordinate of a cutting start point

CZ: Z coordinate of a cutting start point
NOTE
3 When a machining area is specified, a cutting start point is
automatically calculated from blank profile data entered
initially.
JESCAPE AMNT EA: Travel along the Xaxis (in outer/inner surface
machining: diameter) or along the Zaxis (in
end facing: radius) for retraction after cutting
(1) Standard roughing
(2) High speed roughing
Clearance
251

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
4 When a bar machining process is newly created, the
clearance specified in parameter No. 9797 (along the
Xaxis) or parameter No. 9798 (along the Zaxis) is set
automatically.
JSDRCT.
RS: Direction of spindle rotation for rough machining.

Choose from [NORMAL] and [REVERSE].
JFINISHINGFX: Finishing allowance along the Xaxis (diameter)
FZ: Finishing allowance along the Zaxis
NOTE
5 The finishing allowance is set automatically to the value
specified on the initial setting screen. A different value,
however, can be specified for each process.
JPROC MOVE. MP: Speed of tool positioning after cutting in a
roughing process.
Choose from [STANDARD] and [HIGH
SPEED].
[STANDARD]
[HIGH SPEED]
The tool is retracted after cutting along

the final figure outline.
JSPINDL GEAL.
The tool is retracted immediately after

cutting.
P: Spindle gear
Select the desired type of SPINDLE GEAR
from the follwing menu items.
1 = Automatic
2 = Low speed
3 = Medium speed 1
4 = Medium speed 2
5 = High speed
NOTE
6 When automatic mode is selected, a spindle gear is
automatically selected according to the range of travel for
the tool. The spindle gears for low speed, medium speed
1, medium speed 2, and high speed correspond to the
spindle speeds determined by parameters No. 3741
(maximum speed for spindle gear 1), 3742 (maximum
speed for spindle gear 2), 3743 (maximum speed for spindle
gear 3), and 3744 (maximum speed for spindle gear 4),
respativety.
252
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
COOLANT

CM: Coolant specificatin

Select either [ON] or [OFF].
When ON is selected, M8 is output. When
OFF is selected, M9 is output.
1 = ON (M8)
2 = OFF (M9)
NOTE
7 Whether to set the coolant to on or off is determined
automatically according to the specification on the initial
setting screen. A different value, however, can be specified
for each process.
RESIDUAL CUT
AU: Automatic residual machining

specification
Residual after cutting

If there is a residual as shown above, it can be cut automatically with a lefthand
tool as shown below.
Select either [EXEC.] or [NO EXEC.].

NOTE
8 When automatic residual machining is valid, the tools for
residual machining and cutting conditions are automatically
determined.
This data item is not displayed when an OUTER, INNER, or
FACING is specified as a machining area.
(2) FINISHING process
ROUGHESS:
253
Surface roughness of a finished surface.

Choose from [1], [2], [3 ], [4 ], [5 ],
[6 ], [7 ], [8
], [9 ], and [10
]. Set
each surface roughness value from Item 9.
Cutting Conditions (Surface Roughness
Setting) of the tool data menu beforehand.
Surface roughness data is also displayed in the
window.

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
9 In finish machining, a cutting feed amount is calculated for
each contour from the surface roughness and the tooltip
radius of the tool being used. For details, see Section
13.2.1.
The surface roughness of each contour is automatically set
to the process data of the surface roughness specified
above. However, the surface roughness of each contour
can also be modified manually.
NOTE
10 When a surface roughness value is specified, the tool
and cutting conditions for finish machining are
determined automatically.
TOOLNO.
: Management number of a finish machining tool
CUTSPD
: Cutting speed for finish machining
FEED/REV
: Feed amount for finish machining
NOTE
11 For FEED/REV, the result of calculation based on the
process data of surface roughness and the tooltip
radius of the tool being used is displayed. However, the
displayed value is not applied to actual machining. To
modify the actual cutting feed amount for finish
machining, the surface roughness specified for each
contour must be modified.
TCODE
: T code of a finish machining tool
JPASS POINT1
X1: X coordinate of pass point 1 for finish

machining
Z1: Z coordinate of pass point 1 for finish
machining
JPASS POINT2
X2: X coordinate of pass point 2 for finish

machining
Z2: Z coordinate of pass point 2 for finish
machining
JSTART PNT
CX: X coordinate of a cutting start point for finish

machining
CZ: Z coordinate of a cutting start point for finish
machining
NOTE
12 Pass point 2 and the cutting start point are automatically
determined in the same way as for rough machining.
254
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

JESCAPE AMNT EA: Travel along the Xaxis (in outer/inner surface
machining: diameter) or along the Zaxis (in
end facing: radius) for retraction after finish
machining
NOTE
13 For finish bar machining, the finishing tool is moved along
the specified workpiece outline. At the end of machining,
the tool is retracted, cancelling tooltip radius
compensation.
For this clearance, the value obtained by multiplying the tooltip radius
of the tool being used by 2 (or 4 when using a diameter value) is set when
a bar machining process is newly created.
Example of retraction in finish machining:
ESCAPE AMNT
JSDRCT
RS: Direction of spindle rotation for finish

machining. Choose from [NORMAL] and
[REVERSE]
JSPINDL GEAR GM: Spindle gear. Choose from [AUTO], [LOW
GEAR], [MID GEAR 1], [MID GEAR 2], and
[HIGH GEAR].
JCOOLANT
CM: Specifies whether to use coolant. Choose [ON]
or [OFF]. M8 (ON) or M9 (OFF) is output.
JRESIDUAL CUT AU: Specifies automatic residual machining.
Specify whether to perform automatic residual
machining, in the same way as for rough
machining.
255

1.1.3
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
In bar machining, the contour calculation function can be used to specify

the final figure.
Details of Figure Data
NOTE
1 Up to 30 contours can be specified for one process.
(1) Specifying the figure start point
After all process data is entered and checked, move the cursor to the
line next to the process data. The contour start point coordinate input
screen will then be displayed.
START POINT X
START POINT Z
X: Xaxis coordinate (diameter value) of the

contour starting point
Z: Zaxis coordinate value of the contour
start point
(2) Selecting a contour

After input of the above start point coordinate, pressing the
[INSERT] soft key displays the figure selection menu on the soft key
field.
<
CHAM
FER
TANGNT
ROUND
PLOT
[+]
<
FIGURE
PLOT
END
(3) HORIZONTAL LINE

Pressing the [] or [] soft key selects a horizontal line, that is, a
straight line parallel to the Z axis.
DIRECTION
END POINT Z
END POINT X
LENGTH
ROUGHNESS
256
B: Direction of the horizontal line

Select the direction with the [] or
[] soft key.
Z: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the
end point
X: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the
horizontal line
Q: Length of the horizontal line
SR: The roughness of the finished face
is selected by the soft key. The
roughness specified by the process
data is set automatically.
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
(4) VERTICAL LINE

Pressing the [] or [] soft key selects a vertical line, that is, a
straight line parallel to the X axis.
DIRECTION
B: Direction of the vertical line
END POINT X
X: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the end
point
END POINT
Z: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the vertical
line
LENGTH
U: Length of the vertical line
ROUGHNESS
SR: The roughness of the finished face is
selected by the soft key. The roughness
specified by the process data is set
automatically.
(5) TAPER LINE
Pressing the [], [], [], or [] soft key selects a taper line.
DIRECTION
B: Direction of the taper line
TAPER END X CORD X: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the
taper line end point
TAPER END Z CORD Z: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the
taper line end point
COMPONENT X
I: Xaxis component of an angle
COMPONENT Z/ANGLE K/J: Angle, or Zaxis component of
an angle
NOTE
2 Specify an angle, together with move direction data, as
shown below.
X
B=
When angle data

of 30 is entered
B=
30
30
30
30
Z
B=
LENGTH
ROUGHNESS
(6) ARC
Pressing the [
DIRECTION
RADIUS
257
B=
Q: Length of the taper line (Radius)

SR: The roughness of the finished face is selected
by the soft key. The roughness specified by the
process data is set automatically.
]or [
] soft key selects an arc.

B: Direction of the are rotation
R: Specify the radius of an arc. A positive
number with a decimal point is to be
specified.

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
ARC END X
X: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the end

point
END Z/ANGLE
Z/J: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the end
point, or the center angle of an arc
CENTER X COORD
I: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the arc
center
CENTER Z COORD K: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the arc
center
ROUGHNESS
selected by the soft key.
The
NOTE
3 No major arc can be entered. For bar machining and pattern
repeating, even a semicircle or minor arc cannot be entered
if that semicircle or minor arc extends over three or more
quadrants.
(7) CHAMFER
Pressing the [CHAMFR] soft key selects chamfering.
BEVEL AMOUNT
I:
I
I: Chamfer amount
ROUGHNESS

selected by the soft key.
The
NOTE
4 When chamfering is specified, CHAMFER is displayed on
the screen until the next contour is entered.
258
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(8) ROUND
Pressing the [ROUND] soft key selects a corner radius.
ROUND RADIUS R:
Corner radius
NOTE
5 When a round corner is specified, ROUND is displayed on
the screen until the next contour is entered.
ROUGHNESS SR: The roughness of the finished face is selected

by the soft key. The roughness specified by
the process data is set automatically.
(9) TANGNT
Pressing the [TANGNT] soft key specifies that the next contour form
a tangent to the previous contour (either contour must be an arc).
NOTE
6 Be sure to specify a straight line or arc for the next contour.
When a contact point is specified, TANGNT is displayed
on the screen.
(10) End of contour input
Upon completion of the necessary contour input, press [FIGURE
END]. Then, the cursor moves to the next process.
259

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.1.4
A part of a contour is referred to as a figure block.
Details of Contour
Calculation
A figure block with its end point not determined is said to be in the
pending state. A pending figure block is drawn by dashed lines.
On the screen for figure data input (contour data input screen), more data
input items than required are provided. These data items are used to
calculate the cross point with the immediately preceding pending figure
block, and also calculate the end point. The pending state is then released.
NOTE
1 Ten successive figure blocks can be specified as pending
blocks.
(1) Chamfering immediately after a start point
Immediately after a start point, chamfering or can be specified. In this
case, the coordinates of a calculated start point are displayed.
Entered start point
Chamfering
Calculated start point
Immediately after chamfering or corner R, only a horizontal line,

vertical line, slanted line, or arc can be specified.
(2) Chamfering/corner R at the end of a contour
At the end of a contour, chamfering or corner R can be specified. In
this case, enter a temporary figure block as a pending block. In a
temporary figure block, specify only a horizontal line, vertical line,
or slanted line, with its end point pending.
Chamfering
Temporary figure block
Specify the end point of the figure block immediately before the
final figure block, allowing the end point of chamfering or corner R
in the final block to be calculated.
260
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

(3) Horizontal line

(a) When the immediately preceding block is pending, and contact
point determination is not specified
i) When the X coordinate of a horizontal line is entered
The intersection with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. However, this figure is pending.

Intersection
When the immediately preceding block specifies an arc,

the intersection selection request screen appears. Press
[CROSS 1] or [CROSS 2], then press [INSERT] (or
[ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure).
ii) When the X coordinate (X) of a horizontal line is entered,
together with the Z coordinate (Z) of an end point, or a line
length (W)
block is calculated, and the end point is determined.
(X, Z)

Intersection
(End point of )
(End point of )
Intersection
(b) When the immediately preceding figure block specifies a pending

arc, and contact point determination is specified
i) When no data is entered (with the direction of a horizontal line
specified at figure selection)
Usually, a contact point is automatically calculated from
the rotation direction of the arc and the direction of the
horizontal line. The horizontal line is pending.
If any of the specified directions is invalid, however, a
warning message is displayed to indicate that invalid data
has been entered.
ii) When the Z coordinate (Z) of an end point, or a line length (W)
is entered
In the same way as in i) above, a contact point is
automatically calculated, and the end point of the
horizontal line is determined.
261

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Z
Contact point
Contact point
(4) Vertical line

(a) When the immediately preceding block is pending, and contact
i) When the Z coordinate of a vertical line is entered
block is calculated. However, this figure is pending.

Z

Intersection
When the immediately preceding block specifies an arc, the

intersection selection request screen appears. Press [CROSS 1] or
[CROSS 2], then press [INSERT] (or [ALTER] or [ALTER
FIGURE] to change the figure).
ii) When the Z coordinate (Z) of a vertical line is entered,
together with the X coordinate (X) of an end point, or a line
length (W)
block is calculated, and the end point is determined.
(X. Z)

U
Intersection
Intersection
262
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

(b) When the immediately preceding figure block specifies a pending

i) When no data is entered (with the direction of a vertical line
specified at figure selection)
Usually, a contact point is automatically calculated from
the rotation direction of the arc and the direction of the
vertical line. The vertical line is pending.
If any of the specified directions is invalid, however, a warning
message is displayed to indicate that invalid data has been entered.
ii) When the X coordinate (X) of an end point, or a line length
(W) is entered.
X
U
Contact point
Contact point
(5) Slanted line

NOTE
2 When an angle of 90 or greater is entered, a warning
message is displayed to indicate that invalid data has been
entered.
(a) When the immediately preceding figure block is not pending
i) When a line length (Q) and angle (J) are entered, or
ii) When a line length (Q), and the X component (I) and the Z
component (K) of an angle are entered
The end point of a slanted line is determined.
End point
End point
J
Start point
Start point
K
iii) When an angle (J), and the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate

(Z) of an end point are entered, or
iv) When the X component (I) and Z component (K) of an angle,
and the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate (Z) of an end point
are entered
The end point of a slanted line is determined
263

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
X or Z
End point
J
Start point
(b) When the immediately preceding figure block specifying an arc

is not pending
i) When the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate (Z) of an end point
is entered
The angle of a slanted line is calculated automatically,
and an end point is determined. If neither the X
coordinate nor Z coordinate of the end point of a slanted
line is entered, the slanted line will be pending.
X or Z
This angle is calculated

automatically.
Arc center
Arc end point
(c) When the immediately preceding block is pending, and contact

i) When the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of the end
point of a slanted line, and an angle (J) are entered, or
ii) When the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of the end
point of a slanted line, and the X component (I) and Z
component (K) of an angle are entered
block is calculated.
End point
(X, Z)

Intersection
When the immediately preceding block specifies an arc, the intersection

selection request screen appears. Press [CROSS 1] or [CROSS 2], then
press [INSERT] (or [ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure).
It is assumed that the radius of the arc and the coordinates (X,Z) of the arc
center have already been entered.
264
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
(d) When the immediately preceding figure block specifies a pending

It is assumed that the radius of the arc and the coordinates (X,Z)
of the arc center have already been entered.
i) When an angle (J) is entered, or
ii) When the X component (I) and Z component (K) of an angle
are entered
The contact point selection request screen appears. Press
[TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2], then press [INSERT] (or
The slanted line is pending.
Contact point
Contact point
iii) When the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of the end
point of a slanted line are entered
The end point of the slanted line is determined.
Contact point
Contact point
iv) When an angle (J) and the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate

(Z) of an end point are entered, or
v) When the X component (I) and Z component (K) of an angle,
and the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate (Z) of an end point
are entered
265

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

The end point of the slanted line is determined.
If the positional relationship between the coordinates of
the contact point and the slanted line is such that an
entered angle conflicts with the entered X coordinate or
Z coordinate of an end point, a warning message is
displayed to indicate that invalid data has been entered.
J
Contact point
X or Z
J
Contact point
vi) When an angle (J), and the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate
(Z) of the end point of a slanted line are entered
The end points of the arc and slanted line are determined.
The contact point selection request screen does not
appear.
(X, Z)

J
Start point of

Contact point
(6) AC
(a) When the immediately preceding block is not pending, and
contact point determination is specified
i) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc
center are entered
The arc is pending.
ii) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate (X) and Z
coordinate (Z) of an arc end point are entered, or
iii) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc
center, and the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of an arc
end point are entered
A minor arc is determined.
266
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
(End point)
(X, Z)
R
(I, K)
(Start point)
iv) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc

center, and the central angle (J) are entered
An arc having the specified central angle is determined.
(End point)
J
(Start point)
(I, K)
NOTE
3 If the distance (radius) between the start point and arc
center differs from the distance (radius) between the end
point and arc center, the figure displayed on the program
screen will differ from the workpiece outline, and machining
will not be performed correctly.
v) When an arc radius (R) is entered
When contact point determination and a horizontal line
with an X coordinate entered are specified immediately
after, an arc can be uniquely determined.
However, there are two possible contact points, such that
one contact point must be selected by pressing
[TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2].
(X, Z)
R

Contact point
(b) When the immediately preceding block is not pending, and

contact point determination is specified
267

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
End point of

Start point of
Contact point
Horizontal line, vertical line, or slanted line (for which its end
point has been determined);
or
Arc (for which the radius and end point have been determined)
Arc for which the X coordinate and Z coordinate of its end point have
been entered
The radius of the arc of is calculated automatically.
(c) Data input when the immediately preceding figure block is

pending (for which the start point has been determined), and
contact point determination is not specified
i) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of an arc center are entered, or
ii) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc
The intersection selection request screen appears. Press
[CROSS 1] or [CROSS 2], then press [INSERT] (or
[ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure)
(d) Data input when the immediately preceding line is pending (for
which the start point has been determined), and contact point
determination is specified
i) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of an arc center are entered
A contact point with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. The arc is pending
(I, K)
R
(Start point of )
Contact point

center, and the central angle (J) are entered, or
iii) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc
block is calculated. The end point of the arc is
determined
268

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
End point of

End point of
(X, Z)
(I, K)
J
Contact point

Contact point
(I, K)
Start point of
Start point of (1)
iv) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate (X) and Z
coordinate (Z) of an arc end point are entered
block is calculated. The contact point selection request
screen appears. Press [TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2]. In
this case, select a contact point to define a minor arc.
(X, Z)
End point of
R
R
Contact point
Contact point
(e) When the immediately preceding arc is pending (for which the
start point has been determined and only the radius is to be
entered), and contact point determination is specified
In this case, the directions of rotation of the two arcs must be the
same.
i) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate and Z coordinate
of an end point are entered
block is calculated. The contact point selection request
screen appears. Press [TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2]. In
this case, select a contact point to define a minor arc.
Contact point
End point
Contact point
R
Start point of

center, and an arc radius (R) are entered
block is calculated. The arc is pending.
269

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

R
(I, K)
Start point of
(7) Lines forming tangents to two arcs

Start point of
(I3, K3)
(I1, K1)

Arc for which the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of its
center have been entered (A start point is determined. This arc
is pending.)
Slanted line (pending)
Data other than direction data cannot be entered.
Arc for which its radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of its center have been entered
The end points of figures and are determined, and the
arc of is pending. Four slanted lines form tangents to the
two arcs as shown above. Depending on the directions of
rotation of the two arcs, the slanted line that makes a smooth
connection to the arcs is automatically selected.
270

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(8) Arc that contact intersecting lines and arcs
(X, Z)
Contact point

Contact point

Start point
Start point
Contact point
Contact point

Contact point
Start point
Contact point
Horizontal line, vertical line, or slanted line that is pending (for

which the start point has been determined);
or
Arc that is pending (for which the start point has been determined)
Arc (pending)
Data other than arc radius data (R) cannot be entered.
Horizontal line for which the X coordinate of its end point has
been entered, a vertical line for which the Z coordinate of its end
point has been entered, or a slanted line for which the X coordinate
or Z coordinate of its end point and its angle have been entered;
or
figure of is pending.
(9) Arc contacting a line and arc that do not intersect with each other
Start point

Contact point

R
Contact point
Horizontal line, vertical line, or slanted line that is pending (for

which the start point has been determined)
271

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Arc (pending)
Data other than arc radius data (R) cannot be entered.
arc o is pending. Depending on the direction of the line and
the rotation direction of the arc of , the arc that makes a
smooth connection is automatically selected.
(10) Arc contacting two arcs that do not intersect with each other

Start point of
(I3, K3)
(I1, K1)
Arc for which the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of its
center have been entered (pending)
Arc (pending)
Data other than the rotation direction data cannot be entered.
arc of is pending. Eight arcs can contact the two arcs
according to the combinations of the rotation directions of the
three contacting arcs. Depending on the direction of rotation
of the arc, the arc that makes a smooth connection is
automatically selected.
272
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

1.1.5
A part of an entered contour can be enlarged when it is drawn.
Partially Enlarged
Drawing of a Contour
Operation)
<
(1) Move the cursor to the contour to be partially enlarged.

(2) Press the right end [+] soft key several times until the following soft
keys are displayed.
SCALE SCALE ENLARG
NORM PROCES
EDIT

DATA
(3) When the above soft keys are displayed, the scale ratio is displayed
at the top right of the screen. Press the [SCALE ] or [SCALE ]
soft key to change the scale ratio.
In this case, the drawing scale is changed to 1.0.
(4) Pressing the [ENLARG] soft key enlarges the figure up to the
specified ratio. The contour indicated by the cursor then comes to
the center of the screen.
(5) To display the figures before or after the contour portion indicated
by the cursor, just move the cursor accordingly.
(6) To draw a figure with the original ratio, press the [NORM] soft key.
273

1.1.6
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Automatic Residual
Machining Function
(1) Compensation by the tool figure

In bar residual machining for which automatic residual machining
is specified, the residual portion automatically remains because of
the tool figure as shown in the examples below.
Example 1)
When the contour is a straight line
Tool
Clearance angle
(Set in Parameter No. 9801)
Example 2)
When the contour is an arc
Tool
Several residual portions can be left unremoved.
Residual portions
274
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(2) Executing automatic residual machining

Residual portions can be cut off automatically.
Tool
Residual portion
NOTE
Automatic residual machining is not performed if NOT
EXEC is specified in the data item which specifies whether
to perform automatic residual machining.
When automatic residual machining is performed, cutting trace

compensation based on the tool angle is not performed. Therefore, the
tool tip may interfere with the workpiece.
In automatic residual machining, the back of a tool can foul the opposite
side of the workpiece. Before actual machining is started, a careful check
must be made using machining simulation.
275

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.1.7
(1) Machining the outer surface, inner surface, and end face of a bar
Details of Bar
Machining
Machining example) Machining the bar outer surface
Cutting start point
Ez
Ex /2
MD
Ez
MD
MD
Ex /2
MD: Depth of cut (Radius) entered on the process data screen

U: Finishing allowance (Delail data screen : diameter) in the Xaxis
direction entered on the initial setting screen (Detail data screen)
W: Finishing allowance along the Zaxis entered on the initial setting
screen (Detail data screen)
Ex: Clearance (Detail data screen) along the Xaxis at rough bar
machining
Ez: Clearance (Detail data screen) along the Zaxis at rough bar
machining
NOTE
1 In rough machining, cutting is performed to produce a figure
which has a clearance of the finishing allowance (along the
Xaxis and Zaxis) plus the tool tip R radius from the
specified contour.
2 When cutting for all the specified figures is completed
semifinish machining is performed. The tools and cutting
conditions used for semifinish machining are the same as
those for rough machining.
Semifinish machining, however, can be canceled by
setting bit 5 of Parameter No. 9772 to 1.
3 In the following cases, semifinish machining is always
performed:
Outer surface machining: X coordinate of a cutting start
point < Maximum X coordinate of a contour
Inner surface machining: X coordinate of a cutting start
point > Minimum X coordinate of a contour
End facing: Z coordinate of a cutting start point < Maximum
Z coordinate of a contour
276
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

(2) Bar machining for which automatic residual machining is specified

Machining example) Outer surface + automatic residual machining 1
Ez
Ex /2
Ez
MD
Ex /2
Ez
MD
Ex /2
Cutting start
point
Finish figure
start point

U: Finishing allowance (Detail data screen : diameter) in the Xaxis
machining
machining
Machining example) Outer surface + automatic residual machining (2)
In the bar machining for which automatic residual machining is specified,
the bar can be cut with the cutting path compensated by the tool figure as
shown below.
Program
zero
point
277

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(3) Automatic residual machining of a bar

Machining example) Automatic residual machining of a bar
Lefthand
tool
Ez Ex /2
MD
Cutting start point
Rz
Rz
MD
Rz
Rz: Clearance (Parameter No. 9800) for residual machining

U: Finishing allowance (Detail data screen : diameter) in the Xaxis
machining
machining
278
B62444E1/04
1.1.8
Entering Contour Data
for Machining on the
2Path Lathe with Two
Spindles Facing Each
Other

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
The contour of the tool post 2 (rightside spindle) on the lathe that has two
facing spindles is entered as follows.
(1) When the program zero point is at the workpiece end
When the coordinate of the zero point of the workpiece end face is
(0, 0), enter then so that the Zaxis runs in the opposite
direction for tool post 1.
The bar machining contours of outer and inner surfaces are entered
from left to right on the screen. The contour for endface bar
machining is entered from outer surface to inner surface and to the
left.
- Contour of the outer surface bar
+X2
Workpiece

+Z2
[frame_small]
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Spindle
Contour of the inner surface bar
+X2
+Z2
279
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Workpiece
Spindle

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Contour of the end face bar

+X2
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Workpiece

+Z2
Spindle
(2) When the program zero point is on the chuck end face
When the coordinate of the zero point of the chuck end face is (0, 0),
enter then so that the Zaxis runs in the opposite direction for
tool post 1.
- Contour of the outer surface bar
+X2
+X2
Workpiece
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Spindle
+Z2
Contour of the inner surface bar

+X2
+Z2
280
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Workpiece
Spindle
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

Contour of the end face bar
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
+X2
Workpiece

+Z2
1.1.9
Entering Contour Data
for Machining on the
Singlespindle 2path
Lathe (16TB)
Spindle
On the singlespindle 2path lathe, the program coordinates of tool post

2 are the same as those of tool post 1. The contour can be specified in
exactly in the same was as for that on tool post 1.
See 5 Description of Coordinate Systems in Chapter II for details.
281

1.1.10
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
In bar machining (outer surface, inner surface, or end face), useless

machining can be canceled automatically according to the specified
material figure to optimize machining.
Null Cutting Cancel

Function
Example)
Outer surface bar machining
Cutting path
Rapid traverse path
Product figure
Material figure
NOTE
1 This function cannot be applied to automatic residual
machining.
(1) Parameter setting
- Setting to validate the null cutting cancel function
Bit No.
9777
#7
ACC
#6
ACC 1
0
-
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
: Null cutting is canceled automatically.

: Ordinary bar machining is performed including null
cutting.
Cutting portion clearance amount
9784
SFCLRX
SFCLRX: Clearance amount at cutting start in end face bar machining
SFCLRZ
282
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
9785

SFCLRZ
SFCLRZ
: Clearance amount at cutting start in outersurface

bar/Innersurface bar machining.
Outersurface bar machining

SFCLRZ
Innersurface bar machining

SFCLRZ
NOTE
2 The parameter for the clearance amount of the above
cutting portion is used also when cutting start point or
machining start point is automatically determined.
(2) Specifying of the material figure
To specify the material figure, specify formed material as the
initial setting data for the machining program, and enter the X and
Z coordinates of the corner.
The material figure consists only of vertical and horizontal lines. It
increases (outer surface) or decreases (inner surface) monotonously
from the material end toward the chuck in steps as shown in the
following example.
The coordinates of up to 12 corner points can be specified for the
outer surface or inner surface.
Example of specifiable material figure)
(X1, Z1)
(X2, Z2)
(X3, Z3)
Coordinates of outer surface point 1 = (X1, Z1)
(X4, Z4)
(X5, Z5)

(X6, Z6)

(X8, Z8)
(X7, Z7)

283

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Example a material figure that can be specified)
Coordinates of inner surface point 1 = (X1, Z1)

(X2, Z2)
(X1, Z1)
(X4, Z4)

(X3, Z3)

(X5, Z5)
(X6, Z6)
Example of a material figure that cannot be specified 1)

A taper line cannot be specified.
Example of a material figure that cannot be specified 2)

Nonmonotonous increase
284
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(3) Specifying of bar machining process data

The process data and contour of bar machining can be entered in the
same way as ordinary input.
The contour, however, must be inside the material figure entered at
initial setting.
Example of a contour for bar machining (outer surface + automatic
residual machining)
Material figure
Contour
Example of a contour that cannot be entered)
The contour goes out of the material figure

Material figure
Contour
NOTE
3 To reduce input errors, enter the material figure and bar
machining contour in the following sequence instead of
entering first the material figure, then the contour.
1. To create a machining program, enter a rough figure
such as a rectangle as a formed material.
2. Enter the bar machining contour like ordinary operation.
3. Redisplay the material figure data screen for initial
setting.
4. Pressing the [PLOT] soft key draws the material figure
and bar machining contour which are overlapped on
each other. This display is called product figure drawing
screen.
Enter the material figure data while checking both the
material figure and contour.
285

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(4) Details of machining

If the parameter for null cutting cancel is set, and the formed material
is specified as the material figure, the bar machining process is
executed, thereby automatically canceling cutting where there is no
material.
(a) Machining the outer surface of a bar
Cutting path
Rapid traverse path
Product figure
Material figure
(b) Machining a recessed outer surface of a bar

When outer surface, inner surface, or end face + automatic
residual machining is specified, the middle portion is cut with the
tooltip geometry compensation as shown below. For other
portions, null cutting is canceled as with ordinary outer surface,
inner surface, or end face machining.
The portion which was left uncut in the middle portion is
automatically cut by the lefthand tool during automatic residual
machining.
Example of machining a recessed outer surface of a bar)
Middle portion
Innersurface bar machining and endface bar machining are executed in

the same way as outersurface bar machining.
286

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.1.11
(1) Generals
When tool whose cutting edge angle is acute is used in bar and
pattern repeating processing , it is possible machining that tool and
material dont interfere.
Compensation by Tool
Cutting Edge
Parameter nonsetting
Bit No.
9767
SGT
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
Parameter setting
#2
#1
SGT
#0
0 : Usual machining
1 : It is possible machining which give consideration to cutting edge
angle. And it is possible to input the tool cutting edge data with
decimal value in tool data screen.
Compensation of conditions are following. (And abovementioned
parameter set to 1. )
(a) Interference
The tool and material interfere in
usual machining.
(b) Cutting edge angle
The cutting angle of the tool is less than
90 degrees. (When round nose tool is
used, this compensation
becomes ineffective.)
(c) Figure
The product figure will be limited to
mototonous increase in the
direction of the X axis and Z axis.
Start point
ineffective
End point
ineffective
Start point
287
End point

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) Details
Figure is compensated according to the following.
(a) The straight line is drawn from the end point of figure that
interference gets up. The inclination of the line is calculated from
a value of cutting edge angle of tool and parameter No. 9801
(TLBACK) . Afterhere, this straight line is called Auxiliary line.
The left part of Auxiliary line in not cut down.
(b) The point that Auxiliary line and figure intersect, is an end point
of new figure.
(c) Auxiliary line becomes figure (taper line). The feed amount is
calculated from the value of the surface roughness of the process
data. And it is used for the finishing machining of Auxiliary line.
(d) All figure that placed between Auxilialy line is ignored.
*Note :
Auxillary line is drawn from

contact line in case of arc.
Parameter value
Auxiliary line
contact
point
Parameter value
Auxiliary line
example)
a
Auxiliary line
d
before
e
*
*
*
End point of the horizonal line which start point is b changes in

to c of the end point of Auxiliary line.
The figure which end point is f changes from the vertical line into
the taper line.
All figure that placed between Auxilialy line is ignored. (c f)
f
after
288
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
(e) When end point of Auxiliary line is outside of begining point

(Auxiliary line dosent intersect with figure), the cross point of
Auxiliary line and the vertical line which passes the beginning
point becomes the new beginning point of figure.
Auxiliary line
before
end point
before
end point
beginning
point
new begnning
point
vertical line which passes

the beginning point
(f) This compensation is also effective in the backward cutting in bar

machining.
before
beginning point
Auxiliary line
after
beginning point
end point
end point
(g) When the distance between end point of Auxiliary line and start
point of figure is smaller than diameter of tool nose, the end point
of Auxiliary line becomes new start point of figure.
before
after
smaller than 2R.
289
move the end point of Auxiliary line.

1.1.12
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(1) Parameter
Bar and Pattern

Repeating Finishing
Processing without
Using G41/G42
Command
Bit No.
9767
NCR
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
NCR
#2
#1
#0
1 : G41/G42 command is not used in bar and pattern repeating finishing

processing.
0 : G41/G42 command is used in bar and pattern repeating finishing
processing.
(2) Details
when parameter No.9767 bit 3 is set to 1, G41/G42 command of
offsetC is not used in finishing of the bar and pattern repeating
processing. Therefore, G40 of offsetC canceling is not
commanded. However G40 is commanded in the top of each
processing to correspond the midway drive of the program.
290
B62444E1/04
1.1.13
Improving the
Machining of Figures
that Differ Slightly in
Level
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

In rough machining of the outer surface, inner surface, and end faces of
a bar, when the machining profile has a slight difference in level as shown
below, set bit 5 (SFG) of parameter 9767 to 1 to perform normal
machining operation.
Must be less than the

tool nose radius
Chamfering
Corner R
This improvement is valid only for the rough machining of a bar.

Finish machining will result in, too much cutting in tool nose radius
compensation, causing P/S alarm 41. When bit 3 (NCR) of parameter
9767 is set to 1 to disable the use of G41/G42, however, the alarm will
not be issued.
In this case, because G41/G42 is not used for finish machining, the
finished figure may be slightly inaccurate. To resolve this problem,
set bit 3 (NCR) of parameter 9767 to 0 and use a tool having smaller
tool nose radius.
Remark)
Machining is not always performed normally, however, for a figure
which is slightly different in level, as in the following example.
For such a figure, machining can be performed normally by adding the
procedure used to machine corner R for a part having an acute angle.
corner R for a part having an acute angle

Horizontal line
Arc
Horizontal line
291

1.2
PATTERN
REPEATING
1.2.1
Machining Type
Selection
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Formed materials such as castings and forgings are machined in pattern

repeating.
automatically created, and the process type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.
Pressing the [RPT] soft key selects pattern repeating.
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD REMOVAL X REMOVAL Z TOOLNO CUTSPD TCODE
RPT (R) OUTER END
HEADL
6.000
3.000
102
80
0101
FEED/REV CUTDPTH
0.25
2.000
PROC(01)
AREA
RPT (F) OUTER END
HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101
292
B62444E1/04
1.2.2
Details of Setting Data
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

JAREAA: Select the desired type of the AREA from the following
items.
Those are displayed on the window.
1 = OUTER END
2 = OUTER MID
3 = INNER END
4 = INNER MID
5 = FACE END
6 = FACE MID
See Section 1.1 Bar Machining for details about machining areas.
However, automatic residual machining cannot be performed with pattern
repeating.
NOTE
When a machining area is specified, the tools for rough
machining and cutting conditions are determined
automatically.
REMOVAL
X: Cutting allowance (diameter) along the Xaxis

Z: Cutting allowance along the Zaxis
All data items displayed on the program screen and detail data
screen, with the exception of the item above, are the same as those
displayed for bar machining.
(2) Finishing process
All data items displayed on the program screen and detail data screen
are the same as those displayed for bar machining.
1.2.3
Figure Data Input
For pattern repeating, specify a final contour as figure data by performing

a contour calculation in the same way as for bar machining.
When specifying figure data for pattern repeating, a cutting direction can
be entered for each contour block. For details of the direction of cutting,
see Section 1.2.5.
CUTDIRECTION: Cutting direction. Choose from [NORMAL] and
[REVERS].
See Section 1.1 for additional information about contour specification.
NOTE
Unlike bar machining, pattern repeating performs neither
automatic cutting path compensation, based on the tool
angle, nor automatic residual machining. This means that
only figure data that does not result in the tool fouling the
workpiece outline can be entered for pattern repeating.
293

1.2.4
Details of Pattern
Repeating
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
In pattern repeating, cutting is repeated while the cutting pattern is shifted

step by step to cut the specified final figure.
Machining example) Pattern repeating for an outersurface edge
A0
An
Al
Af
MD
First trace of rough machining
Last trace of rough machining
Product figure
RX/2
U/2
RZ
MD : Depth of cut (Radius) entered on the process data screen

U : Finishing allowance (Detail data screen : diameter) along the
Xaxis entered on the process data screen
W : Finishing allowance along the Zaxis entered on the process
data screen (Detail data screen)
RX : Cutting allowance (Detail data screen : diameter) along the
Xaxis entered on the process data screen
RZ : Cutting allowance along the Zaxis entered on the process
data screen
(1) Determining the machining start point (outersurface machining)
A0 : Virtual machining start point
This start point, indicating the 0th machining start point, is
used only for machining start point calculation.
A0x = Sx + RX + (TRx or 0)
Sx = Cutting start point:
X coordinate.
A0z = Sz + RZ + (TRz or 0)
Sz = Cutting start point:
Z coordinate.
TRx = Tool tip : Diameter
of R radius.
TRz = Tool tip : R radius.
Sx and Sz indicate the coordinates of the cutting start point.
NOTE
1 The values in parentheses vary according to the virtual tool
tip position of the tool being used.
A1 : First machining start point
A1x = A0x d0 (d0: Maximum depth of cut MD)
A1z = A0z d0z (d0z = d0 *RZ/RX)
An : nth machining start point

Anx = An1x d0
Anz = An1z d0z
294
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

Af : Finishing start point

Afx = Sx
Afz = Sz
(2) Determining the machining start point (for a recessed outer surface)
A0
MD
Al
RX
An
U
Af
A0 : Virtual machining start point

This start point, indicating the 0th machining start point, is
used only for machining start point calculation.
A0x = Sx + RX + (TRx or 0)
Sx = Cutting start point:
X coordinate.
A0z = Sz
Sz = Cutting start point:
Z coordinate.
TRx = Tool tip : Diameter
of R radius.
Sx indicates the coordinates of the cutting start point.
NOTE
2 The values in parentheses vary according to the virtual tool
tip position of the tool being used.
A1 : First machining start point

A1x = A0x d0 (d0: Maximum depth of cut MD)
A1z = Sz

An : nth machining start point
Anx = An 1x d0
Anz = Sz
Af : Finishing start point
Afx = Sx
Afz = Sz
Also for machining the end surface, recessed end face, inner surface, and
recessed inner surface, the machining start points are determined
according to the machining areas.
295

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(3) The rough machining and finishing are executed as shown in the
following example.
Machining
start point
Auxiliary figure
end point
Next
machining
start point
Figure
end point
Figure
start point
1.2.5
Auxiliary
figure
start point
A cutting direction can be specified for each figure block.
Automatic Reverse
Machining

The cutting direction can be specified for each contour with the
[NORMAL] or [REVERS] soft key.
When a figure block specifying reverse machining is displayed, it is
marked with an asterisk (*).
1.2.6
See 1.1.11 Compensation by Toll Cutting Edge in Part III for details.
Compensation by Tool
Cutting Edge
296
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1.2.7
Improvement of
Pattern Repeating
Cutting Retract
Movement
Generals
In pattern repeating, when each X coordinates of rough machining

terminal point (XE) are lower than next machining start point (X2) , the
retract position of X axis direction is higher one of cutting start point or
first machining start point.
The tool always moves to a constant point and it becomes the following
cycles.
Z3 Z2 Z1
S S S
S Cutting start point
S Cutting start point
S Machining start point X1

For outer surface and inner surface
For and facing
Motions
D Outer surface, Inner
surface
i)
When X coordinate of in terminal of rough machining (XE)

is lower than next machining start point (X2) .
XEX axis direction (Higher one of cutting start point or first
machining start point) Z axis directionX axis direction
(Next machining start point X2) .
Cutting start point or first machining

start point.
X2
XE
297

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
ii) When X coordinate in terminal of rough machining (XE) and

next machining start point (X2) is same or X coordinate in
terminal of rough machining (XE) is higher (In case of inner
diameter is lower ) than next machining start point (X2) .
XE Z axis direction (next machining start point Z2) X
axis direction (next machining start point X2) .
Z2
XE
X2
D Facing
i)
When Z coordinate in terminal point of rough machining (ZE)

is lower than next machining start point (Z2) .
ZEZ axis direction (higher one of cutting start point Z1 or
machining start point Z1) X axis direction Z axis
direction (next machining start point Z2)
Z2
X
Z
ZE
298
higher one of cutting start point

Z1 or machining start point Z1.
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

ii) When Z coordinate in terminal point of rough machining (ZE)

and next machining start point (Z2) are same or Z coordinate
in terminal point of rough machining (ZE) is higher than next
machining start point (Z2).
ZEX axis (next machining start point X2) Z axis
direction (next machining point Z2)
Z2
X2
X
Z
ZE
299

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.2.8
Pattern Repeating
Approach to Shape
Start Point
Generals
In pattern repeating, the method of the movement from machining start

point to the beginning point of shape is as follows.
machining
start point
PAP=1
standard
cutting start
point
shape
to rapid traverse all
start point of shape
In above mentioned method, when start point of shape is in material, the

material is cut in rapid traverse. To evade this trouble, the approach that
from the machining start point to the shape start point , is changed only
when parameter effective.
machining
start point
PAP
effective
cutting start
point
shape

to rapid traverse all

cutting feed
The tool moves from the machining start point to the shape start point
each one axis. The last block, which moves to the shape start point is
cutting feeding.
300

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Parameter
Bit No.
9767
PAP
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
PAP
#1
#0
1 : It moves to shape start point every one axis in pattern repeating.

0 : It moves to shape start point by rapid travers simultaneous 2axes.
Approach
movement of
each machining
<Forward>
Outer surface, Inner surface

machining
start point
cutting start
point
shape

to
Outer surface+residual machining

Inner surface+residual machining
rapid traverse.
cutting feed.

cutting start point

machining start point
to rapid traverse.
cutting feed.
shape
301
shape
start
point

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
End face
cutting start point
machining start
point

shape
to rapid traverse.
cutting feed.
End face+residual machining
cutting start point


shape start
point
shape
to rapid traverse.
cutting feed.
302
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
<Backward>

cutting start point
machining start
point
shape

(Backward specified each shape)
backward
shape
303
cutting start point
back
ward

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
End face
shape

cutting start point
End face (Backward specified each shape)

back
shape
back
machining start point 2
cutting start point
1.2.9
Bar and Pattern
Repeating Finishing
Processing without
Using G41/G42
Command
See 1.1.12 Bar and Pattern Repeating Finishing Processing without

Using G41/G42 Command in Part III for details.
304
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.3

The residual portion at a right angle is machined in residual machining.

If, however, machining a recessed surface of a bar is specified, residual
machining does not need to be specified, because it is usually performed
automatically.
RESIDUAL
MACHINING
1.3.1
created automatically, and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
Machining Type
Selection
Pressing the [RESID] soft key selects residual machining.
PROC(01)
RESI (R)
PROC(01)
RESI (F)
AREA
OUTER
AREA
OUTER

HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101
305

1.3.2
Details of Process Data
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
JAREA (A): Select the desired type of the AREA from the following
menu items.
1. Outer surface
2. Inner surface
3. End face
306
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

4. Inner bottom
Residual machining is performed for the bottom of a drilled hole.
Machining start point CX : X coordinate (diameter value) of a clearance

position between residual portions
CZ : Z coordinate of a clearance position
between residual portions
All data items displayed on the program screen and detail data screen,
with the exception of those described above, are the same as for bar
machining.
307

1.3.3
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
In one process, up to five residual machining portions can be specified for

one machining area.
(1) Outersurface residual machining
Input data example)
30
80
50
60
3
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(START POINT X)
(START POINT Z)
(END POINT X)
(END POINT Z)
(ROUND RADIUS)
End point
Chamfer amount
Start point
End point
Corner R radius
Start point
308
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(2) Innersurface residual machining

Input data example)
50 INPUT
80 INPUT
30 INPUT
60 INPUT
INPUT
2
INPUT
(START POINT X)
(START POINT Z)
(END POINT X)
(END POINT Z)
(Cursor shift)
(Chamfer amount)
Start point
Chamfer amount
End point
Start point
Corner R radius
End point
309

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(3) Endface residual machining

Input data example)
30
10
50
0
3
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(START POINT X)
(START POINT Z)
(END POINT X)
(END POINT Z)
(ROUND RADIUS)
End point
Chamfer amount
Start point
End point
Corner R radius
Start point
310
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(4) Endbottom residual machining

Input data example)
10 INPUT
80 INPUT
40 INPUT
75 INPUT
INPUT
2
INPUT
(START POINT X)
(START POINT Z)
(END POINT X)
(END POINT Z)
(Cursor shift)
(Chamfer amount)
End point
Chamfer amount
Start point
End point
Corner R radius
Start point
311

1.3.4
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(1) When the machining area is an outer surface
Details of Residual
Machining
End point
Ez
MD
Ex
Start point
Ez
MD : Depth of cut (radius value) entered on the process data screen

U : Finishing allowance (diameter value) along the Xaxis
entered on the process data screen
W : Finishing allowance along the Zaxis entered on the process
data screen
Rz : Clearance (parameter No. 9800) for residual machining
Ex : Clearance (Parameter No. 9797: diameter) along the Xaxis
at rough bar machining
Ez : Clearance (Parameter No. 9798) along the Zaxis at rough
bar machining
NOTE
1 In rough machining, cutting is performed to produce a figure
which has a clearance of the finishing allowance (along the
Xaxis or Zaxis) plus the tool tip radius from the specified
residual machining figure.
2 Use parameter No. 9799 to specify a clearance for
endface residual machining and innerbottom residual
machining.
312
B62444E1/04
1.4
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

End facing cuts mill scales from an end face of a material.
END FACING
1.4.1
Machining Type
Selection
created automatically, and a machining type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.
Pressing the [FACING] soft key selects end facing.
PROC(01)
FACING (R)
PROC(01)
FACING (F)
1.4.2

HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101
(1) Roughing process/Finishing Process

END PT
EX : X coordinate of a cutting end point for rough

machining/finish machining.
The position
where a workpiece is cut from the workpiece
center by (tool tip radius of the tool used),
multiplied by 2, is determined automatically.
NOTE
1 In end facing, a cutting start point and end point are
automatically determined. However, when an area requires
no machining as in the case of a material that has holes,
unnecessary machining operation can be eliminated by
manual setting.
2 All data items displayed on the program screen and detail
data screen, with the exception of the item above, are the
same as for bar machining.
3 Figure data is not used for end facing.
313

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.4.3
Details of End Facing
W
MD
(Cutting start point)
Ex
(Cutting end point)
Ez
MD : Depth of cut per pass in rough machining. The formulas

below are used to determine the average depth of cut per
pass.
N (CUT COUNT) = ((END REMOVAL) (FINISHING
AMNT))/(CUTTING DEPTH):
The fractional part is rounded up to an integer.
MD (CUT DPTH) = ((END REMOVAL) (FINISHING
AMNT))/N
ED : X coordinate (parameter No. 9807: Diameter) where the feed
amount for end facing is reduced. From the cutting start
point (CX) to ED, the workpiece is cut according to the
cutting feed amount specified on the program screen. From
ED to the cutting end point (EX), the workpiece is cut
according to the cutting feed amount with the feed amount
override near the center (parameter No. 9808) applied.
EX : Absolute X coordinate of a cutting end point (detail data
screen)
FZ : Finishing allowance for end facing (detail data screen)
Ex : Clearance (parameter No. 9797: Diameter) along the Xaxis
for end facing
Ez : Clearance (parameter No. 9798: Diameter) along the Zaxis
for end facing
NOTE
In end facing, a generalpurpose end facing tool is
automatically selected. When a generalpurpose outer
surface machining tool is to be used for end facing, the tool
must be registered as a generalpurpose end facing tool in
the tool file. In this case, the same tool can also be
registered as a generalpurpose outer surface machining
tool by using the same T code.
314
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1.5
THREADING
Tool
Start point
End point 45
Chamfering is possible only at 45.
1.5.1
Machining Type
Selection
key field.
Pressing the [THREAD] soft key selects threading.
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD THRDTYPE THRDANGL CUTMETHD
THREAD(01) OUTER HEADL
GENERAL
60 ANMT.SNGL
TOOLNO CUTSPD CUTDPTH
CHAMFER
251
80
0.500
ON
315
LEAD
1.0000
TCODE
0505

1.5.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
menu items.
1 = OUTER
2 = INNER
1. OUTER
Tool
End
point
Start
point
2. INNER
Start
point
End
point
Tool
THRDTYPE: Choose from [GENERL THREAD], [METRIC

THREAD], [UNIFID THREAD], [PT THREAD], and
[PF THREAD].
1. GENERL THREAD
This type of threading is the same as conventional threading.
Continuous threading is enabled by matching the X coordinate and
Z coordinate of the end point of a thread figure with those of the
start point of the next thread figure.
NOTE
1 For continuous threading, the corresponding optional
function of the NC must be supported. In one threading
process, up to five thread figures (all having the same lead)
can be specified.
316
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. METRIC THREAD
This type of threading is performed according to the metric thread
standard. Only straight threads can be cut. Up to five thread figures
(all having the same lead) can be specified.
Example of metric threading process data:
PROC(02)
THREAD
AREA
HEAD
OUTER HEADL
TOOLNO CUTSPD
251
80
THRDDIA STATPZ
THRDTYPE
METRIC
CUTDPTH
0.300
ENDPTZ
CUTMETHD
AMNT.SNGL
CHAMFER
ON
LEAD
1.200
TCODE
0101
NOTE
2 A thread angle of 60 degrees is used for metric threading.
This value cannot be changed.
3. UNIFIED THREAD
This type of threading is performed according to the unified thread
standard. Only straight threads can be cut. In one process, only one
thread figure can be specified.
Example of unified threading process data:
PROC(02)
THREAD
AREA
HEAD
OUTER HEADL
TOOLNO CUTSPD
251
80
THRDDIA STATPZ
THRDTYPE
UNIFIED
CUTDPTH
5
ENDPZ
CUTMETHD
AMNT.SNGL
CHAMFER
ON
THRD CNT
20
TCODE
0101
NOTE
3 For unified threading, the number of threads per inch is
specified instead of the thread lead that is usually specified.
A thread angle of 60 degrees is used. This value cannot be
changed.
4. PT THREAD (Tapered threads for pipes)

This type of threading is performed according to the pipetaper
thread standard. Only tapered threading with a slant angle of
1.7899 degrees can be performed. In one process, only one thread
figure can be specified.
With an external tapered (male) thread figure, the end face of the
workpiece represents the minimum diameter section. With an
internal tapered (female) thread figure, the end face of the
workpiece represents the maximum diameter section.
317

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Example of pipetaper threading process data:

PROC(02)
THREAD
AREA
HEAD THROTYPE
OUTER HEADL PIPETAPER
TOOLNO CUTSPD
CUTDPTH
251
80
0.300
START X START Z
END Z
CUTMETHD
AMNTSNGL
CHAMFER
ON
THRD CNT
20
TCODE
0101
NOTE
4 For pipetaper threading, the number of threads per inch is
changed.
5. PF THREAD (Parallel threads for pipes)
This type of threading is performed according to the PF thread
standard. Only straight threads can be cut. In one process, only one
thread figure can be specified.
Example of PF threading process data:
PROC(02)
THREAD
AREA
HEAD
OUTER HEADL
TOOLNO CUTSPD
251
80
THRDDIA START Z
THRDTYPE CUTMETHD
PIPEFLAT AMNTSNGL
CUTNMBR
CHAMFER
5
ON
END Z
THRD CNT
20
TCODE
0101
NOTE
5 For PF threading, the number of threads per inch is
changed.
6 The metric thread standard and unified thread standard
specify threads that are shaped differently depending on
whether they are external threads or internal threads. To
simplify the processing, however, the above functions
regard figure data as being identical.
THRDANGL (for generalpurpose threads only) :

Tool tip angle. When parameter No. 9835 is set to
0, this angle is automatically set to 60. When the
parameter is set to a value other than 0, this angle is
automatically set to that value.
CUTMETHD
: Choose from [AMNT SINGLE], [AMNT
BOTH], [AMNT STRGHT], [DEPTH
SINGLE], [DEPTH BOTH], and [DEPTH
STRGHT].
318
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
1. [AMNT SNGL]: Constant amount of cut, singleedge cutting.
Tool tip
d1
A
d2
d3 d
n
H
D = Depth of cut
d1 = D
d2 = d1 * sqrt (2)
d3 = d1 * sqrt (3)
dn = d1 * sqrt (n)
u = Finishing allowance for threading (parameter 9834)
H = Thread height
H=Pt * LD
Pt: Thread height coefficient (parameter 9832)
LD: Thread lead
A = Threading tool angle
2. [DEPTH BOTH]: Constant amount of cut, zigzag cutting.
Tool tip
A
d1
d2 d
3
d4 d
5
d6
H
D = Depth of cut
d1=(D * sqrt (2) ) / 2
d2 = D * sqrt (2)
d3=(D * (sqrt (2) + sqrt (4) ) ) / 2
d4=D * sqrt (4)
d3=(D * (sqrt (4) + sqrt (6) ) ) / 2
d4=D * sqrt (6)
319

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
7 When the depth of cut per pass becomes less than the
minimum depth of cut (set in parameter No. 9833), the depth
of cut is clamped to the specified minimum value, if a
constant depth of cut has been specified.
3. [AMNT STRGHT]: Constant amount of cut, bothedge cutting

The depth of cut per pass is the same as [AMNT SINGLE], but
straight cutting is performed along the center line of the tool.
4. [DEPTH SINGLE]: Constant amount of cut, singleedge cutting
Tool tip
A
D
H
D
D
u
5. [DEPTH BOTH]: Constant amount of cut, zigzag cutting
Tool tip
A
D
H
D
D
u
6. [DEPTH STRGHT]: Constant amount of cut, bothedge cutting

The depth of cut per pass is the same as [DEPTH SINGLE], but
straight cutting is performed along the center line of the tool.
NOTE
8 When a new threading process is created, [AMNT SINGLE]
is automatically set.
320
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LEAD (Generalpurpose/
metric thred)
Thread lead
The least input increment is 0.0001 mm
or 0.000001 inch.
THRD CNT/INCH
(UNIFIED/PT/PF THRED)
Number of threads per inch
TOOLNO
Management number of a threading tool
CUTSPD (M/minute)
Cutting feedrate for threading
CUTDPTH
(CUTNMBR)
Depth of cut for the first pass
The least input increment is 1.
By pressing [CUTNMBR], the number

of cuts can be specified, instead of a
depth of cut, for the first pass.
1. When CUTDPTH is selected
Specify a depth of cut for the first
pass.
The number of cuts is
determined from the depth of cut and
the cutting method.
2. When CUTNMBR is selected
The number of cuts is calculated from
the depth of cut determined by the automatic cutting condition determination function when the LEAD data
item is specified.
When the number of cuts is entered,
threading is performed according to
the specified number of cuts. This
number of cuts includes the spark
out operations.
NOTE
9 The maximum number of cuts is 999. If CUTNMBR is
selected for the first time after the creation of a threading
process, the number of cuts is automatically calculated after
data has been entered for the LEAD item.
10 When specifying zigzag cutting as the cutting method,
specify an even number of cuts, excluding the number of
sparkout operations. If an odd number of cuts is
specified, one extra cutting operation is performed.
11 Depending on the minimum depth of cut (set in parameter
No. 9833), the specified number of cuts may be greater
than actually needed. In such a case, the actual number
of cuts is reduced to a value below the specified number.
Furthermore, the specified number of cuts may differ
slightly from the actual number of cuts because of a degree
of error in the calculation.
321

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
CHAMFER:
B62444E1/04
Specifies whether to perform chamfering.

Select [ON] or [OFF].
1. When ON is selected
At a common safety point prior to the
process being executed, the M code for
CHAMFER ON (parameter No. 9836:
CMFONM) is output.
2. When OFF is selected
At a common safety point before the process
is executed, the M code for CHAMFER
OFF (parameter No. 9837: CMFOFM) is
output.
NOTE
12 If neither ON nor OFF is specified, no M code is output. If
no data is set in the parameters described above, no M
code is output.
TCODE
: T code for a threading tool
JSTART PNT.
CX: X coordinate of the retract position used when

the tool moves from one threading area to
another
CZ: Z coordinate of the retract position used when
the tool moves from one threading area to
another
JNO.OF THREAD NT: Number of starts when multistart threads are

cut
JSPARK OUT
SO: Number of finishing operations to be repeated
JTHRD HEIGHT SH: Thread height. A thread height is automatically

determined from the parameters below when
the data for LEAD (THRD CNT) is specified.
1. General threads: Parameter No. 9832
2. Metric threads/unified threads: Parameter
No. 9838
3. PT threads/PF threads: Parameter No. 9839
JSPINDL GEAR
322
: Spindle gear selection. Choose from [AUTO],

[LOW GEAR], [MID GEAR 1], [MID GEAR
2], and [HIGH GEAR].
In one process, up to five threading operations
can be specified. For each threading operation,
a different spindle speed is required to satisfy
the cutting condition data for surface speed
(cutting speed). When [AUTO] is selected, an
M code that matches the optimum spindle gear
(low speed, medium speed or high speed) is
automatically output within the range of
spindle speeds.
B62444E1/04
1.5.3

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
After process data is entered and confirmed, moving the cursor to the next
line of the process data displays the figure data for the threading process.
(1) General threads
STATP
(X, Z):
Coordinates of a threading start point
ENDPT
(X, Z):
Coordinates of a threading end point
NOTE
1 One threading process allows up to five threading areas to
be specified.
Tool
End
point
Start
point
Thread
height
TC
TC: Distance required for the spindle to reach a stable speed (parameter 9831)
NOTE
2 To enter the figure data for the second and subsequent
threading areas, move the cursor to the next line. This
operation displays the figure data for the next threading
area. Then, specify the figure data in the same way as
above.
If the next process has already been entered, an input line for the new
figure data can be opened by pressing [INSERT].
Once the input of all required threading area figure data has been
completed, press [FIGURE END].
(2) Metric thread
THRD DIA
: Thread diameter D
STATPZ
: Z coordinate of the start point of a threading
area ZS
ENDPTZ
: Z coordinate of the end point of a threading area
ZE
ZE
ZS
323

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(3) Unified thread

THRD DIA
STATPZ
ENDPTZ
: Thread diameter D
area ZS
ZE
ZS
ZE
NOTE
3 One threading process allows up to one thraeading area to
be specified.
(4) PT thread
STATPX
STATPZ
ENDPTZ
: X coordinate of the start point of a threading

area XS
area ZS
ZE
ZE
ZS
XZ
1.7899
NOTE
4 One threading process allows up to one thraeading area to
be specified.
324
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
(5) PT thread
THRD DIA
STATPZ
ENDPTZ
: Thread diameter D
area ZS
ZE
ZE
ZS
D
NOTE
5 One threading process allows up to five thraeading area to
be specified.
Example of figure data input operation)

30 INPUT (START POINT X)
0. INPUT (START POINT Z)
30 INPUT (END POINT X)
20 INPUT (END POINT Z)
[FIGURE END]
325

1.5.4
Details of Threading
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
The same tool is used for both rough machining and finish machining.
(1) Outersurface threading
Tool
Cutting
start point
TH
Start
point
End point
H
TC
CL
CA
Center of the spindle
TC : Distance required for the spindle to reach a stable speed

(parameter 9831)
TH : Clearance along the Xaxis in threading (parameter 9830)
CL : Threading end area length (parameter 5130)
Let LD be a lead. Then CL is specified using a twodigit
number from 00 to 99 in steps of 0.1*LD; CL must fall in the
range 0*LD to 9.9*LD.
CA : Threading ending angle (45)
H : Thread height
(2) Innersurface threading
CA
CL
TC
H
End point
Start point
Cutting start point
326
TH
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(3) Threading for multiple areas
Machining
start point
Threading area
Threading area
Type
327

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
1.6
GROOVING
(1) Standard groove
(2) Slanted groove
(3) Trapezoidal groove (with corner radius or chamfer)
(4) Treadling groove
328
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.6.1

key field.
Machining Type
Selection
Pressing the [GROOVE] soft key selects grooving.

NOTE
Roughing and finishing can be performed in trapezoidal
grooving. In standard grooving, slanted grooving, and
thread grooving, only roughing can be performed. Finishing
cannot be performed.
(1) Process data for standard grooves
PROC(01)
GRV
AREA
HEAD
BASIS PATTERN
OUTER
HEADL
STANDARD
CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH
DWELL
80
0.25
0.700
2.500
WIDTH TOOLNO TCODE

3.000
451
0606
(2) Process data for slanted grooves
PROC(01)
GRV
AREA
HEAD
BASIS PATTERN
OUTER HEADL
SLANTED
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH
451
80
0.25
0.700
WIDTH
3.000
DWELL
2.500
ANGLE
60.000
TCODE
0606
(3) Process data for trapezoidal grooves
PROC(01)
GRV
PROC(01)
GRV
AREA
OUTER
CUTSPD
80
AREA
OUTER
TOONO
451
HEAD
BASIS
HEADL
FEED/REV CUTDPTH
0.25
0.700
HEAD
BASIS
HEADL
CUTSPD FEED/REV
80
0.25
PATTERN
TRAPEZD
DWELL
2.500
PATTERN
TRAPEZD
WIDTH
3.000
TOOLNO TCODE
451
0606
WIDTH ROUGHNES
3.000
5
TCODE
0606
(4) Process data for threading groobes
PROC(01)
GRV
AREA
OUTER
TOOLNO
451
HEAD
BASIS
PATTERN
HEADL
THREDGRV
CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH
80
0.25
0.700
329
WIDTH
3.000
DWELL
2.500
ANGLE
60.000
TCODE
0606

1.6.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
menu items.
1 = OUTER
2 = INNER
3 = FACING
1. Outer surface
2. Inner surface
3. End face
330
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
Machining start point
X: Xcoordinate of an approach point before

machining is started
Z: Zcoordinate of an approach point before
machining is started

(outer surface)

(inner surface)
(Outersurface or innersurface machining)

BASIS:
Select the desired type of the BASIS from

the following menu items.
1 = Left reference position [ ]
2 = Right reference position [ ]
1. Grooving tool with the left reference position
Grooving
tool
Program point
Specified grooving point

(Standard groove/Slanted
groove)
331

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2. Grooving tool with the right reference position
Grooving
tool
Program point

groove)
(End face machining)

BASIS :
Grooving tool program point

Select the desired type of the BASIS from the
following menu items.
1 = Lower reference position [ ]
2 = Upper reference position [ ]
1. Grooving tool with the lower reference position
Grooving
tool
Program point
groove)
332
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2.Grooving tool with the upper reference position
Program point
Grooving
tool

groove)
Machining pattern (PP) : Grooving type

Select the desired type of machining pattern
from the following menu items.
1 = STAND
2 = SLANTE
3 =TRAPEZ
4 =THREAD
1. Standard groove (rectangular groove)
333

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2. Slanted groove
3. Trapezoidal groove
4. Thread grooving
NOTE
1 Thread grooving can be specified for areas for which
outersurface or innersurface machining has been
selected. In thread grooving, multiple thread grooves,
positioned at constant intervals, cannot be created.
334
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
WIDTH

: Minimum width of a groove (minimum groove

width).
In machining grooves other than trapezoidal grooves,
a grooving tool having a width that is less than TOOL
WIDTH is selected automatically.
In machining trapezoidal grooves, a grooving tool
having a width that is less than (TOOL WIDTH
machining allowance Z (for inner or outer surface)) or
(TOOL WIDTH machining allowance X (for end
face)) is selected.
Minimum
groove width
ANGLE
: Slanted groove angle
1. Slanted groove
Groove angle
2. Thread grooving
For thread grooving, a groove angle of 60is selected
automatically.
Groove angle
335

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
2 When AREA, BASIS, WIDTH, and GROOVE ANGLE (for
slanted grooving) have been specified, the tool and cutting
conditions for roughing are determined automatically.
ROUGHNESS : Finished surface roughness (for a trapezoidal groove

only)
NOTE
3 When a surface roughness is specified for a trapezoidal
groove, a tool for finish machining and cutting conditions are
automatically determined.
DWELL
: Dwell at the bottom of a groove in roughing. The

dwell is calculated automatically from parameter No.
9826 once the tool has been determined.
NOTE
4 Data items other than those described above are displayed
on the program and detail data screens in the same way as
those for bar machining.
336
B62444E1/04
1.6.3
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

line of the process data displays the figure data for the grooving process.
(1) Ordinary or slanted grooving of an outerinnersurface
STATPX, X: Coordinates of a point where grooving starts
ENDPTX : Xcoordinate of point where grooving ends
NOTE
1 When a tool has a right reference position, the start point is
on the right side of the groove and the end point is on the
left side.
WIDTH
GRVDIV
DEPTH
CHAMFER
Xcoordinate
of the start point
: Width of a groove to be machined

: Absolute X coordinate of the bottom of a
groove. By pressing the [GROOVE
DEPTH] key, the groove depth can be
specified instead of the groove bottom
diameter.
: Depth of a groove to be machined
STATP
ENDPT
CHAMFER
DEPTH
Xcoordinate
of the end point
WIDTH
GRVDIA
CHAMFER
: Chamfer amount
NOTE
2 For slanted grooving, the Xcoordinate of the end point or
chamfer amount cannot be set.
PITCH
: Distance between grooves when grooves

of the same figure are machined at regular
intervals
337

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1. When the program reference position is placed on a workpiece

edge.
(a) When the pitch is positive
PT
PT
Chuck side
Workpiece end face
Reference groove
Program
zeropoint
(b) When the pitch is negative
PT
PT
Chuck side
Workpiece
end face
Reference groove
2. When the program zeropoint is placed on the end face of the chuck
PT
PT
Chuck side
Workpiece
end face
Reference groove
Program zeropoint

PT
PT
Chuck side
Workpiece
end face
Reference groove
NUMBER
: Number of grooves when more than one

groove are to be machined at regular intervals
338
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(2) Standard or slanted grooving of an end face

STATPX, Z
ENDPTZ
(X, Z): Coordinates of a point where grooving starts

: Zcoordinate of a point where grooving ends
NOTE
3 When a tool has an upper reference position, a start point
is on the upper side of the groove and an end point is on the
lower side.
WIDTH
DEPTH

: Depth of a groove to be machined
WIDTH
DEPTH
End point
Start point
CHAMFER
CHAMFER
: Chamfer amount in grooving
NOTE
4 For slanted grooving, the Zcoordinate of an end point or
chamfer amount cannot be set.
PITCH
: Distance between grooves when multiple

grooves of the same figure are machined at
regular intervals
groove are to be machined at regular intervals
NUMBER
339

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
PT
PT
Reference groove
Reference groove
PT
PT
340
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(3) Outersurface trapezoidal grooving

PITCH
: Distance between grooves when multiple

grooves of the same figure are machined at
regular intervals. For detailed information
about intervals, see the description of ordinary
grooves.
groove are to be machined at regular intervals.
For detailed information about the number of
grooves to be machined, see the description of
ordinary grooves.
: Coordinates of a point where grooving starts
NUMBER
STATPX, Z
NOTE
5 Irrespective of tooltip reference data, the start point and
direction in which a figure is specified are fixed.
Points 1 to 4
X, Z: X and Zcoordinates of the corners of a

trapezoidal groove shown below
: Corner radius of each of points 1 to 4
: Chamfer amount for each of points 1 to 4
X, Z: X and Zcoordinates of the end point of a
trapezoidal groove shown below
Corner radius
Chamfer
ENDPTX, Z
Start point
Point 1
Point 4
End point
Reference
point
Point 2
Point 3
NOTE
6 For each point, a corner radius and chamfer amount cannot
be specified at the same time; only one of the two items can
be specified at a time for each point.
341

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(4) Innersurface trapezoidal grooving

Point 2
Point 3
Reference
point
Start point
Point 1
Point 4
End point
(5) End face trapezoidal grooving

End point
Point 4
Point 3
Reference point
Point 2
Point 1
Start point
(6) Thread grooving
Start pint Z
Groove depth
Start pint X
Groove angle
Groove
width
Start pint X
Groove botton die
NOTE
7 Irrespective of tooltip reference data, the start point and
direction in which a figure is specified are fixed.
342
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.6.4

(1) Standard grooving and slanted grooving

For an standard groove or slanted groove, only rough machining is
performed.
Example of machining) Outersurface standard grooving using a
grooving tool with the left reference position
Details of Grooving
Reference
point
Cutting
start point
GC
Start
point
GC: Clearance along the Xaxis in grooving (parameter 9820).

Clearance along the Zaxis for endface grooving (parameter
9821).
(2) Trapezoidal grooving
For a trapezoidal groove, both rough machining and finish
machining are performed.
- Rough machining for outersurface trapezoidal grooving using
a tool with the left reference position
OVLGRV* (Tool width)

Reference
point
Cutting
start point
GC
Start point
End
point
GRVBCK
GRVBCK: Parameter 9824
OVLGRV: Parameter 9825
343

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
In rough machining, cutting is performed so that figures can
be produced which have a clearance equivalent to the
amount of finishing allowance (along the X and Zaxes)
plus the tool tip radius with respect to the specified
trapezoidal groove figure.
When rough machining is completed, semifinish
machining is performed. For semifinish machining, the
same tools and cutting conditions as used for rough
machining are used.
However, semifinish machining can be cancelled by
setting bit 5 of parameter 9772 to 1.
-
Finish machining
Grooving
tool
Grooving
tool
Reference
point
Reference
point
Reference
point
344
B62444E1/04
1.7
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

Necking machines a neck portion at a comer for finish grinding.
NECKING
Tool
1.7.1
Machining Type
Selection
key field.
Pressing the [NECK] soft key selects necking.
(1) Process data for generalpurpose necking
PROC(01)
NECKING
HEAD
HEADL
CUTSPD FEED/REV
80
0.25
AREA
SHAPE ROUGHNES
GENERAL
5
AMNT A
B
C
2.000
0.500
0.500
TOOLNO TCODE
102
0101
D
2.000
(2) Process data for necking for grinding 1/grinding 2/threads
PROC(01)
NECKING
HEAD
AREA
SHAPE STNDRDD ROUGHNES
HEADL
GRINDING1
35.000
5
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV
TCODE
102
80
0.25
0101
345

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
menu items.
1 = Right side of an outer surface [ ]
2 = Left side of an outer surface [ ]
3 = Right side of an inner surface [ ]
4 = Left side of an inner surface [ ]
5 = Upper side of an end face [ ]
6 = Lower side of an end face [ ]
1.7.2
1. Rightside outer surface [
2. Leftside outer surface [
3. Rightside inner surface [
4. Leftside inner surface [
5. Upper end face [
6. Lower end face [
346
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
JSTART PNT.
X: Xcoordinate of a relief position between

necking portions
Z: Zcoordinate of a relief position between
necking portions
Machining
start point
Necking portion (2)
Necking portion (1)
JNecking figure (NT): Select the desired type of the Necking figure
from the following menu items.
1 = GENERAL
2 = GRINDING1 (or DIN509E)
3 = GRINDING2 (or DIN509F)
4 = THREADS (or DIN76)
1. Generalpurpose necking
2. Necking 1 for grinding (or DIN509E)
WT
347
15
DT

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3. Necking 2 for grinding (or DIN509F)
W1
WT
8
R
15
DT
4. Necking for threads (or DIN76)
WT
0.6 * DT
JSTNDRDD
30
DT
: Xcoordinate of a necking portion used for the

reference (for a necking figure based on the
DIN standards only)
NOTE
1 For a necking figure based on the DIN standards, each
dimension is determined automatically when a standard
diameter is specified, as shown in the table below.
Diameter
(Xcoordinate)
Depth (DT)
(radius)
Corner
radius (R)
Width (WT)
(radius)
Removing
(W1)
Smaller than 18 mm 0.25 mm

Smaller than 0.7087 0.0098 in.
in.
0.6 mm
0.236 in.
2.0 mm
0.0787 in.
0.1 mm
0.0039 in.
18 mm or larger but
smaller than 80 mm
0.7087 in. or larger
but smaller than
3.15 in.
0.35 mm
0.0138 in.
0.6 mm
0.236 in.
2.5 mm
0.0984 in.
0.2 mm
0.0079 in.
80 mm or larger
3.15 in. or larger
0.45 mm
0.0177 in.
1.0 mm
0.0394 in.
4.0 mm
0.1575 in.
0.3 mm
0.0118 in.
JROUGHNES
348
: Machined surface roughness

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
2 When a necking figure, machining area, and surface
roughness are specified, a tool for necking and cutting
conditions are determined automatically.
TOOLNO.
:
CUTSPD(M/minute) :
FEED/REV
:
TCODE
:
AMNT A, B, C, D :
1. AREA [
Management number for a necking tool

Cutting speed in necking
Feed amount in necking
Tcode for a necking tool
Each dimension of a generalpurpose necking
portion (Generalonly purpose necking)
2. AREA [
B
C
3. AREA [
C
4. AREA [
]
D
5. AREA [
6. AREA [
B
C
D
D
C
B
349
]
A

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
The following data is displayed on the detail data screen.

JSDRCT
: Derection in which the spindle rotates in

necking
JSPINDLE GEAR : Spindle gear selection
JCOOLANT
: Cutting oil specification
- Necking based on the DIN standards (DIN509E, DIN76)
NECKING AMNT
JWIDTH
JDEPTH
JROUND
JAPPROACH ANG
-
WT:
DT:
R:
AA:
See the items of a necking figure

and standard diameter.
Necking based on the DIN standards (DIN509F)

NECKING AMNT
WIDTH
DEPTH
ROUND
APPROACH ANG
RELIEF AMNT
RELIEF ANGLE
350
WT:
DT:
R:
AA:
W1:
WA:
See the items of necking figure

and standard diameter.
B62444E1/04
1.7.3
Automatic Tool
Selection

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
(1) Generalpurpose necking without, necking 1 for grinding

(DIN509E), and necking for threads (DIN76)
TA
TB
TC (= 180TATB)
15
TC 15 +3 : DIN 509E
TC 30 +3 : DIN 76
TA 90
(2) Generalpurpose necking with removing and necking (with

removing) for grinding (DIN509F)
DIN509F
TC 15 +3
TA 90 +8+3
Generalpurpose necking
TC ParameterNo.9815+3
TA 90+ParameterNo.9815+3
TA
TC
Relief
NOTE
Only those tools that satisfy the angle requirement shown
above can be selected.
351

1.7.4
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
line of the process data displays the figure data for the necking process.
60
20
70
50
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(Xcoordinate of the first necking portion)

(Zcoordinate of the first necking portion)
(Xcoordinate of the second necking portion)
(Zcoordinate of the second necking portion)
BSC PT
X1: Xcoordinate value of the reference position

for the first necking portion
Z1: Zcoordinate value of the reference position
for the first necking portion
X5: Xcoordinate of the reference point for the fifth

necking portion
Z5: Zcoordinate of the reference point for the fifth
necking portion
Pn (X, Z): Reference point
1.7.5
For necking, only finish machining is performed.
Details of Necking
Cancellation of noseR
compensation
Cutting start point
EA
Start up noseR of
compensation
SA
352
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
A clearance angle of 3 is used for the cutting angle and relief angle for
a necking portion.
Tool tip
TA (cutting
edge angle)
TB (tool angle)
SA (cutting angle) = 180 TA (cutting edge angle) TB (tool angle) 3

EA (relief angle) = TA (cutting edge angle) 90 3
Those tools that can satisfy the cutting angle and relief angle requirements
set in parameter 9815 are selected automatically.
NOTE
In necking based on the DIN standards, a point of
intersection calculation is automatically performed as
described below.
Example) Necking (with removing) for grinding (DIN509F)
Sz
W1
WT
f
8
r Corner R2
e
Corner R1
Sx
15
:Point with known coordinates

: Point with unknown coordinates
353
DT

1.8
CENTER DRILLING,
DRILLING, REAMING,
BORING, AND
TAPPING
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
The following types of turning can be used to make a hole in the center
of a workpiece. It is assumed that the hole will subsequently be threaded
or enlarged.
(1) Center drilling
(2) Drilling
Drill tool
Center drill tool
(4) Reaming
(3) End mill drilling
Reamer tool
End mill tool
(5) Boring
(6) Throw away drill drilling

Boring tool
Throw away drill
(7) Tapping
Tap tool
NOTE
1 To perform reaming or boring, set bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 9771 to 1. For details, see the
parameter descriptions. When the capacity of the part program storage is insufficient, however,
reaming or boring cannot be performed.
2 To perform throwaway drilling, set bit 0 (SLW) of parameter No. 9765 to 1.
354
B62444E1/04
1.8.1
Machining Type
Selection

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
When the cursor is positioned to the end of a program, a new process is

created automatically. The available machining types are displayed as
soft keys.
To perform a given machining type, follow the corresponding procedure
below:
Pressing one of the [CENTER], [DRILL], and [TAP] soft keys selects the
machining.
Center drilling
Drilling
Tapping
Drilling
:
:
:
:
End milling
Reaming
Boring
Throwaway drilling
355
Press the [CENTER] soft key.

Press the [DRILL] soft key.
Press the [TAP] soft key.
Press the [DRILL] soft key, then select
[DRILL] from the type of machining
column.
[ENDMIL] from the type of machining
column.
[REAM] from the type of machining
column.
[BORING] from the type of machining
column.
[THROWAWAY] from the type of
machining column.

1.8.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(1) Process data for center drilling
Process Data
PROC(01)
CENTERDRL
MACHN2
HEAD HOLEDIA STATPZ
CENTER
HEADL
2.000
0.000
CUTSPD FEED/REV
DWELL
80
0.25
1.000
ENDPTZ
2.000
TOOLNO TCOOD
702
0808
NOTE
1 For chamfering, CHAMFDIA is displayed instead of
HOLEDIA.
MACHN2
: Select the desired type of machining from

[CENTER],[CENTER+CHAMF],
[STARTING], or [START.+CHAMF].
2. Center drilling + chamfering
1. Center drilling
Center drill
60
Center drill
DD
90
DD
End point Z
3. Starting
4. Starting + chamfering
Drill
90
DD
DD
Drill
90
End point Z
DD: Hole diameter or chamfering diameter
NOTE
2 For center drilling + chamfering, the chamfering is not drawn
on the screen during machining simulation.
HOLEDIA
: Diameter of the hole subject to center drilling
CHAMFDIA : Diameter of the hole subject to chamfering
356
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
STATPZ
ENDPTZ
TOOLNO
TCODE
CUTSPD
FEED/REV
DWELL

: Absolute Z coordinate of the start point for center

drilling or chamfering. The position of the start point
on the end face of the workpiece is determined
automatically. It can subsequently be changed
manually, however.
: Absolute Z coordinate of the end point for center
drilling or chamfering. End point Z, used for
chamfering, is determined automatically.
Pressing the [DEPTH] soft key enables the depth of a
hole, relative to the start point, to be input.
: Tool ID number for center drilling or chamfering
For starting, a drill having a tip angle of 90 is
For center drilling, a center drill having a tip angle of
60 is selected automatically.
In center drilling plus chamfering, a center drill
having a tip angle of 90 is determined automatically.
: T code for the tool described above
: Cutting speed
The actual spindle speed is calculated from the
circumferential speed and nominal diameter of the
tool.
Pressing the [SPINDL SPEED] soft key enables input
of the spindle speed.
: Feedrate
: Dwell at the bottom of a hole
Data items other than those described above are displayed on the detail
data screen in the same way as those for bar machining.
(2) Process data screen for drilling
PROC(01)
DRILLING
MACHN2
HEAD
PATTERN PROCDIA STATPZ ENDPTZ
DRILLING
HEADL HOLEPECK
20.000
0.000
10.000
TOOL NO CUTSPD FEED/REV
DWELL CUTDPTH
TCODE
601
80
0.25
1.000
2.000
0808
PATTERN
: Select the desired drilling type from [HOLE DRILL],

[HOLE PECK, [HOLE HI.SPD], [PENET DRILL],
[PENET PECK] and [PENET HI.SPD].
357

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
1. Blindhole drilling
B62444E1/04
2. Blindhole, peck drilling
3. Highspeed, blindhole, peck drilling 4. Throughhole drilling
5. Throughhole, peck drilling
6. Highspeed, throughhole, peck drilling
PROCDIA
STATPZ
: Diameter of a blind hole or through hole

Z: Absolute Z coordinate of the start point of a blind hole
or through hole
ENDPTZ
Z: Absolute Z coordinate of the end point of a blind hole
or through hole
End point Z for a through hole is determined
automatically.
Pressing the [DEPTH] soft key enables input of the
depth of a hole relative to the start point.
CUTDPTH
: Depth of the first cut in peck or highspeed peck
drilling. (Related parameter: No. 9853, DRILCF)
Example)
When parameter No. 9853 is set to 30

and the nominal diameter of the tool is
20 mm, the depth of cut is calculated as
follows:
20 (nominal diameter)
30
100
(coefficient) = 6 mm (depth of cut)
JDEPTH DECRS : Decrement of the depth of cut for peck or

highspeed peck drilling. The depth of cut is
reduced by the specified amount for each cut.
(Related parameter: No. 9850, DRLDEC)
JRETURN AMNT: Amount of retraction for peck or highspeed peck
drilling.
(Related parameter:
NO. 9851,
DRLRET)
358
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
1. Peck drilling
Cutting start point
Amount of retraction
Amount of each cut
2. Highspeed peck drilling

Cutting start point
Amount of retraction
Amount of each cut
JMIN DEPTH
JSTART FEED
: Minimum depth of cut. (Related parameter: No.

9852, DRLMIN)
: Cutting feed amount at the start of cutting.
(Related parameter: No. 9050, STFECF). The
cutting feed amount at the start of cutting is
calculated as follows. It can be changed manually.
(Usual cutting feed amount)
JSTART CLR
(STFECF)
100
: Clearance (distance between the tool tip and tool

shoulder) at the start of cutting. The tool cuts the
workpiece by the cutting feed amount at the start of
cutting, described above, from a point distanced
from the cutting start point by an amount equal to
this clearance. This clearance is calculated as
follows. It can be changed manually.
SC=
(nominal diameter of the tool)

2 x Tan ( /2)
(=Tool angle between 0< <180)
SC
JEND FEED (only for a through hole):

Cutting feed amount for the last cut. (Related
parameter: No. 9051, ENFECF). The cutting feed
amount for the last cut is calculated as follows. It
can be changed manually.
359
(ENFECF)
100

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
JENDCLR (only for a through hole):

Clearance (distance the tool protrudes from a hole)
for the last cut. The tool cuts a workpiece by the
cutting feed amount at the last cut, described
above, from a point distanced from the cutting end
point by an amount equal to this clearance. This
clearance is calculated as follows. It can be
changed manually.
SC=

2 x Tan ( /2)

10
(=Tool angle between 0< <180)
Data items other than those described above are displayed on the
program and detail data screens in the same way as for center
drilling.
NOTE
3 For drilling, a tool having a tool angle of other than 180 is
selected automatically.
(3) Process data screen for end milling
PROC(01)
DRILLING
MACHN2
HEAD PATTERN PROCDIA STATPZ RESIDPZ
ENDMILL HEADL RESIDPZ
20.000
0.000
1.000
ENDPTZ TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/MIN1
DWELL
TCODE
12.000
751
80
0.25
1.000
0808
PATTERN
: Select
either
of
[SPOTFACING].
1. Residual machining
[RESID.CUTTNG]
2. Spotfacing
SZ
RZ
EZ
and
SZ
D
EZ
: Nominal diameter of an end mill

STATPZ (for residual machining): Z:
Absolute Z coordinate of the start point of the original
hole for which residual machining is performed (SZ,
shown above)
PROCDIA
360

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
STATPZ (for spotfacing): Z:

Absolute Z coordinate of the start point of the original
hole for which spotfacing is to be performed (SZ,
shown above)
RESIDPZ (for residual machining): Z::
Absolute Z coordinate of the start point for residual
machining (RZ, shown above)
ENDPTZ
: Absolute Z coordinate of the end point for residual
machining or spotfacing (D, shown above):
TOOLNO.
: Tool ID number for an end mill
For residual machining, a tool having a nominal
diameter not more than and as close as possible to the
diameter of the drilled hole is determined
automatically.
For spotfacing, a tool having a nominal diameter not
less than and as close as possible to the diameter of the
drilled hole is determined automatically.
FEED/REV 1 (only for residual machining):
Feed amount for residual machining (RZ > EZ). The
feed amount along the axis of the end mill is
FEED/REV (only for spotfacing):
Feed amount for spotfacing (SZ > EZ). The feed
amount along the axis of the end mill is determined
automatically.
JFEED/REV 2 (only for residual machining).:
Feed amount for movement from the start point (SZ) to the
start point for residual machining. (Related parameter:
No. 9052, EMLFR2)
Data items other than those described above are displayed on the program
and detail data screens in the same way as for drilling.
(4) Process data screen for reaming
PROC(01)
DRILLING
MACHN2
REAMING
STATPZ
0.000
HEAD
HEADL
ENDPTZ
12.000
PATTERN.
PATTERN
HOLE
TOOLNO
901
PROCDIA CMAMFLNG
20.000
3.000
CUTSPD FEED/MIN DWELL TCODE
80
0.25 1.000
0808
: Select one of [HOLE] or [PENE TRATE].
1. Blind hole
2. Through hole
Reamer
361

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
CHAMFLNG : Cuttinglip length of a reamer at cutting start or

cutting end (SC, shown below) (related parameter:
No. 9054, RIMKLN)
1. Blind hole/through hole
2. Through hole
SC
SC
TOOLNO.
: Tool ID number for a reamer. A reamer having a

nominal diameter equal to that of the drilled hole is
JSTART FEED: Cutting feed amount at the start of cutting.
<Related parameter: No. 9050, STFECF>
The cutting feed amount at the start of cutting is
calculated as follows. It can be changed manually.
(STFECF)
100
JEND FEED (only for a through hole):

Cutting feed amount for the last cut for a through hole.
(Related parameter: No. 9051, ENFECF)
The cutting feed amount for the last cut is calculated
as follows. It can be changed manually.
(ENFECF)
100
JRETURN SPD: Feedrate for retraction to the cutting start point upon
the completion of reaming.
<Related parameter: No. 9860, RMBROV>
The feedrate for retraction is calculated as follows. It
can be changed manually.
(RMBROV)
10
(5) Process data screen for boring
PROC(01)
DRILLING
MACHN2
HEAD PROCDIA STATPZ
BORING
HEADL
20.000
0.000
CUTSPD FEED/REV
DWELL
SHIFT
80
0.25
1.000
0.500
SHIFT
ENDPTZ
20.000
TOOLNO TCODE
951
0808
: Shift in retraction for boring (Q, shown below)

<Related parameter: No. 9858, BRSHFT>
362
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

NOTE
4 The tool is usually retracted, at the rapid traverse rate, to the
cutting start point upon the completion of boring. When the
diameter of a hole is small (shift x 2 + tool width hole
diameter), the tool is retracted at the same feedrate as that
for retraction for reaming.
Data items other than those described above are displayed
on the program and detail data screens in the same way as
for drilling.
(6) Process data screen for throwaway drilling
PROC(01)
MACHN2
HEAD PATTERN PROCDIA STATPZ
DRILLING THROWAWAY HEADL PENHI.S
20.000
0.000
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV
DWELL CUTDPTH
631
80
0.25
1.000
1.500
ENDPTZ
20.000
TCODE
0808
CUTSPD (m/minute) : Cutting speed for throwaway drilling.

<Related parameter: No. 9055, SLCSCF>
The cutting speed for throwaway drilling is
calculated from the drilling cutting conditions,
as follows:
(Cutting speed of drill)
FEED/REV
(SLCSCF)
100
: Feed amount for throwaway drilling.

<Related parameter: NO. 9057, SLFRCF>
The feed amount for throwaway drilling is

calculated from the drilling cutting conditions, as
follows:
(Feed amount of drill)
(SLFRCF)
100
363

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(7) Process data screen for tapping
PROC(01)
TAP
TOOLNO
631
HEAD
HEADL
CUTSPD
80
PITCH
TOOLNO.
STATZ ENDPTZ
0.000
20.000
DWELL
1.000
NOMINLD
10.000
PITCH
0.500
TCODE
0808
: Tap pitch
: Tool ID number of a tap. A tap having the same
nominal diameter and the same pitch is determined
automatically.
1.8.3
Automatic Pretool
Determination
Function
In drilling, when a final machining process is just created for the drilling,
a necessary preprocess, tools, and cutting conditions are determined
automatically according to the data registered beforehand in the pretool
list.
For information about the pretool list, see Section 13.3.
Example of operation for automatic pretool determination)
(1) Create a new process by pressing the [] or [INSERT] soft key as in
the case of other machining processes.
(2) Tools and cutting conditions are determined automatically by
specifying tapping as the machining type, 50 mm as the hole bottom
point, 20 mm as the nominal diameter, and 1 mm as the pitch.
With the above operation, automatic pretool determination is
performed, and the the pretool process shown below is
automatically created.
(i) Pretool 1 (center drilling)
(ii) Pretool 2 (prepared hole by drilling)
364
B62444E1/04
1.9
SINGLE ACTION
1.9.1
Machining Type
Selection
PROC(01)
SINGL ACT
1.9.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

The single action process executes a simple move command or auxiliary

function block.
key field.
Pressing one of the [SINGL] soft key selects the singleaction process.
HEAD
HEADL
TOOLNO CUTSPD
102
80
FEEDRATE
MM/REV
TCODE
0101
TOOLNO
: Tool management number of a tool to be used

for a single action
TCODE
: Tcode for tool selection
FEED RATE
: Select the desired type of FEEDRATE from the
0 = mm/rotation
1 = mm/minute
CUTSPD (m/minute) : Cutting speed (constant surface speed control
enabled)
Pressing the [SPINDL SPEED] soft key
enables the direct specification of the spindle
speed.
Constant surface speed control,
however, is disabled.
NOTE
Single action is not supported by the detail data screen. The
profile of a workpiece cannot be drawn on this screen.
365

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.9.3
Seven types of single actions can be specified.
One single action process allows up to 30 blocks to be registered.

(1) AUXF
AUXF
M=
S=
M : Mcode
S : SPINDLE SPD.
(2) POSITN (G00)
POSITN
X=
Z=
X : END POS. X
Z : END POS. Z
(3) LINE (G00)
LINE
X=
F=
Z=
X : END POS. X
Z : END POS. Z
F : FEED AMNT (mm/revolution) or
FEED RATE (mm/minute)
(4) ARC
ARC
X=
R=
Z=
F=
X
Z
R
F
:
:
:
:
(5) ARC
ARC
(G02)
END POS. X
END POS. Z
ARC R
FEED AMNT (mm/revolution) or
(G03)
X=
R=
Z=
F=
X
Z
R
F
:
:
:
:
END POS. X
END POS. Z
ARC R
FEED AMNT (mm/revolution) or
366

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(6) DWELL (G04)

DWELL
P=
P : DWELL TIME
(7) THREAD (G32)
THREAD
X=
F=
Z=
X : END POS. X
Z : END POS. Z
F : Lead of thread
1.9.4
Figure Data Input
Operation
(1) Creating a new block

After entering singleaction process data is completed, moving the
cursor to the next line of the process data displays the following
figure data menu in the soft key field.
ARC
<
ARC
AUXF POSITN LINE
DWELL THREA FIGURE PLOT

D
END
Press the soft key corresponding to a figure to be specified. Move

the cursor to the next line to display the above menu again, then
select the next figure.
After the necessary figure data is entered, press the [FIGURE END]
soft key.
(2) Changing operation data
Place the cursor on an operation data item to be changed. Then, enter
a new numeric value with numeric keys and press the INPUT key.
(3) Changing the operation type
Place the cursor on an operation type item to be changed. Then,
press the [ALTER FIGURE] soft key and select a new operation type
with the desired soft key.
(4) Inserting a block
Move the cursor to the operation type item in the block just after
which a new block is to be added, press the [INSERT] soft key, and
select a new operation type with the desired soft key.
(5) Deleting a block
Move the cursor to a block to be deleted, then press the [DELETE]
soft key. This operation displays the [CANCEL] and [EXEC] soft
keys. To cancel block deletion, press the [CANCEL] soft key.
Or, to execute block deletion, press the [EXEC] soft key.
367

1.9.5
Selecting the Type of
Machining (Single
Action II)
PROC(01)
SINGL ACT
1.9.6
Process Data (For
Single Action II)
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Use single action II to input more general NC program commands.

Addresses other than O or N can be input. Multiple G codes can also be
specified in a single block.
To use single action II, set bit 0 (SC2) of parameter No. 9766 to 1. Then,
press the [SINGL] soft key in the same way as for the conventional single
action.
HEAD
HEADL
TOOL NO
102
TYPE TCODE
SIDE
0101
TOOL NO. : Tool ID number of the tool used for the conventional
single action
TYPE
: Screen on which the machining simulation is drawn

Select one of [SIDE], [CFRONT], [COPEN],
[YFRONT], or [YCROSS].
1. Turning drawing: Turning simulation on the ZX plane is displayed.
2. Caxis endface drawing:
Caxis drilling/grooving/notching
simulation on the XC plane is displayed.
3. Caxis development drawing: Simulation of Caxis cylindrical
machining on the CZ plane is displayed.
4. Yaxis endface drawing:
Yaxis endface drilling/milling
simulation on the XY plane is displayed.
5. Yaxis side drawing: Yaxis sideface drilling/milling simulation on
the YZ plane is displayed.
NOTE
1 To disable the display of TYPE on the screen, set bit 1 (TYP)
of parameter No. 9766 to 1. Then, the turning drawing is
automatically selected and displayed for turning tools
(including drills), while the endface drawing is displayed for
milling tools.
T CODE
: Tool ID number
This item is used only to select the tool to be displayed in
machining simulation.
To actually output a T code, figure data must be specified.
NOTE
2 Single action II is not supported by the detail data screen.
A product profile cannot be displayed.
368
1.9.7
Figure Data (For Single
Action II)
PROC(01)
SINGL ACT
<

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
In single action II, any NC program commands, including G codes, can

be input (excluding O and N commands).
Up to 104 blocks can be input to a singleactionII process.
HEAD
HEADL
TOOL NO CUTSPD
102
80
NSERT DELETE FIGURE WINDOW PROCES

OFF
END
EDIT
1st data
2nd data
FEED/REV
MM/REV
MACHIN TOOL DETAIL

DATA
DATA
C
3rd data
4th data
TCODE
0101
PLOT
5th data
(1) Inputting figure data

To input figure data, enter an address (alphabetic character) key,
enter a value with the numeric keys, then press the INPUT key.
A line of figure data, consisting of up to five data items, corresponds
to one block of a NC program.
Once a data item has been input, the cursor moves to the nextdata
position. Once all five data items have been input, the cursor moves
to the next line. If data items necessary for a block have been entered
in the middle of a line, press the downarrow key to position the
cursor to the next line.
Once all necessary data items have been entered, press the [FIGURE
END] soft key.
(2) Changing figure data
Position the cursor to the data item to be changed, then enter a new
value.
(3) Adding figure data
Position the cursor to the block immediately before the block to be
added, then press the [INSERT] soft key to insert a new block. Enter
new data into that block.
(4) Deleting figure data
Position the cursor to the block to be deleted, then press the
[DELETE] soft key. Then, [CAN]/[EXEC] appears on the screen.
To cancel block delete operation, press the [CAN] soft key. To delete
the block, press the [EXEC] soft key.
369

1.10
CALLING
SUBPROGRAMS
1.10.1
Machining Type
Selection
PROC(01)
CALL SUB
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
This process calls and executes a subprogram registered beforehand in the

program area of the NC.
Up to four subprograms can be registered using subprogram numbers
O9990 to O9993.
key field.
Pressing one of the [CA.SUB] soft key selects the subprogram call
process.
HEAD
HEADL
PROGRAM
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
NOTE
1 The subcall process is not supported by the detail data
screen.
2 When bit 5 (SP6) of parameter 9776 is set to 1, up to six
programs can be registered.
1.10.2
PROGRAM

1=
:
2=
:
3=
:
4=
:
: Subprogram specification
Select the desired type of PROGRAM from the
Program 1 (O9990)
AAAAAAAAAAAA
Program 2 (O9991)
BBBBBBBBBBBB
Program 3 (O9992)
CCCCCCCCCCCC
Program 4 (O9993)
DDDDDDDDDDDD
NOTE
Name AAAAAAAAAAAA is set in parameter 9700 to 9715;
name BBBBBBBBBBBB is set in parameter 9716 to 9731;
name CCCCCCCCCCCC is set in parameter 9732 to 9747;
and name DDDDDDDDDDDD is set in parameter 9748 to
9763.
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
:
:
:
:
370
Variable 1 data (macro variable #20828)


TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.10.3
Notes on Subprograms
1.10.4
Selecting the Type of
Machining
(For Subcall II)
(1) A subprogram must be created in the program area of the NC.

(2) No programs can be called from a subprogram.
(3) Gcodes, address specification, NC format programs including
auxiliary functions, and custom macro instructions can be used.
However, subprogram calling (M98 ...) or subprogram calling using
an M, T, or Gcode cannot be performed.
(4) Only when a custom macro function is provided, data 1 to data 4
specified in a process of calling subprograms can be read using
custom macro variables #20206 to #20209.
In subcall process II, any subprograms stored in part program storage can
be called and up to 21 variables can be specified.
A called subprogram can call other subprograms with a nesting level of
up to seven (with a nesting level of four when using custommacro call
G65, or with a nesting level of three when using subprogram call M98).
To use subcall process II instead of the conventional subcall process,
set bit 3 (CS2) of parameter No. 9771 to 1.
NOTE
The conventional subcall process is not compatible with
subcall process II. To use subcall process II from a point
partway through a program, any subcall processes that
have already been created must be deleted.
To enter subcall process II, press the [CA.SUB] soft key in the same way
as for a conventional subcall.
PROC(02)
CALL SUB
DATA J
HEAD
HEADL
DATA K
PROGRAM
5555
DATA D
371
DATA A
DATA B
DATA C DATA I
DATA E
DATA F
DATA H DATA M

1.10.5
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
PROGRAM : Number of the subprogram to be called

The subprogram to be called must reside in part program
storage. A program number must consist of four digits.
Process Data
(For Subcall II)
DATA A
DATA B
: Data for argument A

: Data for argument B
L
DATA M
L
: Data for argument M
NOTE
Up to 21 variables to be passed to a subprogram can be
specified. (Arguments A, B, C, I, J, K, D, E, F, H, M, Q, R,
S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z)
Data items other than arguments are displayed on the detail
data screen.
Example of detail data screen for subcall process II

MACHINING
P=
CALL SUB
HEAD
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
H=
A=
B=
C=
I=
J=
K=
D=
E=
F=
H=
M=
Q=
R=
S=
T=
HEADL
10.000
A
B
C
I
J
K
D
E
F
H
M
Q
R
S
T
[CAP]
*** PROCESS ***
30.000
1.000
1209.020
22.222
99999.999
90.222
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
15.000
0.001
0.050
30.000
20.000
DATA A
372
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
U=
V=
W=
X=
Y=
Z=
1.000
5.000
0.011
0.033
34.230
56.000
B62444E1/04
1.10.6
Subprograms to be
Called (Subcall II)
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

A machining program created by means of conversational programming

is executed either directly or after being converted to an NC program.
To call a subprogram from a machining program to be executed in either
of the above two ways, a subprogram having the following format must
be created.
When a conversational machining program is to be executed directly,
code argument data (P code variables #20807, #20808, ...) input in
subcall process II to arguments (local variables #1, #2, ...).
Example)
09***
(Start of subprogram)
#8570=1 ;
(#8570=0:Offset is read with #1****. #9*** is disabled.)

(#8570=1: P code variable is read with #1****. #9*** is
enabled.)
IF[#9121 EQ 0]GOTO @@@@;
(#9121=0: NC program is being executed. #9121=1:
Conversational program is being executed.)
#1=#20807; (The value of conversational data A is specified in local
argument variable A.)
#2=#20808; (The value of conversational data B is specified in local
argument variable B.)
N@@@@
NOTE
Macro variables correspond to addresses input in
conversational subcall process II, as follows.
Address A=: #20807
Address B=: #20808
Address C=: #20809
Address I=: #20810
Address J=: #20811
Address K=: #20812
Address D: #20813
Address E: #20814
Address F: #20815
Address H: #20816
Address M: #20817
Address Q: #20818
Address R: #20819
Address S: #20820
Address T: #20821
Address U: #20822
Address V: #20823
Address W: #20824
Address X: #20825
Address Y: #20826
Address Z: #20832
373

1.10.7
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Subcall II is converted to the following NC program.
NC Program
Conversion For
Subcall II
G65 P5555
Example NC program, converted from subcall process II)
A10.0 C30.0 11.0 J1209.02 K22.222

D99999.999 F90.222 M15.0 Q0.001
R0.05 S30.0 T20.0 U1.0 V5.0 W0.011
X0.033 Y34.23 Z56.0 ;
NOTE
Block variables in subcall II are output in units of the least
input increment, as shown in the above example.
Insignificant 0s, positioned to the left of the decimal point,
are not output. When a variable is null, it is not output.
1.11
AUXILIARY AND
TRANSFER
PROCESSES
The machine tool builders may have created auxiliary and transfer
processes on their own. For details of these processes, refer to the
descriptions issued by the machine tool builders.
The auxiliary process can be used for both the 1path lathe and the 2path
lathe. The transfer process can only be used for the 2path lathe with two
spindles facing each other.
374
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
1.12
MCODE AND
PROGRAM END
PROCESSES
1.12.1
Mcode Process
In the Mcode process, only Mcodes are output. Up to five Mcodes can
be output.
When the cursor is at a machining type item after a new process is created,
pressing the [M] soft key selects the Mcode process.
PROC(01)
M
HEAD
HEADL
M
11
M
12
The Mcodes are output to the tool post specified in the head item. No
head item is displayed in the 1path lathe.
375

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.12.2
The operation at the end of a machining program can be specified.
Program End Process
When the cursor is at a machining type item after a new process is created,
pressing the [END] soft key selects the program end process.
PROC(01)
END
RETURN
G00
RETURNX
100.000
RETURNZ
80.000
RETURNC
0.000
ENDM
M02
LOOP
10
RETURN
: Type of a return to be made at the end of

machining program execution
Select the desired code of RETURN from the
[G00], [G28] and [G30] soft key.
G28
: Return to the machine zero point.
G30
: Return to the second zero point (tool change
position).
RETURNX, Z, C, F : Absolute coordinates of individual axis return
positions when G00 is selected on the above
menu.
The machine is moved only along the axis for
which a return position is entered.
ENDM
: M code indicating the end of a machining
program
Select one of [M02], [M30], or [M99].
When M02 is selected, M02 is output and the
program is terminated.
When M30 is selected, M30 is output and the
program is terminated.
When M99 is selected, the program is repeated
until it is forcibly reset by an external reset or
other factor.
LOOP
: A program is repeated the specified number of
times. At the end of repetition, the specified
end M code, M02 or M30, is output. When
M99 is selected as an end M code, M02 is
output.
NOTE
When a program end process is not specified, program
termination can be specified with the following parameters.
(1) Bit 2 (EDM) of parameter No. 9772
0: M02 is output when the program is terminated.
1: M30 is output when the program is terminated.
(2) Bit 3 (280) of parameter No. 9774
0: T0;G28 U0 W0; is executed at the end of the program,
after which the program is terminated.
1: The program is terminated without T0;G28 U0 W0;
being executed at the end of the program.
376
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LATHES WITH CAXIS
MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES WITH CAXIS
377

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2.1
CENTER DRILLING,
DRILLING, REAMING,
AND TAPPING FOR
END FACES
Z
Drill
Caxis
Blank
In the same way as for turning, center drilling, drilling, reaming, boring,
end milling, and tapping can be used for Caxis endface drilling.
Throwaway drilling, however, cannot be specified.
For details, see Section 1.8.
NOTE
To perform Caxis boring, set bit 1 (CBR) of parameter No.
9765 to 1.
2.1.1
Machining Type
Selection
When the cursor is moved to the end of program, a new process is

automatically created, and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
below:
Caxis center drilling: Press the [CCNTR] soft key, then the [FACING]
key.
Caxis drilling: Press the [CDRIL] soft key, then the [FACING] key.
Caxis tapping: Press the [CTAP] soft key, then the [FACING] key.
Select DRILLING to perform Caxis reaming, boring, or end milling.
378
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2.1.2

LATHES WITH CAXIS
(1) Process data screen for Caxis center drilling

PROC(01)
CCENTER
AREA
FACING
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD MACHN2 HDLEDIA

HEADL
CENTER
2.000
DWELL INTERVAL
1.000
EQUAL
TOOLNO
701
REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505
REV/MIN : Speed of the tool for drilling (/min.)

FEED/MIN : Feedrate for drilling (mm/min. or inch/min.)
NOTE
While drilling in turning is performed with feed per rotation,
Caxis drilling is performed with feed per minute.
INTERVAL : [EQ INTRVL] / [UNEQ INTRVL]

Select the desired type of INTERVAL from the following
menu items.
1 = EQ INTRVL
2 =UNEQ INTERVL
1. EQ INTRVL
2. UNEQ INTVL
379

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
JMachining start point X: X coordinate of the position to which the

tool retracts between holes
Z: Z coordinate of the position to which the
tool retracts between holes
JMILLING GEAR
: Milling gear selection (only when required)

Enter an M code directly.
and detail data screens in the same way as those for drilling in turning.
(2) Process data screen for Caxis drilling
PROC(01)
CDRILL
AREA
HEAD MACHN2 PATTERN PROCDIA
FACING
HEADL DRILLING HOLEPECK
20.000
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
DWELL CUTDPTH INTERVAL
800
300
1.000
2.000
EQUAL
TOOLNO TCODE
601
0505
(3) Process data screen for Caxis end milling
PROC(01) AREA
HEAD MACHN2
PATTERN PROCDIA TOOLNO TCODE
CDRILL FACING
HEADL END.MILL RESID.CUT
20.000
751
0505
REV/MIN FEED/MIN1
DWELL INTERVAL
800
300
1.000
EQUAL
(4) Process data screen for Caxis reaming
PROC(01)
CDRILL
AREA
HEAD MACHN2
FACING HEADL REAMING
TOOLNO REV/MIN FEED/MIN
901
800
300
380
PATTERN PROCDIA CHMFLNG

HOLE
20.000
DWELL INTERVAL
TCODE
1.000
EQUAL
0505
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS
(5) Process data screen for Caxis boring
PROC(01)
CDRILL
AREA
FACING
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD
HEADL
DWELL
1.000
MACHN2 PROCDIA
BORING
20.000
SHIFT INTERVAL
0.500
EQUAL
TOOLNO
951
REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505
JORIENT M
: M code for spindle orientation (related parameter:

No. 9056, CBRORM)
JSHIFTDRECT.X: Shift direction (related bit: bit 2 (BSH) of
parameter No. 9765)
Use the [PLSWRD] or [MNSWRD] soft key to
select the direction.
When bit 2 of parameter No. 9765 is set to 0, the
positive direction is selected automatically. When
the bit is set to 1, the negative direction is selected
automatically.
(6) Process data screen for Caxis tapping
PROC(01)
CTAP
AREA
FACING
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD
HEADL
DWELL
1.000
NOMINLD
20.000
INTERVAL
EQUAL
381
PITCH
0.500
TOOLNO
651
REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.1.3
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(1) Figure data when EQ INTRVL is specified as the hole interval
STATPX
30.000
STATPZ
0.000
STATPX
STATPZ
STATPC
STATPC
20.000
DEPTH
10.000
ANGLE NUMBER LST.ANGL

30.000
6
: Xcoordinate of the hole position (common)

: Zcoordinate of the hole start point (common)
: Ccoordinate of the first hole position
NOTE
1 In drilling, cutting starts at a point which allows for a drilling
clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).
Hole depth
Drilling clearance (parameter

9855: GRDCL)
DEPTH
ANGLE
NUMBER
LST.ANGL
Zcoordinate of the hole start point
: Hole depth (common)

: Angle subtended by consecutive holes
Either the positive or negative direction can be
specified.
: Total number of holes
: Ccoordinate of the last hole position
382

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
When neither A (angle), N (number of holes), nor EC (final angle)

is entered
Example) X = r
C = 90.000
r
C=0
When a number greater than or equal to 2 is entered for N (number

of holes) and data is entered for EC (final angle), with no data
entered for A (angle)
Example) X = r
C = 90.000
N=3
EC= 270.000
C=0
When data is entered for A (angle) and a number greater than or

equal to 2 is entered for N (number of holes), with no data entered
for EC (final angle)
Example) X = r
C = 90.000
A = 90.000
N=3
r
C=0
383

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) Figure data when UNEQ INTRVL is specified as the hole interval
Up to six end face holes can be specified at arbitrary positions with
arbitrary hole depths.
POINT1X POINT1C
30.000
0.000
POINT
POINT
STATP
STATPZ
DEPTH
20.000 10.0000
nX: Xcoordinate of the nth hole position

nC: Ccoordinate of the nth hole position
Z: Zcoordinate of the nth hole start point
NOTE
Hole depth
Drilling clearance (parameter

9855: GRDCL)
Zcoordinate of the hole start point
DEPTH
(E): Hole depth at the nth point (to be specified for each
hole)
NOTE
3 Machining is not performed for a hole unless all the figure
data above is entered.
4 Moving the cursor to the next line displays the figure data in
sequence. To specify the second and subsequent points,
enter the coordinates for the figure data. When all the hole
positions have been specified, press the [FIGURE END]
soft key.
2.1.4
Automatic Pretool
Selection Function
As with the drilling operations in turning, an automatic pretool selection

function is available for the Caxis end face drilling operations.
384
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
2.2
CENTER DRILLING,
DRILLING, REAMING,
AND TAPPING FOR
SIDE FACES
X
Drill
Z
Caxis
Blank
As with the drilling operations in turning, Caxis drilling for side faces
allows center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping to be specified.
For detailed information about each type of machining, see Section 1.8.
2.2.1
Machining Type
Selection
When the cursor is moved to the end of a program, a new process is

automatically created and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
below:
Caxis center drilling:
[CROSS] key.
Press the [CCENTER] soft key, then the
Caxis drilling: Press the [CDRILL] soft key, then the [CROSS] key.
Caxis tapping: Press the [CTAP] soft key, then the [CROSS] key.
Select DRILLING to perform Caxis reaming, boring, or end milling.
385

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.2.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(1) Process data screen for Caxis center drilling.
PROC(01)
CCENTER
AREA
CROSS
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD MACHN2
HEADL
DWELL INTREVAL
1.000
EQUAL
START PNT.
.
HOLEDIA
2.000
TOOLNO
701
REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505
X: Xcoordinate of the relief position, which is one of

the multiple drilled portions
Z: Zcoordinate of the relief position, which is one of
the drilled portions
Machining
start point
and detail data screens in the same way as those for Caxis endface
drilling.
(2) Process data screen for Caxis drilling
PROC(01)
CDRIL
AREA
CROSS
REV/MIN
800
HEAD MACHN2
PATTERN PROCDIA
HEADL DRILLING HOLEPECK
20.000
FEED/MIN
DWELL CUT/DPTH INTERVAL
300
1.000
2.000
EQUAL
386
TOOLNO TCODE
601
0505
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS
(3) Process data screen for Caxis end milling
PROC(01)
CDRILL
AREA
HEAD MACHN2
PATFERN HOLEDIA TOOLNO TCODE
CROSS
HEADL ENDMILL RESID.CUT
2.000
751
0505
REV/MIN FEED/MIN1
DWELL INTERVAL
800
300
1.000
EQUAL
(4) Process data screen for Caxis reaming
PROC(01)
CDRILL
AREA
CROSS
TOOLNO
901
HEAD MACHN2
HEADL REAMING
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
800
500
RATTERN HOLEDIA CHAMFLNG TCODE

HOLE
2.000
5.000
0505
DWELL INTERVAL
1.000
EQUAL
(5) Process data screen for Caxis boring
PROC(01)
CDRILL
AREA
CROSS
FEED/REV
500
HEAD
HEADL
DWELL
1.000
MACHN2
BORING
SHIFT
0.500
PROCDIA
20.000
INTERVAL
EQUAL
TOOLNO
951
REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505
JSHIFTDRECT.Z: Shift direction (related bit: bit 2 (BSH) of

parameter No. 9765)
Use the [PLSWRD] or [MNSWRD] soft key to
When bit 2 of parameter No. 9765 is set to 0, the
positive direction is selected automatically. When
the bit is set to 1, the negative direction is selected
automatically.
(6) Process data screen for Caxis tapping
PROC(01)
CTAP
AREA
CROSS
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD NOMINLD
HEADL
20.000
DWELL INTERVAL
1.000
EQUAL
387
PITCH
0.500
TOOLNO
651
REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.2.3
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(1) Figure data when EQUAL is specified as the hole interval
STATPX
30.000
STATPZ
0.000
STATPC
20.000
STATPX
STATPZ
STATPC
DEPTH
10.000
ANGLE
30.000
NUMBER LST.ANGL
6
: Xcoordinate of a hole start position (common)

: Zcoordinate of a hole position (common)
: Ccoordinate of the first hole position
NOTE

Drilling clearance (parameter 9855:
GRDCL)
Hole depth
(radius)
DEPTH
ANGLE
NUMBER
LST.ANGL
Xcoordinate of a hole start point
: Hole depth (Radius:Common)

: Angle subtended by consecutive holes
Either the positive or negative direction can be
specified.
: Ccoordinate of the last hole position
388
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS
When neither A (angle), N (number of holes), nor EC (final angle)

is entered
Example) C = 90.000
C=0

of holes) and data is entered for EC (final angle), with no data
Example) C = 90.000
N = 3
EC = 270.000
C
EC
C=0

equal to 2 is entered for N (number of holes), with no data entered
for EC (final angle)
Example) C = 90.000
A = 90.000
N = 3
A C
A
389
C=0

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) Figure data screen when UNEQ INTRVL is specified as the hole
interval
Up to six sideface holes can be specified at arbitrary positions with
arbitrary hole depths.
POINT 1Z
30.000
POINT IC
0.000
STATPX
20.000
DEPTH
10.000
POINT
POINT
STATP
nZ: Zcoordinate of the nth hole position

nC: Ccoordinate of the nth hole position
X: Xcoordinate of the nth hole start point
NOTE

Drilling clearance (parameter 9855:
GRDCL)
Hole depth
(radius)
DEPTH
Xcoordinate of the hole start point
(E): Hole depth at the nth point (Radius: To be specified

for each hole)
NOTE
3 Up to six endface holes can be specified at arbitrary
positions with arbitrary hole depths.
4 Moving the cursor to the next line displays the figure data in
sequence. To specify the second and subsequent points,
enter the coordinates for the figure data. When all the hole
positions have been specified, press the [FIGURE END]
soft key.
2.2.4
Automatic Pretool
Selection Function
As with the drilling operations in turning, an automatic pretool selection

function is available for the Caxis sideface drilling operations.
390
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.3
GROOVING FOR END
FACES
X
Z
End mill
Blank
2.3.1
Machining Type
Selection

soft key field.
Pressing the [CGROV] soft key selects Caxis grooving.
PROC(01)
CGRV(R)
AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO
FACING HEADL
10.000
752
FEED.Z
SHAPE BEVELAM
1500 REGULAR
REV/MIN
2000
FEED.X,C TCODE
1200
0101
NOTE
When data other than 0 is specified for BEVELAM, the
following chamfering process is automatically created.
PROC(01)
CGRV(R)
PROC(01)
CGRV(C)
AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO
FACING
HEADL
10.000
752
FEED.Z
SHAPE BEVELAM
1500 REGULAR
1.000
AREA
HEAD GRVDIA TOOLNO
FACING
HEADL
10.000
752
FEDRATE BEVELAM
REGULAR
1.000
391
REV/MIN
2000
FEED.X,C TCODE
1200
0101
REV/MIN
2000
FEEDRATE TCODE
2200
0101

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.3.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
START PNT X : Xcoordinate of the relief position, which is one of

the grooved portions
Z : Zcoordinate of the relief position, which is one of the
grooved portions
Machining
start point
MIL DIA
NOTE
In automatic tool selection, an end face end mill whose
nominal diameter is not larger than the specified groove
diameter is selected. Caxis grooving for end faces
machines a groove which is exactly as wide as the tool used.
Therefore, the width of a machined groove may be smaller
than the specified groove diameter.
TOOLNO
: Management number of a grooving tool (end

face end mill)
: Tcode for grooving tool or chamfering tool
: Tool speed (rpm) for grooving tool or
chamfering tool
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) used
in a traverse direction of the end face end mill
(along the X or Caxis)
along the axis of the end face end mill (along
the Zaxis)
: Type of Caxis end face grooving
Select the desired type of SHAPE from the
1 = REGUL.
2 = IRREG.
TCODE
REV/MIN
FEED.X,C
FEED.Z
SHAPE
392
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LATHES WITH CAXIS
1. REGULAR.
2. IRREGULAR.
JBEVEL AM
: Groove chamfer amount
Chamfer
amount
Actual groove
width
FEED/MIN
JMILLNGGEAR
JCOOLANT
393
: Feedrate for chanfering. (mm/min or

inch/min)
: Milling gear selection for chamfering (only
when needed). Enter an Mcode directly.
: Specify cutting oil.

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.3.3
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(1) Figure data when REGUL. is specified as the groove figure
STATPX STATPZ
30.000
0.000
LST.ANGL
STATPC
45.000
DEPTH
5.000
STATPX
STATPZ
GRVLNG
30.000
ANGLE NUMBER
90.000
4
: Xcoordinate of the groove (common)

: Zcoordinate of the groove start point
(common)
: Ccoordinate of the first groove
STATPC
NOTE
In grooving, cutting starts at a point which allows for a
grooving clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).
Groove depth
Grooving clearance
(parameter 9855: GRDCL)
Zcoordinate of the groove start

point
DEPTH
GRVLNG
: Groove depth (common)

: Length of the groove (Center angle:Common)
Groove end
point (X, C)
Groove
length
C=0
Groove start point (X, C)
394
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
ANGLE

LATHES WITH CAXIS
: Center angle made by the start positions of

consecutive grooves
Groove1
end point
Groove
interval angle
Groove2
start point
C=0
Groove1 start point
Groove2 end point
NUMBER
LST.ANGL
: Total number of grooves

: Ccoordinate of the machining start point of the last
groove
Last groove
start point
Final angle
C=0
Groove1 start point
Front of a workpiece
When neither A (angle), N (number of grooves), nor EC (final

angle) are entered
Example) X = r
C =180.000
LA =90.000
r
C=0
395

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

of grooves) and data is entered for EC (final angle), with no data
Example) X
C
N
EC
=r
= 0.000
=2
= 180.000
C=0

equal to 2 is entered for N (number of grooves), with no data
entered for EC (final angle)
Example) X
C
A
N
=r
= 0.000
= 180.000
=2
C=0
(2) Figure data when IRREGULAR. is specified as the groove figure

Up to six Caxis end face grooves can be specified at arbitrary
positions with arbitrary groove depths.
GROOVE. n
STATPX: Xcoordinate of the start position of the nth

groove
STATPZ: Zcoordinate of the start position of the nth
groove
STATPC: Ccoordinate of the start position of the nth
groove
NOTE
In grooving along the Zaxis, cutting starts at a point which
allows for a grooving clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).
396
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
Groove depth
Grooving clearance
Zcoordinate of the groove start point
ENDPTX
ENDPTC
: Xcoordinate of the end point of the nth groove

: Ccoordinate of the end point of the nth groove
Groove1 end
point (X, C)
Groove2 start
point (X, C)
C=0
Groove1 start point

(X, C)
Groove2 end point
(X, C)
DEPTH
: Groove depth of the nth groove (to be specified for

each groove)
397

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2.4
CAXIS GROOVING
FOR SIDE FACES
End mill
C
Front of a blank
Blank
2.4.1
Machining Type
Selection

soft key field.
To select Caxis sideface grooving, press the [CGROV] soft key, then
the [CROSS] soft key.
PROC(01)
CGRV(R)
AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO
CROSS HEADL
10.000
752
FEED.X
SHAPE BEVELAM
1500 REGULAR
REV/MIN
2000
FEED.Z,C TCODE
1200
0101
NOTE
PROC(01)
CGRV(R)
PROC(01)
CGRV(C)
AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO REV/MIN
CROSS
HEADL
10.000
752
2000
FEED.X
SHAPE BEVELAM
1500 REGULAR
1.000
AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO REV/MIN
CROSS
HEADL
10.000
851
2000
SHAPE BEVELAM
REGULAR
1.000
398
FEED.Z,C TCODE
1200
0101
FEED/MIN TCODE
1200
0909
B62444E1/04
2.4.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LATHES WITH CAXIS
The same process data as for Caxis grooving for end faces applies to
Caxis grooving for side faces, except a machining start point as
described below.
FEED.Z,C
FEED.X
: Feedrate for cutting in the direction (Zaxis or

Caxis) lateral to the sideface end mill (mm/min. or
inch/min.)
: Feedrate for cutting in the axial direction (Xaxis) of
the sideface end mill (mm/min. or inch/min.)
X coordinate of the retraction position between
sections to be grooved
Z coordinate of the retraction position between
sections to be grooved
Machining
start point
399

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.4.3
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(1) Figure data when REGULAR. is specified as the groove figure
STATPX STATPZ
100.000 20.000
LST.ANGL
STATPC
45.000
DEPTH
5.000
STATPX
STATPZ
GRVLNG
20.000
ANGLE NUMBER
90.000
4
: Xcoordinate of the groove (common)

: Zcoordinate of the groove start point
(common)
: Ccoordinate of the first groove
STATPC
NOTE
1 In grooving, cutting starts at a point which allows for a
Side face end mill

Z
Grooving clearance
Groove depth
(radius)
DEPTH
GRVLNG
Xcoordinate of the
groove start point
: Groove depth (Radius:Common)

: Length of a groove along the Zaxis (common)
400
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LATHES WITH CAXIS
1. Program reference position = workpiece end face, groove length

=+
Side face end mill
Groove length
2. Program reference position = workpiece end face, groove length

=
Side face end mill
Groove length
401

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3. The opposite applies when the program reference position = chuck

end face
ANGLE
: Angle subtended by consecutive grooves
1st groove
Angle
C=0
2nd groove
NUMBER
LST.ANGL
: Total number of grooves

: Ccoordinate of the last groove
1st groove
2nd groove
Final angle
C=0
Last groove
When neither A (angle), N (number of grooves), nor EC (final

angle) are entered
Example) C = 90.000
C=0
402
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS

of grooves) and data is entered for EC (final angle), with no data
Example) C = 0.000
N =3
EC =180.000
C=0

equal to 2 is entered for N (number of grooves), with no data
entered for EC (final angle)
Example) C = 0.000
A =180.000
N =3
C=0
(2) Figure data when IRREGULAR. is specified as the groove figure

Up to six Caxis end face grooves can be specified at arbitrary
positions with arbitrary groove depths.
STATPX STATPZ STATPC ENDPTZ ENDPTC

100.000
20.000
45.000
50.000
60.000
STATPX STATPZ STATPC ENDPTZ ENDPTC
100.000
20.000
90.000
50.000 150.000
GROOV. n
DEPTH
5.000
DEPTH
5.000
STATPX: Xcoordinate of the start position of the nth

groove
STATPZ: Zcoordinate of the start position of the nth
groove
STATPC: Ccoordinate of the start position of the nth
groove
403

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
2 Cutting for grooving along the Xaxis is started at a point
allowing for a grooving clearance (parameter 9855:
GRDCL).
Side face end mill

Grooving clearance
Groove depth
(radius)
ENDPTZ
ENDPTC
Xcoordinate of a
groove start point
: Zcoordinate of the end point of the nth groove

: Ccoordinate of the end point of the nth groove
Example:
Groove1 start point
Groove1 end point
Groove2 start point
Groove2 end point
X=r
X=r
X=r
X=r
Z = Z1s
Z = Z1e
Z = Z2s
Z = Z2s
C = 90.0
C = 180.0
C = 180.
C = 0.
Groove 1
Groove 1
Groove 2
DEPTH
Groove 2
: Depth of the nth groove (Radius: To be specified for

each groove)
404
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
2.5
CAXIS NOTCHING
FOR END FACES
X
Endface end mill

End face of
a blank
Caxis
Blank
Notch
NOTE
Notching for end faces may not be possible due to a cutter
compensation C interference alarm, depending on the cut
profile.
Furthermore, one of the tool offset data items (number of offset groups,
offset number 16 in the case of group 16, or number 32 in the case of group
32, or number 64 in the case of group 64, or number 97 in the case of group
97) is exclusively used for the offset data above, so the offset data item
cannot be used for other purposes.
2.5.1
Machining Type
Selection

soft key field.
Pressing the [CNOTC] soft key selects Caxis notching.
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(R) FACING
HEADL
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
2667
4000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(F) FACING
HEADL
FEED/MIN BEVELAM
4000
STATPZ
0.000
FINISHX
0.500
STATPZ
0.000
ENDPTZ REMOVALX
5.000
10.000
FINISHZ
0.300
ENDPTZ TOOLNO
5.000
752
TOOLNO
752
TCODE
1212
REV/MIN
2667
TCODE
1212
NOTE
405

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(R) FACING
HEADL
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
2667
4000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(F) FACING
HEADL
FEED/MIN BEVELAM
4000
0.500
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(C) FACING
HEADL
BEVELAM
0.500
B62444E1/04
STATPZ
0.000
FINISHX
0.500
STATPZ
0.000
ENDPTZ REMOVALX
5.000
10.000
FINISHZ
0.300
ENDPTZ TOOLNO
5.000
752
STAT/PZ
0.000
TOOLNO
851
406
TOOLNO
752
TCODE
1212
REV/MIN
2667
TCODE
1212
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
2667
4000
TCODE
1515
B62444E1/04
2.5.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LATHES WITH CAXIS

STATPZ
: Zcoordinate of the point where cutting is
started
ENDPTZ
: Zcoordinate of the cutting end point
REMOVAL X
: Cutting allowance for rough machining
The maximum residual fillet depends on the
shape of the notch and the diameter of the
blank. Enter a value much larger than the
maximum residual fillet ((a) in the figure).
(a)
TOOLNO
: Management number for a rough machining

tool
TCODE
: Tcode for a rough machining tool
REV/MIN
: Tool speed (rpm) for rough machining
FEED/MIN
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) for
rough machining
FINISHING X
: Finishing allowance for the side face (along the
Xaxis)
FINISHING Z
: Finishing allowance for the bottom (along the
Zaxis)
JMILLNGGEAR
: Milling gear selection for rough machining
(only when needed)
JCUT WID (%)
: Depth of cut per operation in rough machining
(percentage of the tool diameter)
Depth of cut per operation in rough machining
(percentage of the tool diameter) Initially set to
50%, but can be changed manually.
(2) Finishing and chamfering
TOOL NO
: Number of a finish machining tool (used for
tool management)
TCODE
: Tcode for a finish machining tool
REV/MIN
: Tool speed (per minute) for finish machining
FEED/MIN
finish machining
BEVELAM
: Chamfer amount for the edge of a notch
JMILLNGGEAR
: Milling gear selection for finish machining
(only when needed)
Data items other than those described above are
displayed on the program and detail data
screens in the same way as for other Caxis
machining.
407

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.5.3
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
On the XC plane coordinate system, a figure is specified having an

Xcoordinate which is a diameter and a Ccoordinate which is a radius:
Caxis (hypothetical axis)

(Radius)
Xaxis
(Diameter)
Z
axis
(1) Figure data programming screen for the approach

START PNT X COORD
(X): Xcoordinate of the notch start point
(diameter)
START PNT C COORD
(C): Ccoordinate of the notch start point
(radius)
APPROACH DIRECTION (P): Direction of rotation along the
approach arc
Use the [ ] or [ ] soft key to
APPROACH RADIUS (R): Radius of arc during approach
(2) Contour selection and figure data input
Enter the figure data for approaching and press the [INSERT] soft
key. Then, the following contour menu is displayed in the soft key
field.
<
CHAM
FER
ROUND
PLOT
Press the [+] soft key to display contour menus other than those
described above.
<
TANGNT
ESCAPE START
FIGURE
PLOT
END
For information about contours that can be selected from the menu
][
], [ESCAPE], and start [START], see the
other than arc [
description of contour input in Section 1.1.
408
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LATHES WITH CAXIS
NOTE
1 The specified arc must not extend beyond a semicircle. To
specify a complete circle, for example, specify two
semicircles.
+(3) Figure data programming screen for retracting
ESCAPE RADIUS
(R): Radius of an arc for retracting
(4) Specification of [START] from the figure menu

A final notch is automatically created where the notching start point
matches the notching end point, and the first contour has the same
profile and same direction as the last contour.
Example 1)
Notching start and end point
Example 2)
Notching start and end point
The final figure shown above can be created after specifying the
figure immediately before the last figure by pressing the [ESCAPE]
soft key.
NOTE
2 Up to 30 contour shapes can be specified for a single Caxis
endface notching process. When a multiquadrant arc is
included, the number of shapes which can be specified may
decrease.
409

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(5) Example of notch figure

(a) When a notch is specified using a closed curve
Caxis
Tool
Retracting end point
Machining start and

end point
Xaxis
Approach start point

Notch figure
(b) When a notch which is not a closed curve is specified
Machining end
point
Caxis
Tool
Xaxis
Notch figure
410

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2.5.4
Details of Caxis
Notching
Caxis
Tool radius
TR
RX
Machining start and end point

Xaxis

Notch figure
ZS
ZE
TR :
TL :
RX :
RZ :
RQ :
FX :
FZ :
ZS :
ZE :
Tool radius
Effective tool length
Cutting allowance along the Xaxis
Cutting allowance along the Zaxis
Cutting width (%)
Finishing allowance X
Finishing allowance Z
Start point Z
End point Z
ND :
MD :
A :
C :
CZ :
CC :
Nominal diameter of the chamfering tool

Minor diameter of the chamfering tool
Chamfering tool angle
Chamfer amount
Chamfering tool position
Clearance for the chamfering tool tip
TL
TR
RQ
FX
RX
FZ
End mill
RZ
Chamfering tool
C
MD
ND
A
CZ
CC
(1) Machining in bites along the Zaxis is not performed in notching for
end faces.
(2) Cutter compensation C is used for machining in bites along the
Xaxis in notching for end faces.
Number of cutting operations = CN = FUP ( (RX FX) / (2*TR*RQ
/ 100))
Depth of cut = Q = ((RX FX) / 2) / CN
First cutter compensation data
D1 = TR + RX / 2 Q
Second and subsequent cutter compensation data
Dn = Dn 1 Q
411

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
1 The rewriting of the above cutter compensation data is
executed with the G10 instruction for each infeed
machining operation. At that time, cutter compensation C
is made using new cutter compensation data, so a Tcode
is used each time.
This means that consideration is required for the machine
to perform no operation for the same Tcode.
The offset used for the processing described above is 16, 32, 64, or
97, according to the number of offset sets, so as not to destroy the
original offset data.
Therefore, the above offset numbers cannot be used in any processes
including notching.
However, when a cutting allowance of 0 is specified, cutter
compensation data is not rewritten by G10 and Tcode is not output.
(3) Chamfering for notching for end faces is performed as described
below.
The Zcoordinate, CZ, of the chamfering tool tip is calculated
according to the following expression:
CZ = ZS (C/tan(A/2) + CC)
Where CC is the tip clearance of a chamfering tool registered in the
tool file.
As with rough machining, cutter compensation C is used for
chamfering after cutter compensation data is temporarily rewritten.
Cutter compensation data for chamfering is calculated according to
the following expression:
CL = M/2 + CC*tan(A/2)
(4) Polar coordinate interpolation, which is an NC function, is used for
Caxis notching.
NOTE
2 Polar coordinate interpolation, which is an NC function, is
used for Caxis notching for end faces. So the restrictions
that apply to the function also apply.
For detailed information, refer to the description of polar coordinate
interpolation in the operators manual of the NC.
412
B62444E1/04
2.5.5
NC Program
Conversion for Caxis
Notching
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LATHES WITH CAXIS
When a roughing program Caxis notching is converted to an NC

program, an NC block specifying an offset with G10 is output for each cut.
When cutter compensation data has to be changed from that specified
when a roughing program is converted to an NC program, all NC blocks
specifying offsets with G10 must be changed.
Instead, an NC block that calls the subprogram (O9010) to automatically
change cutter compensation data can be output for each cut. Then, the
converted NC program can be used to perform correct machining simply
by changing the cutter compensation data.
To use this function, set bit 7 (MRO) of parameter No. 9779 to 1. This
function can be used for both Caxis endface notching and Caxis
sideface notching.
(1) Output NC program for roughing
G (1)
:
G (1)
:
G (1)
:
G (1)
C (2)
I (3)
R (4)
F (5)
T1 ; . . . Initial offset
T1 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First cut
T2 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second cut
Tn ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nth cut
1= G code for calling subprogram O9010, stored in the standard system

NOTE
1 This G code is specified with compile parameter No. 9013
in the Macro Executor of Super CAP T. The code varies with
the machine tool being used. For details, see the manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.
2= Maximum residual fillet X specified in a Caxis notching process

3= Allowance X specified in a Caxis notching process
4= Cutting width specified in a Caxis notching process
5= Offset to be used for cut (one of 16, 32, 64, or 97. The offset varies
with the option being used.)
n= Number of cuts
413

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) Output NC program for chamfering (only for endface notching)

G (1) C (2) I (3) R (4) F (5)
; . . . . . Initial offset
:
G (1) ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First cut
NOTE
2 The following offset number is used for a cut depending on
the offset option being used. The number cannot be used
for ordinary machining.
16 offset pairs: Offset number 16

414
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.6
CAXIS NOTCHING
FOR SIDE FACES
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
Side cutter tool
Side cutter tool
Blank
Caxis
Blank
2.6.1
Machining Type
Selection

soft key field.
Pressing the [CNOTC] soft key selects Caxis notching.
PROC(01)
CNOTCH(R)
AREA
HEAD
CROSS
HEADL
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
2667
4000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(C) CROSS
HEADL
FEED/MIN
4000
STATPZ
60.000
FINISHX
0.500
STATPZ
0.000
ENDPTZ REMOVALX
5.000
20.000
FINISHZ
0.300
ENDPTZ TOOLNO
5.000
752
TOOLN
752
TCODE
1212
REV/MIN
2667
TCODE
1212
NOTE
For Caxis notching for side faces, chamfering cannot be
performed.
415

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.6.2
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
STAT PZ

started
ENDPTZ

ended
Program point
""
""
""
""
""
ZS
Side cutter
ZE
All other process data items for Caxis notching for side faces are the
same as those for Caxis notching for end faces.
2.6.3
The figure data for Caxis notching for side faces is the same as that for
end faces.
416

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2.6.4
Details of Caxis
Notching for Side
Faces
Caxis
Tool radius
TR
RX
Machining start and end point

Xaxis
Notch figure
TW
TL
TR
Side cutter
ZS
TR:Tool radius
TW:Tool width
TL:Effective tool length
RX:Cutting allowance along the Xaxis
RZ:Cutting allowance along the Zaxis
RQ:Cutting width X (%)
ZQ:Cutting overlap (%)
FX:Finishing allowance X
FZ:Finishing allowance Z
ZS:Start point Z
ZE:End point Z
ZE
FX
RQ
FZ
RX
FZ
RZ
(1) In notching for side faces, machining in bites along the Zaxis is
performed for the cutting allowance along the Zaxis with an
overlap equivalent to the tool width (TW) multiplied by the cutting
overlap value.
Number of cutting operations=CN=FUP ((ZEZS 2*FZ) / (TW*
(100 ZQ) / 100))
Depth of cut = Q = (ZE ZS 2*FZ)/CN
(2) The machining operations of notching for side faces other than the
above are the same as for Caxis notching for end faces.
417

LATHES WITH CAXIS
2.7
CAXIS
CYLINDRICAL
MACHINING
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
As shown in the figure below, Caxis cylindrical machining machines a

groove as wide as the diameter of the end mill used.
Sideface end mill

Z
(Development drawing)
2.7.1
Machining Type
Selection

soft key field.
Pressing the [CCYL.] soft key selects Caxis cylindrical machining.
PROC(01)
CCYL(R)
REV/MIN
300
HEAD
HEADL
FEED.Z,C
4500
STATPX
DEPTH MILDIA
105.000
5.000
10.000
FEED.X BEVELAM
2700
TOOLNO
753
TCODE
1111
NOTE
418

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
PROC(01)
CCYL(R)
REV/MIN
300
PROC(01)
CCYL(F)
REV/MIN
3000
HEAD
HEADL
FEED.Z,C
4500
HEAD
HEADL
FEED/MIN
4500
STATPX
DEPTH MILDIA
105.000
5.000
10.000
FEED.X BEVELAM
2700
1.000
STAPX
DEPTH MILDIA
105.000
5.000
10.000
BEVELAM
1.000
TOOLNO
753
TCODE
1111
TOOLNO
851
TCODE
1313
NOTE
1 A Caxis cylindrical machining process does not support
finishing.
2 In a Caxis cylindrical machining process, a groove having
a width equal to the diameter of the end mill being used is
created.
2.7.2
Details of Set Data
STRTPX:Xcoordinate of the groove start point

NOTE
In grooving, cutting starts at a point which allows for a
Passing point 2
Grooving clearance
(parameter 9855:GRDCL)
Groove depth
(Radius)
Xcoordinate of the groove start point
DEPTH
TOOLNO
: Depth of the groove (radius)

: Number of the side face end mill for grooving
(used for tool management)
: Tcode for the grooving tool
: Tool speed (rpm) for grooving
in the traverse direction of the side face end mill
(along the Z or Caxis)
along the axis of the side face end mill (along
the Xaxis)
: Groove chamfer amount
TCODE
REV/MIN
FEED.Z,C
FEED.X
BEVELAM
419

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Chamfer amount
Actual
groove width
JMILLNGGEAR
JCOOLANT
: Milling gear selection for grooving (only when

needed)
(2) Chamfering process

TOOLNO.
TCODE
REV/MIN
FEED/MIN
JMILLNGGEAR
JCOOLANT
: Number of the chamfering tool (used for tool

management)
: Tcode for a chamfering tool
: Tool speed (rpm) for chamfering
chamfering
: Milling gear selection for chamfering (only
when needed)
and detail data screens in the same way as for Caxis machining.
420
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2.7.3

LATHES WITH CAXIS
To define a contour, specify the center line (dashed line) of the groove as
shown below.
Z
30
60
300
330
360
Side face end mill
30mm
60mm
90mm
Bit 3 (CGRPDR) of parameter 9776 = 0
Program reference position = cechuck end face
Program reference position = workpiece end face
+C
Blank surface
Blank surface
+C
+Z
+Z
Program reference position = cechuck end face
Program reference position = workpiece end face
+Z
+Z
+C
Blank surface
Blank surface
+C
421

LATHES WITH CAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) Input of multiple figures
Z
Tool
0
0
360
(3) Moving between multiple figures

To machine multiple figures, use [TRANS].
ESCAPE X COORD.
(R): Xcoordinate of the relief position

NEXT SHAPE C COORD (C): Ccoordinate of the start point of
the next figure
NEXT SHAPE Z COORD. (Z): Zcoordinate of the start point of
the next figure
(C, Z)
For an explanation of contours other than those created by

TRANS, see Section 1.1.
NOTE
1 The specified arc must not extend beyond a semicircle. To
specify a complete circle, for example, specify two
semicircles.
2 One Caxis cylindrical machining process allows up to 30
contours including multiple figures to be specified.
When a quadrant arc is included, the number of contours
which can be used may decrease.
422
B62444E1/04
2.7.4
Details of Cylindrical
Machining
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

LATHES WITH CAXIS
(1) In Caxis cylindrical machining, one cutting operation is performed

with a side face end mill along a contour specified as figure data.
(2) Caxis cylindrical machining uses a cylindrical interpolation
function, which is an NC function.
NOTE
Caxis cylindrical machining is subject to the same
restrictions as imposed on the cylindrical interpolation
function on the NC side. For details, refer to the operators
manual of NC.
(3) To use the cylindrical interpolation function, set the following
parameters:
- Bit 4 (CCR) of parameter 3405 = 1
: Uses I or K for chamfering/corner
radius specification.
- Parameter 1020 = 67 : Defines the program axis name of the
third axis as C.
- Parameter 1022 = 2 : Defines the third axis as the Yaxis of
the reference coordinate system.
- Parameter 5460 = 1 : Defines the straight line axis for polar
coordinate interpolation as the first
axis.
- Parameter 5461 = 3 : Defines the rotation axis for polar
coordinate interpolation as the third
axis.
(4) To specify a cylindrical interpolation mode, the NC commands
described below are used.
(a) G19 H0 W0 ; (CZ plane selection)
(b) G107 C (cylinder radius value) ; (Cylindrical interpolation mode
specification)
(c) Cutting is performed along a contour.
(d) G107 C0 ; (Cylindrical interpolation mode cancellation)
(e) G18 U0 W0 ; (ZX plane selection).
423

FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR A LATHE

HAVING THE YAXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
424
B62444E1/04

FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.1
YAXIS CENTER
DRILLING, DRILLING,
AND TAPPING
(ON THE END FACE)
X
Drill
Note)
This figure shows the axes of the

workpiece coordinate system.
Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping can be specified for Yaxis
drilling on the end face in the same way as for drilling for turning.
For details of each machining operation, see Section 1.8, Chapter III.
NOTE
1 To perform reaming, set bit 0 of parameter 9771 (TOOL80)
to 1. In some cases, reaming may be inhibited, depending
on the length of tape used for storage.
2 For Yaxis drilling on the end face, the following cannot be
performed:
Center drilling + chamfering, starting
machining, starting + chamfering, through hole machining,
blind hole machining, boring, throwaway drilling, and end
milling. Turning drilling and Caxis drilling thus cannot be
performed.
425

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.1.1
Type
B62444E1/04

automatically created and the machining mode soft keys are displayed.
Press the [YCNTR], [YDRIL], or [YTAP] soft key then press
[FACING] to select Yaxis center drilling, Yaxis drilling, or Yaxis
tapping, respectively. To select reaming, press the [YDRIL] soft key.
To select reaming, press the [YDRIL] soft key.
(1) Sample process data screen for Yaxis center drilling
PROC (01)
YCENTER
AREA
HEAD NOMINLD
FACING
HEADL
2.000
DWELL HOLEPIN
0.500
CIRCLE
TOOLNO
701
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
800
300
TCODE
0505
(2) Sample process data screen for Yaxis drilling
PROC (01)
AREA
YDRILL
FACING
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD MACHN2 PROCDIA TOOLNO

HEADL DRILLING
20.000
601
DWELL PATTERN CUT/DPTH HOLEPTN
0.500 DEEP HOLE
2.000
CIRCLE
REV/MIN
800
TCODE
0505
(3) Sample process data screen for Yaxis reaming
PROC (01)
AREA
YDRILL
FACING
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD MACHN2 PROCDIA

HEADL REAMING
20.000
DWELL HOLEPTN
0.500
CIRCLE
TOOLNO
901
REV/MIN
800
TCODE
0505
(4) Sample process data screen for Yaxis tapping
PROC (01)
AREA
YTAP
FACING
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD NOMINLD
HEADL
20.000
DWELL HOLEPIN
0.500
CIRCLE
426
PITCH
0.500
TOOLNO
651
REV/MIN
800
TCODE
0505
B62444E1/04
3.1.2
Setting

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
J PASS POINT X/Z (1/2) : X and Z coordinates of a point through

which the tool passes to reach the
machining start point (detailed data
screen)
NOTE
1 Only passing point 2 is automatically determined.
J START PNT.
X/Z : X and Z coordinates of the point to which

the tool retracts in machining two or more
holes (detailed data screen)
PROCDIA (NOMINLD)
PITCH (for tapping)
: Nominal diameter of a tool

: Pitch of a tap
NOTE
2 To perform Yaxis drilling, select final machining for drilling
and specify the cutting data described above. By doing this,
the following are automatically determined according to the
data cataloged in the pretool list and registered together
with the final machining: preceding process, tools to be
used, and cutting conditions.
TOOLNO
TCODE
REV/MIN
FEED/MIN
: Tool ID number of a drill

: T code for the drill
: Speed at which the tool revolves in drilling
(revolutions/min)
: Feedrate during drilling (mm/min or inch/min)
NOTE
3 While drilling for turning uses a feed per rotation, Yaxis
drilling uses a feed per minute.
427

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
DWELL
: Dwell time at the bottom of a hole
J MILLING GEAR : Desired milling gear (Detailed data screen:
only when required). Directly enter the
corresponding M code.
J COOLANT
: Desired coolant (detailed data screen)
The following data must be specified only when drilling is selected:
PATTERN (Drilling)
: Select by [DRILLING], [PECKING], [HISPD

PECKING]
CUT DPTH:
(Drilling)
J DEPTH DECRS:
(Drilling)
Same as for the drill to be

used for turning
(described in Section 1.8)
J RETURN AMNT:
(Drilling)
J MIN DEPTH (Drilling)
HOLEPTN : Select the desired type of hole pattern from the following
menu items.
1 = CIRCLE
2 = LATTIC
3 = OPTIONAL
1.
CIRCLE
Y
2.
LATTICE
Y
428

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3.
OPTIONAL
Y
J SKIP POINT 1/2/3 : Number of a hole which is not machined

(detailed data screen).
Assign drilling
sequence numbers to the holes to be drilled
starting from 1. Then, if desired, the drilling of
a hole can be skipped. Up to three holes can be
specified.
429

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.1.3
B62444E1/04
(1) Sample figure data when CIRCLE is selected as the hole pattern
Figure Data
CENTRPX
20.000
RADIUS
30.000
CENTRPY
0.000
ANGLE
60.000
STATPZ
0.000
NUMBER
6
ST.ANGL
10.000
LST.ANGL
10.000
DEPTH
30.000
REV.ANGLE
0.000
CENTRPX/Y: Coordinates of the center of a circle (X, Y)

[HEAD 1]
Y
[HEAD 2]
Y
2
R
R
Center (X, Y)
1
A
X
Positive angular direction
Center (X, Y)
Positive angular direction
STATPZ: Z coordinate of the hole start point

NOTE
1 Drilling starts when the tool reaches the point which is the
specified drilling clearance (GRDLCL bit of parameter 9855)
away from the workpiece.
Hole depth
Drilling clearance
(GRDLCL bit of parameter 9855)
ST.ANGL
Z coordinate of the hole start point
: Angle between the first hole and the Xaxis (A in the

examples shown above)
DEPTH
: Depth of a hole (radius)
REV.ANGLE : Angular displacement of the workpiece (C coordinate)
RADIUS
: Radius of the circle (R in the examples shown above)
430

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
ANGLE
NUMBER
LST.ANGL
: Angle between two adjacent holes (B in the examples

shown above). A positive or negative value can be
specified.
: Angle between the last hole and the Xaxis
NOTE
2 Not all of ANGLE, NUMBER, and LST.ANGL need to be
specified. For example, one of them can be omitted as
shown below:
1
When 2 or more is set for ITEMS and FINANGL is specified, but

ANGLE is not specified
Example)
CENTRP = (X, Y)
RADIUS
=R
STATANGL= 90.000
ITEMS
=3
FINANGL =270.000
R
+(X, Y)
X
When ANGLE is specified and 2 or more is set for ITEMS, but

FINANGL is not specified
Example)
CENTRP
RADIUS
STATANGL
ANGLE
ITEMS
B
(X,Y)
X
B
431
= (X, Y)
=R
= 90.000
= 90.000
=3

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) Sample figure data when LATTICE is selected as the hole pattern
STATPX
20.000
NUMBER/LIN
3
STATPY
STATPZ
0.000
0.000
LINE PIT. LINNUMBER
20.000
2
DEPTH
10.000
REV.ANGLE
0.000
HOLE PIT.
20.000
STATPX/Y:Coordinates of the first hole (X, Y)

Y
[HEAD1]
I
X
STATPZ
DEPTH
REV.ANGLE
HOLE PIT.
[HEAD2]
:
:
:
:

Depth of a hole (radius)
Angular displacement of a workpiece (C coordinate)
Distance between two adjacent holes in the same line
(I in the examples shown above). A positive or
negative value can be specified.
NUMBR/LIN : Number of holes in one line (three in the examples
shown above)
LINE PIT.
: Distance between straight lines (J in the examples
specified.
LINNUMBR : Number of straight lines (two in the examples shown
above)
(3) Sample figure data when OPTIONAL is selected as the hole pattern
On one end face, up to six holes of desired depth can be specified at
desired positions.
POINT 1X
30.000
PINT 1Y
0.000
POINT 1C
20.000
POINT n X
POINT n Y
POINT n C
POINT n Z
POINT 1Z
10.000
DEPTH
10.000
: X coordinate of the hole at point n

: Y coordinate of the hole at point n
: Angular displacement of the workpiece when the hole
at point n is machined (C coordinate)
: Z coordinate of the hole start point at point n
432
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
NOTE
specified drilling clearance (GRDCL bit of parameter 9855)
Hole depth
Drilling clearance
(GRDCL bit of parameter 9855)
DEPTH: Depth of the hole at point n (specified for each hole)

NOTE
4 A hole can be drilled only when all the figure data described
above is specified.
5 To specify the figure data of point 2 and subsequent points,
move the cursor to the next line. After specifying the data
of all the holes, press the [FIGURE END] soft key.
3.1.4
Automatic Pretool
Selection Function
The automatic pretool selection function can be used for Yaxis drilling
on the end face in the same way as for drilling for turning.
433

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3.2
CENTER DRILLING,
DRILLING, REAMING,
AND TAPPING
(ON THE SIDE FACE)
Y
[HEAD1]
End face of a workpiece
Chuck side
Z
Note)

The figure above shows a workpiece viewed from the tool side. When a
machining program is created, however, the workpiece is viewed from the
front of the machine; therefore, in the figure above the face to be actually
machined is hidden from view.
To view the side face to be machined, the workpiece must be rotated about
the Caxis by 180 degrees. Consequently, the Yaxis of the actual
workpiece coordinate system is inverted as shown below.
Workpiece coordinate systems for Yaxis machining on the side face
[HEAD1]
[HEAD2]
Since a positive value is always specified as the Z coordinate, the Zaxis

of the program coordinate system is always opposite to that of the
corresponding workpiece coordinate system, as shown below:
Program coordinate systems for Yaxis machining on the side face
434

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
[HEAD1]
[HEAD2]
Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping can be specified for Yaxis
drilling on the side face in the same way as for drilling for turning.
435

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.2.1
B62444E1/04

Machining Type
Selecting
Press the [YCNTR], [YDRIL], or [YTAP] soft key to select Yaxis

center drilling, Yaxis drilling, or Yaxis tapping, respectively.
To select drilling on the side face of a workpiece, press the [CROSS] soft
key when the cursor is in the AREA field.
To select reaming, press the [YDRIL] soft key.
(1) Sample process data screen for Yaxis center drilling
PROC (01)
YCENTER
AREA
HEAD NOMINLD TOOLNO
CROSS
HEADL
2.000
701
DWELL HOLEPTN
500
CIRCLE
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
800
300
TCODE
0505
(2) Sample process data screen for Yaxis drilling
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD
YDRILL
CROSS HEADL
FEED/MIN
DWELL
300
500
MACHN2 PROCDIA TOOLNO

DRILLING
20.000
601
PATTERN CUT/DPTH HOLEPTN
DEEP HOLE
2.000
CIRCLE
REV/MIN
800
TCODE
0505
(3) Sample process data screen for Yaxis reaming
PROC (01)
AREA
YREAM
CROSS
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD MACHN2 PROCDIA

HEADL REAMING
20.000
DWELL HOLEPTN
500
CIRCLE
TOOLNO
901
REV/MIN
800
TCODE
0505
(4) Sample process data screen for Yaxis tapping
PROC (01)
AREA
YTAP
CROSS
FEED/MIN
300
HEAD
HEADL
DWELL
500
NOMINALD
20.000
HOLEPTN
CIRCLE
436
PITCH
0.500
TOOLNO
651
REV/MIN
800
TCODE
0505
B62444E1/04
3.2.2
Process Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
The process data for Yaxis drilling on the side face is the same as that
for Yaxis drilling on the end face, except for the machining start point
described below:
JSTART PNT. X/Z
: X and Z coordinates of the point to which the

tool retracts in machining two or more holes
(detailed data screen)
HOLEPTN : Select the desired type of hole pattern from the following
menu items.
1 = CIRCLE
2 = LATTIC
3 = OPTIONAL
1. CIRCLE
2 . LATTICE
437

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3. OPTIONAL
JSKIP POINT 1/2/3 : Number of a hole which is not machined

(detailed data screen).
Assign drilling
sequence numbers to the holes to be drilled
starting from 1. Then, if desired, the drilling of
a hole can be skipped. Up to three holes can be
specified.
438

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3.2.3
(1) Sample figure data when CIRCLE is selected as the hole pattern
Figure Data
CENTRPY
0.000
RADIUS
30.000
CENTRPZ
30.000
ANGLE
60.000
STATPX
80.000
NUMBER
6
ST.ANGL
10.000
LST.ANGL
10.000
DEPTH
30.000
REV.ANGLE
0.000
CENTRY/Z: Coordinates of the center of the circle (Y, Z)
[HEAD1]
[HEAD2]
(X, Z)
R
2
STATPX
A
B
: X coordinate of the hole start point
NOTE
Drilling cleareance
Hole deptph
X coordinate of the hole start point
ST.ANGL
DEPTH
REV.ANGLE
RADIUS
: Angle between the first hole and the Zaxis (A in the

examples shown above)
: Depth of a hole (radius)
: Angular displacement of the workpiece (C
coordinate)
: Radius of the circle (R in the examples shown above)
439

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
ANGLE
NUMBER
LST.ANGL
B62444E1/04
: Angle between two adjacent holes (B in the samples

specified.
: Angle between the last hole and the Zaxis
Not all of ANGLE, ITEMS, and FINANGL need to be specified. For

example, one of them can be omitted as shown below:
1
When 2 or more is set for ITEMS and FINANGL is specified, but

ANGLE is not specified
R
Example)
CENTRP = (Y, Z)
+(Y, Z)
RADIUS = R
STATANGL = 0.000
ITEMS = 3
FINANGL = 180.000
Y
When ANGLE is specified and 2 or more is set for ITEMS, but

FINANGL is not specified
R
Example)
+(Y, Z)
CENTRP = (Y, Z)
RADIUS = R
STATANGL = 0.000
ANGLE = 90.000
ITEMS = 3
Y
(2) Sample figure data when LATTICE is selected as the hole pattern
STATPY
20.000
NUMBR/LIN
3
STATPZ
STATPX
0.000
0.000
LINE PIT. LINNUMBR
20.000
2
440
DEPTH
10.000
REV.ANGLE
0.000
HOLE PIT.
20.000

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
STAT Y/Z:Coordinates of the first hole (Y, Z)

[HEAD1]
[HEAD2]
Z
3
J
I
STATPX
DEPTH
REV.ANGLE
HOLE PIT.
:
:
:
:
X coordinate of the hole start point

Depth of a hole (radius)
Angular displacement of a workpiece (C coordinate)
Distance between two adjacent holes in the same line
(I in the examples shown above). A positive or
negative value can be specified.
NUMBR/LIN : Number of holes in one line (three in the examples
shown above)
LINE PIT.
: Distance between straight lines (J in the examples
specified.
LINNUMBR : Number of straight lines (two in the examples shown
above)
(3) Sample figure data when OPTIONAL is selected as the hole pattern
On one side face, up to six holes of desired depth can be specified
at desired positions.
POINT 1Y
30.000
PINT 1Z
0.000
POINT 1C
20.000
POINT n Y
POINT n Z
POINT n C
POINT n X
POINT 1X
10.000
DEPTH
10.000
: Y coordinate of the hole at point n

: Z coordinate of the hole at point n
: Angular displacement of the workpiece when the hole
at point n is machined (C coordinate)
: X coordinate of the hole start point at point n
NOTE
441

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Drilling clearance
X coordinate of the
hole start point
Hole depth
DEPTH: Depth of the hole at point n (specified for each hole)

NOTE
3 A hole can be drilled only when all the figure data described
above is specified.
4 To specify the figure data of point 2 and subsequent points,
move the cursor to the next line. After specifying the data
of all the holes, press the [FIGURE END] soft key.
3.2.4
Automatic Pretool
Selection Function
The automatic pretool selection function can be used for Yaxis drilling
on the side face in the same way as for drilling for turning.
442
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.3
YAXIS MILLING
(ON THE END FACE)
Y
End mill
X
Note)

Workpiece
In Yaxis milling (on the end face), an end mill cuts an end face of a
workpiece by moving only once along the contour determined by the
specified figure data. Specify a desired path along which the cutting tool
is to be moved.
Machining in bites is not performed along the Zaxis.
3.3.1
Machining Type
Selection
PROC (01)
AREA
YMIL
FACING
FEED.X,Y
500

To select Yaxis endface milling, press the [YMILLING] soft key,
then the [FACE] soft key.
HEAD
DEPTH MILDIA TOOLNO REV/MIN TCODE
HEADL
5.000
5.000
751
1200
0101
FEED.Z ESCAPESZ SHIFTDR
300
600
CENTER
443

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.3.2
B62444E1/04
JSTART PNT
X: X coordinate of the point to which the tool

retracts in successive milling
JSTART PNT
Z: Z coordinate of the point to which the tool

Process Data
DEPTH
: Depth of a cut in milling. Milling starts when

the end mill reaches the point which is the
depth of cut away from the Z coordinate of the
bottom of the cut, which is specified as the
figure data.
Depth of cut
Z coordinate of the machining start point
End mill
Retraction
(at escape speed Z in the G01
mode)
Z coordinate of the
bottom of the cut
(figure data)
Depth of cut
MILDIA
: Major diameter of the end mill to be used for

endface machining
NOTE
1 The automatic tool selection function selects an end mill for
endface machining whose nominal diameter is smaller
than or equal to the groove diameter. In Yaxis milling, the
machining width is limited to the width of the end mill used.
The machined width may be smaller than the diameter of
the end mill.
444
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
TOOLNO
: Tool ID number of the end mill for endface

machining
REV/MIN
: Speed at which the tool revolves in milling
(revolutions/min)
TCODE
: T code for the end mill
FEED.X,Y
: Feedrate at which the end mill for endface
machining transversely mills the end face of
the workpiece (along the Xaxis and Yaxis)
(mm/min or inch/min)
FEED.Z
: Feedrate at which the end mill for endface
machining longitudinally mills the workpiece
(along the Zaxis) (mm/min or inch/min)
ESCAPESZ
: Feedrate in retraction. After milling is
completed, the end mill is returned to the Z
coordinate of the machining start point at this
speed in the G01 mode. Triple the value set for
FEEDRATE2 is automatically specified.
SHIFTDR
: Desired direction of cutter compensation.
Select the desired type of SHIFTDR from the
1=CENTER : The tool is moved so that its center moves
along the contour determined by the specified
figure data.
2=RIGHT : Cutter compensation to the right is applied to a
specified figure. (tool post 1: G42, tool post 2:
G41)
3=LEFT:
: Cutter compensation to the left is applied to a
specified figure. (tool post 1: G41, tool post 2:
G42)
NOTE
2 If SHIFTDR is set to RIGHT or LEFT, alarm P/S 41 may be
issued while the program is running to indicate interference
in cutter compensation, depending on the specified contour.
JMILLING GEAR
JCOOLANT:
445
: Desired milling gear (only when required).

Directly enter the corresponding M code.
: Desired coolant

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.3.3
B62444E1/04
Specify the figure data on the XY plane shown below: Specify a diameter
along the Xaxis and a radius along the Yaxis.
Figure Data
Yaxis
(radius)
Xaxis
(diameter)
Zaxis
(1) Figure data of the start point

START POINT X
: X coordinate of the start point (diameter)
START POINT Y
: Y coordinate of the start point (radius)
START PNT C COORD
: Angular displacement of the workpiece
(C coordinate)
BOTTOM Z
: Z coordinate of the bottom of the cut
NOTE
1 The cutting start point is determined from the Z coordinate
of the bottom of the cut and the depth of cut. If the depth
of cut is not large enough to enable positioning of the cutting
start point outside the blank, the tool may collide with the
blank during rapid traverse.
(2) Selecting a contour and entering the figure data
After entering the figure data of the start point, press the [INSERT]
soft key. The following soft key menu for selecting a contour is
displayed:
<
CHAM
FER
ROUND
PLOT
To display the second page of the soft key menu, press the [+] soft key.
<
TANGNT
446
TRANS.
FIGURE
PLOT
END
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
For the contours entered by selecting options other than [TRANS.] on the
contour selection menu, see Section 1.1.
(3) Entering two or more figures
By pressing the [TRANS.] soft key on the contour selection menu,
two or more figures can be entered for a single Yaxis milling
process.
Y
Tool
To mill two or more figures, press the [TRANS.] key on the contour
selection menu.
NEXT SHAPE X COORD X
NEXT SHAPE Y COORD Y
NEXT SHAPE C COORD C
BOTTOM Z
: X coordinate of the start point of

the next figure
: Y coordinate of the start point of
the next figure
: Angular displacement of the
workpiece when the next figure is
cut (C coordinate)
: Z coordinate of the bottom of the
cut of the next figure
NOTE
2 An arc exceeding a semicircle cannot be specified. To
specify a whole circle, for example, enter two semicircles.
3 For a single Yaxis milling process, up to 30 contours
(including multiple identical figures) can be specified.
447

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3.4
YAXIS MILLING
(ON THE SIDE FACE)
Y
End lace of a
workpiece
[HEAD1]
Chuck side
Note)

In Yaxis milling (on the side face), an end mill cuts the side face of a
workpiece by moving only once along the contour determined by the
specified figure data. Specify a desired path along which the cutting tool
is to be moved. Machining in bites is not performed along the Xaxis.
The figure above shows a workpiece viewed from the tool side. When a
machining program is created, however, the workpiece is viewed from the
front of the machine; therefore, in the figure above the face to be actually
machined is hidden from view.
To view the side face to be machined, the workpiece must be rotated about
the Caxis by 180 degrees. Consequently, the Yaxis of the actual
workpiece coordinate system is inverted, as shown below:
Workpiece coordinate systems for Yaxis machining on the side face
[HEAD2]
[HEAD1]
448

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Since a positive value is always entered as the Z coordinate, the Zaxis

of the program coordinate system is always opposite to that of the
corresponding workpiece coordinate system, as shown below:
Program coordinate systems for Yaxis machining on the side face
[HEAD1]
[HEAD2]
3.4.1
Machining Type
Selection
PROC (01)
AREA
YMIL
CROSS
FEED.Y,Z
500

To select Yaxis milling, press the [YMILLING] soft key, then the
[SIDE CUT] soft key.
HEAD
HEADL
FEED.X
300
DEPTH
5.000
ESCAPESX
600
449
MILDIA TOOLNO REV/MIN TCODE

5.000
751
1200
0101
SHIFTDR
CENTER

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.4.2
J START PNT.
B62444E1/04
X: X coordinate of the point to which the tool

Setting
Z: Z coordinate of the point to which the tool

DEPTH : Depth of a cut in milling (radius). The milling operation

starts when the end mill reaches the point which is the depth
of cut away from the X coordinate of the bottom of the cut,
which is specified as the figure data.
Retraction (at escape speed X in the G01 mode)
X coordinate of the machining
start point
X coordinate of the bottom

of the cut (figure data)
X coordinate of the bottom

of the cut (figure data)
Depth of cut (radius)
MILDIA
: Major diameter of the end mill to be used for

sideface machining
NOTE
1 The automatic tool selection function selects an end mill for
sideface machining whose nominal diameter is smaller
than or equal to the groove diameter. In Yaxis milling, the
machining width is limited to the width of the end mill used.
The machined width may be smaller than the diameter of
the end mill.
450
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
TOOLNO
: Tool ID number of the end mill for sideface

machining
: Speed at which the tool revolves in milling
(revolutions/min)
: T code for the end mill
: Feedrate at which the end mill for sideface
machining transversely cuts the side face of the
workpiece (along the Yaxis and Zaxis)
(mm/min or inch/min)
: Feedrate at which the end mill for sideface
machining longitudinally cuts the workpiece
(along the Xaxis) (mm/min or inch/min)
: Feedrate in retraction. After milling is completed,
the end mill is returned to the X coordinate of the
machining start point at this speed in the G01
mode. Triple the value set for FEEDRATE2 is
automatically specified.
: Desired direction of cutter compensation.
Select the desired type of SHIFTDR from the
follwing menu items
1 = CENTER :
The tool is moved so that its
center moves along the contour determined by the specified figure.
2 = RIGHT :
Cutter compensation to the
right is applied to a specified
figure. (tool post 1: G42, tool
post 2: G41)
3 = LEFT
:
Cutter compensation to the
left is applied to a specified
figure. (tool post 1: G41, tool
post 2: G42)
REV/MIN
TCODE
FEED.Y,Z
FEED.X
ESCAPESX
SHIFTDR
NOTE
2 When SHIFTDR is set to RIGHT or LEFT, alarm P/S 41
may be issued while the program is running to indicate
interference in cutter compensation, depending on the
specified contour.
JMILLING GEAR: Desired milling gear (only when required).
Directly enter the corresponding M code.
JCOOLANT
: Desired coolant
451

MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
3.4.3
B62444E1/04
Specify the figure data on the YZ plane shown below: Specify a radius
along the Yaxis and a radius along the Zaxis.
Figure Data
[HEAD1]
[HEAD2]
(1) Figure data of the start point

START POINT Y
: Y coordinate of the start point (radius)
START POINT Z
: Z coordinate of the start point (radius)
START PNT C COORD. C : Angular displacement of the workpiece
(C coordinate)
BOTTOM X
: X coordinate of the bottom of the cut
NOTE
1 The cutting start point is determined from the X coordinate
of the bottom of the cut and the depth of cut. If the depth
of cut is not large enough to enable positioning of the cutting
start point outside the blank, the tool may collide with the
blank during rapid traverse.
(2) Selecting a contour and entering the figure data
After entering the figure data of the start point, press the [INSERT]
soft key. The following soft key menu for selecting a contour is
displayed:
<
CHAM
FER
ROUND
PLOT
To display the second page of the soft key menu, press the [+] soft key.
<
TANGNT
TRANS.
FIGURE
PLOT
END
For the contours entered by selecting options other than [TRANS.] on the
contour selection menu, see Section 1.1.
452
B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS
(3) Entering two or more figures

By pressing the [TRANS.] soft key on the contour selection menu
to rotate the workpiece about the Caxis or to change the depth of
cut, two or more figures can be entered for a single Yaxis milling
process.
End mill
To cut two or more figures, press the [TRANS.] key on the contour
selection menu.
NEXT SHAPE Y COORD Y
NEXT SHAPE Z COORD Z
NEXT SHAPE C COORD C
BOTTOM X
: Y coordinate of the start point of

the next figure
: Z coordinate of the start point of
the next figure
: Angular displacement of the
workpiece when the next figure is
cut (C coordinate)
: X coordinate of the bottom of the
cut of the next figure
NOTE
2 An arc exceeding a semicircle cannot be specified. To
specify a whole circle, for example, enter two semicircles.
3 For a single Yaxis milling process, up to 30 contours
(including multiple identical figures) can be specified.
453
IN THE RIGHTHAND COORDINATE

SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFT
TYPES OF MACHINING
HAND COORDINATE SYSTEM
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
CONVERTING A MACHINE PROGRAM IN THE RIGHTHAND

COORDINATE SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFTHAND
COORDINATE SYSTEM
454
B62444E1/04
4.1
OVERVIEW
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

When a machining program is created in the conversational mode, it is

assumed that the figures are specified in the righthand coordinate system
(ZX plane) as shown in the example below. It is also assumed that
machining operation with the machining program is performed in the
same coordinate system.
+X
+Z
However, some machines have the lefthand coordinate system, where

the negative Xdirection points upward.
+Z
+X
With the procedure described below, machining programs for such

machines can be created in the conversational mode.
(1) Set bit 6 (RVX) of parameter 9775 to 1.
(2) When creating a machining program in the conversational mode,
enter contour data in the righthand coordinate system as usual, in
the ZX plane where the positive Xdirection points upward.
455

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(3) A machining program created in the conversational mode is

converted to an NCformat program.
The machining program is automatically converted to a machining
program in the lefthand coordinate system, where the negative
Xdirection points upward.
Therefore, machining on the actual machine is always performed
using an NCformat program.
456
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

4.2
DETAILS OF
CONVERSION TO
MACHINING
PROGRAM IN THE
LEFTHAND
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
4.2.1
Conversion of
Machining Programs
A machining program created in the conversational mode is converted to

an NCformat program through the conversion operations described
below.
(1) Axis command along the Xaxis
The signs of all axis commands along the Xaxis are reversed.
(2) Gcodes
All Gcodes associated with the coordinate planes in a machining
program are converted as follows:
G02 G03
G03 G02
G41 G42
G42 G41
(3) Gcode commands for animated simulation
Graphic commands starting with G10 P9**** for animated
simulation are always deleted in conversion to an NC format
program.
NOTE
NCformat programs after conversion cannot perform
animated simulation.
457

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
4.2.2
Restrictions on
Conversion to
Machining Programs in
the Lefthand
Coordinate System
B62444E1/04
(1) Machining programs created in the conversational mode in the

righthand coordinate system cannot be directly executed on a
machine that has the lefthand coordinate system, where the
negative Xdirection points upward.
(2) Animated simulation using a machining program created in the
conversational mode in the righthand coordinate system can be
performed only on the ZX plane where the positive Xdirection
points upward. At this time, set the coordinate system for animated
simulation (Parameter 6510: GRPAX setting value) as described
below.
(a) When the program reference position is on the chuck end face
GRPAX = 1
: Draws only the upper half of a material to be

machined.
GRPAX = 11 : Draws the lower half of a material to be
machined as well.
(b) When the program reference position is on the workpiece end face
GRPAX = 4
GRPAX = 14
: Draws only the upper half of a material to be

machined.
: Draws the lower half of a material to be
machined as well.
After a machining program such as the above is converted to an

NCformat program, animated simulation cannot be performed.
NOTE
If a tool offset is set for a machine based on the lefthand
coordinate system when animated simulation is to be
executed by a machining program created in conversational
mode, movement along the Xaxis associated with the tool
offset may be reversed.
(3) Set the virtual tool tip direction data on the tool data screen of the
conversational function according to the program input coordinate
system, that is, the righthand coordinate system.
Until conversion to an NC format program in the lefthand
coordinate system is completed, set the hypothetical tool tip
direction data of the tool offset data on the NC side as well as the
hypothetical tool tip data on the tool data screen according to the
righthand coordinate system.
Before starting actual machining using a converted NCformat
program, set the hypothetical tool tip direction data of the tool offset
data on the NC side to a normal value in the leftside coordinate
system.
(4) The setup guidance functions of the conversational function such as
tool length compensation value measurement, chuck barrier
specification, and toolchange position specification cannot be
used.
The tooling data directory screen cannot be displayed. In addition,
the tool life management function available with the conversational
function cannot be used.
458
B62444E1/04
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS

FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE
BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS FOR A LATHE WITH A

SUBSPINDLE
459

FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE
5.1
SELECTING THE
SUBSPINDLE
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
In conversational programming, the following functions can be used to

create a program for machining with a subspindle.
These optional functions are valid when bit 6 (2SP) of parameter No. 9771
is set to 1.
(1) The main spindle (main) or subspindle (sub) can be selected for
each machining process.
(2) A program for machining with the main spindle or subspindle can
be selected for each tool.
(3) Some processes can be moved from the main spindle to the
subspindle and vice versa. The processes that can be moved are
limited. They include bar machining and grooving.
460
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
5.2
BACK MACHINING
WITH THE
SUBSPINDLE

FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE
To execute back machining in bar machining with the subspindle,

specify reverse machining as shown below:
- Outer surface
- Inner surface
"""
"""
"""
"""
- End surface
"""
"""
""""
""""
""""
"""
"""
"""
""""
""""
""""
Pressing the [+] soft key on the machiningarea menu for bar machining
displays the following reverse cutting menu.
7: OUTER END (BACKWARD)
8: OUTER MID (BACKWARD)
9: INNER END (BACKWARD)
10: INNER MID (BACKWARD)
11: FACE END (BACKWARD)
12: FACE MID (BACKWARD)
Select the desired machining depending on the shape and area to be
machined.
NOTE
When bar machining or reverse bar machining is specified
for a point, corner rounding/chamfering cannot be specified
immediately after the contour start point. Enter an arc or
diagonal line instead of corner rounding/chamfering.
461

FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE
5.3
COORDINATE
SYSTEM FOR CAXIS
MACHINING WITH
THE SUBSPINDLE
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Viewing the end face of the workpiece from the front, enter coordinates
for Caxis machining with the subspindle, as shown below:
+X
+C
Caxis tool
C=0
End face of
the workpiece
462
B62444E1/04
5.4
ANIMATED
SIMULATION
FUNCTION FOR
MACHINING WITH
THE SUBSPINDLE
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE
While an animated drawing of a single workpiece is displayed on the

screen as shown below, turning with the main spindle or subspindle is
simulated:
NOTE
When the function for machining with the subspindle is
used, the following animated simulation command for
shifting the graphic coordinate system is executed at the
beginning of each process of a converted NC program. The
command is not output if the suppression of the output in NC
program conversion is specified.
-
5.5
FUNCTION FOR
CONTROLLING THE
CAXIS BRAKE
Process of machining with the main spindle: G10 X0 Z0

P90105;
Process of machining with the subspindle: G10 X0
Z(productlength) P90105;
In Caxis drilling, M codes for activating and deactivating the Caxis

brake are automatically output before and after each drilling action.
The M code for activating the Caxis brake and the M code for
deactivating the Caxis brake (M code for activating the brake plus 1) are
specified in parameter No. 5110. These M codes are automatically output
in the Caxis machining under control of spindle positioning.
463

FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE
5.6
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Even when the machine controls spindle positioning (96 angular

subsections), the following Caxis machining and animated simulation
can be executed:
(1) Caxis drilling on the end face (center drilling, drilling, tapping)
(2) Caxis drilling on the side surface (center drilling, drilling, tapping)
(3) Caxis machining of a predetermined groove on the side surface
CAXIS MACHINING
FUNCTION UNDER
CONTROL OF
SPINDLE
POSITIONING
NOTE
1 For the unit controlling spindle positioning (main
spindle/subspindle), set the parameters for selecting the
Caxis machining menu (Nos. 9791, 9792) to 1.
2 The spindle positioning program is created by the machine
tool builder. For details, refer to the manual written by the
When NC program conversion is carried out, the spindle positioning

command is converted to the following block:
M
I1(or 2);
m = M code used to call another M code

c = C coordinate
After a drilling process following the spindle positioning command
terminates, the M code for canceling spindle positioning is automatically
output.
The M code for canceling spindle positioning is specified in parameter
No. 9862 (960FFM).
-
Bit NO.
9771
7
1SP
6
2SP
96M
96S
The following parameters have been added for spindle

positioning:
5
96S
4
96M
1: The spindle positioning control function (96 angular

subsections) is enabled for the main spindle. This is valid
only for the FS16/18T with the subspindle control
functions.
subsections) is disabled for the main spindle.
subsections) is enabled for the subspindle. This is valid
only for the FS16/18T with the subspindle control
functions.
subsections) is disabled for the subspindle.
464
TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
2SP
1SP
5.7
AUTOMATIC OUTPUT
OF THE M CODE FOR
CONTROLLING THE
SUBSPINDLE
(AND THE M CODES
FOR CALLING
SUBPROGRAMS)
1: The conversational
lathe is enabled.
lathe is disabled.
lathe is enabled.
lathe is disabled.

FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE
function for a oneturret twospindle

function for a oneturret twospindle
function for a twoturret onespindle
function for a twoturret onespindle
The M code for changing the subspindle gear and the function to call the
M codes for enabling and disabling the subspindle can be used to control
the subspindle.
(1) M code for changing the subspindle gear
Parameter No. 9893 (GERM1S) : M code for selecting a low gear
Parameter No. 9894 (GERM2S) : M code for selecting medium
gear 1
Parameter No. 9895 (GERM3S) : M code for selecting medium
gear 2
Parameter No. 9896 (GERM4S) : M code for selecting a high gear
The maximum speed of each gear, which determines which gear is
selected, is the same as that specified in the corresponding parameter
for the main spindle.
(2) Calling the M codes for enabling and disabling the subspindle
At the beginning of a process for machining with the subspindle,
a subprogram for enabling the subspindle is automatically called.
At the beginning of a process for machining with the main spindle,
a subprogram for disabling the subspindle is automatically called.
The O9028 subprogram is called to enable the subspindle. The
O9027 subprogram is called to disable the subspindle.
When the program is converted to an NC program, the above block
is converted as a block for calling the M code.
Enabling the subspindle : Mm1; (m1 is the M code for calling
a subprogram.)
Disabling the subspindle : Mm2; (m2 is the M code for calling
a subprogram.)
Machining menu parameters
Machining menus can be displayed separately by specifying
parameter Nos. 9791 (for tool post 1 or the main spindle) and 9792
(for tool post 2 or the sub spindle) accordingly.
For details, see the parameter descriptions.
465
IV. EXAMPLES OF CREATING

PROGRAMS
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH

WARNING
The parameters, tool data, cutting condition data, and machining programs in the following
examples differ from those used in actual machining. Actual data varies from one machine model
to another. Refer to the applicable manual supplied by the respective machine tool builders for
details.
If the set data does not match the characteristic of a specific machine, a machining program
created using the conversational function cannot work correctly.
If a machining program fails to work correctly, the tool may bump against the workpiece, and the
machine may be forced to perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the tool
and/or machine, and even injuries.
469
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS
1.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS
B62444E1/04
(1) Coordinate system parameters for drawing

Parameter No. 6510 (GRPAX) = 14 (program reference position =
workpiece end face, workpiece upper and lower face drawing)
(2) Workpiece material display
Parameter No.
Setting value
9100
9101
9102
9103
9104
9105
9106
9107
70
67
50
53
0
0
0
0
9108
9109
9110
9111
9112
9113
9114
9115
70
67
68
52
53
0
0
0
9116
9117
9118
9119
9120
9121
9122
9123
83
83
52
49
0
0
0
0
9124
9125
9126
9127
9128
9129
9130
9131
83
52
53
67
0
0
0
0
9132
9133
9134
9135
9136
9137
9138
9139
83
75
68
49
49
0
0
0
9140
9141
9142
9143
9144
9145
9146
9147
83
85
83
51
48
52
0
0
470
Workpiece material 1 (FC25)
Workpiece material 2 (FCD45)
Workpiece material 3 (SS41)
Workpiece material 4 (S45C)
Workpiece material 5 (SKD 11)
Workpiece material 6 (SUS304)
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Parameter No.
9148
9149
9150
9151
9152
9153
9154
9155
Setting value
65
76
0
0
0
0
0
0
Workpiece material 7 (AL)
NOTE
1 Specify parameter Nos. 9156 to 9759 according to the
application.
(3) Parameters required to execute a machining program created

conversationally
Parameter No.
Setting value
9050
9051
9052
9053
9054
9055
9056
50
70
2000
500
3000
60
0
9057
9090
9091
9765
9766
9770
9771
9772
9773
9774
9775
9776
9777
9778
9779
9780
9781
9782
9783
9784
9785
9786
9787
9788
9789
9790
9791
9792
9793
9794
9795
9796
9797
9798
9799
80
0
0
11001011
00000001
00000000
00001001
11100000
01101010
11011000
10011001
00000001
11000000
00000100
00000100
30000
10000
3000
1500
3000
3000
0
3000
3000
0
0
5
5
0
0
80
1000
1000
1000
3000
(Cutting feed override at the start of cutting in drilling)

(Cutting feed override at the end of cutting in throughhole drilling)
(Cutting feed amount for retraction in turning residual drilling)
(Cutting feed amount for retraction in Caxis residual drilling)
(Cuttinglip length in reaming)
(Surface speed override in throwaway drilling)
(M code for spindle orientation in Caxis boring; the setting depends on the machine
being used.)
(Cutting feed amount override in throwaway drilling)
(PMC parameter start address in batched data input/output)
(PMC parameter end address in batched data input/output)
(Xcoordinate for outer surface common safety point clearance)

(Zcoordinate for outer surface common safety point clearance)
(Xcoordinate for inner surface common safety point clearance)
(Zcoordinate for inner surface common safety point clearance)
(Cutting start point clearance Xcoordinate)
(Cutting start point clearance Zcoordinate)
(The program reference position is the workpiece end face.)
(Drilling cutting start point clearance Xcoordinate)
(Drilling cutting start point clearance Zcoordinate)
(Override of depth of cut for tool post 1)
(Override of depth of cut for tool post 2)
(Machining menu selection for tool post 1)
(Machining menu selection for tool post 2)
(Automatically set toolchange position X)
(Automatically set toolchange position Z)
(Change ratio of depth of cut)
(Minimum depth of cut)
(Clearance Xcoordinate)
(Clearance Zcoordinate)
(Residual clearance Xcoordinate)
471
PROGRAMS
Parameter No.
9800
9801
9802
9803
9804
9805
9806
9807
9808
9815
9820
9821
9822
9823
9824
9825
9826
9830
9831
9832
9833
9834
9835
9836
9837
9838
9839
9840
9850
9851
9852
9853
9854
9855
9856
9857
9858
9859
9860
9861
9862
9865
9866
9870
9871
9872
9873
9874
9875
9876
9877
9878
9879
9880
9881
9882
9883
9884
9885X9887
9888
9889X9891
9892
9893X9896
9897X9899
B62444E1/04
Setting value
3000
3
0
0
0
0
0
100000
50
30
3000
3000
80
1000
1000
20
5
10000
3000
6495
200
300
60
20
21
6495
6300
0
1000
3000
1000
30
30
1000
1000
50
5000
3000
3
14
0
20
0
0
0
0
0
50
51
0
13
14
3000
46
45
2
10
9
0
2
0
0
0
0
(Residual clearance Zcoordinate)

(Cut angle clearance)
(90 < cutting angle x 135 overridden)
(135 < cutting angle < 180 overridden)
(180 < cutting angle x 225 overridden)
(225 < cutting angle < 270 overridden)
(Overriding at mill scale machining)
(Distance along which end facing speed is reduced)
(Overriding reduction in end facing speed)
(Necking cut angle)
(Groove cut clearance X)
(Groove cut clearance Z)
(Groove cut change ratio)
(Minimum depth of groove cut)
(Amount of groove return)
(Grooving overlap amount)
(Groove bottom dowel time for rotation of the spindle)
(Threading clearance X)
(Threading clearance Z)
(Thread height coefficient)
(Minimum depth of thread cut)
(Thread finishing allowance X)
(Initial thread angle)
(M code for enabling chamfering)
(M code for disabling chamfering)
(Coefficient of thread height for metric and unified threads)
(Coefficient of thread height for PT and PF threads)
(Parameter for canceling Yaxis machining mode)
(Drilling reduced depth)
(Drilling clearance return amount)
(Drilling minimum depth)
(Drilling depth coefficient)
(Drill dowel speed)
(Clearance of drilling or grooving)
(C axis tap clearance)
(Tapped hole bottom clearance)
(Boring shift amount)
(Boring return clearance)
(Boring return speed overridden)
(M code for reversing the direction of tool rotation around the milling axis in Caxis
tapping)
(M code for canceling spindle positioning mode)
(Side face notching overlap amount)
(M code for selecting lowspeed gear)
(M code for selecting middlespeed 1 gear)
(M code for selecting middlespeed 2 gear)
(M code for selecting highspeed gear)
(Tail stock ON M code)
(Tail stock OFF M code)
(Milling axis stop M code)
(Milling axis normal rotation M code)
(Milling axis reverse rotation M code)
(Milling axis maximum speed)
(Spindle Cfaxis switching M code)
(Cfaxis spindle switching M code)
(Number of digits of feed amount)
(Sequence number specification at NC statement conversion)
(Graphic drawing reduction ratio)
(Data for checking the cutting power)
(Cassette number for tool file output)
(Average time required to execute an M, S, or T code)
(Program selected when conversational mode is switched to NC mode)
(M code for selecting subspindle gears)
(Data for the tool/chuck interference check function)
472
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
NOTE
2 The above parameter values are temporary ones. When a
device is connected for actual run, the values appropriate
to the device should be set.
The above example shows the values to be set when such
options as the Caxis conversational automatic
programming function and NC statement output function
are used. If they are not used, each parameter must be set
to 0.
473
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.2
SETTING TOOL DATA
AND CUTTING
CONDITION DATA
1.2.1
(1) Registering a righthand outside surface cutting tool (HEADL)
Setting Tool Data

On the screen with a registeredtool directory displayed, press:
[TOOL ENTRY]
After making sure the tool data is displayed on the screen, specify:
[GENERAL OUTTER]
(Tool type)
[HEADL]
(Tool post)
[
]
(Direction of the tool)
[COMMON]
(Roughing or finising)
0101
INPUT
(Tcode)
[NORMAL]
(Direction of rotation)
0.4
INPUT
(Tool tip radius)
90
INPUT
(Cutting edge angle)
60
INPUT
(Tool angle)
20
INPUT
(Tool width)
3
INPUT
(Virtual tool tip)
[CARBID]
(Tool material)
NOTE
1 Pressing the [TOOL LIST] soft key redisplays the
registeredtool directory.
(2) Registering a lefthand outside surface cutting tool (HEADR)
On the screen with a registeredtool directory displayed, press:

[TOOL ENTRY]
After making sure the tool data is displayed on the screen, specify:
[GENERAL OUTTER]
(Tool type)
[HEADR]
(Tool post)
[
]
(Direction of the tool)
[COMMON]
(Roughing or finising)
1111
INPUT
(Tcode)
[NORMAL]
0.4
INPUT
(Tool tip radius)
90
INPUT
(Cutting edge angle)
60
INPUT
(Tool angle)
20
INPUT
(Tool width)
3
INPUT
(Virtual tool tip)
[CARBID]
(Tool material)
474
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
NOTE
2 When the registeredtool directory is on the screen,
pressing the [MENU RETURN] soft key redisplays the tool
data menu.
1.2.2
Setting Cutting
Condition Data
Set cutting condition data according to descriptions in 13.2 Machining

Condition Data and Surface Roughness Data in Chapter I.
475
PROGRAMS
1.3
EXAMPLES OF
PROGRAMS FOR
MACHINING THE
CYLINDRICAL
SURFACE OF BARS
B62444E1/04
Program example) Machining cylindrical surfaces

Material code: FC25
Material type: Round bar (100 80, including an
end face cutting allowance of 2 mm on either face)
80
R3
R3
C2
75
30
95
C2
60
60
25
30
50
62
76
1.3.1
(1) Displaying the main menu
Creating a Machining
Program
Press the
PROG
function key to display the main conversational
menu.
NOTE
If the main menu is not displayed, see descriptions in 6.3
Selecting the Conversational Mode in Chapter II.
(2) Operations for program creation
To display a menu for program creation, press the [ 1 ] soft key
(machining program creation).
(3) Entering the program number and name
Enter program number 0194 and name PRG11.
0194
PRG11
INPUT
INPUT
(Program number)
(Program name)
476
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.3.2
Entering Initial Data
[FC25]
[BAR]
100
INPUT
80
2000
[ON]
1
.5
2
76
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(Workpiece material)
(Workpiece figure)
(Maximum outside dimension)
(Maximum inside diameter)
(Length)
(Maximum spindle speed)
(Coolant)
(Finishing allowance Xcoordinate)
(Finishing allowance Zcoordinate)
(End surface chamfering allowance)
(Product length)
(Cursor key)
NOTE
Once entered for a program, the above data is preserved
and used for other programs automatically. To use such
data to create another program, just check they are
appropriate for the new program and press the
cursordown key () repeatedly until a new process is
created.
477
PROGRAMS
1.3.3
Specifying the Primary
Machining Process
(For the Leftside Tool
Post)
1
BAR
<
B62444E1/04
(1) Entering the process data

Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of initial data entry
creates a new process and assigns various menus to the soft keys as
shown below:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TAP
To select bar machining, press the [1 BAR] soft key, and specify the
machining area and tool post. To select a finishing tool, specify the
desired surface roughness. These operations automatically determine the
tool and cutting conditions.
[1 BAR]
[1 OUTER]
[HEADL]
(Workpiece type)
(Machining area)
(Tool post)
[5
(Surface roughness)
(Cursor key)
(2) Entering contour data (primary machining)

Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of the operations (1)
displays an entry window for the start point of contour data. Enter
contour data according to the design drawings.
478
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point Xcoordinate)

(Start point Zcoordinate)
[ ]
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
[CHAMFR]
2
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Amount of chamfer)
[ ]
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Horizontal direction)
(End point Zcoordinate)
(Horizontal line Xcoordinate)
[ROUND]
3
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Radius of a corner)
[ + ]
[
]
60
INPUT
30
INPUT
INPUT
60
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Direction of movement)
(Slanted line end point Xcoordinate)
(Oblique line end point Zcoordinate)
(Xcomponent of an angle)
(Angle)
[ ]
[INSERT]
(Horizontal direction)
[ROUND]
3
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Radius of a corner)
[ + ]
[
]
95
INPUT
50
INPUT
INPUT
80
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Oblique line end point Zcoordinate)
(Angle)
[ ]
62
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
479
PROGRAMS
1.3.4
Specifying a Transfer
Process
<
1
BAR
B62444E1/04
The last key operation [FIGURE END] in 1.3.3 creates a new process,
resulting in the machining type menus being assigned to the soft keys as
shown below:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TAP
Press the rightmost soft key [ + ] to display the soft keys for page 2 of
machining type menus shown below.
<
11
SINGL
12
AUX
13
14
15
CCENT CDRIL CTAP
16
17
18
19
20

CGROV CNOTC CCYL. TRANS CA.SUB
Press the [19 TRANS] soft key to select a process in which the workpiece
that has undergone the primary machining is transferred from the leftside
tool post to the rightside tool post.
[19 TRANS]
(Machining type)
NOTE
1 The soft key assignment for page 2 of machining type
menus varies depending on whether the Caxis machining
option is available.
2 Refer to the applicable machine tool manual for descriptions
on the transfer process.
3 For the onepath lath, it is impossible to specify the transfer
process and the secondary machining process (for
rightside tool post) described later.
480
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.3.5
Specifying the
Secondary Machining
Process (For the
Rightside Tool Post)
1
BAR
<
(1) Entering the process data

The last key operation in the previous section creates a new process
and assigns the machining type menus to the soft keys, as shown
below, for the specification of the secondary process:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TAP
To machine a bar, press the [1 BAR] soft key, and specify the machining
area and tool post. Also specify the surface roughness to select the desired
finishing tool. These operations determine the tool and cutting conditions
automatically.
[1 BAR]
[1 OUTER]
[HEADL]
(Workpiece type)
(Machining area)
(Tool post)
[5
(Surface roughness)
(Cursor key)
481
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) Entering contour data (secondary machining)

The last key operation () in item (1) displays an entry window for
the start point data for the contour. Enter the contour data according
to the design drawings.
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

[ ]
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
[CHAMFER]
2
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Amount of chamfer)
[ ]
INPUT
30
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
[ + ]
[
]
95
INPUT
7662
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
75
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Calculation of end point Zcoordinate)
(Angle)
482
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
1.3.6
Pressing the [PLOT] soft key displays the figure of the product in the
multiwindow.
Displaying the Figure

of a Product
[PLOT]
[RETURN]
(Displays the figure of the product.)

(Returns to the original screen.)

NO. = 0194
PROC (02)
TRANS.
PROC(03)
BAR (R)
PROC (01)
BAR (R)
NAME =
AREA
OUTER
AREA
OUTER
START
CHAMFR
[CAP: HEADL]
PRG11
*** PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE ***

X
SOFTKEY selection
CUTDPTH TCODE
8.000
0202
FEED/REV TCODE
0.20
0202
B=
X= 95.000
Z= 14.000
I=
K/J= 75.000
Q=
) SR=
5W
FIG.TYPE
RETURN
(1) Returning to the main menu

After the initial program screen is resumed by pressing the
[RETURN] soft key on the above screen, pressing the leftmost soft
key [ ] redisplays the main menu.
(Super return)
483
PROGRAMS
1.3.7
Animated Simulation
B62444E1/04
A program can be checked by running it for animated simulation using

the procedure shown below:
On the main menu, press:

[3]
(Machining simulation)
A list of machining programs is displayed for simulation purposes.
Place the cursor on the program you want to run for animated
simulation, then specify:
[ANIMA + RT.CH]
(Animated simulation with tool trajectory)
After making sure that the animated simulation appears on the screen,
press:
[EXEC]
(Starts animated simulation.)
To start animated simulation at the very beginning, press:
[HEAD]
[EXEC]
HEAD1
HEAD2
X1
00001
O0001 P0001
P0000
X2
X1
Z1
C1
200.000
100.000
0.000
X2 92.000
Z2 13.057
C2
0.000
ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
0M00S
26.0
500%
< SPEED SPEED PLOT
DOWN
UP
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
1.071
C
0.000
Z2
0M43G
26.0
MEM STOP *** ***
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
14:22:25
STOP

STEP
PIECE
(FS16/18TB)
1.3.8
Returning to the Main

Menu
simulation screen redisplays the main menu.
484
] (super return) on the animated
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
1.4
SETTING UP
MACHINING
1.4.1
Setting the Workpiece
Shift Amount
When the machine stroke is too large to compensated for by the geometry
compensation amount, the workpiece shift amount is used for
compensation as shown in the following example:
Example) When the tool geometry compensation is insufficient
Tool post
(machine zero
point)
Zgo (Tool geometry compensation along the Zaxis)
Chuck
Xgo
Workpiece
Tail stock
Origin of the workpiece coordinate system
(on the end surface of the chuck)
When the stroke along the Zaxis of the machine exceeds the maximum
value (999.999 mm in metric system) of the tool geometry compensation
amount (Zgo), assign the machining workpiece length value and other
values as the workpiece shift amount along the Zaxis. Then, place the
virtual reference position on the workpiece end face. The Zaxis tool
geometry compensation amount will then be able to be within the
maximum value.
Tool post
(machine zero
point)
Zws (Workpiece shift amount along the Zaxis)
Zgo
Chuck
Xgo
Workpiece
Origin of the workpiece coordinate system
(on the end surface of the chuck)
Tail stock
Virtual zero point
NOTE
Some machine tool builders use the workpiece shift amount
for purposes other than the above. In such a case, the data
setting method differs from this. Refer to the manual
prepared by each machine tool builder.
485
PROGRAMS
1.4.2
Another Setup
Operation for
Machining
B62444E1/04
The following setup must be performed before the conversationally

created machining program can be executed. See Section 12.1 of Chapter
II for details.
(1) Measuring a tool geometry compensation amount
(2) Specifying a tool changing position
(3) Specifying a chuck barrier
NOTE
checking a machining program using drnamic graphic
displays does not require this setup.
486
B62444E1/04
CONTOURS FOR BAR

MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING
PROGRAMS
EXAMPLE OF INPUTTING CONTOURS FOR BAR

MACHINING AND PATTERN REPEATING
WARNING
The following example of entering contour data is intended
only to illustrate what automatic calculation of intersections is
like when contour data is entered. The contour data given in
the example may not be able to be used in actual machining.
If the machine is forced to run according to a program like the
one shown above, the tool may bump against the workpiece,
and the machine may be forced to perform unnatural
machining, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or
machine, and even injuries.
NOTE
The following examples show the input procedure for
contours, assuming that the process data for bar machining
and pattern repeating has already been input.
Example 1
70
29
R5
70
52
R100
487
32
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
PROGRAMS
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ ]
32
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)
[
]
100
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(FIG. TYPE)
[
]
5
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
52
INPUT
29
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG.TYPE)
[ ]
70
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)
[
70
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
]
INPUT
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
(FIG.TYPE)
488
B62444E1/04
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Example 2
70
15
R40
R14
100
70
20
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ ]
20
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)
[ ]
15
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
[
40
INPUT
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
]
INPUT
INPUT
100
INPUT
15
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
14
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG.TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(FIG.TYPE)
[ ]
70
INPUT
70
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)
[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
(FIG.TYPE)
489
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Example 3
70
40
R=10
20
70
30
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ ]
30
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)
[ + ]
[
]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
20
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(Angle)
(FIG.TYPE)
[
]
10
INPUT
70
INPUT
40
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(End point X)
(End point Z)
[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ ]
70
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
(FIG.TYPE)
490
B62444E1/04
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
PROGRAMS
Example 4
70
40
20
70
R=10
30
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ ]
30
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)
[
]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ + ]
[
]
70
INPUT
40
INPUT
INPUT
20
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(TAPER END Z COORD)
(Angle)
[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ ]
70
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
(FIG. TYPE)
491
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Example 5
70
54
R=10
R=110
70
74
R=7
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[
]
7
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
0
INPUT
7
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
110
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
10
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
74
INPUT
54
INPUT
[INSERT]
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
492
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ ]
70
INPUT
70
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)
[CROSS1]
[INSERT]
(CROSS PT NUMBER)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
(FIG. TYPE)
Example 6
155
120
R35
150
R35
25
R25
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[
]
25
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
0
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
35
INPUT
[INSERT]
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
493
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
PROGRAMS
(FIG. TYPE)
[
]
35
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
80
INPUT
120
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ ]
155
INPUT
150
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
B62444E1/04
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG.TYPE)
Example 7
33
R80
R2
90
20
R30
R2
20
70
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ ]
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
[ROUND]
2
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(ROUND RADIUS)
(FIG. TYPE)
494
80
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
30
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
20
INPUT
20
INPUT
[INSERT]
(RADIUS)
[CROSS2]
[INSERT]
(CROSS PT NUMBER)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
80
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(FIG.TYPE)
[
]
20
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
90
INPUT
33
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ ]
70
INPUT
80
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)
[CROSS1]
[INSERT]
(CROSS PT NUMBER)
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
495
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Example 8
10
R10
70
15
R8
60
100
40
65
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ ]
20
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)
[ + ]
[
]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
15
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
60
(FIG. TYPE)
(Angle)
(FIG. TYPE)
[
]
10
INPUT
40
INPUT
20
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(End point X)
(End point X)
[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ ]
40
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)
[
]
8
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(FIG. TYPE)
496
40
20
20
B62444E1/04
[ + ]
[
]
60
INPUT
60
INPUT
INPUT
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
PROGRAMS
(FIG. TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(TAPER END Z COORD)
(Angle)
[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ ]
65
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)
[ ]
70
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)
[ ]
100
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
497
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Example 9
R2
R=20
D=65
D=50
25
D=65
25
D=65
D=50
25
15
25
65
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ROUND]
2
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(ROUND RADIUS)
[ ]
25
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)
[ + ]
[ ]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ ]
INPUT
50
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[
]
65
INPUT
75
INPUT
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(Angle)
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)
(FIG.TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(TAPER END Z COORD)
(Angle)
498
220
75
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
[ ]
INPUT
INPUT
15
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
[ ]
20
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIIUS)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(LENGTH)
(FIG.TYPE)
[ ]
INPUT
50
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(End point X)
(FIG.TYPE)
[
]
20
INPUT
65
INPUT
220
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIIUS)
(End point X)
(End point Z)
[TRANGNT2]
[INSERT]
(TRANGENITIAL PT NO)
[ ]
INPUT
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(LENGHT)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
499
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Example 10
20
R10
R20
R10
R10
10
R8
70
100
145
R10
40
30
45
10
75
60
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ ]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)
[CHAMFR]
1
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(BEVEL AMOUNT)
[ ]
5
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)
[
]
10
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
30
INPUT
5
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ + ]
[ ]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
45
INPUT
[INSERT]
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(Angle)
500
50
35 30
B62444E1/04
[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
8
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ + ]
[ ]
30
INPUT
30
INPUT
INPUT
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
[
]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
PROGRAMS
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
(FIG.TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIIUS)
(FIG.TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(TAPER END Z COORD)
(Angle)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIIUS)
(FIG.TYPE)
[ ]
50
INPUT
40
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)
[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ROUND]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(ROUND RADIUS)
[ + ]
[ ]
70
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
70
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ ]
60
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(Angle)
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
501
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
[
]
20
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
70
INPUT
80
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
PROGRAMS
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG.TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(FIG.TYPE)
[ ]
75
INPUT
100
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)
[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
B62444E1/04
(FIG.TYPE)
Example 11
22
2.4
19.6
6.6
0.99
1.31
5.5
R3
R1.4
R1.5
25 23
R0.5
R1.5
R3
18
502
26.6
24.8
R30
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
24.8
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Start point X)
(Start point Z)
[ ]
.99
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
INPUT(End point Z)
[ROUND]
.5
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(ROUND RADIUS)
[
]
1.4
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
23.8
INPUT
2.3
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
30
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(FIG. TYPE)
[
]
3
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
29
INPUT
13
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
1.5
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ ]
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]
(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)
503
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
CONTOURS FOR BAR

REPEATING
[CROSS1]
[INSERT]
(CROSS PT NUMBER)
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
(FIG.TYPE)
[
]
1.5
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ + ]
[ ]
18
19.6
18
2.4
[INSERT]
PROGRAMS
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(FIG.TYPE)
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(FIG.TYPE)
(TAPER END
(TAPER END
(COMPONENT
(COMPONENT
X COORD)
Z COORD)
X)
Z)
[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]
(TANGENTIAL PT NO)
[ ]
22
INPUT
[INSERT]
(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
504
B62444E1/04
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES

WITH THE CAXIS
WARNING
The parameters, tool data, cutting condition data, and
machining programs in the following examples differ from
those used in actual machining. Actual data varies from one
machine model to another. Refer to the applicable manual
supplied by the respective machine tool builders for details.
If the set data does not match the characteristic of a specific
machine, a machining program created using the
conversational function cannot work correctly.
If a machining program fails to work correctly, the tool may
bump against the workpiece, and the machine may be forced
to perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to
505
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
3.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
Set the following parameters in addition to the parameters described in

Section 1.1.
D Bit 4 (CCR) of parameter No. 3405 = 0 : I and K are used for
chamfer/corner radius specification.
D Parameter No. 1020 (third axis) = 67 : The Caxis is programmed as
the third axis.
D Parameter No. 1022 = 6 : The third axis is the Yaxis of the basic
coordinate system.
D Parameter No. 5460 = 1 : The straight line axis for polar coordinate
interpolation is the first axis.
D Parameter No. 5461 = 3 : The rotation axis for polar coordinate
interpolation is the third axis.
Set all other parameters necessary for Caxis control (including polar
coordinate and cylindrical interpolation).
506
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
3.2
SETTING TOOL AND
CUTTING CONDITION
DATA
3.2.1
(1) Registering an end mill tool for notching and grooving
Setting Tool Data for

Machining Around the
Caxis
When a registeredtool directory is on the screen,press:
[TOOL ENTRY]
Confirm that the tool data is displayed on the screen,then enter:
[END MIL]
[HEAD_L]
[FACE]
[COMMON]
1010
INPUT
[NORMAL]
5
INPUT
3
INPUT
50
INPUT
0
INPUT
[CARBID]
(Tool type)
(Tool post, for twopath lathes only)
(Tool direction)
(Roughing/finishing)
(T code)
(Radius of tool)
(Number of edges)
(Tool length)
(Virtual tool tip)
(Tool material)
(2) Registering an end mill tool for cylindrical machining
When a registeredtool directory is on the screen, press:

[TOOL ENTRY]
Confirm that the tool data is displayed on the screen, then enter:
[END MIL]
[HEAD_L]
[CROSS]
[COMMON]
1111
INPUT
[NORMAL]
5
INPUT
3
INPUT
50
INPUT
0
INPUT
[CARBID]
(Tool type)
(Tool post, for twopath lathes only)
(Tool direction)
(Roughing/finishing)
(T code)
(Radius of tool)
(Number of edges)
(Tool length)
(Virtual tool tip)
(Tool material)
507
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
NOTE
When a registeredtool directory is on the screen, pressing
the [MENU RETURN] soft key redisplays the tool data
menu.
508
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3.3
Program example)
EXAMPLE OF
CREATING A
PROGRAM FOR
NOTCHING AND
CYLINDRICAL
MACHINING
AROUND THE
CAXIS
(1) Material code :
FC25 Material type: Round bar (105 123,

including end face cutting allowance of 3 mm)
(2) Process1
Turning the end face and outside cylindrical

surface of the material
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
(3)
3 : End face cutting allowance

5 : Cylindrical machining allowance
100
100
Process 2
Notching the material end face around the Caxis

with an end mill tool
(40, 0)
10mm
30
30
(80, 0)
(80, 0)
X
30
30
(40, 0)
509
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
(4)
Cylindrical workpiece
Process 3
B62444E1/04
Machining the cylindrical surface of the material

around the Caxis with an end mill tool
Expanded view of cylindrical portions
Groove on the cylindrical surface
3.3.1
Creating a Machining
Program
(1) Operations for program creation

To display a menu for program creation, press the [ 1 ] soft key
(machining program creation) on the main menu.
(2) Entering the program number and name
Enter program number 20 and name PRGC.
20
PRGC
INPUT
(Program number)
(Program name)
510
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
3.3.2
Entering the Initial Data
[FC25]
[BAR]
105
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
123
2000 INPUT
[ON]
0.5
INPUT
0.2
INPUT
3
INPUT
(Workpiece material)
(Workpiece figure)
(Maximum outside dimension)
(Minimum inside diameter)
(Length)
(Maximum spindle speed)
(Coolant)
(Finishing allowance Zcoordinate)
(End surface chamfering allowance)
NOTE
1 It is unnecessary to specify the initial data for product
length for onepath lathes. This hold true for twopath
lathes if no secondary machining (rightsode tool post) is to
be performed.
2 Once the initial data has been specified, it is set
automatically in subsequent programming operations. In
subsequent programming, therefore, check that the
automaticallyset initial data is appropriate, then press the
key several times until a new process is created.
511
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
3.3.3
1
BAR
B62444E1/04
Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of initial data entry creates
a new process and assigns various menus to the soft keys as shown below:
Specifying Process 1
(End Face and
Cylindrical Surface
Machining)
<
PROGRAMS
2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THRED
6
7
8
9
10
TAP
To select pattern repeating, press the [2 PT.RPT] soft key, and specify the
machining area and tool post. To select a finishing tool, specify the
desired surface roughness. These operations automatically determine the
tool and cutting conditions. In addition, specify the cutting allowance
necessary for pattern repeating.
[2PT. RPT]
[1 OUTER]
[HEADL]
(Machining type)
(Machining area)
(Tool post)
5
3
INPUT
INPUT
(Cutting allowance Xcoorlinate)

(Cutting allowance Zcoordinate)
[5
(Surface roughness)
(Cursor key)
(2) Entering contour data

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

[ ]
(Figure pattern)
Position the cursor at Direction Cutting (D=),
[REVERS]
(Direction of cutting)
[INSERT]
[ ]
100 INPUT
100 INPUT
[ INSERT ]
(Figure pattern)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
512
then
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3.3.4
(Notching the End Face
Around the Caxis)
1
BAR
<
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
shown below:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TAP
Press the rightmost soft key [ + ] to display the soft keys for page 2 of machining
type menus shown below.
<
11
SINGL
12
AUX
13
14
15
CCNTR CDRIL CTAP
16
17
18
19
20

Press the [17 CNOTC] soft key to select notching around the Caxis,
then specify the machining area, tool post, start point Zcoordinate, and
end point Zcoordinate.
Specifying these values automatically selects an end mill tool whose
length is greater than the machining depth (= end point Zcoordinate
start point Zcoordinate) and determines the cutting conditions.
Also enter data for the cutting allowance Xcoordinate and the finishing
allowance X/Zcoordinate necessary for notching around the Caxis.
NOTE
The finishing allowance X/Zcoordinate for nothing
around the Caxis must bespecified separately from the
finishing allowance entered as the initial cutting data
[17 CNOTC]
[ FACING ]
[ HEADL ]
0
INPUT
INPUT
10
30
INPUT
(Machining type)
(Machining area)
(Tool post)
(Cutting allowance)
After placing the cursor on the finishing allowance Xcoordinate,specify:

. 2
. 1
INPUT
INPUT (Finishing allowance Zcoordinate)
(Cursor key)
(Cursor key)
513
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(2) Entering contour data (notching around the Caxis)

displays an entry window for contour approach data. Enter the
80 INPUT
INPUT
0
[
]
30 INPUT
[INSERT]
(Machining
(Machining
(Direction
(Radius of
start point Xcoordinate)

start point Ccoordinate)
of approach)
approach)
[ ]
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[ ]
INPUT
0
INPUT
40
INPUT
INPUT
30
[INSERT]
(Slanted line end point Ccoordinate)
(Angle)
[ + ]
[ ]
(Figure pattern)
After placing the cursor on the angle (K/J), specify:
INPUT
(Angle)
30
[INSERT]
[
80
[ +
[
0
40
30
]
INPUT
INPUT
]
]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
(Figure pattern)
(End point Xcoordinate)
(Figure pattern)
(Angle)
[ + ]
[
]
(Figure pattern)
placing the cursor on the angle (K/J=), specify:
After
INPUT
(Angle)
30
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[ START ]
[ + ]
[ESCAPE]
INPUT
30
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Figure pattern)
(Clearnce radius)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
514
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
(3) Displaying the figure of a product

Pressing the [PLOT] soft key displays the figure of the product in
the multiwindow.
[PLOT]
[RETURN]

NO. = 0020 NAME = PRGC
PROC(02)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(F)
FACING HEADL
FEED/MIN
START
APPROACH
STATPZ
0.000
TOOLNO REV/MIN TCODE

752
3000
1010
PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE

***
*** PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE***
X
***
JESCAPE
Softkey selection
ENDPTZ
10.000
R=30.000
Figure pattern
RETURN
<
515
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
3.3.5
(Cylindrical Surface
Machining Around the
Caxis)
1
BAR
<
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
shown below:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TAP
Press the rightmost soft key [ + ] to display the soft keys for page 2 of
machining type menus shown below.
<
11
SINGL
12
AUX
13
14
15
CCNTR CDRIL CTAP
16
17
18
19
20
Press the [18 CCYL.] soft key to select cylindrical surface machining
around the Caxis, then specify the tool post, groove start point
Xcoordinate, groove depth, and groove diameter.
Specifying these values automatically selects an end mill tool whose
length is greater than the groove depth and whose diameter is less than the
groove diameter, and determines the cutting conditions.
[18 CCYL]
[HEADL]
100 INPUT
INPUT
10
INPUT
10
(Machining type)
(Machining area)
(Groove start point Xcoordinate)
(Groove depth)
(Groove diameter)
(Cursor key)
(Cursor key)
(2) Entering contour data (cylindrical surface machining around the

Caxis)
the contour data according to the design drawings.
20
INPUT
50
INPUT
[INSERT]
(Machining start point Ccoordinate

(Machining start point Zcoordinate
(Figure pattern)
]
INPUT
INPUT
180 INPUT
60 INPUT
50 INPUT
[INSERT]
(Center angle)
(Ccoordinate for the center of an arc)
(Zcoordinate for the center of an arc)
516
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
NOTE
When entering contour data for notching and cylindrical
machining around the Caxis, it is impossible to specify an
arc with a center angle of 180C or greater (semicircle to
full circle).
]
INPUT
INPUT
180 INPUT
INPUT
60
INPUT
50
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TRANS]
INPUT
110
INPUT
120
INPUT
50
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Center angle)
(Ccoordinate of the cented of an arc)
(Zcoordinate of the cented of an arc)
(Figure pattern)
(Clearance Xcoordinate)
(Start point Ccoordinate for another figure)
(Start point Zcoordinate for another figure)
[ + ]
[ ]
(Figure pattern)
After placing the cursor on the angle (K/J=), SPECIFY:
INPUT
(Angle)
30
[INSERT]
[
]
INPUT
INPUT
200
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[
]
INPUT
120
INPUT
50
INPUT
INPUT
30
[INSERT]
(Figure pattern)
(Figure pattern)
(Slanted line end point Zcoordinate)
(Angle)
[ + ]
[FIGURE END]
(3) Displaying the figure of a product

Pressing the [PLOT] soft key displays the figure of the product in
the multiwindow.
[PLOT]
[RETURN]
517
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04

NO.= 0020
NAME =
START
SHIFT
PRGC
C=20.000 Z=50.000
C=99.999 Z=50.000 R=43.906
X
*** PLOTTING
PART FIGURE
***
PLOTTING
OF PART FIGURE
*** OF
*** PLOTTING
OF PART
*** ***
FIGURE
B=
C=
Z=
I=
K/J=
Softkey selection
120.000
50.000
30.000
Figure patterm
RETURN
<
3.3.6
Input for the End
Process
<
21
M
Pressing the [FIGURE END] key as the last step of the previous section
creates a new process, displaying a menu of machining types as soft keys.
Press the [+] soft key several times until the following soft keys appear:
22 PROGRAM WINDOW PROCES

END
END
OFF
EDIT
MCHNC TOOL
DATA
DETAIL PLOT
DATA
To select the end process, press the [22 END] soft key. The G code for
performing a return operation and the M code for termination are set
automatically.
Data including G and M codes can be modified manually to suit the
application.
[22
END]
(Machining type)
To return to the main menu, press the [
518
] soft key.
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
3.3.7
A program can be checked by running it for animated simulation using

the procedure shown below:
Animated Simulation
On the main menu, press:

[ 3 ]
(Machining simulation)
A list of machining programs registered for simulation is displayed.
Place the cursor on the program you want to run for animated simulation, specify:
[ANIMA. + RT. CH] (Animated simulation with tool trajectory)
After making sure that the animated simulation appears on the screen,
press:
[EXEC]
(Starts animated simulation.)
To stsrt animated simulation at the very beginning , press:

[HEAD]
[EXEC]
The screen switches among the SIDE drawing (other than machining
around the Caxis), the FRONT drawing (machining around the Caxis
other than cylindrical surface machining), the OPEN drawing (cylindrical
surface machining around the Caxis) automatically according to the type
of machining during animated simulation.
After animated simulation is completed, any of the drawings can be
selected by soft keys.
SIDE
FRONT
OPEN
<
OPRT
These soft keys can be displayed by pressing the following keys in the
order shown:
<
SPEED SPEED
UP
DOWN
POLT
PROG
ON/OFF
HEAD
ZOOM
EXEC SINGLE

STEP
<
WORK PROCES
PIECE
519
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
B62444E1/04
G.PRM A.PRM GRAPH
OPRT
<
[GRAPH]
NOTE
1 For twopath lathes. these soft key are effective only for
display for the tool post selscted using the tool post
setection switch on the operalors panel of the machine.
2 When redisplaying the original soft keys, press [OPRT].
(1) Soft key [SIDE]
00020 P0000
X
S
0.83
X
Z
C
0.000
0.000
120.000
ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G00
X
0.000Z
Z
0.000
C
0.000
19M43S
MEM **** *** ***
500%
<
SIDE
14:39:08
(DPRT) +
FRONT OPEN
(2) Soft key [FRONT]

00020 P0000
S
0.83
X
Z
C
0.000
0.000
120.000
ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
19M43S
500%
MEM **** *** ***
<
SIDE
520
FRONT OPEN
14:39:36
(DPRT) +
B62444E1/04
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS
PROGRAMS
(3) Soft key [OPEN]

00020 P0000
X
Z
C
0.83
0.000
0.000
120.000
ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
19M43S
C
500%
MEM **** *** ***
<
3.3.8
Returning to the Main
Menu
SIDE
14:40:05
FRONT OPEN
(DPRT) +

] (super return) on the animated
simulation screen redisplays the directory of registered programs.
Pressing the soft key again resumes the main menu.
521
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A. PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
WARNING
Be sure to use the parameters set by the machine tool builder.
If you change the setting of a parameter, the machining
program may not work correctly.
If the machining program does not work correctly, the tool may
bump against the workpiece, and the machine may be forced
to perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to
525
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.1
DRILLING
PARAMETERS (1)
NOTE
In addition to the parameters listed below, parameter Nos.
9850 to 9862 are provided for drilling.
9050
STFECF
STFECF Cutting feed override at the start of cutting in turning/Caxis drilling.

Valid data range: 0 to 255
Units:
1%
9051
ENFECF
ENFECF Cutting feed override at the end of cutting in turning/Caxis throughhole

drilling
Units: 1%
9052
EMLFR2
EMLFR2 Cutting feed amount to be set automatically upon retraction in turning

residual drilling with an end mill (cutting feed 2 on the detail data screen)
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999 Units: 0.0001mm/rev.
0.000001inch/rev.
9053
CEMFR2
CEMFR2 Cutting feed amount to be set automatically upon retraction in Caxis

residual drilling with an end mill (cutting feed 2 on the detail data screen)
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999 Units: 1mm/min.
0.01inch/min.
9054
RIMKLN
RIMKLN Cuttinglip length to be set automatically at the start of cutting in

turning/Caxis reaming (chamfer length on the program screen)
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999 Units: 0.001mm
0.0001inch
9055
SLCSCF
SLCSCF Surface speed override in turning/Caxis throwaway drilling. The

surface speed for drilling is automatically overridden by the value set for
this parameter.
Units: 1%
9056
CBRORM
CBRORM M code for spindle orientation in Caxis boring

526
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9057
SLFRCF
SLFRCF Cutting feed override in turning/Caxis throwaway drilling. The cutting

feed amount for drilling is automatically overridden by the value set for
this parameter.
Units: 1%
A.2
PARAMETERS FOR
CONVERSATIONAL
PERIPHERAL
FUNCTIONS
9061
RGBN01
9075
RGBN15
RGBN01 15 Screen display color code

Storing display colors on the color scheme setting screen causes the
display colors to be automatically set in these parameters. The user,
therefore, need not set these parameters. (This parameter is valid for only
Super CAP II T.)
9090
PMCIOS
PMCIOS PMC parameter output start address in batched data input/output

9091
PMCIOE
PMCIOE PMC parameter output end address in batched data input/output

527
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.3
ENTERING
WORKPIECE
MATERIAL
NOTE
Parameters 9172 and subsequent parameters are used
only when the number of types of workpiece material is
expanded to 24 (when bit 0 (TOOL99) of parameter 9771 is
set to 1).
9100
WKNM11
9107
WKNM18
WKNM11 WKNM18
: Character code of workpiece material 1
9108
WKNM21
9115
WKNM28
WKNM21 WKNM28
9116
WKNM31
9123
WKNM38
WKNM31 WKNM38
9124
WKNM41
9131
WKNM48
WKNM41 WKNM48
9132
WKNM51
9139
WKNM58
WKNM51 WKNM58
9140
WKNM61
9147
WKNM68
WKNM61 WKNM68
528
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9148
WKNM71
9155
WKNM78
WKNM71 WKNM78
9156
WKNM81
9163
WKNM88
WKNM81 WKNM88
9164
WKNM91
9171
WKNM98
WKNM91 WKNM98
9172
WKN101
9179
WKN108
WKN101 WKN108
9180
WKN111
9187
WKN118
WKN111 WKN118
9188
WKN121
9195
WKN128
WKN121 WKN128
9196
WKN131
9203
WKN138
WKN131 WKN138
9204
WKN141
9211
WKN148
WKN141 WKN148

529
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9212
WKN151
9219
WKN158
WKN151 WKN158
9220
WKN161
9227
WKN168
WKN161 WKN168
9228
WKN171
9235
WKN178
WKN171 WKN178
9236
WKN181
9243
WKN188
WKN181 WKN188
9244
WKN191
9251
WKN198
WKN191 WKN198
9252
WKN201
9259
WKN208
WKN201 WKN208
9260
WKN211
9267
WKN218
WKN211 WKN218
9268
WKN221
9275
WKN228
WKN221 WKN228

530
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9276
WKN231
9283
WKN238
WKN231 WKN238
9284
WKN241
9291
WKN248
WKN241 WKN248
531
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.4
PARAMETERS FOR
THE
MFUNCTIONLIST
SCREEN
9300
MCNO1
MCNO1
: M code that is displayed at the top left of the screen and

is output to the target device
9301
MCN001
9316
MCN016
MCN001 MCN016
: Character code of the above M code
9317
MCNO2
MCNO2
: M code that is displayed at the left of the second line

and is output to the target device
9318
MCN021
9333
MCN036
MCN021 MCN036
9334
MCNO3
MCNO3
: M code that is displayed at the left of the third line and

9335
MCN041
9350
MCN056
MCN041 MCN056
9351
MCNO4
MCNO4
: M code that is displayed at the left of the fourth line and

9352
MCN061
9367
MCN076
MCN061 MCN076

532
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9368
MCNO5
MCNO5
: M code that is displayed at the left of the fifth line is

output to the target device
9369
MCN081
9384
MCN096
MCN081 MCN096
9385
MCNO6
MCNO6
: M code that is displayed at the left of the sixth line and

9386
MCN101
9401
MCN116
MCN101 MCN116
9402
MCNO7
MCNO7
: M code that is displayed at the left of the seventh line

9403
MCN121
9418
MCN136
MCN121 MCN136
9419
MCNO8
MCNO8
: M code that is displayed at the left of the eighth line and

9420
MCN141
9435
MCN156
MCN141 MCN156
9436
MCNO9
MCNO9
: M code that is displayed at the left of the ninth line and

533
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9437
MCN161
9452
MCN176
MCN161 MCN176
9453
MCNO10
MCNO10
: M code that is displayed at the left of the tenth line and

9454
MCN181
9469
MCN196
MCN181 MCN196
9470
MCNO11
MCNO11
: M code that is displayed at the top right of the screen

9471
MCN201
9486
MCN216
MCN201 MCN216
9487
MCNO12
MCNO12
: M code that is displayed at the right of the second line

9488
MCN221
9503
MCN236
MCN221 MCN236
9504
MCNO13
MCNO13
: M code that is displayed at the right of the third line and

534
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9505
MCN241
9520
MCN256
MCN241 MCN256
9521
MCNO14
MCNO14
: M code that is displayed at the right of the fourth line

9522
MCN261
9537
MCN276
MCN261 MCN276
9538
MCNO15
MCNO15
: M code that is displayed at the right of the fifth line and

9539
MCN281
9554
MCN296
MCN281 MCN296
9555
MCNO16
MCNO16
: M code that is displayed at the right of the sixth line and

9556
MCN301
9571
MCN316
MCN301 MCN316
9572
MCNO17
MCNO17
: M code that is displayed at the right of the seventh line

9573
MCN321
9588
MCN336
MCN321 MCN336

535
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
9589
MCNO18
B62444E1/04
MCNO18
: M code that is displayed at the right of the eighth line

9590
MCN341
9605
MCN356
MCN341 MCN356
9606
MCNO19
MCNO19
: M code that is displayed at the right of the ninth line

9607
MCN361
9622
MCN376
MCN361 MCN376
9623
MCNO20
MCNO20
: M code that is displayed at the right of the tenth line

9624
MCN381
9639
MCN396
MCN381 MCN396
536
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.5
REGISTERING THE
TOOL MATERIAL
9640
TLNM01
9645
TNM06
TLNM01 TNM06
: Character code of the material for the special tool

When all the parameters are set to 0, SPCIAL is
displayed.
A.6
USER PARAMETERS
9646
Bit parameters
9655
9656
Word parameters
9685
NOTE
For details of parameter Nos. 9646 to 9685, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
537
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
A.7
ENTERING
SUBPROGRAM
NAMES ON THE
SUBPROGRAM
CALLING SCREEN
B62444E1/04
Four subprograms which can be called on the conversational screen can

be registered using up to 12 characters for each.
9700
SBPR01
9711
SBPR12
SBPR01 SBPR12
: Character code of subprogram 1
9712
SBPR21
9723
SBPR32
SBPR21 SBPR32
9724
SBPR41
9735
SBPR52
SBPR41 SBPR52
9736
SBPR61
9747
SBPR72
SBPR61 SBPR72
538
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.8
TOOL POST NAME
PARAMETERS
For twopath lathes, each tool post can be named by using the following
parameters:
9748
HNAML1
9753
HNAML6
HNAML1 to HNAML6
: Character code of tool post 1
9754
HNAMR1
9759
HNAMR6
HNAMR1 to HNAMR6
: Character code of tool post 2
539
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.9
PARAMETERS
NECESSARY FOR
USING THE
CONVERSATIONAL
AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION
(BITTYPE)
Bit No.
9765
SLW
CBR
BSH
DRS
RND
RKB
OPR
OPB
NOTE
Parameters for the conversational programming function
for Caxis or Yaxis machining must be set to 0 if the
corresponding option is not provided.
#7
OPB
#6
OPR
#5
RKB
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
#4
RND
#3
DRS
#2
BSH
#1
CBR
#0
SLW
The throwaway drilling function is enabled.

The throwaway drilling function is disabled.
The Caxis boring function is enabled.
The Caxis boring function is disabled.
1: Shift is made in the negative () direction in Caxis boring.
Shift is made in the positive (+) direction in Caxis boring.
The shoulder of the drill is regarded as being the end point in
turning/Caxis drilling.
0 : The tip of the drill is regarded as being the end point in turning/Caxis
drilling.
1 : Pressing [PREEX] or [TOOLING] does not result in the following
NC data being rewritten:
(a). Workpiece shift amount
(b). Toolchange position (coordinates of the second reference
position)
(c). Chuck barrier data (second stored stroke limit data)
(d). Chuck/tailstock barrier data (when the corresponding option is
provided)
(e). Radius of the tool tip of the tool used and the virtual tool tip data
0 : Pressing [PREEX] or [TOOLING] results in the above NC data
being rewritten.
: Not used
1 : Override teaching in memory protect mode is enabled during override
playback.
0 : Override teaching in memory protect mode is disabled during
override playback.
1 : The override playback function is enabled.
0 : The override playback function is disabled.
540
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
Bit No.
9766
SC2
#7
#6
#5
#4
SAP
#3
US2
#2
OSV
#1
TYP
#0
SC2
Single action II is enabled.

Single action II is disabled.
TYP
No TYPE data item is indicated in the process data for single action II.
A type data item is indicated in the process data for single action II.
OSV
Offset data can be saved and restored during machining simulation.
Offset data is neither saved nor restored during machining simulation.
US2
If auxiliary and transfer processes are converted to an NC program,
the resulting program will be as shown below.
G#10700 A#10701 B#10703 C#10705 I#10707 J#10709 K#10711
D#10713 E#10715 F#10717 H#10719M#10721 Q#10723
R#10725 S#10727 T#10729 U#10731V#10733 W#10735
X#10737 Y#10739 Z#10741 ;
(G#10700 means that following address G, a value in #10700 is
output.)
0 : The function described above is disabled.
Note 1 The auxiliary and transfer processes are created by each machine tool
builder independently. For parameters related to these processes, refer to
the applicable manual supplied by the respective machine tool builders.
SAP
1 : In a singleoperation process, the tool does not move to a transit point.
0 : In a singleoperation process, the tool moves to a transit point before
staring the process.
Note 1 This parameter is invalid for single operation II.
9767
SFC
SGT
PAP
NCR
MTA
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
#7
WDM
#6
NT0
#5
SFG
#4
MTA
#3
NCR
#2
PAP
#1
SGT
#0
SFC
1 : For arcs created in bar material machining by pattern repeating, arc

radius compensation is applied using both tooltip radius and
finishing allowance.
0 : The compensation stated above uses only the tooltip radius; the
finishing allowance is used as a shift amount for compensation.
1 : Compensation based on the cutting edge angle is enabled.
0 : Compensation based on the cutting edge angle is disabled.
1 : In machining by pattern repeating, the X and Zaxes move to the
beginning of the shape, one at a time.
0 : In machining by pattern repeating, the X and Zaxes move to the
beginning of the shape simultaneously.
1 : G41 or G42 is not used in the finishing phase of bar material
machining by pattern repeating.
0 : G41 and G42 are used in the finishing phase of bar material machining
by pattern repeating.
1 : Multiple threading is carried out by specifying an angle (address Q).
0 : Multiple threading is carried out by shifting the beginning of the start
point of each thread.
541
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
SFG
B62444E1/04
1 : Bar material machining for contours containing very small steps is

enabled.
0 : Bar material machining for contours containing very small steps is
disabled.
1 : An offset cancel command in a conversational program is issued
using T**00 (where ** is the tool selection number).
0 : An offset cancel command in a conversational program is issued
using T0.
1 : The Xcoordinate of a cutin start point in machining the inner
surface is calculated from the blank inner surface machining process
or a drilling process.
0 : The Xcoordinate of a cutin start point in machining the inner
surface is calculated from the minimum Xcoordinate of the contour
in machining the inner surface.
NT0
WDM
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
9768
#1
NBC
#0
SBC
SBC
1 : Characters in the title bar of the contour data input window are
displayed in black.
0 : Characters in the title bar of the contour data input window are
displayed in white.
Note 1 This parameter is valid on the Super CAP II T.
NBC
1 : Characters in the title bar of the guidance window are displayed in

black.
0 : Characters in the title bar of the guidance window are displayed in
white.
Note 1 This parameter is valid on the Super CAP II T.
Bit No.
9770
#7
NM7
#6
#5
#4
#3
NM3
#2
NM2
#1
NM1
#0
NM0
NM0NM7 Distribution for the NC statement program area and conversation

program area
NOTE
According to parameters 9970, the number of proccsses
that can be registered in the conversational program is
changed as follows:
542
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
D When T80/T99(V2) is 0
Length of tape used for storage
160m
320m
640m
1280m
Number of processes
115
270
575
999
Length of tape used for NC program

storage
10m
20m
40m
80m
Number of processes
105
250
535
999

storage
20m
40m
80m
160m
Number of processes
95
230
495
999

storage
30m
60m
120m
240m
Number of processes
85
210
450
940

storage
40m
80m
160m
320m
Number of processes
67
125
285
610

storage
60m
160m
320m
640m
Number of processes
130
NM0NM7=0
NM0=1
(Other bits are 0)
NM1=1
(Other bits are 0)
NM2=1
(Other bits are 0)
NM3=1
(Other bits are 0)
NM7=1 (V2)
(Other bits are 0)

storage
Bit No.
9771
T99
DM2
CLD
CS2
96M
#7
1SP
#6
2SP
#5
96S
#4
96M
#3
CS2
1100m
#2
CLD
#1
DM2
#0
T99
1 : Reaming and boring are enabled, with 99 tools and 24 workpiece

materials registered.
0 : Reaming and boring, with 99 tools and 24 workpiece materials
registered, are disabled.
Not used.
1 : Automatic demonstration function II erases a stored procedure for
automatic demonstration operation. The program is erased at the next
poweron. After the program is erased, the parameter is automatically
set to 0.
0 : Automatic demonstration function IIdoes not erase the procedure for
automatic demonstration operation. <Related parameters: Bit 4
(DMO) of No. 9776, bit 2 (CLD) of No.9771>
1 : Subprogram calling process II is enabled.
0 : Subprogram calling process II is disabled.
1 : Spindle positioning control (96 angular subdivisions) of tool post 1
(main spindle) is enabled.
(main spindle) is disabled.
543
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
96S
2SP
B62444E1/04

(sub spindle) is enabled.
(subspindle) is disabled.
1 : The conversational function for a lathe with a subspindle is enabled.
0 : The conversational function for a lathe with a subspindle is disabled.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid only for the FS16/18TTA.
1SP
1 : The conversational function for a twoturret onespindle lathe is

enabled.
0 : The conversational function for a twoturret onespindle lathe is
disabled.
NOTE
2 Once bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 9771 has been changed,
the following operations are necessary.
NOTE
3 When the setting of bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 9771 has
been changed, one of the following may have to be
performed:
(1) When changing T99 from 0 to 1
The tool data file and cutting condition data are left as is.
So, no additional setting is required.
(2) When changing T99 from 1 to 0
(a) P/S alarm 101 is issued. Set PWE to 1, then turn off the
NC. Then, hold down the DELETE key and turn on the
NC again (for twopath lathes, hold down DELETE and
1, or DELETE and 2). All machining programs will be
cleared.
(b) The tool data and cutting condition files will all be erased.
So, before setting T99, save the contents of these files
via the reader/punch interface.
Note that up to 40 tools can be registered. Before saving
the files, modify the file contents; delete any
unnecessary tools so that the number of registered tools
does not exceed 40.
NOTE
4 When data has been set in parameter No. 9766, 9770, or
9771, the power must be turned off then on again before
continuing operation.
544
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
Bit No.
9772
#7
INO
#6
DIO
#5
RFN
#4
YMD
#3
RLF
#2
EDM
#1
M50
#0
CM5
CM5
1: If Caxis or Yaxis machining is specified for both the previous and

current processes, M05 is output at the beginning of the current
process.
0: If Caxis or Yaxis machining is specified for both the previous and
current processes, M05 is not output.
M50
1: M05 is output when the spindle rotation is changed and when the
spindle gear speed is changed.
0: M05 is not output when the spindle rotation changed and when the
spindle gear speed is changed.
EDM
1: When an end process is created, M30 is automatically specified.
0: When an end process is created, M02 is automatically specified.
RLF
1: Between the toolchange position and the common safety point, the
tool simultaneously moves along two axes (interpolation is not
executed).
0: Between the toolchange position and the common safety point, the
tool moves along one axis at a time.
YMD
1: The M code to enable or disable the Yaxis machining mode (M code
for calling a subprogram) is automatically output.
0: The M code to enable or disable the Yaxis machining mode is not
output.
<Related parameter: YCANPN bit of parameter 9840>
RFN
1: Semifinish machining is not performed.
0: Semifinish machining is performed
NOTE
According to the positions of the start point of a cut and the
end point of an entered figure, semifinish machining may be
carried out, regardless of the value specified in the
parameter.
Example)
End point of a figure
D Start point of a cut: Machin

ing is performed according to
the parameter.
D Start point of a cut: Semifin
ish machining is performed
unconditionally.
D Start point of a figure
DIO
1 : The batch data input/output function is enabled.

0 : The batch data input/output function is disabled.
545
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
INO
9773
SG3
GRO
OPO
RPT
B62444E1/04
1 : When NC program conversion is carried out, the data of

workpiece shift amount, toolchange position, chuck barrier,
tailstock barrier is output in the G10 block.
0 : When NC program conversion is carried out, the data of
workpiece shift amount, toolchange position, chuck barrier,
tailstock barrier is not output in the G10 block.
#7
TRT
#6
MDL
#5
GTL
#4
TCD
#3
RPT
#2
OPO
#1
GRO
the
and
the
and
#0
SG3
1 : In subprogram calling process II, a return to the tool change point

(G30) is not executed.
0 : In subprogram calling process II, a return to the tool change point
(G30) is executed.
1 : Data required for graphic drawing is not output when an NC statement
is output.
0 : Data required for graphic drawing is output when an NC statement is
output.
1 : When an NC statement is output, a slash (/) is output at the beginning
of the G10 block for graphics.
0 : When an NC statement is output, a slash (/) is not output at the
beginning of the G10 block for graphics.
1 : In pattern repeating, cutting feed is carried out when the direction is
changed from normal to reverse.
0 : In pattern repeating, cutting feed is not carried out when the direction
is changed from normal to reverse.
: Approach
Cutting direction
Cutting direction
TCD
1 : Tcode call is executed instead if Tcode output.

0 : Tcode call is not executed.
NOTE
When a conversational machining program is executed, a
subprogram is called from a storage area on the tape or
system ROM. The T code is not output.
<Related parameter: Bit 7 (CLT) of No. 9778>
GTL
1 : The tailstock is not displayed in the initial stage for graphic drawing.
0 : The tailstock is displayed in the initial stage for graphic drawing.
546
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
MDL
1 : In the NC statement output, a continuousstate G code (G code of the

01 group) and F code are not output if they are the same as those in the
previous block.
0 : In the NC statement output, a continuousstate G code (G code of the
01 group) and F code are output even if they are the same as those in
the previous block.
NOTE
When the NC statement output function is not provided, set
the corresponding parameters to 0.
TRT
1 : When the tool is first moved to the toolchange position after

machining is started, it travels first along the Zaxis then along the
Xaxis.
0 : When the tool is first moved to the toolchange position after
machining is started, it travels first along the Xaxis then along the
Zaxis.
NOTE
After a machining process is completed, the tool always
moves to the toolchange position by traveling first along
the Xaxis then along the Zaxis.
9774
TLC
MLS
#7
AUT
#6
GPW
#5
T0O
#4
M1O
#3
28O
#2
MLT
#1
MLS
#0
TLC
1 : The tool tip radius and virtual tool tip direction held in the
conversational program are different from those in the NC program.
The tool data in the conversational program is copied into the NC
when the program is selected for execution.
0 : The conversational program has the same tool tip radius and virtual
tool tip direction as the NC program.
1 : When the cutter revolving around the milling axis is stopped, a
specified M code is output.
0 : When the direction in which the cutter revolves around the milling
axis is changed, the M code to stop the cutter is not output.
NOTE
When the milling mode is changed to the turning mode, the
M code to stop the cutter from revolving around the milling
axis is output.
MLT
1 : When the cutter revolves in the normal or reverse direction around the
milling axis, specified M codes (parameters Nos. 9877 and 9878) are
output.
0 : When the cutter revolves in the normal or reverse direction around the
milling axis, M03 or M04 is output.
547
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
28O
1 : The program is terminated without executing T0 and G28 at the end of

the program.
0 : The program is terminated after executing T0 and G28 at the end of
the program.
1 : M01 is output after positioning at the tool changing position at the end
of each process.
0 : M01 is not output after positioning at the tool changing position at the
end of each process.
1 : T0; is output immediately before a return to the toolchange position
(G30).
0 : T0; is not output immediately before a return to the toolchange
position (G30).
1 : The drawing screen is displayed when the first graphic screen is
selected after turning on the power.
0 : The graphic parameter screen is displayed when the first graphic
screen is selected after turning on the power.
1 : Of tools satisfying the desired conditions, the tool having the smallest
tool management number is automatically selected.
0 : Of tools satisfying the desired conditions, the tool that minimizes the
cutting time is automatically selected.
M1O
T0O
GPW
AUT
9775
IGM
PRD
IGT
THT
B62444E1/04
#7
LOD
#6
RVX
#5
#4
CRS
#3
THT
#2
IGT
#1
PRD
#0
IGM
1 : In tooling, the tooling data is unconditionally created with T codes

specified in the program. The T codes specified in the tool file are
automatically rewritten.
0 : In tooling, the tooling data is not created if the T codes specified in the
tool file do not agree with those in the program. In this case, the
machining program cannot be executed.
1 : On the presetting screen, a workpiece shift along the Zaxis is
specified by bringing the tool in touch with the end face of the
workpiece.
0 : On the presetting screen, a workpiece shift along the Zaxis is
specified by entering the difference between the desired value and the
current value.
1 : A tool is not automatically determined.
0 : A tool is automatically determined.
1 : The cut count is displayed at the top of the process data for threading.
0 : The depth of the first cut is displayed at the top of the process data for
threading.
NOTE
The cut count and depth of cut can be switched by pressing
the corresponding soft key.
CRS
1 : Cross editing is valid.

0 : Cross editing is invalid.
548
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
RVX
1 : When an NC statement is output, the righthand coordinate system

(+X for the upper) is changed to the left hand coordinate system (X
for the upper).
0 : When an NC statement is output , the righthand coordinate system
(+X for the upper) is not changed to the left hand coordinate system
(X for the upper).
1 : The cutting power is checked.
LOD
NOTE
If bit 0 (T88/T99) of parameter No. 9771 is set to 0, the
system checks only whether the cutting condition data is 0.
If the parameter is set to 1, the system checks the cutting
power with parameters Nos. 9885 to 9887.
0 : The cutting power is not checked.
#7
9776
TRD
STM
#6
BIS
#5
SP6
#4
DMO
#3
CGR
#2
MTS
#1
STM
#0
TRD
1 : In automatic scheduling, threading is incorporated into the finishing

cycle.
0 : In automatic scheduling, threading is always scheduled as the last
process.
1 : When the spindle is switched to the Cf axis, the NC program O9994 is
called and no M codes are output.
0 : When the spindle is switched to the Cf axis, the M code (STMMCD)
is output.
Example)
When STMCAL is 0
M1 ;
G00 ;
M5 ;
M45 ;
G28 H0 ;
When STMCAL is 1
M1 ;
G00 ;
M5 ;
M98 P9994 ;
G28 H0 ;
MTS
1 : When the Cf axis is switched to the spindle, the NC program O9995 is

called and no M codes are output.
0 : When the Cf axis is switched to the spindle, the M code (MTSMCD)
is output.
NOTE
Set this parameter to 0 if the conversational Caxis
programming function is not provided.
549
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
CGR
B62444E1/04
1 : The upper side of the screen corresponds to the +Z direction in

animated simulation in cylindrical machining.
0 : The upper side of the screen corresponds to the Z direction in
animated simulation in cylindrical machining.
CGRPDR=0
Program reference position =
workpiece end
CGRPDR=0
chuck end
+C
Material surface
+C
+Z
+Z
CGRPDR=1
workpiece end
+Z
CGRPDR=0
chuck end
+Z
+C
+C
NOTE
The above diagram shows the workpiece coordinate
system
DMO
1 : The automatic demonstration function is enabled.

0 : The automatic demonstration function is disabled.
NOTE
For the automatic demonstration function, see the
corresponding manual.
SP6
1 : A subprogram calling process can call six subprograms.

0 : A subprogram calling process can call four subprograms.
1 : When a machining program is created, the initial data is not
automatically determined.
0 : When a machining program is created, the initial data is automatically
determined.
BIS
9777
SB1
#7
ACC
#6
NCF
#5
SB6
#4
SB5
#3
SB4
#2
SB3
#1
SB2
#0
SB1
1 : Subprogram 1 called by the subprogram calling process is held in the

ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : Subprogram 1 called by the subprogram calling process is held in a
storage area on the tape.
550
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
SB2

1 : When NC program conversion is carried out, the delivery and
auxiliary processes are converted to a subprogram calling sequence to
be called.
0 : When NC program conversion is carried out, the delivery and
auxiliary processes are converted to the NC commands to be
executed.
1 : The function to cancel idle cutting for a molding material is enabled.
0 : The function to cancel idle cutting for a molding material is disabled.
SB3
SB4
SB5
SB6
NCF
ACC
9778
TRS
#7
CLT
#6
NAX
#5
NPS
#4
SMS
#3
SSM
#2
DIE
#1
AUX
#0
TRS
1 : The macro program for executing the delivery process is held in a

NOTE
The number of the macro program is O9018.
AUX
0 : The macro program for executing the delivery process is held in the
1 : The macro program for executing the auxiliary process is held in a
NOTE
0 : The macro program for executing the auxiliary process is held in the
551
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
DIE
B62444E1/04
1 : The conversational mode is selected by pressing the soft key.

0 : The conversational mode is selected by an input signal (G062.4).
1 : The subprogram for switching the mode from turning to milling is
held in the ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : The subprogram for switching the mode from turning to milling is
held in a storage area on the tape.
SSM
NOTE
SMS
1 : The subprogram for switching the mode from milling to turning is

held in the ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : The subprogram for switching the mode from milling to turning is
held in a storage area on the tape.
NOTE
NPS
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
The delivery process menu is not displayed.

The delivery process menu is displayed.
The auxiliary process menu is not displayed.
The auxiliary process menu is displayed.
The program to be called by a T code is held in the ROM module by
the macro compiler.
0 : The program to be called by a T code is held in a storage area on the
tape.
<Related parameter: Bit 4 (TCD) of parameter No. 9773>
NAX
CLT
NOTE
When CLT is set to 1, the numbers of the above subprogram
and macro variable are O9000 and #149, respectively.
When CLT is set to 0, the numbers of the above subprogram
and macro variable are O9003 and #20300, respectively.
When NC program conversion is carried out, the T code is
directly output.
9779
CRF
#7
MRO
#6
G32
#5
MNU
#4
TLF
#3
TLP
#2
CEM
#1
CRC
#0
CRF
1 : When the command for rotating the Caxis end facing tool specifies
normal rotation, the M code for reverse rotation is output. When the
command specifies reverse rotation, the M code for normal rotation is
output.
In Caxis tapping, the M code specified in parameter No. 9861
(CRVMCD) is output immediately before the tapping command.
0 : The above function is disabled.
552
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
CRC
CEM
1 : When the command for rotating the Caxis side facing tool specifies
normal rotation, the M code for reverse rotation is output. When the
command specifies reverse rotation, the M code for normal rotation is
output.
In Caxis tapping, the M code specified in parameter No. 9861
(CRVMCD) is output immediately before the tapping command.
0 : The above function is disabled.
1 : A subprogram stored by the macro compiler is called from the ROM
module according to the M code output at the end of the end process.
NOTE
When M02 is output, O9020 is called; when M30 is output,
O9021 is called. In the NC program conversion, the M code
is directly output.
TLP
0 : The above M code is directly output.

1 : The setup guidance screen created by the machine tool builder is
displayed.
0 : The FANUC standard setup guidance screen is displayed.
NOTE
For a lathe with a subspindle or a onespindle twoturret
lathe, the FANUC standard setup guidance screen is not
displayed.
TLF
MNU
G32
1 : The tool life management data screen created by the machine tool
builder is displayed.
0 : The tool life management data screen created by the machine tool
builder is not displayed.
1 : The main menu screen created by the machine tool builder is
displayed.
0 : The main menu screen created by the machine tool builder is not
displayed.
1 : When G32 is output, tapping is performed on the lathe.
0 : When G84 is output, tapping is performed on the lathe.
Example)
MRO
G32=0
G32=1
X0. M8 ;
Z6. ;
G99 G84 Z30. R0. F0.5 P225 ;
G80 ;
X0. M8 ;
Z6. ;
G32 Z30. F0.5 M5 ;
Z6. M4 ;
G99 ;
1 : The command to rewrite the offset of cutting in Caxis notching is

output by a subprogram when NC program conversion is carried out.
0 : The command to rewrite the offset of cutting in Caxis notching is
output by the offset rewrite command of the G10 block.
553
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.10
PARAMETERS
NECESSARY FOR
USING THE
CONVERSATIONAL
AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION
(COMMON DATA)
9780
OTSFPX
OTSFPX: Distance along the Xaxis from the maximum outer surface to the
common safety point (passing point 2, V2) in outer surface machining
(diameter)
Pass point 2 is automatically set based on this data.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9781
OTSFPZ
OTSFPZ: Distance along the Zaxis from an end face to the common safety point
(passing point 2) in outer surface machining
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
Common safety point (passing

point 2)
SFPNTX
Cutting start point
SFPNTZ
9782
Not used
9783
INCLRZ
INCLRZ: Distance along the Zaxis from an end face to the common safety point
(passing point 2) in inner surface machining
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
554
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
INCLRZ
Cutting start point
9784
Common safety point (passing

point 2, V2)
SFCLRX
SFCLRX: Clearance to the cutting or machining start point along the Xaxis
(diameter). The cutting or machining start point is automatically
determined based on this data.
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9785
SFCLRZ
SFCLRZ: Clearance to the cutting or machining start point along the Zaxis. The
cutting or machining start point is automatically determined based on this
data.
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
NOTE
The cutting or machining start point is calculated as follows:
1. Bar machining
(1) [Outer surface]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
(2) [Outer surface + automatic residual machining]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece (or +
[Parameter No. 9784])]
Z = [End face of the workpiece (or + [Parameter No. 9785])]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour]
(3) [Inner surface]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])]
= [X coordinate of minimum point on the contour]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter NO. 9785]
555
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
(4) [Inner surface + automatic residual machining]:

diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of minimum point on the contour (or
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour (or + [Parameter
No. 9785])]
(5) [End face]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of start point on the contour] + [Parameter
No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] (Subspindle)
(6) [End face + automatic residual machining]:
= [X coordinate of start point on the contour (or + [Parameter
No. 9784])]
face (or [Parameter No. 9785])] (Subspindle)
(7) [Outer surface (reverse direction)]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece]
Z = [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour] [Parameter
No. 9785]
(8) [Outer surface + automatic residual machining (reverse direction)]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece (or +
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour (or [Parameter
No. 9785])]
(9) [Inner surface (reverse direction)]:
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour] [Parameter
No. 9785]
556
B62444E1/04
APPENDIX
A. PARAMETERS
(10) [Inner surface + automatic residual machining (reverse direction)]:

No. 9784]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour (or [Parameter
No. 9785])]
(11) [End face (reverse direction)]:
No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] = [Length of the workpiece]
+ [Cutting allowance on the end face] (Subspindle)
(12) [End face + automatic residual machining (reverse direction)]:
No. 9784]
face (or [Parameter No. 9785])] (Subspindle)
2. Pattern repeating
(1) [Outer surface near the edges]:
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
(2) [Outer surface away from the edges]:
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour] (Subspindle)
(3) [Inner surface near the edges]:
No. 9784]
557
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
(4) [Inner surface away from the edges]:

No. 9784]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour] (Subspindle)
(5) [End face near the edges]:
= [Start point X on the contour] + [Parameter No. 9784]
(6) [End face away from the edges]:
= [X coordinate of start point on the contour]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785] =
[Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
3. Residual machining
(1) [Outer surface, end face, and inner bottom surface]:
No. 9784]
4. End facing:
Z = [End face of the workpiece] = [Length of the workpiece]
+ [Cutting allowance on the end face] (Subspindle)
558
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
5. Threading
(1) [Outer surface]:
No. 9784]
6. Grooving and necking
(1) [Outer surface and end face]:
No. 9784]
7. Drilling:
X = 0
8. Caxis drilling:
= [Length of the workpiece]+[Cutting allowance on the end
9786
ZEROPT
ZEROPT 0 : The program reference position is on the end surface of the workpiece.
1 : The program reference position is on the end surface of the chuck.
559
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
9787
B62444E1/04
HLSFPX
HLSFPX X coordinate (diameter) of the common safety point (passing point 2, V2)
in drilling (turning)
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9788
HLSFPZ
HLSFPZ Z coordinate of the common safety point (passing point 2, V2) in drilling
(turning)
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9789
CUTOV1
CUTOV1 Ratio of the depth of an actual cut to the depth of cut programmed for each
process (For the FS16/18TTA, data of tool post 1).
If the parameter is set to 0, the system assumes that the ratio is 100%.
Increment: %
9790
CUTOV2
CUTOV2 Ratio of the depth of an actual cut to the depth of cut programmed for each
process on tool post 2 (for the FS16/18TTA only).
If the parameter is set to 0, the system assumes that the ratio is 100%.
Increment: %
9791
CAXLS1
CAXLS1 Caxis machining menu selected for tool post 1

0 : The Caxis machining menu and Yaxis machining menu are not
displayed.
1: Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving (only regular grooves on side
surfaces) are enabled.
2: Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving are enabled.
3: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Caxis notching are enabled.
4: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Caxis cylindrical machining
are enabled.
5: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, and Caxis
cylindrical machining are enabled.
6: Yaxis machining is enabled.
7: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving (only regular grooves on side
surfaces), and Yaxis machining are enabled.
8: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Yaxis machining are enabled.
9: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, and Yaxis
machining are enabled.
10: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis cylindrical machining, and
Yaxis machining are enabled.
11: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, Caxis
cylindrical machining, and Yaxis machining are enabled.
560
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
NOTE
The machining that can be executed depends on the
specifications of the machine.
9792
CAXIS2
CAXIS2 Caxis machining menu selected for tool post 2

0: The Caxis machining menu and Yaxis machining menu are not
displayed.
1: Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving (only regular grooves on side
surfaces) are enabled.
2: Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving are enabled.
3: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Caxis notching are enabled.
4: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Caxis cylindrical machining
are enabled.
5: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, and Caxis
cylindrical machining are enabled.
6: Yaxis machining is enabled.
7: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving (only regular grooves on side
surfaces), and Yaxis machining are enabled.
8: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Yaxis machining are enabled.
9: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, and Yaxis
machining are enabled.
10: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis cylindrical machining, and
Yaxis machining are enabled.
11: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, Caxis
cylindrical machining, and Yaxis machining are enabled.
NOTE
The machining that can be executed depends on the
specifications of the machine.
9793
TLPOSX
TLPOSX X coordinate of the toolchange position to be automatically specified on

the presetting screen.
If the parameter is set to 0, the data is not automatically specified.
9794
TLPOSZ
TLPOSZ Z coordinate of the toolchange position to be automatically specified on

the presetting screen.
If the parameter is set to 0, the data is not automatically specified.
NOTE
For the 2 PathLathe, specify parameters Nos. 9793 and
9794 for each tool post.
561
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.11
PARAMETERS FOR
BAR MACHINING,
PATTERN
REPEATING, END
FACING, AND
RESIDUAL
MACHINING
9795
CUTCHG
CUTCHG Rate of change in the depth of cut in bar machining, pattern repeating, and
residual machining. If the parameter is set to 0, the depth of cut remains
unchanged.
Increment: %
Example)
When the depth of cut is 5 mm, CUTCHG is 70%, and CUTMIN is 1.5
mm, the depths of cuts are as follows:
First cut:
5 mm
Second cut:
3.5 mm
Third cut:
2.45 mm
Fourth cut:
1.715 mm
Fifth cut:
1.5 mm
Sixth cut:
1.5 mm
Seventh cut:
.
Eighth cut:
.
9796
CUTMIN
CUTMIN Limit of depth of cut (radius) in bar machining, pattern repeating, and
residual machining
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9797
RELFX
RELFX X component (diameter) of a clearance from the cutting surface in infeed

machining
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9798
RELFZ
RELFZ Z component of a clearance from the cutting surface in infeed machining

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
562
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
RELFZ
RELFX
9799
CLRSDX
CLRSDX Clearance along the Xaxis from the line connecting the start point and
the end point of residual machining (end face)
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9800
CLRSDZ
CLRSDZ Clearance along the Zaxis from the line connecting the start point and the
end point of residual machining (outer surface, inner surface)
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
CLRSDZ
X
CLRSDX
9801
TLBACK
TLBACK Angle at which the back of the tool is raised above the workpiece in
intermediate cutting of a bar
Increment:
563
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
""""""""
""""""""
""""""""
""""""""
""""""""
9802
TLBACK
PCOVR1
PCOVR1 Override of the feed amount when the cutting angle of a tool is greater than
90 degrees but less than or equal to 135 degrees.
In case of setting 0, it is regarded as 100%.
Increment: 10%
9803
PCOVR2
135 degrees but less than 180 degrees.
Increment: 10%
9804
PCOVR3
180 degrees but less than or equal to 225 degrees.
Increment: 10%
9805
PCOVR4
225 degrees but less than 270 degrees.
Increment: 10 %
NOTE
The override is invalid when the cutting angle of a tool is 90
degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees.
564
B62444E1/04
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
(1) Generalpurpose tool for

outer surface machining (right hand)

inner surface machining (left hand)
90
135
90
135
180
180

225
270

inner surface machining (right hand)

inner surface machining (left hand)
270
225
225
270
270
225
180
180
135

90
90

end facing (negative direction)

end facing (positive direction)
225

270
270

225
90

135
180
565
135
180
135

90
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
9806
B62444E1/04
FSTOVR
FSTOVR Surface speed override for the first cut in roughing for bar machining,
pattern repeating, or end facing (mill scale machining)
Increment: 10%
The override is applied

only to the speed of the
first cut.
9807
ENDECX
ENDECX Xcoordinate for reducing the amount of feed during end facing
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9808
ENDCRT
ENDCRT Override of the feed amount around the center during end facing
Increment: %
F1 = (Feed amount on
the process screen)
F1
F2 = F1 ENDCRT/100
ENDECX
F2
X
566
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.12
PARAMETERS FOR
NECKING
9815
NEANG
NEANG Angle from each coordinate axis in necking

Increment: Degrees
NEANG
567
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.13
PARAMETERS FOR
GROOVING
9820
CLGRVX
CLGRVX Clearance (diameter) along the X axis in outer or inner surface grooving
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9821
CLGRVZ
CLGRVZ Clearance along the Z axis in end surface grooving

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
CLGRVZ
OVLGRV
OVLGRV
CLGRVX
X
Z
GRVBCK
9822
GRVCHG
GRVCHG Rate of reduction in the depth of cut in grooving

When this parameter is set to 0, the depth of the cut remains unchanged.
Increment: Percent
Example)
When the depth of cut is 5 mm, CUTCHG is 70%, and CUTMIN is 1.5
mm, the depths of cuts are as follows:
First cut:
5 mm
Second cut:
3.5 mm
Third cut:
2.45 mm
Fourth cut:
1.715 mm
Fifth cut:
1.5 mm
Sixth cut:
1.5 mm
Seventh cut:
.
Eighth cut:
.
568
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9823
GRVMIN
GRVMIN Clamp value (radius) for the depth of cut in grooving

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9824
GRVBCK
GRVBCK Pecking clearance for grooving (radius)

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9825
OVLGRV
OVLGRV Overlaps between each cutting in grooving (proportion to the tool width)
Increment: Percent
9826
DWLGRV
DWLGRV Dwell time at the bottom of the groove in grooving (spindle speed)
Increment: Revolutions per 10
569
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.14
PARAMETERS FOR
THREADING
9830
CLSCRX
CLSCRX Clearance (diameter) along the X axis for threading

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9831
CLSCRZ
CLSCRZ Acceleration distance along the Z axis for threading

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
D First threading
CLSCRZ
Height of the
thread plus CLSCRX
D Last threading
CLSCRX
Height of the
thread
NOTE
The length of a part where a threading cycle is performed
along the X axis remains unchanged.
9832
SCWCF
SCWCF Coefficient for the height of a thread

Increment: 1/10000
The system automatically sets the height of the thread for process data
from the following formula:
Height of a thread = thread pitch SCWCF/10000
Standard set values:
6495 for thread angle 60
6403 for thread angle 55
570
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9833
TRDMIN
TRDMIN Minimum depth (radius) of cut for threading

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9834
TRDFNX
TRDFNX Finish allowance along the X axis for threading (diameter)

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9835
TRDAGL
TRDAGL Threading tool angle to be set automatically

0: The thread angle of 60 is automatically set when a new threading
process is created
Value other than 0: The value is automatically specified as a thread
angle.
Increment: Degrees (angle)
9836
CMFONM
CMFONM M code for enabling chamfering in threading

9837
CMFOFM
CMFOFM M code for disabling chamfering in threading

Setting range : 0 to 999
9838
MTUNCF
MTUNCF Coefficient of thread height (metric thread, unified thread)

Increment: 1/10000
9839
PTPFCF
PTPFCF Coefficient of thread height (PT thread, PF thread)

Increment: 1/10000
571
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.15
PARAMETERS FOR
YAXIS MACHINING
9840
YCANPN
YCANPN Number of the compile parameter in which the M code to disable the
Yaxis machining mode is cataloged
NOTE
Catalog the M code to enable the Yaxis machining mode
in the compile parameter subsequent to this one.
Setting range:
9023 to 9031
572
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.16
PARAMETERS FOR
DRILLING
9850
DRLDEC
DRLDEC: Reduced depth of cut in peck or highspeed peck drilling (radius) to be set
automatically
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9851
DRLRET
DRLRET: Return clearance for peck or highspeed peck drilling (radius) to be set
automatically
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9852
DRLMIN
DRLMIN: Minimum depth of cut for peck or highspeed peck drilling (radius) to be
set automatically
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9853
DRILCF
DRILCF: Coefficient for the depth of cut in peck or highspeed peck drilling
Increment: Percent
Drilling depth of cut = nominal diameter for the drill DRILCF
Example)
NOTE
The drilling depth of cut must not exceed 99999999.
9854
DRLDWL
DRLDWL: Dwell time at the bottom of the hole in drilling (speed)

Increment: Revolutions per 10
9855
GRDLCL
GRDLCL: Clearance from each starting point in Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving
(radius)
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
573
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
NOTE
Set this parameter to 0 when there is no optional Caxis
graphic conversation function.

Drilling or grooving start point
Drilling or grooving start point
GRDLCL
9856
TAPCCL
TAPCCL: Clearance at each starting point in Caxis tapping (radius)

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
NOTE
This parameter must be set to 0 when there is no optional
Caxis graphic conversation function.
9857
TAPCLR
TAPCLR: Clearance at the bottom of the hole when the system automatically
determines a preprocess in tapping
Increment: Percent
Nominal diameter of the tap TAPCLR
574
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9858
BRSHFT
BRSHFT Amount of shift for returning in boring (radius)

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
BRSHIFT
F
F= F 0.1 REMROV
9859
BRCLER
BRCLER: Clearance for returning in boring (radius)

Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
BRSHFT
F = F 0.1 RMBROV
Tool width (TW)
Hole diameter (DD)
9860
RMBROV
RMBROV: Amount of feed for returning in reaming or boring (speed)

F = F 0.1 RMBROV
Increment: 10 percent
575
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
NOTE
In boring, the tool normally returns in rapid traverse. When
the hole has a small diameter (TW + BRSHFT < DD), the tool
returns with the speed indicated by this parameter.
In reaming, the tool always returns with the speed indicated
by this parameter.
9861
CRVMCD
CRVMCD: M code for reversing the rotation of the tool around the milling axis in
Caxis tapping
<Related parameters: Bit 0 (CRF) and bit 1 (CRC) of No. 9779>
9862
96OFFM
96OFFM: M code for canceling spindle positioning control (96 angular

subdivisions) by the machine
576
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.17
PARAMETERS FOR
NOTCHING
9865
OVLNTC
OVLNTC: Overlaps between each cutting in side face notching

Increment: Percent
TW
OL
OL = TW OVLNTC/100
9866
APRCFD
APRCFD: Feedrate for approaching and retraching during notching

NOTE
When 0 is specified, the tool moves at the maximum cutting
speed (parameter 1422 or 5462).
577
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
A.18
PARAMETERS FOR
OTHER
CONVERSATIONAL
FUNCTIONS
9870
GERMC1
GERMC1: Mcode output when a lowspeed gear is selected (Main spindle)

9871
GERMC2
GERMC2: Mcode output when intermediatespeed gear 1 is selected (Main

spindle)
9872
GERMC3
GERMC3: Mcode output when intermediatespeed gear 2 is selected (Main

spindle)
9873
GERMC4
GERMC4: Mcode output when a highspeed gear is selected (Main spindle)

9874
TLSKON
TLSKON: Mcode to prepare a tail stock

9875
TLSKOF
TLSKOF: Mcode to store a tail stock

9876
MLSTPM
MLSTPM: M code for stopping the tool rotating around the milling axis
<Related parameter: Bit 1 (MLS) of No. 9774>
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, M5 is output.
MLNMLM: Mcode to rotate the milling axis normally

578
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9877
MLNMLM
NOTE
When a value out of the setting range is set, the Mcode is
not output. This parameter must be set to 0 when there is
no optional Caxis graphic conversation function.
9878
MLRVSM
MLRVSM: Mcode to rotate the milling axis in reverse

NOTE
When a value outside the setting range is set, the Mcode
is not output.
9879
MILMAX
MILMAX: Maximum rotating speed of the milling axis

Increment: Perminute
NOTE
If the speed automatically determined as a milling condition
exceeds the parameterset value, the speed is clamped to
the parameterset value.
9880
STMMCD
STMMCD: Mcode to change the turning mode to the milling mode

<Related parameter: Bit 1 (STM) of No. 9776>
9881
MTSMCD
MTSMCD: Mcode to change the milling mode to the turning mode

<Related parameter: Bit 2 (MTS) of No. 9776>
9882
DECEMF
DECEMF: Number of digits in the fraction part of the feed amount (F)
Setting range: 1 to 4 for mm input
1 to 6 for inch input
579
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
9883
B62444E1/04
SQNOIC
SQNOIC: Specification for the sequence number to be output for each block during
NC statement translation
0 : No sequence number is output.
1 to 8999:
A specified value is added to the sequence number
for the first block of each process.
8999 to 1:
The absolute value of a specified value is added to
thesequence number for all blocks.
9000 to 9999:
A specified value minus 9000 is added to the
sequence number, and the calculated number is
output to the first block of each process except the
end process. N9000 is output to the first block of
the end process.
9000 to 9999:
The absolute value of a specified value plus 9000 is
added to the sequence number, and the calculated
number is output to all blocks. N9000 is output to
the first block of the end process.
NOTE
If nonzero data is specified, process names (comment
statement) are output at the beginning of individual
processes of the translated NC program.
9884
GRPMGN
GRPMGN: Scale factor of the blank length and blank diameter in the graphic
parameters for the length and the maximum outside diameter specified on
the initial setting screen
Increment: 10 percent
Blank length and blank diameter in the graphic parameters = maximum
outside diameter and length specified on the initial setting screen *
(GRPMGN)/10
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, automatic setting is not
performed.
9885
MEFICY
MEFICY: Machine efficiency used when calculating the cutting power for cutting
condition check.
Increment: One percent
580
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the cutting power is not
calculated. If bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 9771 is set to 0,
the system does not check the cutting power using
parameters Nos. 9885 to 9887.
9886
SMTPWR
SMTPWR: Output of the spindle motor used when calculating the cutting power for
cutting condition check
Increment: 0.1 kW
NOTE
calculated.
9887
MMTPWR
MMTPWR: Output of the milling axis motor used when calculating the cutting power
for cutting condition check
Increment: 0.1 kW
NOTE
calculated.
9888
TLFLNO
TLFLNO: Number of the file containing tool data in the FANUC Cassette
9889
MFNCTM
MFNCTM: Average time required to execute the miscellaneous function

Increment: 10 ms
NOTE
This parameter is used to calculate the machining time in
9890
SFNCTM
SFNCTM: Average time required to execute the spindlespeed function

Increment: 10 ms
581
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
NOTE
9891
TFNCTM
TFNCTM: Average time required to execute the tool function

Increment: 10 ms
NOTE
9892
NCPRGN
NCPRGN: Program number to be searched for automatically when the

conversational mode is switched to the NC mode
NOTE
This parameter prevents a machining program from being
accidentally executed when machining is started after the
conversational mode is switched to the NC mode.
If this parameter is set to 0, the system does not search for
programs.
9893
GERM1S
GERM1S: M code to be output when the low gear is selected (subspindle)

9894
GERM2S
GERM2S: M code to be output when medium gear 1 is selected (subspindle)

9895
GERM3S
GERM3S: M code to be output when medium gear 2 is selected (subspindle)

582
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
9896
GERM4S
GERM4S: M code to be output when the high gear is selected (subspindle)

9897
ANGNTL
ANGNTL: Angle of turret (tool post 1)

NOTE
This parameter is used for the tool/chuck interference check
function.
9898
DTCTRN
DTCTRN: Distance along the Xaxis between the center of the turret and the tip of
the turning tool
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inch
NOTE
function.
9899
DTCMIL
DTCMIL: Distance along the Xaxis between the center of the turret and the tip of
the milling cutter
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inch
NOTE
function.
583
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
A.19
B62444E1/04
The following parameters in the NC must be set when a conversational

function is used.
SETTING
PARAMETERS IN
THE NC
1022
Setting axes in the reference coordinate system
To determine the following planes for circular interpolation and tool tip
radius compensation, set each control axis to any one of axes, X, Y, Z in
the reference coordinate system, or an axis parallel to one of the reference
axes. Only one of the reference axes can be specified. Two or more axes
parallel to any of the reference axes can be specified.
G17:
G18:
G19:
XpYp plane
ZpXp plane
YpZp plane
Setting
Description
Axis which is neither a reference axis nor a parallel axis
X reference axis
Y reference axis
Z reference axis
Axis parallel to the Xaxis
Axis parallel to the Yaxis
Axis parallel to the Zaxis
D Set the parameter corresponding to the first axis (Xaxis) to 1, and the
parameter corresponding to the second axis (Zaxis) to 3. Set the
parameter corresponding to the third axis (Caxis) to 6 if the Caxis
graphic conversion function is provided.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1300
OUT
3401
#0
OUT
1 : The outer end of the second stored stroke limit is treated as the
prohibited area.
0 : The inner end of the second stored stroke limit is treated as the
prohibited area.
D Always set this bit to 0.
#7
GSC
#6
GSB
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
GSB and GSC: Any one of the G code systems is specified.

D Always set both bits to 0 (G code system A).
584
#0
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
#7
#6
#5
3405
CCR
#7
#6
LD1
1:
0:
D
1:
LGN
0:
D
1:
0:
LGT
D
1:
LGC
0:
D
GRN
SP2
GUL
DPA
#3
#2
#1
#0
To specify a corner radius during chamfering,

1 : Addresses I and K are used. In direct programming of a drawing
dimension, ,C or ,R are used.
0 : Addresses C and R are used. Address C cannot be used as the name of
a Caxis.
D Always set this bit to 0.
5002
6500
#4
CCR
#7
ANM
#5
LGC
#4
LGT
#3
#2
#1
LGN
#0
LD1
The offset No. of tool offset is specified by one digit after the T code.
The offset No. of tool offset is specified by two digits after the T code.
Always set this bit to 0.
The upper two digits in the T code indicate a tool geometry
compensation No.
The lower two digits in the T code indicate a tool geometry
compensation No.
Set this bit corresponding to the PMC.
The tool geometry is compensated according to tool movement.
The tool geometry is compensated according to the shift of the
coordinate system.
Tool geometry compensation is canceled by specifying 0 for the offset
No.
Tool geometry compensation is not canceled by specifying 0 for the
offset No.
#6
NZM
#5
#4
CSF
#3
DPA
#2
GUL
#1
SP2
#0
GRN
On the twospindle graphic display of the FS16/18TTA,

1 : Tool post 1 is shown on the right and tool post 2 is shown on the left.
0 : Tool post 1 is shown on the left and tool post 2 is shown on the right.
The graphic display of the FS16/18TTA shows:
1 : One spindle.
0 : Two spindles.
On the onespindle graphic display of the FS16/18TTA, the X1 and X2
axes are displayed:
1 : After they are exchanged.
0 : As they are.
The current position shown on the graphic screen is:
1 : The programmed position.
0 : The actual position obtained after the tooltip radius compensation is
applied.
D Always set this bit to 0
585
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
CSF
During NC program conversion, NC program display and product figure

drawing are:
1 : Enabled.
0 : Disabled.
Screen magnification according to the specified coordinates of the center
of the screen and magnification is:
1 : Enabled. (The conventional screen magnification is disabled.)
0 : Disabled.
On the graphic screen, the continuousstate G code and remaining
traveling distance are:
1 : Indicated.
0 : Not indicated.
NZM
ANM
#7
#6
6501
CSR
#5
CSR
#7
GRY
6509
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
The cursor that appears on the magnified screen is:

1 : A cross ().
0 : A square (j).
#6
#5
6502
HSA
B62444E1/04
#4
#3
#2
#1
GRY
#0
HSA
Highspeed machining simulation drawing is:

1 : Enabled.
0 : Disabled.
D Usually, set this bit to 1.
Animated simulation for Yaxis machining is:
1 : Enabled.
0 : Disabled.
D When the Yaxis machining function is supported, set this bit to 1.
Drawing coordinate system: GRPAXS (for onespindle twoturret lathe)
GRPAXS Drawing coordinate system for the graphic function for a onespindle
twoturret lathe (Applicable to both tool posts)
<Related parameter: Bit 1 (SP2) of No. 6500>
11: The programmed zero point is on the end face of the chuck. The X1
axis is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
12: The programmed zero point is on the end face of the chuck. The X1
axis is displayed in the lower part of the screen.
14: The programmed zero point is on the end face of the workpiece. The
X1 axis is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
15: The programmed zero point is on the end face of the workpiece. The
X1 axis is displayed in the lower part of the screen.
586
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
X1
X2
GRPAXS=11
GRPAXS=12
Z
X2
X1
X2
X1
GRPAXS=15
GRPAXS=14
Z
X1
X2
6510
GRPAX:
Drawing coordinate system: GRPAX
Drawing coordinate system in the graphic function (Set the value each tool
post)
D Only the following values are valid for tool post 1 of the 1path lathe
and tool post 1 of the 2 turrets lathe with facing two spindles.
1 : The program reference position is on the chuck end surface and only
the upper half of the material is displayed.
11: The program reference position is on the chuck end surface and the
upper and lower sides of the material are displayed.
4 : The program reference position is on the workpiece end surface and
only the upper half of the material is displayed.
14: The program reference position is on the workpiece end surface and
the upper and lower sides of the material are displayed.
GRPAX=11
GRPAX=1
Z
Z
X
GRPAX=14
GRPAX=4
Z
Z
587
A. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
D Only the following values are valid for tool post 2 of the 2 turrets lathe
with facing two spindles.
21: The program reference position is on the chuck end surface and only
the upper half of the material is displayed.
31: The program reference position is on the chuck end surface and the
upper and lower sides of the material are displayed.
only the upper half of the material is displayed.
the upper and lower sides of the material are displayed.
+X
+X
GRPAX=31
GRPAX=21
+Z
+Z
+X
+X
GRPAX=34
GRPAX=24
+Z
+Z
588
B. ALARMS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
ALARMS
If one or more of the set parameters are incorrect or the machining

program which was created in the conversational mode is incorrect when
an attempt is made to execute that program, the following P/S alarms are
raised.
When an alarm other than the following P/S alarms is raised, refer to the
relevant NC operators manual.
Alarm
3000
3001
Description
Cause
Some initial setting data is missing. (For example, the maximum

outside diameter or length is not entered.)
Action
On the initial setting screen, check whether all required data is entered. If some data is missing, enter correct data.
Reference
Section 6.3 in Part II SELECTING THE CONVERSATIONAL

MODE
Cause
The value of process data such as the machining area, tool number, or spindle gear is incorrect.
Example) A negative value is entered for an item that must be
positive.
Action
Reference
3002
3004
On the process data screen corresponding to this alarm, check

the entered process data values. If there is an incorrect value, enter a correct value.
Section 6.4 in Part II CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM
Part III TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS
Cause
Some figure data is missing.
Action
On the figure data screen for the process corresponding to this

alarm, check the entered data. If some data is missing, enter correct data.
Reference

MODE
Cause
On the initial setting screen, the value for the maximum spindle
speed is missing or set to 0.
Action
On the initial setting screen, enter a correct value for the maximum
spindle speed.
Reference

MODE
589
B. ALARMS
APPENDIX
Alarm
3005
Description
Cause
On the process data screen, the value for the feedrate is missing
or set to 0.
Action
On the process data screen corresponding to this alarm, enter a

correct value for the feedrate.
Reference
3006
On the process data screen, the value for the depth of cut is missing or set to 0.
Action

correct value for the depth of cut.
3012
On the process data screen, the value for the feedrate is missing
or set to 0.
Action

correct value for the tool speed.
3015

Cause
The graphic conversation function does not operate normally.

This alarm is raised when the NC internal memory is damaged and
the graphic conversation function cannot operate normally.
Action
Contact FANUC.
Cause
The tool data is missing.

This alarm is raised when the data for the tool specified in the process data is not registered in the tool file.
Action
Check the tool management number for the process corresponding to this alarm. If the tool management number is incorrect, set
a correct value or register tool data with a correct tool management number in the tool file.
Reference
3014

Cause
Reference
3011

Cause
Reference
3007
B62444E1/04
Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA
Cause
The program is not selected.

This alarm is raised when a cycle is started without any program
being selected.
Action
Select a program and start the cycle.
Reference
Section 12.1 in Part II DIRECT OPERATION FOR MACHINING

PROGRAMS CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY
Cause
The finishing allowance or radius of the tool tip specified for bar
machining, pattern repeating, or grooving is too great. Normal
rough machining cannot be executed.
Action
Reduce the finishing allowance. Alternatively, use a tool with a

smaller radius at the tool tip.
Reference
Sections 1.1, 1.2, and 1.6 in Part III BAR MACHINING, PATTERN
REPEATING AND GROOVING
590
B. ALARMS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
Alarm
3020
Description
Cause
Cutting in bar machining is impossible because of the relationship

between the tool angle, cutting edge angle, and clearance angle
(parameter 9801) for the tool used.
This alarm is raised when the sum of the above three angles is less
than or equal to 90 or is greater than or equal to 180.
Action
Check the tool angle and cutting edge angle or parameter 9801.
If the angles are incorrect, set correct values for the angles. If the
parameter is incorrect, set a correct value in the parameter.
If the sum of the three angles is less than or equal to 90 or is greater than or equal to 180 even after the change, change the tool.
Reference
3021
Cause
The part to be left in automatic residual machining cannot be determined.

This alarm is raised when the intersection of the end point of the
part to be left and the figure cannot be calculated (the part to be
left is determined by the tool angle, cutting edge angle, and clearance angle (parameter 9801)) for the tool used.
Action

alarm, check the machining figure. If the figure is incorrect, enter
correct figure data. If the figure is correct, the tool cannot be used
for that figure. So, change the tool for the process data or change
the clearance angle (parameter 9801).
Reference
3022
The figure data is incorrect in intermediate bar machining. If there

is a figure whose Xcoordinate is greater than that of the starting
point in bar machining, the Zcoordinate of the start point must be
on the end surface of a workpiece after end cutting. Conversely,
if the Zcoordinate of the start point is not on the end surface of a
workpiece after end cutting, there must be no figure whose X
coordinate is greater than the Xcoordinate of the start point. This
alarm is raised when an attempt is made to execute a figure violating the above conditions.
Action

alarm, check the figure data. If there is incorrect data, enter correct
data.
Section 1.1 in Part III BAR MACHINING
Cause
The figure data for automatic residual machining in bar machining

is incorrect.
This alarm is raised when the change of the X and Zcoordinates
for the figure for automatic residual machining is not monotonous.
Action
On the figure data screen for the bar machining process corresponding to this alarm, check the figure.
Reference
3025

Cause
Reference
3024
Cause
A correct tool trace cannot be calculated in bar machining.

This alarm is raised when there is an error in the result of internal
calculation (for example, when the value under a square root sign
is negative because of an error in calculation).
Action
Contact FANUC.
591
B. ALARMS
APPENDIX
Alarm
3026
Description
Cause
The groove width or tool used is incorrect in grooving.

This alarm is raised when the width of the tool used is smaller than
the groove width.
Action
On the process data screen for the grooving process corresponding to this alarm, check the groove width. If the width is incorrect,
enter a correct value. Otherwise, select a tool whose cutting edge
width is smaller than the groove width.
Reference
3027
The cutting edge width of the tool used in grooving is 0.
Action
Enter a correct value for the cutting edge width for the grooving
tool in the tool data file.
Cutting in trapezoidal grooving is impossible because of the relationship of the groove bottom width and the tool width.
This alarm is raised when the cutting edge width of the tool used
is smaller than the groove bottom width in trapezoidal grooving.
Action
Check the figure, on the figure data screen for the grooving process corresponding to this alarm. If the figure is incorrect, enter
correct data. Otherwise, select a tool whose cutting edge width is
smaller than the groove bottom width.
Section 1.6 in Part III PATTERN REPEATING
Cause
The start point for threading coincides with the end point.
Action
On the figure data screen for the threading process corresponding

to this alarm, enter correct data for the figure.
Reference
3030

Cause
Reference
3029

Cause
Reference
3028
B62444E1/04
Section 1.5 in Part III THREADING
Cause
The cutting edge angle or tool angle for the tool used in necking
is incorrect.
There are some restrictions on the cutting edge angle and tool
angle in necking because of the nature of necking. These limits
are determined by the angle at the necking part set in the parameter.
Normally, the system automatically determines a tool which satisfies the above limits. However, when a tool is manually selected,
that tool may not satisfy the limits. In this case, this alarm is raised.
Action
Check the cutting edge angle and tool angle for the tool used in
necking. If the tool is not suitable for necking, charge the tool. Select the number of a tool appropriate for necking on the process
data screen for necking again.
Reference
Section 1.7 in Part III NECKING

592
B. ALARMS
APPENDIX
B62444E1/04
Alarm
3031
Description
Cause
The chamfering tool is incorrect in Caxis grooving or Caxis cylindrical machining.

This alarm is raised when the smaller diameter of the chamfering
tool is larger than the groove width.
Action
Select a chamfering tool whose minor diameter is smaller than the

groove width.
Reference
3032
Cause
Section 2.3 in Part III GROOVING FOR END FACES

Section 2.4 in Part III CAXIS GROOVING FOR SIDE FACES
Section 2.7 in Part III CAXIS CYLINDRICAL MACHINING
The relation between the Zcoordinates of the start point and the
end point is set incorrectly in Caxis notching.
This alarm is raised in the following cases:
1) The start point is closer to the chuck than the end point in the
Zaxis in Caxis notching for end faces.
2) The start point is closer to the end face than the end point in
the Zaxis in Caxis notching for side faces.
Action
Reference
3033
The tool radius is set to 0 in Caxis notching.
Action
In the tool data file, check the radius of the tool being used. If it is
wrong, enter correct data.
Section 2.5 in Part III CAXIS NOTCHING FOR END FACES
Section 2.6 in Part III CAXIS NOTCHING FOR SIDE FACES
Cause
The tool cannot enter the section where notching is to be performed.

This alarm is raised when the width of the tool is larger than that
of the section to be notched in the Zaxis.
Action
Select a side cutter whose width is smaller than that of the section
to be notched. The width of the section to be notched is the difference between the Zcoordinates of the start point and the end
point in Caxis notching for side faces.
Reference
3040
Section 2.5 in Part III CAXIS NOTCHING FOR END FACES

Cause
Reference
3034
Check the Zcoordinates of the start point and the end point in C
axis notching. If the relation of the values is incorrect, enter correct
data.

Cause
Data of an incorrect format was input from an external memory

unit. This alarm is issued, for example, when the format of the data
output by the batch data input/output function is converted to an
invalid format by a remote unit.
Action
Check the input data.
Reference
Section 14 in Part II BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
593
Index
B62444E1/04
Changing screen display colors (Super CAP II T), 237

Changing the figure, 101
Adding a figure, 103
Changing the process data, 98
Adding a new process, 97
Checking a machining program, 8
Alarms, 589
Checking input figures, 74
Alarms during conversion of the machining program into the

NC program, 124
Checking machining programs, 73
Alternation of G30 command in macro program, 90
Checking machining programs using the simulation, 77
Animated simulation, 484, 519
Chuck barrier, 146
Animated simulation function for machining with the

subspindle, 463
Chuck data extension function (optional), 224
Another setup operation for machining, 486
Chuck/tail stock figure data, 223
Automatic output of the M code for controlling the subspindle

(and the M codes for calling subprograms), 465
Chuck/tailstock barrier, 155
Chuck figure data, 223
Clearing setting data, 226
Automatic pretool determination function, 364
Coefficients, 211
Automatic pretool selection function, 384, 390, 433, 442
Compensation by tool cutting edge, 287, 296
Automatic residual machining function, 274
Conversion of machining programs, 457
Automatic reverse machining, 296

Automatic scheduling, 111
Converting a machine program in the righthand coordinate

system to that in the lefthand coordinate system, 454
Automatic tool selection, 351
Converting a machining program to an NC program, 121, 122
Automatic tool specification function, 194
Converting machining programs into NC programs, 120
Auxiliary and transfer processes, 374
Coordinate system for Caxis machining with the subspindle,

462
Copying a process, 109
Copying a program, 72
Creating a machining program, 7, 57, 476, 510
Back machining functions for a lathe with a subspindle, 459
Creating a new program using other programs, 72
Back machining with the subspindle, 461
Creating machining programs, 53
Bar and pattern repeating finishing processing without using

G41/G42 command, 290, 304
Creating machining programs for a lathe having the Yaxis

machining function, 424
Bar machining, 247
Creating machining programs for lathes with the Caxis, 505
Batch data input/output function, 227
Creating machining programs for twopath 4axis (X1, Z, X2,

and Z2) lathes, 469
Cutting condition data for Caxis/Yaxis machining tools, 209
Cutting condition data for drilling tools, 207

Cutting condition data for grooving tools, 206
Caxis cylindrical machining, 418
Cutting condition data for tapping tools, 208
Caxis grooving for side faces, 398
Cutting condition data for threading tools, 205
Caxis machining function under control of spindle positioning,

464
Caxis notching for end faces, 405
Caxis notching for side faces, 415
Data input, 234
Calculation functions similar to those of a handheld calculator,

12
Data output, 229
Calling display color data, 241
Data that can be entered and output, 228
Calling subprograms, 370
Deleting a figure, 105
Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping (on the side face),
434
Deleting a process, 97, 110
Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping for end faces, 378
Deleting machining programs, 116

Description of coordinate systems, 43
Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping for side faces,

385
Description of the keyboard, 21
Center drilling, drilling, reaming, boring, and tapping, 354
Details of automatic scheduling, 113
Changing entered figure data, 99
Details of bar machining, 276
Changing figure data other than contour data, 105
Details of Caxis notching, 411
Changing part of the contour data, 99
Details of Caxis notching for side faces, 417
i1
INDEX
B62444E1/04
Details of contour calculation, 260
Example of creating a program for notching and cylindrical

machining around the Caxis, 509
Details of conversion to machining program in the lefthand

coordinate system, 457
Example of inputting contours for bar machining and pattern

repeating, 487
Details of cylindrical machining, 423
Examples of programs for machining the cylindrical surface of

bars, 476
Details of end facing, 314
Executing machining programs, 156
Details of figure data, 256, 308, 323, 337, 352, 366, 382, 388,
394, 400, 408, 416, 421
Details of grooving, 343
Execution of a conversational machining program after

conversion to an NC program, 159
Details of necking, 352
Execution selection state display, 89
Details of pattern repeating, 294

Details of process data, 306, 313, 316, 330, 346, 365, 370, 379,
386, 392, 399, 407, 416
Details of residual machining, 312
Figure data, 430, 439, 446, 452
Details of set data, 419
Figure data (for single action II), 369
Details of setting data, 249, 293
Figure data input, 293
Details of settings, 58
Figure data input operation, 367
Details of the automatic setting of tool geometry data for

drawing, 198
Figure data screen, 68

Flowchart from creating a program to executing it, 6
Details of the keyboard, 23
For twopath lathes with one spindle, 50
Details of threading, 326
Format of machining program used for the onepath lathes, 54
Direct operation for machining programs created

conversationally, 126
Format of machining program used for the twopath lathes, 55
Displaying the contents of the machining program, 74
Function for controlling the Caxis brake, 463
Displaying the figure of a product, 483

Displaying the process directory screen, 106
Displaying the registeredprogram directory screen for direct

operation, 127
Grooving, 328
Displaying the tool data directory screen, 163
Grooving for end faces, 391
Drilling parameters (1), 526
Hierarchy of the conversational screens, 15

How to change display colors, 238
Editing a machining program in units of processes (program

screen), 97
Editing machining programs, 94
Editing machining programs in units of processed (process

editing screen), 106
Editing NC programs (cross editing), 117
I/O parameter display, 236
End facing, 313
Improvement of pattern repeating cutting retract movement,

297
End of checking machining programs, 76

Enlarging a figure and displaying other screens, 83
Improving the machining of figures that differ slightly in level,

291
Enlarging the part of the contour, 76
Initial settings, 58
Entering contour data for machining on the 2path lathe with

two spindles facing each other, 279
Input for the end process, 518
Entering contour data for machining on the singlespindle

2path lathe (16TB), 281
Entering initial data, 477
Keyboard types, 22
Entering setting data before execution, 123
Keys for calculation, 14
Entering subprogram names on the subprogram calling

screen, 538
Entering the initial data, 511
Entering the number and name of a program, 57
Mcode and program end processes, 375
Entering workpiece material, 528
i2
INDEX
B62444E1/04
Mcode process, 375
Parameters for conversational peripheral functions, 527
Machine coordinate system, 44, 47, 50
Parameters for drilling, 573
Machining condition data and surface roughness data, 203
Parameters for grooving, 568
Machining condition data for generalpurpose tools, 203
Parameters for necking, 567
Machining programs for 2axes (X and Z axis) lathes, 246
Parameters for notching, 577
Machining programs for lathes with Caxis, 377
Parameters for other conversational functions, 578
Machining simulation based on a solid model (Super CAP II T),

91
Parameters for the Mfunctionlist screen, 532
Machining type selecting, 436
Parameters for Yaxis machining, 572
Machining type selection, 247, 292, 305, 313, 315, 329, 345,
355, 365, 370, 378, 385, 391, 398, 405, 415, 418, 443, 449
Parameters necessary for using the conversational automatic

programming function (bittype), 540
Measuring tool geometry compensation when a tool setter is

used, 143
Parameters necessary for using the conversational automatic

programming function (common data), 554
Measuring tool geometry compensation when no tool setter is

used, 137
Partially enlarged drawing of a contour, 273
Parameters for threading, 570
Pattern repeating, 292
Mounting tools, 135
Pattern repeating approach to shape start point, 300
Moving a process between the two tool posts, 108
Pretool list, 222
Moving a process for a tool post, 107
Process data, 356, 437

Process data (for single action II), 368
Process data (for subcall II), 372
Process data screen, 65
NC program conversion for Caxis notching, 413
Processing data, 444
NC program conversion for subcall II, 374
Program coordinate system, 46, 49, 52
Necking, 345
Program end process, 376
Notes on subprograms, 371
Punching out setting data, 226
Null cutting cancel function, 282
Reading machining programs, 119
Offset data save and restore function, 87
Reading setting data, 226
Onepath lather, 44
Registeredprogram directory screen for conversion to NC

program, 121
Onepath lathes, 29
Registeredprogram directory screen for editing, 72, 74, 95
Operation before execution (such as selecting a program,

mounting a tool, etc.), 127
Registering the tool material, 537
Operation for calculation, 12
Residual machining, 305
Operation for data other than contour data on the figure data
screen, 70
Restrictions on conversion to machining programs in the

lefthand coordinate system, 458
Operation for initial settings, 64
Returning to the main menu, 484, 521
Operation for the process data screen, 66

Operation modes, 26
Operation of automatic scheduling, 111

Operation on the contour data screen, 68
Searching for a process (editing), 110
Operations on the tool data directory screen, 164
Selecting a machining program, 78, 96
Outputting machining programs, 118
Selecting a machining program to be executed, 9
Override playback function, 157
Selecting a machining type, 426
Overview of the procedure, 19
Selecting the conversational mode, 56

Selecting the machining program to be edited, 95
Selecting the menu and inputting data, 10
Selecting the subspindle, 460

Selecting the type of machining (for subcall II), 371
Parameters, 525
Selecting the type of machining (single action II), 368
Parameters for bar machining, pattern repeating, end facing,

and residual machining, 562
Setting, 427, 450
i3
INDEX
B62444E1/04
Setting cutting condition data, 475

Setting data, 160
Tail stock figure data, 225
Setting data on the setting screen before execution, 129
Threading, 315
Setting parameters, 470, 506
Tool changing position temporary setting, 90
Setting parameters in the NC, 584
Tool data file, 162
Setting the reader/punch interface, 125
Tool data for boring, 192
Setting the workpiece shift amount, 485
Tool data for center drills, 180
Setting tool and cutting condition data, 507
Tool data for chamfering, 188
Setting tool data, 474
Tool data for drilling, 176
Setting tool data and cutting condition data, 474
Tool data for end mills, 184
Setting tool data for machining around the Caxis, 507
Tool data for external threads and internal threads, 170
Setting up machining, 485
Tool data for grooving on outer surfaces, inner surfaces, and

end faces, 172
Simulating a cutting operation based on a solid model, 91

Simulating machining, 80
Tool data for machining outer surfaces, inner surfaces, end

faces, and inner bottom faces, 166
Simulation of C/Yaxis machining, 91
Tool data for reamers, 190
Simulation of Yaxis machining, 85
Tool data for side cutters, 186
Simulation of Yaxis machining by a onepath lathe, 85
Tool data for tapping, 178
Simulation of Yaxis machining by a twopath lathe, 86
Tool data for throwaway drills, 182
Single action, 365
Tool geometry data for drawing, 196
Soft keys, 11
Tool post name parameters, 539
Specifying a machining program, 128
Twopath lathes, 37
Specifying a transfer process, 480
Twopath lathes with two opposing spindles, 47
Specifying process 1 (end face and cylindrical surface

machining), 512
Type of screens, 28
Specifying process 2 (notching the end face around the Caxis),

513
Specifying process 3 (cylindrical surface machining around the

Caxis), 516
User parameters, 537
Specifying the primary machining process (for the leftside tool

post), 478
Specifying the program to be edited, 74
Specifying the secondary machining process (for the rightside

tool post), 481
Workpiece coordinate system, 45, 48, 51
Starting execution of machining programs, 156

Storing and calling display color data, 240
Storing display color data, 240

Subprograms to be called (subcall II), 373
Surface roughness data, 221
Yaxis center drilling, drilling, and tapping (on the end face),
425
Symbols used, 5
Yaxis milling (on the end face), 443

Yaxis milling (on the side face), 448
i4
Oct., 97
Dec., 95
Nov., 94
Sep., 94
Date
04
03
02
01
Edition
Contents
Following functions are added.

Offset Data Save and Restore Function
Compensation by Tool Cutting Edge
Bar and Pattern Repeating Finishing Processing without using G41/G42
Improvement of Pattern Repeating Cutting Retract
Movement
Pattern Repeating Approach to Shape Start Point
Series 18TB is added.
Super CAP II T is added.
Series 16TC and Series 18TC are added.
Series 16i/18iTA is added.
Edition
Date
FANUC

Revision Record
Contents
No part of this manual may be

reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

B-62444e-1!04!050120 Series 16 18 TB TC 16i 18i Ta Super Cap T and Super Cap II T

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

B-62444e-1!04!050120 Series 16 18 TB TC 16i 18i Ta Super Cap T and Super Cap II T

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Super CAP T and Super CAP II T

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

PowerMotion is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4. SELECTING THE MENU AND INPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

5. HIERARCHY OF THE CONVERSATIONAL SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

5. DESCRIPTION OF COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

TWOPATH LATHES WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

FORMAT OF MACHINING PROGRAM USED FOR THE ONEPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

CHECKING INPUT FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MACHINING SIMULATION BASED ON A SOLID MODEL (SUPER CAP II T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Simulating a Cutting Operation Based on a Solid Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Simulation of C/Yaxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

SELECTING THE MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE EDITED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Selecting a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

EDITING A MACHINING PROGRAM IN UNITS OF PROCESSES (PROGRAM SCREEN) . . . . 97

Adding a New Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

CHANGING THE PROCESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

CHANGING PART OF THE CONTOUR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Changing Entered Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Changing the Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Adding a Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Deleting a Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

CHANGING FIGURE DATA OTHER THAN CONTOUR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS IN UNITS OF PROCESSES

Displaying the Process Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Moving a Process for a Tool Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Moving a Process between the Two Tool Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Copying a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Deleting a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Searching for a Process (Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

AUTOMATIC SCHEDULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Operation of Automatic Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Details of Automatic Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

DELETING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

EDITING NC PROGRAMS (CROSS EDITING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

9. OUTPUTTING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

CONVERTING A MACHINING PROGRAM TO AN NC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Conversion to NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Converting a Machining Program to an NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Entering Setting Data Before Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

ALARMS DURING CONVERSION OF THE MACHINING PROGRAM

SETTING THE READER/PUNCH INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR MACHINING PROGRAMS CREATED

OPERATION BEFORE EXECUTION

13. SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

DATA THAT CAN BE ENTERED AND OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (Super CAP II T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

III. TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES WITH CAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, AND TAPPING FOR END FACES . . . . . . . . . . .

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR A LATHE HAVING